LINK: CONTENT & A-Z
The Ultimate Driving Machine®
OWNER'S MANUAL. THE BMW 5 SERIES SEDAN.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 WELCOME TO BMW. Owner's Manual. BMW 5 Series.
Thank you for choosing a BMW. The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control you will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest: Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new BMW. Also use the Integrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It contains important information on vehicle operation that will help you make full use of the technical features available in your BMW. The manual also contains information designed to en‐ hance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to maintaining the value of your BMW. Any updates made after the editorial deadline can be found in the appendix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle. You can find supplementary information in the additional brochures in the on‐ board literature. We wish you a safe and enjoyable ride.
3 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 TABLE OF CONTENTS
NOTES Information ...... 8
QUICK REFERENCE Your BMW at a glance ...... 18
AT A GLANCE Cockpit ...... 34 Idle state, standby state, and drive-ready state ...... 39 iDrive ...... 42 BMW Gesture Control ...... 51 Voice activation system ...... 54 General settings ...... 57 Owner's Manual media ...... 70
CONTROLS Opening and closing ...... 74 Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel ...... 101 Transporting children safely ...... 115 Driving ...... 120 Displays ...... 139 Lights ...... 156 Safety ...... 163 Driving stability control systems ...... 195 Driver assistance systems ...... 199 Driving comfort ...... 238 Climate control ...... 240 Interior equipment ...... 253 Storage compartments ...... 260 Cargo area ...... 265
4 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Navigation, Entertainment and Communication can be called up via the Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving ...... 274 Saving fuel ...... 279
MOBILITY Refueling ...... 288 Fuel ...... 290 Wheels and tires ...... 296 Engine compartment ...... 328 Engine oil ...... 331 Coolant ...... 335 Maintenance ...... 337 Replacing components ...... 339 Breakdown assistance ...... 346 Care ...... 353
REFERENCE Technical data ...... 360 Appendix ...... 363 Everything from A to Z ...... 364
© 2018 Bayerische Motoren Werke Aktiengesellschaft Munich, Germany Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written consent of BMW AG, Munich. US English VI/18, 07 18 490 Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling. 5 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18
6 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 NOTES
Information ...... 8
7 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 8
NOTES Information
Information
Using this Owner's Manual Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle Orientation The Integrated Owner's Manual specifically de‐ scribes features and functions found in the vehi‐ The fastest way to find information on a particu‐ cle. The Integrated Owner's Manual can be dis‐ lar topic is by using the index. played on the Control Display. Additional An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in information, refer to page 70. the first chapter. BMW Driver’s Guide App Updates made after the editorial The BMW Driver's Guide app specifically de‐ deadline scribes features and functions found in the vehi‐ Due to updates after the editorial deadline, differ‐ cle. The app can be displayed on smartphones ences may exist between the printed Owner's and tablets. Manual and the Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle. BMW Driver’s Guide Web Notes on updates can be found in the appendix Driver’s Guide Web shows the most suitable in‐ of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle. formation for the selected vehicle. If possible, only equipment and functions that are actually in‐ Owner's Manual for Navigation, stalled in the vehicle will be explained. Driver’s Entertainment, Communication Guide Web can be displayed in any current browser. The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain‐ ment, and Communication can be obtained as printed book from the service center. Symbols and displays The topics are also discussed in the Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle. Symbols in the Owner's Manual
Additional sources of Symbol Meaning information Precautions that must be followed in order to avoid the possibility of injury Dealer’s service center to yourself and to others as well as serious damage to the vehicle. A dealer’s service center will be glad to answer questions at any time. Measures that can be taken to help protect the environment.
Internet "..." Texts in vehicle used to select The Owner's Manual and general information on individual functions. BMW, for example on technology, are available on the Internet: www.bmwusa.com.
8 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 9
Information NOTES
Symbol Meaning When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ ›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the served. voice activation system. For any options and equipment not described in ››...‹‹ Responses generated by the voice this Owner's Manual, refer to the Supplementary activation system. Owner's Manuals. Your BMW dealer’s service center is happy to Action steps answer any questions that you may have about the features and options applicable to your vehi‐ Action steps to be carried out are presented as cle. numbered list. The steps must be carried out in the defined order. 1. First action step. Status of the Owner's 2. Second action step. Manual
Enumerations Basic information Enumerations without mandatory order or alter‐ The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a pol‐ native possibilities are presented as list with bul‐ icy of constant development that is conceived to let points. ensure that our vehicles continue to embody the ▷ First possibility. highest quality and safety standards. In rare ▷ Second possibility. cases, therefore, the features described in this Owner's Manual may differ from those in your Symbols on vehicle components vehicle. This symbol on a vehicle component Updates made after the editorial indicates that further information on the component is available in the Owner's Manual. deadline Due to updates after the editorial deadline, differ‐ ences may exist between the printed Owner's Vehicle features and Manual and the Integrated Owner's Manual in options the vehicle. Notes on updates can be found in the appendix This Owner's Manual describes all models and of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle. all standard, country-specific and optional equip‐ ment that is offered in the model series. There‐ fore, this Owner's Manual also describes and il‐ For Your Own Safety lustrates features and functions that are not available in a vehicle, for example because of the Intended use selected optional features or the country-specific Follow the following when using the vehicle: version. ▷ Owner's Manual. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. ▷ Information on the vehicle. Do not remove stickers. ▷ Technical vehicle data.
9 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 10
NOTES Information
▷ The traffic, speed, and safety laws where the If work is performed improperly, for instance vehicle is driven. maintenance and repair, there is a risk of subse‐ ▷ Vehicle documents and statutory documents. quent damage and related safety risks.
Warranty Parts and accessories Your vehicle is technically configured for the op‐ BMW recommends the use of parts and acces‐ erating conditions and registration requirements sory products approved by BMW. applying in the country of first delivery, also Approved parts and accessories, and advice on known as homologation. If your vehicle is to be their use and installation are available from a operated in a different country it might be neces‐ BMW dealer's service center. sary to adapt your vehicle to potentially differing BMW parts and accessories have been tested by operating conditions and registration require‐ BMW for their safety and suitability in BMW vehi‐ ments. If your vehicle does not comply with the cles. homologation requirements in a certain country BMW warrants genuine BMW parts and acces‐ you may not be able to lodge warranty claims for sories. your vehicle there. Further information on war‐ ranty is available from a dealer’s service center. BMW does not evaluate whether each individual product from another manufacturer can be used Maintenance and repairs with BMW vehicles without presenting a safety hazard, even if a country-specific official approval was issued. BMW does not evaluate whether WARNING these products are suitable for BMW vehicles Improperly performed work on the vehicle paint under all usage conditions. can lead to a failure or malfunction of the radar sensors and thereby result in a safety risk. California Proposition 65 There is a risk of accidents or risk of damage to Warning property. Have paintwork or paintwork repairs California law requires vehicle manufacturers on bumpers of vehicles with radar sensors per‐ provide the following warning: formed by a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop only. WARNING Advanced technology, e. g. the use of modern Engine exhaust and a wide variety of Automo‐ materials and high-performance electronics, re‐ bile components and parts, including compo‐ quires suitable maintenance and repair work. nents found in the interior furnishings in a vehi‐ The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends cle, contain or emit chemicals known to the that you entrust corresponding procedures to a State of California to cause cancer and birth BMW dealer’s service center. If you choose to defects and reproductive harm. In addition, cer‐ use another service facility, BMW recommends tain fluids contained in vehicles and certain use of a facility that performs work, for instance products of component wear contain or emit maintenance and repair, according to BMW chemicals known to the State of California to specifications with properly trained personnel, re‐ cause cancer and birth defects or other repro‐ ferred to in this Owner's Manual as "another ductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and re‐ qualified service center or repair shop". lated accessories contain lead and lead com‐ pounds. Batteries also contain other chemicals known to the State of California to cause can‐
10 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 11
Information NOTES
cer. Wash your hands after handling. Used en‐ Detailed information about these warranties is gine oil contains chemicals that have caused listed in the Service and Warranty Information cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models. water. For more information go to Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle. designed to meet the particular operating condi‐ tions and homologation requirements in your country and continental region in order to deliver WARNING the full driving pleasure while the vehicle is oper‐ Operating, servicing and maintaining a passen‐ ated under those conditions. If you wish to oper‐ ger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle can ate your vehicle in another country or region, you expose you to chemicals including engine ex‐ may be required to adapt your vehicle to meet haust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, different prevailing operating conditions and ho‐ which are known to the State of California to mologation requirements. You should also be cause cancer and birth defects or other repro‐ aware of any applicable warranty limitations or ductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid exclusions for such country or region. In such breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine ex‐ case, please contact Customer Relations for fur‐ cept as necessary, service your vehicle in a ther information. well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your ve‐ Maintenance hicle. For more information go to Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the road www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle. safety, operational reliability and the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Specifications for required maintenance meas‐ WARNING ures: Breathing Diesel Engine exhaust exposes you ▷ BMW Maintenance system. to chemicals known to the State of California to ▷ Service and Warranty Information Booklet for cause cancer and birth defects or other repro‐ US models. ductive harm. For more information go to ▷ Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/diesel. Canadian models. If the vehicle is not maintained according to Service and warranty these specifications, this could result in serious We recommend that you read this publication damage to the vehicle. Such damage is not cov‐ thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the follow‐ ered by the BMW New Vehicle Limited Warranty. ing warranties: ▷ New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Data memory ▷ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty. ▷ Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty. General information ▷ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty. Electronic control devices are installed in the ve‐ ▷ California Emission Control System Limited hicle. Electronic control units process data they Warranty. receive from vehicle sensors, self-generate or exchange with each other. Some control units are necessary for the vehicle to function safely or
11 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 12
NOTES Information
provide assistance during driving, for instance ▷ Malfunctions and faults in important system driver assistance systems. Furthermore, control components, for instance lights and brakes. devices facilitate comfort or infotainment func‐ ▷ Responses by the vehicle to special situa‐ tions. tions such as airbag deployment or engage‐ Information about stored or exchanged data can ment of the driving stability control systems. be requested from the manufacturer of the vehi‐ ▷ Information on vehicle-damaging events. cle, in a separate booklet, for example. The data is required to perform the control de‐ vice functions. Furthermore, it also serves to rec‐ Personal reference ognize and correct malfunctions, and helps the Each vehicle is marked with a unique vehicle vehicle manufacturer to optimize vehicle func‐ identification number. Depending on the country, tions. the vehicle owner can be identified with the vehi‐ The majority of this data is transient and is only cle identification number, license plate and corre‐ processed within the vehicle itself. Only a small sponding authorities. In addition, there are other share of the data is stored event-related in event options to track data collected in the vehicle to or fault memories. the driver or vehicle owner, e.g. via the Connec‐ tedDrive account that is used. When servicing, for instance during repairs, serv‐ ice processes, warranty cases, and quality assur‐ Operating data in the vehicle ance measures, this technical information can be read out from the vehicle together with the vehi‐ Control units process data to operate the vehicle. cle identification number. For example, this includes: A dealer’s service center or another qualified ▷ Status messages for the vehicle and its indi‐ service center or repair shop can read out the in‐ vidual components, e.g., wheel rotational formation. The socket for OBD Onboard Diagno‐ speed, wheel speed, deceleration, transverse sis required by law in the vehicle is used to read acceleration, engaged safety belt indicator. out the data. ▷ Ambient conditions, e.g., temperature, rain The data is collected, processed, and used by sensor signals. the relevant organizations in the service network. The processed data is only processed in the ve‐ The data documents technical conditions of the hicle itself and generally volatile. The data is not vehicle, helps with the identification of the fault, stored beyond the operating period. compliance with warranty obligations and quality improvement. Electronic components, e.g. control units and ig‐ nition keys, contain components for storing tech‐ Furthermore, the manufacturer has product nical information. Information about the vehicle monitoring duties to meet in line with product lia‐ condition, component usage, maintenance re‐ bility law. To fulfill these duties, the vehicle man‐ quirements or faults can be stored temporarily or ufacturer needs technical data from the vehicle. permanently. The data from the vehicle can also be used to check customer claims for warranty and guar‐ This information generally records the state of a anty. component, a module, a system, or the environ‐ ment, for instance: Fault and event memories in the vehicle can be reset when a dealer’s service center or another ▷ Operating states of system components, qualified service center or repair shop performs e.g., fill levels, tire inflation pressure, battery repair or servicing work. status.
12 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 13
Information NOTES
Data entry and data transfer into ferred to the mobile device at the same time. De‐ the vehicle pending on the type of incorporation, this in‐ cludes, for instance position data and other General information general vehicle information. This optimizes the way in which selected apps, for instance naviga‐ Depending on the vehicle equipment, comfort tion or music playback, work. and individual settings can be stored in the vehi‐ There is no further interaction between the mo‐ cle and modified or reset at any time. bile device and the vehicle, for instance active For example, this includes: access to vehicle data. ▷ Settings for the seat and steering wheel posi‐ How the data will be processed further is deter‐ tions. mined by the provider of the particular app being ▷ Suspension and climate control settings. used. The extent of the possible settings de‐ If necessary, data can be transferred to the en‐ pends on the respective app and the operating tertainment and communication system of the system of the mobile device. vehicle, e.g. via smartphone. This includes the following depending on the re‐ Services spective equipment: General information ▷ Multimedia data such as music, films or pho‐ tos for playback in an integrated multimedia If the vehicle has a wireless network connection, system. this enables data to be exchanged between the vehicle and other systems. The wireless network ▷ Address book data for use in conjunction with connection is realized via an in-vehicle transmit‐ an integrated hands-free system or an ter and receiver unit or via personal mobile devi‐ integrated navigation system. ces brought into the vehicle, for instance smart‐ ▷ Entered navigation destinations. phones. This wireless network connection ▷ Data on the use of Internet services. enables 'online functions' to be used. These in‐ This data can be stored locally in the vehicle or is clude online services and apps supplied by the found on a device that has been connected to vehicle manufacturer or by other providers. the vehicle, e.g., a smartphone, USB stick or MP3 player. If this data is stored in the vehicle, it Services from the vehicle can be deleted at any time. manufacturer This data is only transmitted to third parties upon Where online services from the vehicle manufac‐ personal request as part of the use of online turer are concerned, the corresponding functions services. This depends on the selected settings are described in the appropriate place, for in‐ for the use of the services. stance the Owner's Manual or manufacturer's website. The relevant legal information pertaining Incorporation of mobile end devices to data protection is provided there too. Personal data may be used to perform online services. Depending on the vehicle equipment, mobile de‐ Data is exchanged over a secure connection, vices connected to the vehicle, for instance for instance with the IT systems of the vehicle smartphones, can be controlled via the vehicle manufacturer intended for this purpose. control elements. Any collection, processing, and use of personal The sound and picture from the mobile device data above and beyond that needed to provide can be played back and displayed through the the services must always be based on a legal multimedia system. Certain information is trans‐ permission, contractual arrangement or consent. 13 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 14
NOTES Information
It is also possible to activate or deactivate the tions and no personal data, for instance name, data connection as a whole. That is, with the ex‐ gender, age, and crash location, are recorded. ception of functions and services required by law However, other parties, such as law enforce‐ such as Assist systems. ment, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired Services from other providers during a crash investigation. When using online services from other providers, To read data recorded by an EDR, special equip‐ these services are the responsibility of the rele‐ ment is required, and access to the vehicle or the vant provider and subject to their data privacy EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manu‐ conditions and terms of use. The vehicle manu‐ facturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, facturer has no influence on the content ex‐ that have the special equipment, can read the in‐ changed during this process. Information on the formation if they have access to the vehicle or way in which personal data is collected and used the EDR. in relation to services from third parties, the scope of such data, and its purpose, can be ob‐ tained from the relevant service provider. Vehicle identification number Event Data Recorder EDR Engine compartment This vehicle is equipped with an event data re‐ corder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa‐ tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understand‐ ing how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record The vehicle identification number can be found such data as: in the engine compartment, on the right-hand ▷ How various systems in your vehicle were op‐ side of the vehicle. erating. ▷ Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were fastened. ▷ How far, if at all, the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal. ▷ How fast the vehicle was traveling. This data can help provide a better understand‐ ing of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data is re‐ corded by the EDR under normal driving condi‐
14 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 15
Information NOTES
Type label America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone 1-800-831-1117. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in in‐ dividual problems between you, your dealer, or BMW of North America, LLC. The vehicle identification number can be found To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle on the type label, on the right-hand side of the Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: vehicle. 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590. You can Windshield also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
For Canadian customers Canadian customers who wish to report a safety- related defect to Transport Canada, Defect In‐ vestigations and Recalls, may call the toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety. The vehicle identification number can also be found behind the windshield.
iDrive It is also possible to display the vehicle identifica‐ tion number via iDrive, refer to page 62.
Reporting safety defects
For US customers The following only applies to vehicles owned and operated in the US. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the Na‐ tional Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of North
15 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18
16 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 QUICK REFERENCE
Your BMW at a glance ...... 18
17 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 18
QUICK REFERENCE Your BMW at a glance
Your BMW at a glance
Opening and closing All vehicle access points are locked. Buttons for the central locking Buttons on the remote control system
Overview
1 Unlocking 2 Locking 3 Open tailgate Buttons for the central locking system. 4 Press and hold or press three times in quick succession: panic mode Locking Press briefly: headlight courtesy delay feature Pressing the button locks the vehicle if the front doors are closed. Unlocking the vehicle The fuel filler flap remains unlocked. Press the button on the remote control. Unlocking Depending on the settings, either only the driv‐ Pressing the button unlocks the vehicle. er's door or all vehicle access points are un‐ locked. If only the driver's door is unlocked, press the Panic mode button on the remote control again to unlock the You can trigger the alarm system if you find your‐ other vehicle access points. self in a dangerous situation. Press and hold the button on the re‐ ▷ Press button on the remote control mote control after unlocking. and hold for at least 3 seconds. The windows and the glass sunroof are opened, ▷ Briefly press the button on the remote control as long as the button on the remote control is three times in succession. pressed. To switch off the alarm: press any button. Locking the vehicle Press the button on the remote control.
18 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 19
Your BMW at a glance QUICK REFERENCE
Comfort Access Opening and closing the tailgate with no-touch activation Concept The vehicle can be accessed without activating Concept the remote control. The tailgate can be opened and closed with no- All you need to do is to have the remote control touch activation using the remote control you are with you, such as in your pants pocket. carrying.
The vehicle automatically detects the remote Performing the foot movement control when it is in close proximity or in the car's interior. 1. Stand in the middle behind the vehicle at ap‐ prox. one arm's length away from the rear of Unlocking the vehicle the vehicle. 2. Wave a foot under the vehicle in the direction of travel and immediately pull it back. With this movement, the leg must pass through the ranges of both sensors.
Grasp the handle of a vehicle door completely.
Locking the vehicle
Tailgate
Opening
Touch the grooved surface on the handle of a closed vehicle door with your finger for approx. 1 second without grasping the door handle.
▷ Unlock the vehicle and press the button on the tailgate. ▷ If carrying the remote control, press the but‐ ton on the tailgate.
19 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 20
QUICK REFERENCE Your BMW at a glance
Press button on the remote control for 4 Backrest width approx. 1 second. 5 Lumbar support Depending on the setting, the doors may be un‐ 6 Backrest tilt, head restraint locked.
Closing Adjusting the head restraint Adjusting the height: power head restraints
▷ Press button, arrow 1, on the inside of the tailgate. ▷ Press button, arrow 2. Push switch up or down. The vehicle will be locked after closing the tailgate. The driver's door must be closed for this purpose and the remote control must be Adjusting the distance: manual head outside of the vehicle in the area of the tail‐ restraints gate.
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
Electrically adjustable seats
▷ Forward: pull the head restraint toward the front. ▷ Back: press the button and push the head re‐ straint toward the rear.
Adjusting the distance: power head restraints 1 Thigh support The head restraint is automatically repositioned when the upper backrest is adjusted. 2 Forward/backward, height, seat tilt 3 Upper backrest
20 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 21
Your BMW at a glance QUICK REFERENCE
Side extensions Adjusting the steering wheel
Electrical steering wheel adjustment
Fold the side extensions forward to increase lat‐ eral support. Move the steering wheel to the preferred height Adjusting the exterior mirrors and angle to suit your seating position by press‐ ing the switch.
Memory function
Concept The following settings can be stored and, if nec‐ essary, retrieved using the memory function: ▷ Seat position. ▷ Exterior mirror position. 1 Settings ▷ Steering wheel position. 2 Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Monitor ▷ Height of the Head-up Display. 3 Folding in and out Storing 1. Set the desired position.
2. Press button. The writing on the but‐ ton lights up. 3. Press selected button 1 or 2 at the door while the writing is lit. A signal sounds.
Calling up settings Press selected button 1 or 2.
21 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 22
QUICK REFERENCE Your BMW at a glance
Displays and control Driver's door elements
In the vicinity of the steering wheel
1 Exterior mirrors 2 Power windows 3 Safety switch 4 Seats, comfort features 1 Light switch element 5 Central locking system 2 Turn signal indicator, high beams 6 Open tailgate 3 Instrument cluster 4 Wipers Switch console 5 Start/Stop button
Indicator/warning lights
Instrument cluster The indicator/warning lights can light up in a vari‐ ety of combinations and colors. Several lights indicate function checks and light up only temporarily when standby state or 1 Selector lever/gearshift lever standby state are activated. 2 Controller 3 Parking brake, Automatic Hold 4 Parking assistance systems 5 Driving Dynamics Control
iDrive
Concept The iDrive combines the functions of many switches. These functions can be operated via the Controller and, depending on the equipment version, the touchscreen.
22 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 23
Your BMW at a glance QUICK REFERENCE
Controller The symbol on the Control Display indi‐ cates that voice activation system is ac‐ General information tive.
The buttons can be used to open the menus di‐ If no other commands are possible, operate the rectly. The Controller can be used to select function via iDrive. menu items and enter the settings. Terminating the voice activation system Buttons on the Controller Press the button on the steering wheel Button Function or ›Cancel‹.
Press once: call up main menu. Help on the voice activation system Press twice: display all menu items of the main menu. ▷ To have the available spoken instructions read out loud: ›Voice commands‹. Open the Communication menu. ▷ To have information on the operating princi‐ ple of the voice activation system read out Open the Media/Radio menu. loud: ›General information on voice control‹. ▷ To have help for the current menu read out Open destination input menu for navi‐ loud: ›Help‹. gation. Information for Emergency Open navigation map. Requests Do not use the voice activation system to initiate Press once: open the previous dis‐ an Emergency Request. In stressful situations, play. the voice and vocal pitch can change. This can Press and hold: open the menus used unnecessarily delay the establishment of a last. phone connection. Open the Options menu. Instead, use the SOS button close to the interior mirror.
Voice activation Driving Using the voice activation system Drive-ready state Activating the voice activation system Switching on drive-ready state 1. Press the button on the steering ▷ Depress the brake pedal. wheel. ▷ Press the Start/Stop button. 2. Wait for the signal. 3. Say the command.
23 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 24
QUICK REFERENCE Your BMW at a glance
Switching off drive-ready state Steptronic transmission Steptronic transmission: Engaging selector lever position D, 1. Engage selector lever position P with the ve‐ N, R hicle stopped. 2. Press the Start/Stop button. The engine is switched off. 3. Set the parking brake.
Auto Start/Stop function The Auto Start/Stop function switches the en‐ gine off automatically while stationary to save fuel. The engine starts automatically under the following preconditions: ▷ Drive mode D. Steptronic transmission: ▷ Neutral N. ▷ By releasing the brake pedal. ▷ Reverse R. ▷ When Automatic Hold is activated: press the With the driver's safety belt fastened, briefly push accelerator pedal. the selector lever in the desired direction, past a resistance point, if needed. The selector lever re‐ Parking brake turns to the center position in each case. To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you Setting select a drive mode or reverse, maintain pressure on the brake pedal until you are ready to start. Pull the switch. A selector lever lock prevents the inadvertent The LED and indicator light light up. shifting to selector lever position R or the inad‐ vertent shifting from selector lever position P. Releasing Engage selector lever position R only when the With drive-ready state switched on: vehicle is stationary. Steptronic transmission: press the switch while the brake is pressed or selector lever posi‐ Releasing the selector lever lock tion P is set. The LED and indicator light go out. The parking brake is released.
Parking The parking brake is automatically set if the vehi‐ cle is being held by Automatic Hold and the drive-ready state is switched off or the vehicle is exited. Press the button.
24 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 25
Your BMW at a glance QUICK REFERENCE
Engaging P High beams, headlight flasher, Engage selector lever position P only when the turn signal vehicle is stationary. High beams, headlight flasher
Press button P. Push the lever forward or pull it backward. Steptronic transmission, Sport ▷ High beams on, arrow 1. program and manual mode The high beams light up when the low beams are switched on. ▷ High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2.
Turn signal
Activate the sport program/manual mode: Press the selector lever to the left out of selector lever position D. Manual mode: ▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐ ▷ On: press the lever past the resistance point. ward. ▷ Off: press the lever past the resistance point ▷ To shift up: pull the selector lever rearwards. in the opposite direction. ▷ Triple turn signal activation: lightly tap the End the sport program/manual mode: lever up or down. Push the selector lever to the right. ▷ Brief signaling: press the lever to the resist‐ ance point and hold it there for as long as you want the turn signal to flash.
25 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 26
QUICK REFERENCE Your BMW at a glance
Lights and lighting Washer/wiper system
Light functions Switching the wipers on/off and brief wipe Symbol Function Switching on Front fog lights.
Night vision.
Lights off. Daytime running lights.
Parking lights. Press the lever up until the desired position is reached. Automatic headlight control. ▷ Resting position of the wipers: position 0. Adaptive light functions. ▷ Rain sensor: position 1. Low beams. ▷ Normal wiper speed: position 2. ▷ Fast wiper speed: position 3.
Instrument lighting. Brief wipe and switching off
Right roadside parking light.
Left roadside parking light.
Press the lever down. ▷ Switching off: press the lever down until it reaches its standard position. ▷ Brief wipe: press the lever down from the standard position.
26 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 27
Your BMW at a glance QUICK REFERENCE
Rain sensor Climate control
Activating/deactivating Automatic climate control
Button Function
Temperature.
Climate control operation. To activate: press the lever up once from its standard position, arrow 1. Maximum cooling. To deactivate: press the lever back into the standard position. AUTO program.
Adjusting the sensitivity Recirculated-air mode.
Air flow, manual.
Air distribution, manual.
SYNC program.
Defrost and defog window. Turn the thumbwheel on the wiper lever. Rear window defroster. Cleaning the windshield Active seat ventilation.
Seat heating.
Open the Climate menu. For the following settings, for in‐ stance: upper body temperature adjustment, parked-car ventila‐ tion. Pull the wiper lever towards you.
27 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 28
QUICK REFERENCE Your BMW at a glance
Infotainment 3. Select the symbol. 4. Select a town/city from the list. Radio 5. If necessary, enter the street. 6. Select the street as you would the town/city. 7. If necessary, enter a house number. 8. Select the symbol. 9. Select a house number or range of house numbers from the list.
Starting destination guidance "Start guidance" If only the town/city was entered: destination 1 Changing the entertainment source guidance is started to the town/city center. 2 CD/DVD drive 3 Eject CD/DVD Connecting a mobile phone 4 Change station/track 5 Programmable memory buttons General information 6 Sound output on/off, volume After the mobile phone is connected once to the vehicle, the mobile phone can be operated using 7 Waveband/satellite radio iDrive, the steering wheel buttons, voice activa‐ Changing the waveband tion, and gestures.
Navigation destination entry Connecting the mobile phone via passkey entry Entering a destination via address Via iDrive: 1. "My Vehicle" State/province 2. "iDrive settings" 1. "Navigation" 3. "Mobile devices" 2. "Enter address" 4. "Connect new device" 3. "State/Province?" 5. Select the functions for which the mobile 4. Move the Controller to the right to select the phone is to be used. state from the list. The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis‐ played on the Control Display. Entering the address 6. To perform additional steps on the mobile The address can be entered in any order. phone, refer to the mobile phone owner's Example: entering the address via the town/city manual: e.g., search for or connect the Blue‐ 1. "City/Postal code?" tooth device or a new device. 2. Enter the town/city. The list is narrowed down further with each entry.
28 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 29
Your BMW at a glance QUICK REFERENCE
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears 2. "Call via" on the mobile phone display. Select the Blue‐ tooth name of the vehicle. Apple CarPlay preparation 7. Depending on the mobile device, a control number is displayed or the control number Concept must be entered. CarPlay allows certain functions of a compatible ▷ Compare the control number displayed Apple iPhone to be used via Siri voice operation on the Control Display with the control and iDrive. number on the display of the device. Confirm the control number on the device Functional requirements and on the Control Display. ▷ Compatible iPhone. ▷ Enter and confirm the same control num‐ iPhone 5 or later with iOS 7.1 or later. ber on the device and via iDrive. ▷ Corresponding mobile wireless contract. The device is connected and displayed in the ▷ Bluetooth, WiFi, and Siri voice operation are device list. switched on on the iPhone.
Using the phone Switching on Bluetooth and CarPlay Via iDrive: Accepting a call Incoming calls can be answered in several ways. 1. "My Vehicle" ▷ Via iDrive: 2. "iDrive settings" "Accept" 3. "Mobile devices" ▷ Press button on the steering wheel. 4. "Settings" 5. Select the following settings: ▷ Via the selection list in the instrument cluster: ▷ "Bluetooth®" Use the thumbwheel on the steering wheel to ▷ "Apple CarPlay" select: "Accept" ▷ Via gestures: point the index finger into the Pairing iPhone with CarPlay direction of the Control Display. Pair iPhone via Bluetooth with the vehicle. Select CarPlay as the function: Dialing a number "Apple CarPlay" 1. "Communication" The iPhone is connected to the vehicle and dis‐ 2. "Dial number" played in the device list. 3. Enter the numbers. 4. Select the symbol. The connection is es‐ tablished via the mobile phone to which this function has been assigned. If connection is to be set up via the additional phone:
1. Press button.
29 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 30
QUICK REFERENCE Your BMW at a glance
Refueling After correcting the tire inflation pressure Refueling Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor. Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor. Fuel cap Checking the tire inflation pressure 1. Press the rear edge of the fuel filler flap to open it. Regularly check the tire inflation pressure and correct it as needed: ▷ At least twice a month. ▷ Before embarking on an extended trip.
Cleaning the wheels The friction during hard braking may produce brake dust and make the rims dirty. Brake dust can be removed by cleaning the rims. BMW rec‐ ommends using vehicle care and cleaning prod‐ 2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise. ucts from BMW. 3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached to the fuel filler flap. Electronic oil measurement
Gasoline Requirements For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline should Depending on the previous displays, the status be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content. display appears when the engine is running or af‐ ter the vehicle has been driven for at least 30 mi‐ Refuel only with unleaded gasoline without met‐ nutes. allic additives. Information on the recommended fuel grade can Displaying the engine oil level be found in the Owner's Manual. Via iDrive: Diesel 1. "My Vehicle" The engine of your BMW is designed for diesel 2. "Vehicle status" with low sulfur content: 3. "Engine oil level" Ultra-Low Sulfur Diesel ASTM D 975-xx. Different messages appear on the Control Dis‐ xx: comply with the current standard in each play depending on the engine oil level. Pay atten‐ case. tion to these messages.
Wheels and tires Adding engine oil
Tire inflation pressure specifications General information The tire inflation pressure specifications can be Safely park the vehicle and switch off drive-ready found in the tire inflation pressure table in the state before adding engine oil. printed Owner's Manual.
30 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 31
Your BMW at a glance QUICK REFERENCE
Adding ConnectedDrive
Concierge service The BMW Assist Concierge service offers infor‐ mation on events, gas stations or hotels, and provides phone numbers and addresses. Many hotels can be booked directly by the BMW Con‐ cierge service. The Concierge service is part of the optional BMW Assist Response Center. Via iDrive: Only add engine oil when the message is dis‐ 1. "ConnectedDrive" played in the instrument cluster. 2. "Concierge" Observe the quantity to be added in the mes‐ A voice connection to the Concierge service is sage. established. Take care not to add too much engine oil. Observe recommended engine oil types. Teleservices Teleservices are services that help to maintain vehicle mobility. Providing assistance Depending on the equipment version, Teleservi‐ ces comprise the following services: Hazard warning flashers ▷ Roadside Assistance. ▷ Service Request. ▷ Automatic Service Request. ▷ Teleservice Report. ▷ Teleservice Battery Guard. ▷ Your dealer’s service center.
The button is located in the center console.
Breakdown assistance
BMW Roadside Assistance Via iDrive:
1. "ConnectedDrive" 2. "BMW Assist" 3. "BMW Roadside Assistance" A voice connection is established to BMW Roadside Assistance.
31 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18
32 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 AT A GLANCE
Cockpit ...... 34 Idle state, standby state, and drive-ready state ...... 39 iDrive ...... 42 BMW Gesture Control ...... 51 Voice activation system ...... 54 General settings ...... 57 Owner's Manual media ...... 70
33 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 34
AT A GLANCE Cockpit
Cockpit
Vehicle features and It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected options options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When us‐ This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ ing these functions and systems, the applicable cific and optional features offered with the series. laws and regulations must be observed.
In the vicinity of the steering wheel
1 Roller sunblind in the rear win‐ Memory function 111 dow 97
2 Safety switch 97 Massage function 111
3 Power windows 96 6 Lights Front fog lights 160
4 Exterior mirror operation 108 Night Vision 177 5 Seating comfort features
34 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 35
Cockpit AT A GLANCE
Light switch 156 Cruise control on/off 199
Lights off Active Cruise Control on/off 201 Daytime running lights 158 Parking lights 156 Steering and lane control assistant on/off 208
Automatic headlight control 157 Cruise control: store speed Adaptive light functions 158 High-beam Assistant 158 Pause or continue cruise control Low beams 157
Active Cruise Control: increase dis‐ Instrument lighting 160 tance
Active Cruise Control: reduce dis‐ Right roadside parking light 157 tance
With steering and lane control as‐ Left roadside parking light 157 sistant: adjust distance
Cruise control rocker switch 7 Central locking system 10 Instrument cluster 139 Unlock 83 11 Steering wheel buttons, right Entertainment source, see Owner's Lock 83 Manual for Navigation, Entertain‐ ment and Communication 8 Volume, see Owner's Manual for 8 Steering column stalk, left Navigation, Entertainment and Turn signal 127 Communication 8 Voice activation system 54
High beams, head‐ light flasher 127 Telephone, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment and High-beam Assistant 158 Communication 8 Thumbwheel for selection lists 149 Onboard Computer 149 12 Steering column stalk, right
9 Steering wheel buttons, left
35 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 36
AT A GLANCE Cockpit
Wipers 128 15 Heated steering wheel 110
Rain sensor 128 16 Adjust the steering wheel 110
Clean the windshield and head‐ 17 Unlock hood 329 lights 129
13 Switch drive-ready state on/ 18 Open/close tailgate 88 off 120
Auto Start/Stop function 121 19 Glove compartment 261
14 Horn, entire surface
In the vicinity of the center console
1 Control Display 44 2 Ventilation 244
36 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 37
Cockpit AT A GLANCE
3 Hazard warning system 346 10 Driving Dynamics Control 136 SPORT driving mode Intelligent Safety 167 COMFORT driving mode
4 Glove compartment 260 ECO PRO driving mode 5 Radio/multimedia, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, and Communica‐ ADAPTIVE driving mode tion 8 6 Automatic climate control 240 DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐ 7 Controller with buttons 44 trol 195 8 Parking brake 124 11 Steptronic transmission selector lever 131
Automatic Hold 125
9 PDC Park Distance Control 212 Without Surround View: rearview camera 217 Surround View 219 Crossing traffic warning 235 Parking assistant 226 Remote Control Parking 231 Surround View: Panorama View 219
37 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 38
AT A GLANCE Cockpit
In the vicinity of the roofliner
1 Emergency Request, SOS 348 4 Reading lights 161
2 Glass sunroof 97 5 Interior lights 160
3 Indicator light, front-seat passenger airbag 166
38 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 39
Idle state, standby state, and drive-ready state AT A GLANCE
Idle state, standby state, and drive-ready state
Vehicle features and Safety information options WARNING This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and cific and optional features offered with the series. possibly roll away. There is a risk of an accident. It also describes features that are not necessarily Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐ available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected ing. options or country versions. This also applies to In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured safety-related functions and systems. When us‐ against rolling away, follow the following: ing these functions and systems, the applicable ▷ Set the parking brake. laws and regulations must be observed. ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, turn the front wheels in the direction of the General information curb. ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, Depending on the situation, the vehicle is in one also secure the vehicle, for instance with a of the three states: wheel chock. ▷ Idle state. ▷ Standby state. WARNING ▷ Drive-ready state. Unattended children or animals can cause the vehicle to move and endanger themselves and Idle state traffic, for instance due to the following actions: ▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button. Concept ▷ Releasing the parking brake. If the vehicle is in idle state, it is switched off. All ▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐ power consumers are deactivated. dows. ▷ Engaging selector lever position N. General information ▷ Using vehicle equipment. The vehicle is in idle state prior to opening from There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not the outside and after exiting and locking. leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐ hicle. Take the remote control with you when exiting and lock the vehicle.
Automatic idle state The idle state is automatically established under the following conditions: 39 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 40
AT A GLANCE Idle state, standby state, and drive-ready state
▷ After several minutes, if no operation takes Standby state place on the vehicle. ▷ If the charge state of the vehicle battery is low. Concept ▷ Depending on the setting via iDrive, if one of When standby state is switched on, most func‐ the front doors is opened when exiting the tions can be used while the vehicle is stationary. vehicle. Desired settings can be adjusted. The idle state is not automatically established General information while a phone call is active. The vehicle is in the standby state after the front Establishing idle state when doors are opened from the outside. opening the front doors Display in the instrument cluster Via iDrive: OFF is displayed in the instru‐ 1. "My Vehicle" ment cluster. The drivetrain is 2. "Vehicle settings" switched off and standby state 3. "Doors/Key" switched on. 4. "Turn off after door opening" Manual idle state Drive-ready state To establish idle state in the vehicle after end of trip: Concept Switching on drive-ready state corresponds to starting the engine.
General information Some functions, such as DSC Dynamic Stability Control, can only be used with drive-ready state switched on. Follow further information on the drive-ready state, refer to page 120. Hold button down until the OFF indicator on the instrument clus‐ Switching on drive-ready state ter goes out. Drive-ready state is switched on via the Start/Stop button:
1. Depress the brake pedal. 2. Press the Start/Stop button.
40 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 41
Idle state, standby state, and drive-ready state AT A GLANCE
Display in the instrument cluster When drive-ready state is switched on, the tach‐ ometer shows the current engine speed.
Switching off drive-ready state Press the Start/Stop button to switch off drive- ready state. The vehicle switches into standby state.
41 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 42
AT A GLANCE iDrive
iDrive
Vehicle features and Input and display options Letters and numbers This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ Letters and numbers can be entered using the cific and optional features offered with the series. Controller or the touchscreen. The keyboard's It also describes features that are not necessarily display changes automatically. available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to Symbol Function safety-related functions and systems. When us‐ or Change between capital and ing these functions and systems, the applicable lower-case letters. laws and regulations must be observed. Insert blank space. Concept Use voice activation. Confirm entry. The iDrive combines the functions of many switches. These functions can be operated via Entry comparison the Controller and, depending on the equipment version, the touchscreen. When entering names and addresses, the choice is narrowed down with every letter entered and letters may be added automatically. Safety information Entries are continuously compared with data stored in the vehicle. ▷ Only those letters are offered during entry for WARNING which data is available. Operating the integrated information systems ▷ Destination search: place names can be en‐ and communication devices while driving can tered in all languages that are available in distract from traffic. It is possible to lose control iDrive. of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only use the systems or devices when the traf‐ Activating/deactivating the fic situation allows. As warranted, stop and use functions the systems and devices while the vehicle is stationary. Several menu items are preceded by a check‐ box. The checkbox indicates whether the func‐ tion is activated or deactivated. Selecting the menu item activates or deactivates the function. Function is activated. Function is deactivated.
42 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 43
iDrive AT A GLANCE
Status information Entertainment
General information Symbol Meaning The status field can be found in the upper area of CD/DVD player. the Control Display. Status information is dis‐ played in the form of symbols. Music collection. Bluetooth audio. Status field symbols USB audio interface.
Radio WiFi.
Symbol Meaning Additional symbols HD Radio station is being received. Symbol Meaning Satellite radio is switched on. Check Control message.
Telephone The sound output has been switched off. Symbol Meaning Request for the current vehicle posi‐ Incoming or outgoing call. tion.
Missed call. Checking the current vehicle posi‐ Signal strength of cellular network. tion.
Network search. Split screen, split screen display Cellular network is not available. General information The critical charge state of the mo‐ bile phone has been reached. Additional information can be displayed in several menus on the right side of the split screen dis‐ Roaming is active. play, the so-called split screen, for instance infor‐ SMS text message received. mation from the Onboard Computer. The additional information remains visible even Message received. when switching to another menu on the split Reminder. screen.
Sending not possible. Switching on/off Contacts are loaded. 1. Press the button. 2. "Split screen"
43 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 44
AT A GLANCE iDrive
Selecting the display In the case of very high temperatures on the The display can be selected in menus, where the Control Display, for instance due to intense solar split screen is supported. radiation, the brightness may be reduced down to complete deactivation. Once the temperature 1. Move the Controller to the right until the split is reduced, for instance through shade or air con‐ screen is selected. ditioning, the normal functions are restored. 2. Press the Controller. 3. Select the desired setting. Safety information
Specifying the number of displays NOTICE It is possible to specify the number of displays. Objects in the area in the front of the Control Display can shift and damage the Control Dis‐ 1. Move the Controller to the right until the split play. There is a risk of damage to property. Do screen is selected. not place objects in the area in front of the 2. Press the Controller. Control Display. 3. "Personalize menu" 4. Select the desired setting. Switching on/off automatically 5. Move the Controller to the left. The Control Display is switched on automatically after unlocking. Control elements In certain situations, the Control Display is switched off automatically, for instance if no op‐ Overview eration is performed on the vehicle for several minutes.
Switching on/off manually The Control Display can also be switched off manually.
1. Press button. 2. "Turn off control display" Press the Controller or any button on the Con‐ 1 Control Display, with touchscreen depending troller to switch it back on again. on the equipment version 2 Controller with buttons and, depending on Controller with navigation the equipment version, with touchpad system
General information Control Display The buttons can be used to open the menus di‐ General information rectly. The Controller can be used to select menu items and enter the settings. To clean the Control Display, follow the care in‐ Some iDrive functions can be operated using the structions, refer to page 356. touchpad on the Controller, refer to page 49.
44 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 45
iDrive AT A GLANCE
Operation Button Function ▷ Turn. Open destination input menu for navi‐ gation.
Open navigation map.
Press once: open the previous dis‐ play. Press and hold: open the menus used last.
Open the Options menu. ▷ Press.
Controller without navigation system
General information The buttons can be used to open the menus di‐ rectly. The Controller can be used to select menu items and enter the settings.
▷ Move in four directions. Operation ▷ Turn.
Buttons on the Controller ▷ Press. Button Function
Press once: call up main menu. Press twice: display all menu items of the main menu.
Open the Communication menu.
Open the Media/Radio menu.
45 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 46
AT A GLANCE iDrive
▷ Move in two directions.
The main menu is displayed. All iDrive functions can be called up via the main Buttons on the Controller menu.
Button Function Adapting the main menu Press once: call up main menu. 1. Press the button twice. Press twice: display all menu items of All menu items of the main menu are dis‐ the main menu. played. Open the Communication menu. 2. Select a menu item. 3. To move the menu item to the desired posi‐ Open the Media/Radio menu. tion, tilt the Controller to the right or left.
Press once: open the previous dis‐ Selecting menu items play. Highlighted menu items can be selected. Press and hold: open the menus used 1. Turn the Controller until the desired menu last. item is highlighted. Open the Options menu.
Operating with the Controller
Opening the main menu
Press button. 2. Press the Controller.
Changing between displays After a menu item is selected, for instance "iDrive settings", a new display appears. ▷ Move the Controller to the left.
46 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 47
iDrive AT A GLANCE
Closes the current display and shows the Entering letters and numbers previous display. Input ▷ Press the button. 1. Turn the Controller: select letters or numbers. The previous display opens. 2. : confirm entry. ▷ Move the Controller to the right. New display is opened. Deleting An arrow indicates that additional displays can be opened. Symbol Function Press the Controller: delete letters or Opening recently used menus number.
Press and hold this button. Hold the Controller down: delete all letters or numbers. The recently used menus are displayed. Using alphabetical lists Opening the Options menu For alphabetical lists with more than 30 entries, Press the button. the letters for which there is an entry are dis‐ played at the left edge. The "Options" menu is displayed. 1. Turn the Controller to the left or right quickly. The Options menu consists of various areas: All letters for which there are entries are dis‐ ▷ Screen settings, for instance "Split screen". played on the left edge. ▷ Control options for the selected main menu, 2. Select the first letter of the desired entry. for instance for "Media/Radio". The first entry of the selected letter is dis‐ ▷ If applicable, further operating options for the played. selected menu, for instance "Save station".
Changing settings Operating via touchscreen Settings, such as brightness, can be entered. Via iDrive: General information 1. "My Vehicle" The Control Display is equipped with a touch‐ screen. 2. "iDrive settings" Touch screen with your fingers. Do not use any 3. "Displays" objects. 4. "Control display" 5. "Brightness" Opening the main menu 6. Turn the Controller until the desired setting is Tap on symbol. displayed. 7. Press the Controller.
47 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 48
AT A GLANCE iDrive
3. "Contents of main menu"
Changing between displays After a menu item is selected, a new display opens. An arrow indicates that additional displays can be opened. ▷ Swipe to the left. The main menu is displayed. ▷ Tap arrow. All iDrive functions can be called up via the main New display is opened. menu. Changing settings Adapting the main menu Settings such as brightness can be changed via 1. Tap on symbol. the touchscreen. All menu items of the main menu are dis‐ Via iDrive: played. 1. "My Vehicle" 2. Drag the menu item to the desired position 2. "iDrive settings" on the right or left. 3. "Displays" Selecting menu items 4. "Control display" Tap desired menu item. 5. "Brightness" 6. To create the desired setting: ▷ Slide in the selected field to the right or left, until the desired setting is displayed. ▷ , Tap on symbol.
Entering letters and numbers
Input 1. Touch the symbol on the touchscreen. Dynamic contents A keyboard is displayed in the Control Dis‐ play. You can display dynamic contents within the menu items. The contents of the menu items 2. Enter letters and numbers. update automatically, e.g., the active destination guidance in the navigation. To access the dy‐ namic content directly, tap on the lower section of the menu item. Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle" 2. "iDrive settings"
48 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 49
iDrive AT A GLANCE
Deleting ▷ The system distinguishes between upper and lower-case letters and numbers. To Symbol Function make entries, it may be necessary to change between upper and lower-case letters, num‐ Tapping the symbol: delete the letter bers and characters, refer to page 47. or number. ▷ Enter characters as they are displayed on the Tapping and holding the symbol for Control Display. an extended period: delete all letters ▷ Always enter associated characters, such as or numbers. accents or periods so that the letter can be clearly recognized. The set language deter‐ Operating navigation map mines what input is possible. Where neces‐ sary, enter special characters via the Control‐ The navigation map can be moved with the ler. touchscreen. Function Operation Entering special characters Enlarge/shrink Drag in or out with the fin‐ map. gers. Input Operation Delete a charac‐ Swipe to the left on the ter. touchpad. Touchpad Enter a blank Swipe to the right in the space. center of the touchpad. General information Enter a hyphen. Swipe to the right in the up‐ Some iDrive functions can be operated using the per area of the touchpad. touchpad on the Controller. Enter an under‐ Swipe to the right in the Selecting functions score. lower area of the touchpad. 1. "My Vehicle" 2. "iDrive settings" Using the map 3. "Touchpad" The map in the navigation system can be moved via the touchpad. 4. Select desired setting: ▷ "Speller": Enter letters and numbers. Function Operation ▷ "Map": using the map. Move map. Swipe in the appropriate di‐ ▷ "Search fields": Write letters without se‐ rection. lecting the list field. Enlarge/shrink Drag in or out on the touch‐ ▷ "Audio feedback": pronounces entered map. pad with fingers. letters and numbers. Display menu. Tap once. Entering letters and numbers Entering letters requires some practice at the be‐ ginning. When entering, pay attention to the fol‐ lowing:
49 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 50
AT A GLANCE iDrive
Programmable memory buttons
General information The iDrive functions can be stored on the pro‐ grammable memory buttons and called up di‐ rectly, for instance radio stations, navigation des‐ tinations, phone numbers and menu entries or pages in the Integrated Owner's Manual. Settings are stored for the driver profile currently used.
Storing a function 1. Select function via iDrive.
2. Press and hold the desired button until a signal sounds.
Running a function Press button.
The function will work immediately. This means, for instance that the number is dialed when a phone number is selected.
Displaying the key assignment Touch buttons with finger. Do not wear gloves or use objects. The button assignment is displayed at the top edge of screen.
Deleting the button assignments 1. Press and hold buttons 1 and simultane‐ ously for approx. 5 seconds. 2. "OK"
50 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 51
BMW Gesture Control AT A GLANCE
BMW Gesture Control
Vehicle features and The gestures that are performed underneath the interior mirror are captured by a camera in the options roofliner.
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ cific and optional features offered with the series. Activating/deactivating It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected Via iDrive: options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When us‐ 1. "My Vehicle" ing these functions and systems, the applicable 2. "iDrive settings" laws and regulations must be observed. 3. "Gestures" 4. "Gesture control" Concept Settings Several iDrive functions can be operated by hand motion only using BMW Gesture Control. 1. "My Vehicle" 2. "iDrive settings" Overview 3. "Gestures" 4. Select desired setting: ▷ "Display tips": the possible gesture is shown on the Control Display. ▷ "Audio feedback": an acoustic signal is emitted once the gesture is recognized.
51 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 52
AT A GLANCE BMW Gesture Control
Possible gestures
Gesture Operation Function
Move index finger forward and backward in the Accept call. direction of the screen. Select a highlighted entry in a list during voice activation. Confirm the "Resume guidance" pop-up.
Swipe with the hand across the width of the Con‐ Reject call. trol Display in the direction of the front-passenger Close the pop-up. side. Terminate voice activation.
Slowly move forearm clockwise in a circular pat‐ Increase the volume. tern with the index finger stretched out forward. Gesture is detected after one circular motion.
Slowly move forearm counterclockwise in a circu‐ Reduce the volume. lar pattern with the index finger stretched out for‐ ward. Gesture is detected after one circular motion.
Pinch with thumb and index finger and move Surround View: turn camera view. hand horizontally to the right or left. This gesture can only be exe‐ cuted while the vehicle is station‐ ary.
Move stretched out index and middle finger for‐ Individually assignable gesture. ward.
Perform gestures underneath the interior mirror Assigning gesture individually and next to the steering wheel. Via iDrive: Execute gestures clearly. 1. "My Vehicle" The gestures can also be executed from the front-passenger side. 2. "iDrive settings" 3. "Gestures"
52 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 53
BMW Gesture Control AT A GLANCE
4. "Function assignment" 5. Select the desired setting.
System limits Gesture recognition by the camera can be distur‐ bed by the following circumstances: ▷ The camera lens is covered. ▷ Objects are located on the interior mirror. ▷ The camera lens is dirty. Clean the camera lenses, refer to page 356. ▷ The gesture is executed outside of the de‐ tection range. ▷ Wearing of gloves or jewelry. ▷ Smoking in the car's interior.
53 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 54
AT A GLANCE Voice activation system
Voice activation system
Vehicle features and Functional requirements options To enable voice command recognition, a lan‐ guage must be set via iDrive that is supported by This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ the voice activation system. cific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily To set the language, refer to page 57. available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When us‐ Using the voice activation ing these functions and systems, the applicable system laws and regulations must be observed. Activating the voice activation Concept system
Most functions displayed on the Control Display 1. Press the button on the steering can be operated by voice commands via the wheel. voice activation system. The system supports 2. Wait for the signal. you with announcements during input. 3. Say the command. The symbol on the Control Display indi‐ General information cates that voice activation system is ac‐ tive. ▷ Functions that can only be used when the ve‐ hicle is stationary can only be operated via No other commands may be available. In this the voice activation system to a limited ex‐ case, operate the function via iDrive. tent. Terminating the voice activation ▷ The system uses a special microphone on the driver's side. system ▷ ›...‹ in the Owner's Manual denotes verbal in‐ Press the button on the steering wheel structions to use with the voice activation or ›Cancel‹. system. ▷ Say the commands, numbers, and letters Using a smartphone via voice smoothly and with normal volume, emphasis, activation and speed. A smartphone connected to the vehicle can be ▷ Always say commands in the language of the used via voice activation. voice activation system.
54 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 55
Voice activation system AT A GLANCE
Activate voice command response on the smart‐ ▷ To have information on the operating princi‐ phone for this purpose. ple of the voice activation system read out loud: ›General information on voice control‹. 1. Press and hold the button on the ▷ To have help for the current menu read out steering wheel for approx. 3 seconds. loud: ›Help‹. Voice command response is activated on the smartphone. Example: opening the tone 2. Release the button. settings If activation is successful, a confirmation ap‐ pears on the Control Display. The commands of the menu items are spoken just as they are selected via the Controller. If it was not possible to activate voice command response, the list of Bluetooth devices appears 1. Switch on the Entertainment sound output, if on the Control Display. needed.
2. Press button on the steering wheel. Possible commands 3. ›Media and radio‹ 4. ›Tone‹ General information Most menu items on the Control Display can be voiced as commands. Settings Commands from other menus can also be spo‐ ken. Setting the voice dialog You may select list entries such as phone list en‐ You can set the system to use standard dialog or tries via voice activation. Read these list entries a short version. out loud exactly as they are shown in the respec‐ The short version of the voice dialog plays back tive list. short messages in abbreviated form. Displaying possible commands Via iDrive: The following is displayed in the top area of the 1. "My Vehicle" Control Display: 2. "iDrive settings" ▷ Some possible commands for the current 3. "Language" menu. 4. "Speech mode:" ▷ Some possible commands from other me‐ 5. Select the desired setting. nus. ▷ Status of the voice recognition. Activating voice recognition via ▷ Encrypted connection is not available. the server The voice recognition feature via the server pro‐ Help on the voice activation vides a dictation function and a natural method of system entering destinations while improving the quality ▷ To have the available spoken instructions of voice recognition. To use the functions, data is read out loud: ›Voice commands‹.
55 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 56
AT A GLANCE Voice activation system
transmitted to a service provider via an encrypted ▷ The volume is stored for the driver profile connection and stored locally there. currently used. Via iDrive: 1. "My Vehicle" Information for Emergency 2. "iDrive settings" Requests 3. "Language" 4. "Server speech recognition" Do not use the voice activation system to initiate an Emergency Request. In stressful situations, Speaking during voice output the voice and vocal pitch can change. This can unnecessarily delay the establishment of a It is possible to answer during inquiries of the phone connection. voice activation system. The function can be de‐ activated if inquiries are often undesirably inter‐ Instead, use the SOS button, refer to page 348, rupted, for instance due to background noise or close to the interior mirror. talking. Via iDrive: Environmental conditions 1. "My Vehicle" ▷ Keep the doors, windows, and glass sunroof 2. "iDrive settings" closed to prevent noise interference. 3. "Language" ▷ Avoid making other noise in the vehicle while 4. "Speaking during voice output" speaking.
Setting the language
The language to be used for voice activation and system announcements can be set. Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle" 2. "iDrive settings" 3. "Language" 4. "Language:" 5. Select the desired language.
Adjusting the volume
Turn the volume button during the spoken in‐ structions until the desired volume is set. ▷ The volume remains constant even if the vol‐ ume of other audio sources is changed.
56 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 57
General settings AT A GLANCE
General settings
Vehicle features and 4. "Time zone:" options 5. Select the desired setting. The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ rently used. This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ cific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily Setting the time available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected Via iDrive: options or country versions. This also applies to 1. "My Vehicle" safety-related functions and systems. When us‐ ing these functions and systems, the applicable 2. "iDrive settings" laws and regulations must be observed. 3. "Date and time" 4. "Time:" Language 5. Turn the Controller until the desired hours are displayed. Setting the language 6. Press the Controller. 7. Turn the Controller until the desired minutes Via iDrive: are displayed. 1. "My Vehicle" 8. Press the Controller. 2. "iDrive settings" 3. "Language" Setting the time format 4. "Language:" Via iDrive: 5. Select the desired setting. 1. "My Vehicle" The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ 2. "iDrive settings" rently used. 3. "Date and time" Setting the voice dialog 4. "Time format:" 5. Select the desired setting. Voice dialog for the voice activation system, refer to page 55. The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ rently used.
Time Instrument cluster with enhanced features: setting the Setting the time zone clock time display Via iDrive: The clock time can be displayed in analog or dig‐ ital form. 1. "My Vehicle" 2. "iDrive settings" 3. "Date and time"
57 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 58
AT A GLANCE General settings
Via iDrive: Setting the date format 1. "My Vehicle" Via iDrive: 2. "iDrive settings" 1. "My Vehicle" 3. "Displays" 2. "iDrive settings" 4. "Instrument panel" 3. "Date and time" 5. "Time" 4. "Date format:" 6. Select the desired setting. 5. Select the desired setting. The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ rently used. rently used.
Automatic time setting Depending on your vehicle's optional features, Setting the units of the time, date and, if needed, the time zone are measurement updated automatically. Via iDrive: Depending on the country version, you can set the units of measurement for some values, for in‐ 1. "My Vehicle" stance fuel consumption, distances, and temper‐ 2. "iDrive settings" ature. 3. "Date and time" Via iDrive: 4. "Automatic time setting" 1. "My Vehicle" The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ 2. "iDrive settings" rently used. 3. "Units" 4. Select the desired menu item. Date 5. Select the desired setting. The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ Setting the date rently used. Via iDrive: 1. "My Vehicle" Activating/deactivating the 2. "iDrive settings" display of the current 3. "Date and time" vehicle position 4. "Date:" 5. Turn the Controller until the desired day is Concept displayed. If vehicle location has been activated, the current 6. Press the Controller. vehicle position can be displayed in the BMW 7. Make the settings for the month and year. Connected app or in the ConnectedDrive cus‐ tomer portal.
58 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 59
General settings AT A GLANCE
Activating/deactivating Depending on the light conditions, the bright‐ ness settings may not be clearly visible. Via iDrive: 1. "My Vehicle" Selecting the contents of the 2. "Vehicle settings" main menu 3. "Vehicle tracking" For some menu items of the main menu, the dis‐ 4. "Vehicle tracking" played contents can be selected.
1. Press button. Activating/deactivating 2. "Contents of main menu" popup windows 3. Select the desired menu and the desired content. For some functions, popup windows are dis‐ The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ played automatically on the Control Display. rently used. Some of these popup windows can be activated or deactivated. Via iDrive: Messages 1. "My Vehicle" 2. "iDrive settings" Concept 3. "Pop-ups" The menu centrally displays all messages arriv‐ ing in the vehicle in list form. 4. Select the desired setting. The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ General information rently used. The following messages can be displayed: ▷ Traffic messages. Control Display ▷ Check Control messages. ▷ Communication messages, for example e- Brightness mails, SMS text messages or reminders. Via iDrive: ▷ Service requirements messages. 1. "My Vehicle" Messages are additionally displayed in the status field. 2. "iDrive settings" 3. "Displays" Retrieving messages 4. "Control display" Via iDrive: 5. "Brightness at night" 1. "Notifications" 6. Turn the Controller until the desired bright‐ ness is set. 2. Select the desired message. 7. Press the Controller. The respective menu is opened, where the mes‐ sage is displayed. The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ rently used.
59 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 60
AT A GLANCE General settings
Deleting messages Activating/deactivating the data All messages, except Check Control messages, transfer can be deleted from the list. Check Control mes‐ Follow the instructions on the Control Display. sages are displayed as long as they are relevant. Via iDrive: Via iDrive: 1. Switch on standby state. 1. "Notifications" 2. "My Vehicle" 2. Select the desired message. 3. "iDrive settings" 4. "Data privacy" 3. Press button. 5. Select the desired setting. 4. "Delete this notification" or "Delete all notifications" Deleting personal data in the Settings vehicle The following settings can be adjusted: Concept ▷ Select the applications, from which mes‐ Depending on the usage, the vehicle stores per‐ sages will be permitted. sonal data, such as stored radio stations. This ▷ Sort the messages according to date or prior‐ personal data can be permanently deleted using ity. iDrive. Via iDrive: General information 1. "My Vehicle" Depending on the equipment package, the fol‐ 2. "iDrive settings" lowing data can be deleted: 3. "Notifications" ▷ Driver profile settings. 4. Select the desired setting. ▷ Stored radio stations. ▷ Stored programmable memory buttons. Data protection ▷ Travel and Onboard Computer information. ▷ Music collection. Data transfer ▷ Navigation, for instance stored destinations. ▷ Phone book. Concept ▷ Online data, for instance Favorites, cookies. The vehicle offers different functions, whose use ▷ Office data, for instance voice notes. requires a data transfer to BMW or a service pro‐ vider. The data transfer can be deactivated for ▷ Login accounts. some functions. Altogether, the deletion of the data can take up to 15 minutes. General information With data transfer deactivated, the respective Functional requirement function cannot be used. Data can only be deleted while stationary. Only make these settings while stationary.
60 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 61
General settings AT A GLANCE
Deleting data Function Connec‐ Heed and follow the instructions on the Control tion type Display. Making calls via the hands-free Bluetooth. Via iDrive: system. 1. Switch on standby state. Using phone functions via iDrive. 2. "My Vehicle" Using the smartphone Office 3. "iDrive settings" functions. 4. "Data privacy" Playing music from the smart‐ Bluetooth or 5. "Delete personal data" phone or the audio player. USB. 6. "Delete personal data" Using compatible apps via Bluetooth or 7. "OK" iDrive. USB. 8. Exit and lock the vehicle. USB storage device: USB. After 15 minutes, the deletion process is com‐ Exporting and importing driver pleted. profiles. If not all of the data was deleted, repeat the dele‐ Performing software updates. tion. Exporting and importing stored trips. Canceling deletion Playing music. Switch on the drive-ready state to cancel dele‐ tion of the data. Playing videos from the smart‐ USB. phone or the USB storage de‐ vice.
Connections Using the vehicle Internet ac‐ Internet hot‐ cess. spot. Concept Use Apple Carplay apps via Bluetooth Various connection types are available for using iDrive and voice operation. and WiFi. mobile devices in the vehicle. The connection type to select depends on the mobile device and Screen Mirroring: WiFi the desired function. Showing the smartphone display on the Control Display. General information The following overview shows possible functions The following connection types require one-time and the suitable connection types for them. The pairing with the vehicle: scope of functions depends on the mobile de‐ ▷ Bluetooth. vice. ▷ Internet hotspot. ▷ Apple CarPlay. ▷ Screen Mirroring. Paired devices are automatically recognized later on and connected to the vehicle.
61 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 62
AT A GLANCE General settings
Safety information Bluetooth connection
Functional requirements WARNING ▷ Compatible device, refer to page 62, with Operating the integrated information systems Bluetooth interface. and communication devices while driving can distract from traffic. It is possible to lose control ▷ The remote control or BMW display key is in of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. the vehicle. Only use the systems or devices when the traf‐ ▷ The device is ready for operation. fic situation allows. As warranted, stop and use ▷ Bluetooth is switched on in the vehicle, refer the systems and devices while the vehicle is to page 62, and on the device. stationary. ▷ Bluetooth pre-settings, such as visibility, may be required on the device; refer to the own‐ Compatible devices er's manual of the device.
General information Switching on Bluetooth Information on mobile devices compatible with Via iDrive: the vehicle can be found at www.bmwusa.com/ 1. "My Vehicle" bluetooth. 2. "iDrive settings" Malfunctions may occur with devices not listed 3. "Mobile devices" or deviating software versions. 4. "Settings" Displaying the vehicle identification 5. "Bluetooth®" number and software part number When looking for compatible devices, you may Activating/deactivating telephone have to state the vehicle identification number functions and the software part number. These numbers To use all supported functions of a mobile can be displayed in the vehicle. phone, the following functions must be activated Via iDrive: prior to pairing the mobile phone with the vehicle. Via iDrive: 1. "My Vehicle" 2. "iDrive settings" 1. "My Vehicle" 3. "Mobile devices" 2. "iDrive settings" 4. "Settings" 3. "Mobile devices" 5. "Bluetooth® info" 4. "Settings" 6. "System information" 5. Select desired setting: A software update, refer to page 68, can be ▷ "Office" performed, if needed. Activate function to transmit short mes‐ sages, e-mails, calendars, tasks, notes, and reminders to the vehicle. Costs can be incurred by transmitting all data to the vehicle. ▷ "Contact images" 62 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 63
General settings AT A GLANCE
Activate function to show the contact pic‐ that, the mobile device does not function as ex‐ tures. pected. 6. Move the Controller to the left. In this case, the following explanations can help: Why could the mobile phone not be paired or Pairing the mobile device with the connected? vehicle ▷ There are too many Bluetooth devices con‐ Via iDrive: nected to the mobile phone or vehicle. 1. "My Vehicle" In the vehicle, delete Bluetooth connections with other devices. 2. "iDrive settings" Delete all known Bluetooth connections from 3. "Mobile devices" the device list on the mobile phone and start 4. "Connect new device" a new device search. 5. Select functions: ▷ The mobile phone is in power-save mode or ▷ "Telephone" has only a limited remaining battery life. ▷ "Bluetooth® audio" Charge mobile phone. ▷ "Apps" Why does the mobile phone no longer react? ▷ "Apple CarPlay" ▷ The applications on the mobile phone do not ▷ "Screen Mirroring" function anymore. The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis‐ Switch the mobile phone off and on again. played on the Control Display. ▷ Too high or too low ambient temperature for 6. Search for Bluetooth devices in the vicinity of mobile phone operation. the mobile device. Do not subject the mobile phone to extreme The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears ambient temperatures. on the mobile device display. Why can phone functions not be used via iDrive? Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle. ▷ The mobile phone may not be properly con‐ 7. Depending on the mobile device, a control figured, for instance as Bluetooth audio de‐ number is displayed or the control number vice. must be entered. Connect the mobile phone with the tele‐ ▷ Compare the control number displayed phone or additional phone function. on the Control Display with the control Why are no or not all phone book entries dis‐ number on the display of the device. played or why are they incomplete? Confirm the control number on the device ▷ Transmission of the phone book entries is and on the Control Display. not yet complete. ▷ Enter and confirm the same control num‐ ▷ It is possible that only the phone book entries ber on the device and via iDrive. of the mobile phone or the SIM card are The device is connected and displayed in the transmitted. device list, refer to page 67. ▷ It may not be possible to display phone book entries with special characters. Frequently asked questions ▷ It may not be possible to transmit contacts All requirements are met and all required steps from social networks. were completed in the specified order. Despite
63 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 64
AT A GLANCE General settings
▷ The number of phone book entries to be The following applications are possible: stored is too high. ▷ Exporting and importing driver profiles, refer ▷ Data volume of the contact too large, for in‐ to page 90. stance due to stored information such as ▷ Playing music files via USB audio. notes. ▷ Playing videos via USB video. Reduce the data volume of the contact. ▷ Loading of software updates, refer to ▷ A mobile phone can only be connected as page 68. audio source or as telephone. Follow the following when connecting: Configure the mobile phone and connect it ▷ Do not use force when plugging the connec‐ with the telephone or additional phone func‐ tor into the USB interface. tion. ▷ Use a flexible adapter cable. How can the phone connection quality be im‐ proved? ▷ Protect the USB storage device against me‐ chanical damage. ▷ Adjust the strength of the Bluetooth signal on the mobile phone, depending on the mobile ▷ Due to the large number of USB media avail‐ phone. able on the market, it cannot be guaranteed that every device is operable on the vehicle. ▷ Insert the mobile phone into the snap-in adapter or place it in the area of the center ▷ Do not expose USB media to extreme envi‐ console. ronmental conditions, such as very high tem‐ peratures; refer to the owner's manual of the ▷ Insert mobile phone into the wireless charg‐ device. ing tray. ▷ Due to the many different compression tech‐ ▷ Adjust the volume of the microphone and niques, proper playback of the media stored loudspeakers separately in the sound set‐ on the USB storage device cannot be guar‐ tings. anteed in all cases. If all points in this list have been checked and the ▷ A connected USB storage device will be sup‐ required function is still not available, contact the plied with charging current via the USB inter‐ hotline, a dealer’s service center or another quali‐ face if the device supports this. fied service center or repair shop. ▷ To ensure proper transmission of the stored USB connection data, do not charge a USB storage device via the onboard socket, when it is connected to General information the USB interface. ▷ Depending on how the USB storage device is Mobile devices with a USB port are connected to being used, settings may be required on the the USB interface. USB storage device, refer to the owner's ▷ Mobile phones. manual of the device. The snap-in adapter features a separate USB Not compatible USB media: port that is automatically connected when a ▷ USB hard drives. compatible mobile phone is inserted. ▷ USB hubs. ▷ Audio devices such as MP3 players. ▷ USB memory card readers with multiple in‐ ▷ USB storage devices. serts. Common file systems are supported. FAT32 ▷ HFS-formatted USB media. and exFAT are the recommended formats.
64 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 65
General settings AT A GLANCE
▷ Devices such as fans or lamps. Connecting device with Internet hotspot Functional requirement Via iDrive: Compatible device, refer to page 62, with USB interface. 1. "My Vehicle" 2. "iDrive settings" Connecting the device 3. "Mobile devices" Connect the USB storage device using a suitable 4. "Connect new device" adapter cable to a USB interface, refer to 5. "Internet hotspot" page 258. Hotspot name and hotspot code are dis‐ The USB storage device is displayed in the de‐ played on the Control Display. vice list, refer to page 67. 6. Search for WiFi networks on the device. Se‐ Internet connection lect network name on the device. 7. Enter hotspot code on the device and con‐ General information nect. Up to 8 devices can be connected with the Inter‐ The device is displayed in the device list, refer to net hotspot. page 67. With the first Internet usage via the Internet hot‐ Functional requirements spot, data volume must be purchased from a service provider. ▷ Compatible device, refer to page 62, with WiFi interface. All devices connected via the Internet hotspot use this data volume. ▷ ConnectedDrive contract. If necessary, data volume can be purchased from ▷ Data contract with a service provider. the ConnectedDrive Store. ▷ WiFi activated on the device. ▷ Internet hotspot activated in the vehicle. Settings ▷ Standby state switched on. The network name and hotspot code can be changed. In addition, the network name can be Activating the Internet hotspot hidden so that it cannot be found by other devi‐ Via iDrive: ces. Via iDrive: 1. "My Vehicle" 2. "iDrive settings" 1. "My Vehicle" 3. "Mobile devices" 2. "iDrive settings" 4. "Settings" 3. "Mobile devices" 5. "Internet hotspot" 4. Press button. 5. ▷ "Change hotspot key" Enter the desired hotspot code. ▷ "Change hotspot name" Enter the desired network name.
65 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 66
AT A GLANCE General settings
▷ "Hide hotspot" Operation Activate or deactivate the function. For more information, refer to the Integrated 6. Confirm the entry of the hotspot code or net‐ Owner's Manual in the vehicle or the printed work name: Owner's Manual for navigation, entertainment, communication. Select the symbol. Frequently asked questions Apple CarPlay preparation All requirements are met and all required steps Concept were completed in the specified order. Despite that, the mobile device does not function as ex‐ CarPlay allows certain functions of a compatible pected. Apple iPhone to be used via Siri voice operation and iDrive. In this case, the following explanations can help: The iPhone has already been paired with Apple Functional requirements CarPlay. When a new connection is established, CarPlay can no longer be selected. ▷ Compatible iPhone, refer to page 62. ▷ Delete the iPhone concerned from the device iPhone 5 or later with iOS 7.1 or later. list. ▷ Corresponding mobile wireless contract. ▷ On the iPhone, delete the vehicle concerned ▷ Bluetooth, WiFi, and Siri voice operation are from the list of stored vehicles under Blue‐ switched on on the iPhone. tooth and under WiFi. ▷ Pair the iPhone as a new device. Switching on Bluetooth and CarPlay If the steps listed have been carried out and the Via iDrive: required function is still not available: contact the 1. "My Vehicle" hotline, a dealer’s service center or another quali‐ 2. "iDrive settings" fied service center or repair shop. 3. "Mobile devices" Screen Mirroring 4. "Settings" 5. Select the following settings: General information ▷ "Bluetooth®" Screen Mirroring enables mirroring (outputting) ▷ "Apple CarPlay" of the smartphone display on the Control Dis‐ play. Pairing iPhone with CarPlay Functional requirements Pair iPhone via Bluetooth with the vehicle, refer to page 63. ▷ Compatible smartphone, refer to page 62, with Screen Mirroring interface. Select CarPlay as the function: ▷ Screen Mirroring is switched on on the "Apple CarPlay" smartphone. The iPhone is connected to the vehicle and dis‐ ▷ WiFi is switched on in the vehicle. played in the device list, refer to page 67.
66 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 67
General settings AT A GLANCE
Switching on WiFi Displaying the device list Via iDrive: All devices paired with or connected to the vehi‐ cle are displayed in the device list. 1. "My Vehicle" Via iDrive: 2. "iDrive settings" 3. "Mobile devices" 1. "My Vehicle" 4. "Settings" 2. "iDrive settings" 5. "Vehicle Wi-Fi®" 3. "Mobile devices" A symbol indicates, for which function a device is Pairing a smartphone with Screen used. Mirroring Symbol Function Via iDrive: "Telephone" 1. "My Vehicle" "Additional telephone" 2. "iDrive settings" 3. "Mobile devices" "Bluetooth® audio" 4. "Connect new device" "Apps"
5. "Screen Mirroring" "Internet hotspot" The WiFi name of the vehicle is displayed on the Control Display. "Apple CarPlay" 6. Search for WiFi devices in the surroundings "Screen Mirroring" of the smartphone. The WiFi name of the vehicle appears on the Configuring the device device display. Select the WiFi name of the Functions can be activated or deactivated for vehicle. paired and connected devices. 7. Confirm the connection via iDrive. Via iDrive: The device is connected and displayed in the 1. "My Vehicle" device list, refer to page 67. 2. "iDrive settings" Managing mobile devices 3. "Mobile devices" 4. Select the desired device. General information 5. Select the desired setting. ▷ After one-time pairing, the devices are auto‐ If a function is assigned to a device, the function matically recognized and reconnected when will be deactivated where appropriate for a de‐ standby state is switched on. vice that is already connected and the device will ▷ The data stored on the SIM card or in the be disconnected. mobile phone are transferred to the vehicle after recognition. Disconnecting the device ▷ For some devices, certain settings are neces‐ Via iDrive: sary, for instance authorization; see the own‐ er's manual of the device. 1. "My Vehicle" 2. "iDrive settings"
67 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 68
AT A GLANCE General settings
3. "Mobile devices" 4. "Settings" 4. Select device. 5. "Swap telephone/additional tel." 5. "Disconnect device" The device remains paired and can be con‐ Software update nected again, refer to page 68. General information Connecting the device The vehicle supports a large number of mobile A disconnected device can be reconnected. devices, for instance mobile phones and MP3 players. Software updates are available for many Via iDrive: of the supported devices. The vehicle is main‐ 1. "My Vehicle" tained up-to-date via regular vehicle software up‐ dates. 2. "iDrive settings" Updates and current information is available at 3. "Mobile devices" www.bmw.com/update. 4. Select device. 5. "Connect device" Displaying the installed software The functions that were assigned to the device version before disconnecting are assigned to the device The software version installed in the vehicle is when it is reconnected. If the device is already displayed. connected, these functions are deactivated. Via iDrive: Deleting the device 1. "My Vehicle" Via iDrive: 2. "iDrive settings"
1. "My Vehicle" 3. "Software update" 2. "iDrive settings" 4. "Show current version" 3. "Mobile devices" If an update has been carried out before, select the desired version to display additional informa‐ 4. Select device. tion. 5. "Delete device" The device is disconnected and removed from Updating software via USB the device list. The software may only be updated when the ve‐ hicle is stationary. Swapping the telephone and Via iDrive: additional phone 1. Store the file for the software update in the If two mobile phones are connected to the vehi‐ main directory of a USB flash drive. cle, the functions of the phone and additional phone can be switched. 2. Connect the USB storage device to a USB interface, refer to page 258. Via iDrive: 3. "My Vehicle" 1. "My Vehicle" 4. "iDrive settings" 2. "iDrive settings" 5. "Software update" 3. "Mobile devices" 6. "Update software"
68 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 69
General settings AT A GLANCE
7. "USB" 8. "Install software" 9. "OK" 10.Wait for the update to complete. 11."Shut down system" If necessary, switch off the engine first.
Restoring the software version The software version before the last software update and the version before the first software update can be restored. The software may only be restored when the ve‐ hicle is stationary. Via iDrive: 1. "My Vehicle" 2. "iDrive settings" 3. "Software update" 4. "Restore software" 5. ▷ "Previous version" The previous software version is restored. ▷ "Default software settings" The first software version is restored. 6. "Remove software" 7. "OK" 8. Wait for restore. 9. "Shut down system" If necessary, switch off the engine first.
69 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 70
AT A GLANCE Owner's Manual media
Owner's Manual media
Vehicle features and Integrated Owner's Manual options in the vehicle
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ Concept cific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily The Integrated Owner's Manual specifically de‐ available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected scribes features and functions found in the vehi‐ options or country versions. This also applies to cle. safety-related functions and systems. When us‐ The Integrated Owner's Manual can be displayed ing these functions and systems, the applicable on the Control Display. laws and regulations must be observed. Selecting the Owner's Manual
General information 1. Press button. 2. "My Vehicle" You can use the following media formats to call up the content in the Owner's Manual: 3. "Owner's Manual" ▷ Printed Owner's Manual, refer to page 70. 4. Select the required method of accessing the contents. ▷ Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle, re‐ fer to page 70. Scrolling through the owner's manual Printed Owner's Manual Turn the Controller, until the next or previous contents are displayed. Concept Context help The printed Owner's Manual describes all stand‐ ard, country-specific, and optional features of‐ fered with the series. General information The section of the Owner's Manual relating to General information the function that is currently selected can be dis‐ played directly. The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain‐ ment, and Communication can be obtained as Opening via iDrive printed book from the service center. Change directly to the Options menu from the Supplementary Owner's Manuals function on the Control Display: Also follow the instructions of the Supplementary Owner's Manuals, which are included in addition 1. Press button. to the onboard literature. 2. "Owner's Manual"
70 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 71
Owner's Manual media AT A GLANCE
Opening when a Check Control message is displayed 2. Press desired programmable mem‐ ory button and hold for more than 2 seconds. Directly from the Check Control message on the Control Display: Executing "Owner's Manual" Press the corresponding button. Changing between a function and The owner's manual is directly dis‐ the Owner's Manual played at the selected entry point. To switch from a function, for instance radio, to the Owner's Manual on the Control Display and to alternate between the two displays:
1. Press the button. 2. "Owner's Manual" 3. Select the desired page in the Owner's Manual.
4. Press the button again to return to last displayed function.
5. Press the button to return to the page of the Owner's Manual displayed last. To alternate continuously between the last dis‐ played function and the last displayed page of the Owner's Manual, repeat steps 4 & 5. Opens a new display every time.
Programmable memory buttons
General information The jumps into the Owner's Manual can be stored on the programmable memory buttons, refer to page 50, and called up directly.
Storing 1. Select the desired entry point via iDrive: ▷ "Quick reference" ▷ "Search by pictures" ▷ "Keyword search" ▷ "Animations"
71 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18
72 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 CONTROLS
Opening and closing ...... 74 Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel ...... 101 Transporting children safely ...... 115 Driving ...... 120 Displays ...... 139 Lights ...... 156 Safety ...... 163 Driving stability control systems ...... 195 Driver assistance systems ...... 199 Driving comfort ...... 238 Climate control ...... 240 Interior equipment ...... 253 Storage compartments ...... 260 Cargo area ...... 265
73 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 74
CONTROLS Opening and closing
Opening and closing
Vehicle features and Safety information options WARNING This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ People or animals in the vehicle can lock the cific and optional features offered with the series. doors from the inside and lock themselves in. In It also describes features that are not necessarily this case, the vehicle cannot be opened from available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected the outside. There is a risk of injury. Take the options or country versions. This also applies to remote control with you so that the vehicle can safety-related functions and systems. When us‐ be opened from the outside. ing these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed. WARNING Remote control For some country versions, unlocking from the inside is only possible with special knowledge. General information Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehi‐ cle while being exposed to extreme tempera‐ Depending on the equipment version, the vehicle tures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock is delivered with two remote controls or one re‐ the vehicle from the outside when there are mote control and the BMW display key. people in it. Each remote control contains a replaceable bat‐ tery. Replacing the battery, refer to page 77. You may set the button functions, depending on WARNING the vehicle equipment and country version. Set‐ Unattended children or animals can cause the tings, refer to page 92. vehicle to move and endanger themselves and The vehicle stores personal settings for every re‐ traffic, for instance due to the following actions: mote control. Driver profile, refer to page 90. ▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button. The remote controls hold information about re‐ ▷ Releasing the parking brake. quired maintenance. Service data in the remote ▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐ control, refer to page 337. dows. To prevent possible locking in of the remote ▷ Engaging selector lever position N. control, take the remote control with you when exiting the vehicle. ▷ Using vehicle equipment. There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐ hicle. Take the remote control with you when exiting and lock the vehicle.
74 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 75
Opening and closing CONTROLS
Overview ▷ Depending on the settings, the welcome light and headlight courtesy delay feature, refer to page 157, are switched on. ▷ Automatically folded in exterior mirrors are folded open. This function must be activated in the settings, refer to page 92. ▷ With anti-theft protection: Anti-theft protec‐ tion is switched off. ▷ The alarm system, refer to page 94, is switched off. 1 Unlocking After opening one of the front doors, the vehicle 2 Locking is ready for operation, refer to page 40. 3 Open tailgate The light functions may depend on the ambient brightness. 4 Press and hold or press three times in quick succession: panic mode Convenient opening Press briefly: headlight courtesy delay feature Press and hold this button on the re‐ mote control after unlocking. Unlocking The windows and the glass sunroof are opened, Press the button on the remote control. as long as the button on the remote control is pressed. Depending on the settings, refer to page 92, the following access points are unlocked: Locking ▷ Driver's door and fuel filler flap. 1. Close the driver's door. Press the button on the remote control again to unlock the other vehicle access points. 2. Press button on the remote control. ▷ All doors, trunk lid, and fuel filler flap. The following functions are executed: In addition, the following functions are executed: ▷ All doors, the tailgate, and the fuel filler flap ▷ Unlocking is confirmed by the turn signals are locked. and the horn. This function must be activated ▷ Locking is confirmed by the turn signals and in the settings, refer to page 92. the horn. This function must be activated in ▷ The settings stored in the driver profile, refer the settings, refer to page 92. to page 90, are applied. ▷ The exterior mirrors are folded in. This func‐ ▷ The driver's seat is set to the last position tion must be activated in the settings, refer to saved in the driver's profile. This function page 92. must be activated in the settings, refer to ▷ With anti-theft protection: Anti-theft protec‐ page 92. tion is switched on. This prevents the doors ▷ The interior lights are switched on, unless from being unlocked using the lock buttons they were manually switched off. Switch the or the door openers. interior lights on/off manually, refer to ▷ The alarm system, refer to page 94, is page 160. switched on.
75 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 76
CONTROLS Opening and closing
If the drive-ready state is still switched on when Tailgate you lock the vehicle, the vehicle horn honks twice. In this case, the drive-ready state must be General information switched off by means of the Start/Stop button. To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place the remote control in the cargo area. With Comfort Access: convenient closing Depending on the vehicle equipment and coun‐ try version, it is also possible to have the doors unlocked. Adjusting the settings, refer to Safety information page 92.
WARNING Safety information With convenient closing, body parts can be jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure WARNING that the area of movement of the doors is clear Body parts can be jammed when operating the during convenient closing. trunk lid. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the trunk lid is clear Closing during opening and closing. Press and hold this button on the remote control in the area close to the vehicle after NOTICE locking. During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and The windows and the glass sunroof are closed, up. There is a risk of damage to property. Make as long as the button on the remote control is sure that the area of movement of the trunk lid pressed. is clear during opening and closing.
Switching on the interior and exterior lights Opening Press and hold button on the remote Press the button on the remote control control for approx. 1 second. with the vehicle locked.
The function is not available for the first 10 sec‐ Panic mode onds after locking. You can trigger the alarm system if you find your‐ ▷ The interior lights are switched on, unless self in a dangerous situation. they were manually switched off. Switch the interior lights on/off manually, refer to ▷ Press button on the remote control page 160. and hold for at least 3 seconds. ▷ Depending on the settings, the exterior light‐ ▷ Briefly press the button on the remote control ing, refer to page 157, is switched on. three times in succession.
The light functions may depend on the ambient To switch off the alarm: press any button. brightness.
76 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 77
Opening and closing CONTROLS
Switching on the headlight Additional remote controls courtesy delay feature Additional remote controls are available from a Press the button on the remote control. dealer’s service center or another qualified serv‐ ice center or repair shop.
Set the duration, refer to page 157. Loss of the remote controls Replacing the battery A lost remote control can be blocked and re‐ placed by a dealer’s service center or another 1. Remove the integrated key from the remote qualified service center or repair shop. control, refer to page 82. 2. Place the integrated key underneath the bat‐ Malfunction tery compartment cover, arrow 1, and lift the cover with a lever movement of the General information integrated key, arrow 2. A Check Control message, refer to page 140, is displayed. Remote control detection by the vehicle may malfunction under the following circumstances: ▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐ charged. Replacing the battery, refer to page 77. ▷ Interference of the radio connection from transmission towers or other equipment with 3. Push battery in the direction of the arrow us‐ high transmitting power. ing a pointed object and lift it out. ▷ Shielding of the remote control due to metal objects. Do not transport the remote control together with metal objects. ▷ Interference of the radio connection from mo‐ bile phones or other electronic devices in di‐ rect proximity to the remote control. Do not transport the remote control together with electronic devices. ▷ Interference of radio transmission by a charg‐ 4. Insert a type CR 2032 battery with the posi‐ ing process of mobile devices, for instance tive side facing up. charging of a mobile phone. 5. Press the cover closed. ▷ The remote control is in direct proximity of Have old batteries disposed of by a deal‐ the wireless charging tray. er’s service center or another qualified Place the remote control down at a different service center or repair shop or take location. them to a collection point. In the case of interference, the vehicle can be unlocked and locked from the outside with the integrated key, refer to page 82.
77 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 78
CONTROLS Opening and closing
Switching the drive-ready state on BMW display key via emergency detection of the remote control General information The BMW display key is supplied with an addi‐ tional mechanical key. If the display key is used, the mechanical key should be carried with you, for instance in the wallet. The mechanical key is used like the integrated key, refer to page 82. The display key supports all functions of the standard remote control. In addition, the following functions are also avail‐ able: It is not possible to switch on the drive-ready state if the remote control has not been de‐ ▷ Display status of doors and windows. tected. ▷ Display status of the anti-theft warning sys‐ Proceed as follows in this case: tem. ▷ Display service information. 1. Hold the remote control with its back against the marked area on the steering column. Pay ▷ Call up range with available fuel. attention to the display in the instrument ▷ With parked-car heating: operate parked-car cluster. heating. 2. If the remote control is detected: Without parked-car heating: operate parked- Switch on drive-ready state within 10 sec‐ car ventilation. onds. ▷ Remote Control Parking. If the remote control is not detected, slightly change the position of the remote control and re‐ Safety information peat the procedure.
WARNING Frequently asked questions People or animals in the vehicle can lock the What precautions can be taken to be able to doors from the inside and lock themselves in. In open a vehicle with an accidentally locked in re‐ this case, the vehicle cannot be opened from mote control? the outside. There is a risk of injury. Take the ▷ The options provided by the Remote Serv‐ remote control with you so that the vehicle can ices of the BMW Connected app include the be opened from the outside. ability to lock and unlock a vehicle. This requires an active BMW Connected‐ Drive contract and the BMW Connected app WARNING must be installed on a smartphone. For some country versions, unlocking from the ▷ Unlocking the vehicle can be requested via inside is only possible with special knowledge. the BMW ConnectedDrive Call Center. An active BMW ConnectedDrive contract is required.
78 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 79
Opening and closing CONTROLS
Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehi‐ 7 Back cle while being exposed to extreme tempera‐ 8 Switch the display on/off tures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock the vehicle from the outside when there are 9 Micro-USB charging socket people in it. Reception range The number of available display key functions WARNING depends on the distance from the vehicle. Unattended children or animals can cause the ▷ When you are in close proximity to the vehi‐ vehicle to move and endanger themselves and cle, all functions of the display key are availa‐ traffic, for instance due to the following actions: ble. ▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button. ▷ The status information can be called up in the ▷ Releasing the parking brake. extended reception range. ▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐ With parked-car heating: the parked-car heat‐ dows. ing can be operated. ▷ Engaging selector lever position N. Without parked-car heating: the parked-car ▷ Using vehicle equipment. ventilation can be operated. There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not ▷ Outside of the reception range of the vehicle, leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐ you can display the last transmitted status in‐ hicle. Take the remote control with you when formation from the vehicle. exiting and lock the vehicle. The symbol is shown on the display if one of the buttons is pressed outside of the reception range. Overview Display
General information The display is divided into the upper status line, the information area, and the lower status line.
Upper status line The upper status line displays the following infor‐ mation: 1 Open tailgate ▷ Vehicle secured. 2 Unlocking Vehicle not secured. 3 Press and hold or press three times in quick ▷ Set time in the vehicle. succession: panic mode ▷ Charge state of the display key battery. Press briefly: headlight courtesy delay feature 4 Locking Information area 5 Park button The information area can be used to access in‐ 6 Display formation and perform additional functions.
79 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 80
CONTROLS Opening and closing
If the information area contains more than one Press the button on the left side of the display page, then page indicators are shown beneath key. the information. The indicator for the current page has Operating concept been filled in. Depending on the vehicle equipment, there are Swipe to the right or left with a finger to change up to five main menus providing access to the between the pages. sub-menus. If further information is available on a page, tap Main menu Information/Function the appropriate symbol. "Security / To return to the original page: tap on the information" symbol beneath the display. Door status. Alarm system status. Lower status line After alarm triggering: date, The lower status line indicates whether or not time, and reason for triggering the display key is within reception range, refer to the alarm. page 79.
▷ "Connected": the display key is within recep‐ Window status. tion range. Glass sunroof status. ▷ "Updated": the display key is not within re‐ ception range. It indicates when the last data "Vehicle Maintenance indicators of transfer from the vehicle took place. information" Condition Based Service CBS, refer to page 337. Switching on/off Status of the roadside parking The display will go out automatically after a brief lights. period to conserve battery power. "Mobility info" Range with available fuel. To hide the display manually: "Precondit. With parked-car heating: oper‐ Press the button on the left side of the display setting" ate parked-car heating, refer to key. Overview, refer to page 79. page 247. To show the display: Without parked-car heating: 1. Press the button on the left side of the dis‐ operate parked-car ventilation, play key. refer to page 247.
2. Then, swipe with your finger from bottom to "R/C parking" Remote Control Parking, refer top to unlock the screen lock. to page 231. To switch off the display to increase the usable battery life: Display key battery 1. If necessary, cancel the screen lock. 2. Press and hold the button on the left side of General information the display key for longer than 4 seconds. Follow the following information: 3. "OK" ▷ If the charge state of the display key battery To switch the display on: declines, the display is switched off automati‐ cally. The battery must be recharged so that
80 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 81
Opening and closing CONTROLS
the display can be switched back on. The op‐ Charging erability of the standard buttons is retained until the battery is completely discharged. Via USB ▷ Charge the battery for at least three hours Connect the display key via the micro-USB before using the display key for the first time charging socket to a USB port. or if the key has not been used for an ex‐ tended period. With Steptronic transmission: in the ▷ The display key can be used during charging wireless charging tray via the USB port. If the battery is fully dis‐ charged, it may take some time before the display key can be used again. ▷ Due to the large number of USB chargers available on the market, it cannot be guaran‐ teed that every charger will function properly. The charging duration depends on the charger used. ▷ Charging via the USB port may heat up the charger and the display key. 1. Open the tray cover. Charging in the wireless charging tray may 2. Place the display key into the middle of the heat up the tray and the display key. wireless charging tray in front of the cup hold‐ At higher temperatures, the display key may ers. cause a reduction in the charging current, Ensure that the display is facing up. and in isolated cases the charging process 3. Close the tray cover. may be interrupted temporarily. ▷ When inserting the display key into the wire‐ Malfunction less charging tray, make sure there are no objects between it and the wireless charging General information tray. A Check Control message is displayed. Safety information BMW display key detection by the vehicle may malfunction under the following circumstances: ▷ The battery of the display key is discharged. WARNING Charge the battery, refer to page 80. When charging a device that meets the Qi ▷ Interference of the radio connection from standard in the wireless charging tray, any transmission towers or other equipment with metal objects located between the device and high transmitting power. the tray can become very hot. If smart cards, memory cards or cards with magnetic strips are ▷ Shielding of the display key due to metal ob‐ placed between the device and the tray, this jects. may impair card function. There is a risk of in‐ ▷ Interference of the radio connection from mo‐ jury and risk of damage to property. When bile phones or other electronic devices in di‐ charging mobile devices, make sure there are rect proximity. no objects between the device and the tray.
81 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 82
CONTROLS Opening and closing
▷ Interference of radio transmission by a charg‐ Integrated key ing process of mobile devices, for instance charging of a mobile phone. Do not transport the display key together with General information metal objects or electronic devices. The driver's door can be locked and unlocked In the case of interference, the vehicle can also without remote control using the integrated key. be unlocked and locked from the outside with The integrated key also fits the glove compart‐ the mechanical key. ment.
Switching on drive-ready state via Safety information emergency detection of the BMW display key WARNING For some country versions, unlocking from the inside is only possible with special knowledge. Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehi‐ cle while being exposed to extreme tempera‐ tures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock the vehicle from the outside when there are people in it.
It is not possible to switch on the drive-ready NOTICE state if the display key has not been detected. The door lock is permanently joined with the Proceed as follows in this case: door. The door handle can be moved. When 1. Hold the display key with its back against the pulling the door handle with the integrated key marked area on the steering column. Pay at‐ inserted, paint or the integrated key can be tention to the display in the instrument clus‐ damaged. There is a risk of damage to prop‐ ter. erty. Remove the integrated key before pulling the outside door handle. 2. If the display key is detected: Switch on drive-ready state within 10 sec‐ onds. Removing If the display key is not detected, slightly change the position of the display key and repeat the procedure.
Resetting the BMW display key If the charged display key cannot be switched on anymore or if the display does not respond to entries anymore, the display key can be reset. Press and hold the button on the left side of the display key for at least 20 seconds, until some‐ Press the button, arrow 1, and pull out the thing appears on the display. integrated key, arrow 2.
82 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 83
Opening and closing CONTROLS
Locking/unlocking via the door The alarm system is triggered when the door is lock opened, if the vehicle has been unlocked via the door lock. 1. Pull and hold the door handle outward with one hand. In order to stop the alarm, unlock the vehicle with the remote control, if necessary through emer‐ gency detection of the remote control, refer to page 77.
Buttons for the central locking system
General information 2. Guide one finger of your other hand from the In the event of a severe accident, the vehicle is back under the cover, feel for the release automatically unlocked. The hazard warning sys‐ there, and press it outward. tem and interior lights come on.
Overview
3. Remove the cover. 4. Unlock or lock the door lock using the integrated key. Buttons for the central locking system.
Locking Press the button with the front doors closed.
▷ The fuel filler flap remains unlocked. ▷ The vehicle is not secured against theft when locking.
The other doors must be unlocked or locked Unlocking from the inside. Press button. Alarm system The alarm system is not switched on if the vehi‐ cle is locked with the integrated key. 83 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 84
CONTROLS Opening and closing
Opening Unlocking ▷ Press the button to unlock all the doors. Pull the door opener above the armrest. ▷ Front doors: pull the door handle on the door to open the door. The other doors remain locked. ▷ Back doors: pull twice on the door handle on the door to be opened; the first time unlocks the door, the second time opens it. The other doors remain locked. Grasp the handle of a vehicle door completely. This corresponds with pressing the button on the remote control. Comfort Access Locking Concept Close the driver's door. The vehicle can be accessed without activating the remote control. All you need to do is to have the remote control with you, such as in your pants pocket. The vehicle automatically detects the remote control when it is in close proximity or in the car's interior.
General information Comfort Access supports the following func‐ Touch the grooved surface on the handle of a tions: closed vehicle door with your finger for approx. ▷ Unlocking and locking the vehicle. 1 second without grasping the door handle. ▷ Convenient closing. This corresponds with pressing the button on the remote control. ▷ Opening tailgate. ▷ Open tailgate with no-touch activation. With automatic tailgate operation: open and Convenient closing close the tailgate with no-touch activation. Safety information Functional requirements ▷ To lock the vehicle, the remote control must WARNING be located outside of the vehicle near the With convenient closing, body parts can be doors. jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure ▷ The next unlocking and locking cycle is not that the area of movement of the doors is clear possible until after approx. 2 seconds. during convenient closing.
84 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 85
Opening and closing CONTROLS
Closing Opening
Touch the grooved surface on the handle of a Press button on the exterior of the tailgate. closed vehicle door with your finger and hold it This corresponds with pressing the button there without grasping the door handle. on the remote control. This corresponds to pressing and holding the button on the remote control. Opening and closing the tailgate In addition to locking, the windows and glass with no-touch activation sunroof will be closed. Concept Open tailgate The tailgate can be opened with no-touch activa‐ tion using the remote control you are carrying. General information With automatic tailgate operation, it can also be If you open the tailgate via Comfort Access, closed with no-touch activation. Two sensors locked doors will not be unlocked. detect a forward-directed foot motion in the cen‐ To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place the tral rear area and the tailgate is opened or closed. remote control in the cargo area. General information Safety information To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place the remote control in the cargo area.
WARNING If the remote control is in the sensor area, the tailgate can be opened or closed inadvertently by Body parts can be jammed when operating the an unconscious or alleged recognized foot trunk lid. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that movement. the area of movement of the trunk lid is clear during opening and closing. The sensor has an approximate range of 5 ft/1.50 m extending from the rear of the vehi‐ cle. If you open the tailgate with no-touch activation, NOTICE locked doors will not be unlocked. During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and up. There is a risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the trunk lid is clear during opening and closing.
85 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 86
CONTROLS Opening and closing
Safety information Opening Perform the foot movement described earlier. WARNING Before the trunk lid opens, the hazard warning During no-touch activation, vehicle parts may system flashes. be touched, such as the hot exhaust gas sys‐ Moving your foot again will stop the opening mo‐ tem. There is a risk of injury. When moving your tion, and moving it one more time after that will foot, make sure you have a firm stance and do close the trunk lid. not touch the vehicle. Closing The tailgate can only be closed with no-touch WARNING activation if automatic tailgate operation is active. Body parts can be jammed when operating the Perform the foot movement described earlier. trunk lid. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that Before closing, the hazard warning system the area of movement of the trunk lid is clear flashes and an acoustic signal sounds. during opening and closing. Moving your foot again will stop the closing mo‐ tion, and moving it one more time after that will re-open the trunk lid. NOTICE During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and Malfunction up. There is a risk of damage to property. Make Remote control detection by the vehicle may sure that the area of movement of the trunk lid malfunction under the following circumstances: is clear during opening and closing. ▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐ charged. Replacing the battery, refer to Performing the foot movement page 77. 1. Stand in the middle behind the vehicle at ap‐ ▷ Interference of the radio connection from prox. one arm's length away from the rear of transmission towers or other equipment with the vehicle. high transmitting power. 2. Wave a foot under the vehicle in the direction ▷ Shielding of the remote control due to metal of travel and immediately pull it back. With objects. this movement, the leg must pass through Do not transport the remote control together the ranges of both sensors. with metal objects. ▷ Interference of the radio connection from mo‐ bile phones or other electronic devices in di‐ rect proximity to the remote control. Do not transport the remote control together with electronic devices. Wet or snowy conditions may disrupt the locking request recognition function on the door han‐ dles. In the case of a malfunction, unlock and lock the vehicle using the buttons of the remote control or using the integrated key, refer to page 82.
86 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 87
Opening and closing CONTROLS
Tailgate Without automatic tailgate operation General information Opening from the outside To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place the remote control in the cargo area. Depending on the vehicle equipment and coun‐ try version, it is also possible to have the doors unlocked. Adjusting the settings, refer to page 92. The trunk lid cannot be opened if it is locked us‐ ing the switch in the glove compartment. Sepa‐ rately lock the trunk lid, refer to page 89.
When the trailer socket is in use or trailer towing ▷ Without Comfort Access: unlock vehicle. is activated, the trunk lid cannot be opened with With Comfort Access: unlock the vehicle or the remote control or with the button in the car's have the remote control with you. interior. Press button on the exterior of the tailgate.
Safety information ▷ Press and hold button on the remote control for approx. 1 second. WARNING Depending on the setting, the doors may also Body parts can be jammed when operating the be unlocked. Opening with the remote con‐ trunk lid. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that trol, refer to page 76. the area of movement of the trunk lid is clear during opening and closing. Opening from the inside Press button in the storage compart‐ ment of the driver's door. NOTICE During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and With Comfort Access: locking up. There is a risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the trunk lid is clear during opening and closing.
With the driver's door shut, press button on the inside of the tailgate.
87 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 88
CONTROLS Opening and closing
Closing Interruption of the opening procedure The opening operation is interrupted: ▷ When the vehicle starts moving. ▷ By pressing the button on the outside of the tailgate. Pressing again closes the trunk lid. ▷ By pressing the button on the inside of the tailgate. Pressing again closes the trunk lid. ▷ By pressing the button on the remote control. Pressing again continues the opening mo‐ tion. Grasp the recess grips and pull the tailgate down. ▷ By pressing or pulling the button in the driv‐ er's door. Pressing again continues the open‐ ing motion. With automatic tailgate operation Closing
Opening From the inside Pull and hold the button in the driver's From the outside door.
The remote control must be located inside the vehicle for this function. An acoustic signal sounds before the tailgate is closed.
From inside the tailgate Without Comfort Access:
▷ Without Comfort Access: unlock vehicle. With Comfort Access: unlock the vehicle or have the remote control with you. Press button on the exterior of the tailgate.
▷ Press and hold button on the remote control for approx. 1 second. Depending on the setting, the doors may also be unlocked. Opening with the remote con‐ Press button on the inside of the tailgate. trol, refer to page 76. With Comfort Access: From the inside Press button in the storage compart‐ ment of the driver's door.
88 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 89
Opening and closing CONTROLS
Locking separately
General information The switch in the glove compartment decouples the tailgate from the central locking system, so it can no longer be opened. If the glove compartment is locked with the integrated key, the remote control can be handed over without the integrated key, for in‐ ▷ Press button, arrow 1, on the inside of the stance to a valet parking service. It is then no lon‐ tailgate. ger possible for objects to be removed from the ▷ Press button, arrow 2. cargo area even with the remote control. The vehicle will be locked after closing the tailgate. The driver's door must be closed for Securing this purpose and the remote control must be ▷ Tailgate secured, arrow 1. outside of the vehicle in the area of the tail‐ gate. ▷ Tailgate not secured, arrow 2.
Interruption of the closing procedure The closing procedure is interrupted in the fol‐ Slide the switch into the desired position. lowing situations: ▷ If the vehicle starts off with a jerky movement. Trunk emergency unlocking ▷ By pressing the button on the outside of the tailgate. Pressing again re-opens the trunk lid. ▷ By pressing the button on the inside of the tailgate. Pressing again re-opens the trunk lid. ▷ By releasing the button on the remote con‐ trol. Pressing again and holding continues the closing motion. ▷ By releasing the button in the driver's door. Pulling again and holding continues the clos‐ ing motion. Pull the handle inside the cargo area. The tailgate unlocks. Malfunction In the event of an electrical malfunction, operate the unlocked tailgate manually with a slow and smooth motion.
89 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 90
CONTROLS Opening and closing
Automatic Soft Closing The new driver profile is assigned to the remote control currently used. There is an additional guest profile available that Safety information is not assigned to any remote control. It can be used to apply settings in the vehicle without WARNING changing the personal driver profiles. Body parts can be jammed while operating the doors. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that Functional requirements the area of movement of the doors is clear dur‐ For the system to be able to identify the driver ing opening and closing. profile associated to a particular driver, the de‐ tected remote control must be clearly allocated to the driver. Closing This is the case when: To close the doors, push lightly. ▷ The driver is only carrying his or her own re‐ Closing occurs automatically. mote control. ▷ The driver unlocks the vehicle. Driver profile ▷ The driver gets into the vehicle through the driver's door.
Concept Active driver profile In the driver profiles, individual settings for sev‐ After switching on the Control Display, the name eral drivers can be stored and called up again of the active driver profile is displayed. when required. Select driver profile, refer to page 91. General information As soon as the engine is started or any key is pressed, the last selected display is shown on There are three driver profiles with which per‐ the Control Display. sonal vehicle settings can be stored. Every re‐ mote control has one of these driver profiles as‐ To exit the welcome screen via iDrive: signed. "OK" If the vehicle is unlocked using a remote control, the assigned personal driver profile will be acti‐ Settings vated. All settings stored in the driver profile are The settings for the following systems and func‐ automatically applied. tions are stored in the active driver profile. The If several drivers use their own remote control, scope of storable settings depends on country the vehicle will adjust the personal settings dur‐ and equipment. ing unlocking. These settings are also restored, if ▷ Unlocking and locking. the vehicle has been used in the meantime by a ▷ Lights. person with a different remote control. ▷ Climate control. Changes to the settings are automatically stored in the driver profile currently activated. ▷ Radio. If another driver profile is selected via iDrive, the ▷ Instrument cluster. settings stored in it will be applied automatically. ▷ Programmable memory buttons.
90 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 91
Opening and closing CONTROLS
▷ Volumes, tone. Guest profile ▷ Control Display. The guest profile is for individual settings that are ▷ Navigation. stored in none of the three personal driver pro‐ files. ▷ TV. Via iDrive: ▷ PDC Park Distance Control. ▷ Rearview camera. 1. "My Vehicle" ▷ Panorama View. 2. "Driver profiles" ▷ Head-up Display. 3. "Drive off (guest)" ▷ Driving Dynamics Control. 4. "OK" ▷ Seat position, exterior mirror position, steer‐ The guest profile cannot be renamed. It is not ing wheel position. assigned to the current remote control. Both the positions saved via the seat memory and the last position set are saved. Renaming a driver profile ▷ Intelligent Safety. A personal name can be assigned to the active driver profile to avoid confusion between the ▷ Night vision. driver profiles. Profile management Via iDrive: 1. "My Vehicle" Selecting a driver profile 2. "Driver profiles" Regardless of the remote control in use, a differ‐ 3. Select driver profile. ent driver profile may be activated. This allows The driver profile marked with this symbol you to call up personal vehicle settings, even if can be renamed. you did not unlock the vehicle with your own re‐ mote control. 4. "Change driver profile name" Via iDrive: 5. Enter profile name. 6. Select the symbol. 1. "My Vehicle" 2. "Driver profiles" Resetting a driver profile 3. Select driver profile. The settings of the active driver profile are reset 4. "OK" to their factory settings. ▷ All settings stored in the called-up driver pro‐ Via iDrive: file are automatically applied. 1. "My Vehicle" ▷ The called-up driver profile is assigned to the 2. "Driver profiles" remote control being used at the time. 3. Select driver profile. ▷ If the driver profile is already assigned to a dif‐ ferent remote control, this driver profile will The driver profile marked with this symbol apply to both remote controls. can be reset. 4. "Reset driver profile" 5. "OK"
91 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 92
CONTROLS Opening and closing
Exporting driver profiles ▷ Online. Most settings of the active driver profile can be 6. Select the driver profile to be imported. exported. Exporting is helpful when storing and retrieving System limits personal settings, for instance before delivering A clear assignment between the remote control the vehicle to a workshop. The stored driver pro‐ and driver may not be possible in the following files can be taken into another vehicle. cases, for example. Via iDrive: ▷ The passenger unlocks the vehicle with his or her own remote control, but another person 1. "My Vehicle" is driving. 2. "Driver profiles" ▷ The driver unlocks the vehicle via Comfort 3. Select driver profile. Access and has multiple remote controls with The driver profile marked with this symbol him or her. can be exported. ▷ The driver changes, but the vehicle is not 4. "Export driver profile" locked and unlocked. 5. Select a storage device for exporting the ▷ Multiple remote controls are located outside driver profile. of the vehicle. ▷ "USB device" Select USB storage device, as needed, Settings refer to page 64. ▷ Online General information Via the BMW ConnectedDrive customer portal. Depending on the package and country version, various settings are available for the remote con‐ Importing driver profiles trol functions. These settings are stored for the driver profile The existing settings of the active driver profile currently used. are overwritten with the settings of the imported driver profile. Unlocking Via iDrive: 1. "My Vehicle" Doors 2. "Driver profiles" Via iDrive: 3. Select the driver profile to be overwritten. 1. "My Vehicle" The driver profile marked with this symbol 2. "Vehicle settings" can be overwritten. 3. "Doors/Key" 4. "Import driver profile" 4. "Driver's door" or "All doors" 5. Select a storage device for importing the 5. Select desired setting: driver profile. ▷ "Driver's door only" ▷ USB storage device: "USB device" Only the driver's door and the fuel filler Select USB storage device as needed. flap are unlocked. Pressing again unlocks the entire vehicle.
92 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 93
Opening and closing CONTROLS
▷ "All doors" Confirmation signals from the The entire vehicle is unlocked. vehicle Via iDrive: Tailgate 1. "My Vehicle" Depending on the vehicle equipment and coun‐ try version, this setting may not be offered. 2. "Vehicle settings" Via iDrive: 3. "Doors/Key" 4. Deactivate or activate the desired confirma‐ 1. "My Vehicle" tion signals. 2. "Vehicle settings" ▷ "Flash for lock/unlock" 3. "Doors/Key" Unlocking is signaled by two flashes, lock‐ 4. "Tailgate" or "Tailgate and ing by one. door(s)" ▷ With alarm system: 5. Select desired setting: "Acoustic signal for lock/unlock" ▷ "Tailgate" Unlocking is signaled by two honks of the The tailgate is opened. horn, locking by one. ▷ "Tailgate and door(s)" The tailgate is opened and the doors are Automatic locking unlocked. Via iDrive:
Adjusting the last seat, mirror, and 1. "My Vehicle" steering wheel position 2. "Vehicle settings" Via iDrive: 3. "Doors/Key" 4. Select desired setting: 1. "My Vehicle" ▷ "Lock automatically" 2. "Driver profiles" The vehicle locks automatically after a 3. Select driver profile. short period of time if no door is opened The setting can be made for the driver after unlocking. profile marked with this symbol. ▷ "Lock after starting to drive" 4. "Last seat position automatic" The vehicle locks automatically after you When the vehicle is unlocked, the driver's seat drive off. and exterior mirrors resume their last set posi‐ tions. When the drive-ready state is switched on, Automatic unlocking the steering wheel is moved to its last set posi‐ tion. Via iDrive: The most recent position is independent of the 1. "My Vehicle" positions saved via the seat memory. 2. "Vehicle settings" 3. "Doors/Key" 4. "Unlock at end of trip"
93 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 94
CONTROLS Opening and closing
After drive-ready state is switched off by Diagnosis. Socket for the OBD Onboard Di‐ pressing the Start/Stop button, the locked ve‐ agnosis, refer to page 338. hicle is automatically unlocked. The alarm system signals these changes visually and acoustically: Folding mirrors automatically ▷ Acoustic alarm: Via iDrive: Depending on local regulations, the acoustic 1. "My Vehicle" alarm may be suppressed. 2. "Vehicle settings" ▷ Visual alarm: 3. "Doors/Key" By flashing the exterior lighting. 4. "Fold mirrors in when locked" Switching on/off Locking the vehicle folds in the exterior mir‐ rors automatically. Unlocking the vehicle au‐ When you unlock and lock the vehicle, either tomatically folds out the exterior mirrors. with the remote control or with Comfort Access, the alarm system is switched off and on at the Establishing idle state after same time. opening the front doors Opening the doors with the alarm Via iDrive: system switched on 1. "My Vehicle" The alarm system is triggered when a door is 2. "Vehicle settings" opened if the door was unlocked using the 3. "Doors/Key" integrated key in the door lock. 4. "Turn off after door opening" Switching off the alarm, refer to page 95. Opening the front doors establishes the idle Opening the tailgate with the state, refer to page 39. alarm system switched on The tailgate can be opened even when the alarm Alarm system system is switched on. After the tailgate is closed, it is locked and moni‐ General information tored again provided the doors are locked. The hazard warning system flashes once. When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle alarm system reacts to the following changes: Panic mode ▷ Opening a door, the hood or the trunk lid. You can trigger the alarm system if you find your‐ ▷ Movements in the car's interior. self in a dangerous situation. ▷ Changes in the vehicle tilt, e. g., during at‐ tempts at stealing a wheel or when towing ▷ Press button on the remote control the vehicle. and hold for at least 3 seconds. ▷ Disconnected battery voltage. ▷ Briefly press the button on the remote control three times in succession. ▷ Improper use of the socket for OBD Onboard Diagnosis. To switch off the alarm: press any button. ▷ Locking the vehicle while a device is con‐ nected to the socket for the OBD Onboard-
94 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 95
Opening and closing CONTROLS
Indicator light on the interior Avoiding unintentional alarms mirror General information The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor can trigger an alarm, although no unauthorized action occurred. Possible situations for an unwanted alarm: ▷ In automatic vehicle washes. ▷ In duplex garages. ▷ During transport on trains carrying vehicles, at sea or on a trailer. ▷ The indicator light flashes briefly every 2 sec‐ onds: ▷ With animals in the vehicle. The alarm system is switched on. ▷ When the vehicle is locked after start of fuel‐ ing. ▷ Indicator light flashes for approx. 10 seconds, then it flashes briefly every 2 seconds: The tilt alarm sensor and the interior motion sen‐ sor can be switched off in such situations. Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor are not active, as doors, hood, or tailgate are Switching off the tilt alarm sensor not correctly closed. Correctly closed access points are secured. and interior motion sensor When the still open access points are closed, Press the remote control button again interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor within 10 seconds as soon as the vehicle is will be switched on. locked. ▷ The indicator light goes out after unlocking: The indicator light lights up for approx. 2 sec‐ onds and then continues to flash. The vehicle has not been tampered with. The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor ▷ The indicator light flashes after unlocking un‐ are switched off until the vehicle is locked again. til drive-ready state is switched on, but no longer than approx. 5 minutes: An alarm has been triggered. Switching off the alarm ▷ Unlock the vehicle using the remote control, Tilt alarm sensor if needed, through emergency detection of the remote control, refer to page 77. The tilt of the vehicle is monitored. ▷ With Comfort Access: if you are carrying the The alarm system responds in situations such as remote control on your person, grasp the attempts to steal a wheel or when the vehicle is driver side or front passenger side door han‐ towed. dle completely. Interior motion sensor The windows and the glass sunroof must be closed for the system to function properly.
95 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 96
CONTROLS Opening and closing
Power windows The window opens automatically. Pressing the switch again stops the motion. Convenient opening via the remote control, refer Safety information to page 75.
WARNING Closing When operating the windows, body parts and ▷ Pull the switch to the resistance point. objects can be jammed. There is a risk of injury The window closes while the switch is or risk of damage to property. Make sure that being held. the area of movement of the windows is clear ▷ Pull the switch beyond the resistance during opening and closing. point. The window closes automatically if the door Overview is closed. Pulling again stops the motion. Convenient closing via the remote control, refer to page 76. Closing via Comfort Access, refer to page 84.
Jam protection system
General information If closing force exceeds a specific threshold as a window closes, closing is interrupted. Power windows The window opens slightly.
Safety switch Safety information
WARNING Functional requirements Accessories on the windows such as antennas The windows can be operated under the follow‐ can impact jam protection. There is a risk of in‐ ing conditions. jury. Do not install accessories in the area of ▷ Standby state is established. movement of the windows. ▷ Drive-ready state is established. ▷ The remote control is in the car's interior. Closing without the jam protection system Opening In case of danger from the outside or if ice might ▷ Press the switch to the resistance prevent normal closing, proceed as follows: point.
The window opens while the switch is being 1. Pull the switch past the resistance point held. and hold it there. ▷ Press the switch beyond the resistance point.
96 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 97
Opening and closing CONTROLS
The window closes with limited jam protec‐ Operation tion. If the closing force exceeds a specific threshold, closing is interrupted. Press the button to open the closed roller sunblind or to close the open roller sunblind. 2. Pull the switch past the resistance point again within approx. 4 seconds and hold it If the button is pressed again during the move‐ there. ment, the roller sunblind is moved in the oppo‐ site direction. The window closes without jam protection.
Safety switch System limits If you are no longer able to move the roller sun‐ Concept blind after having activated it consecutively a The safety switch in the driver's door can be number of times, the overheating protection used to prevent children, for instance from open‐ mechanism is active. The system is blocked for a ing and closing the rear windows using the limited time to prevent overheating. Let the sys‐ switches in the rear. tem cool. The roller sunblind cannot be moved at low inte‐ Switching on/off rior temperatures. Press button. The LED lights up if the safety function Roller sunblinds, rear side is switched on. windows
Rear window roller WARNING sunblind With closed roller sunblinds and open windows, the roller sunblinds may be strained while driv‐ Overview ing due to the wind. The roller sunblinds may be damaged and vehicle occupants may be harmed. There is a risk of injury. Do not open the windows while driving if the roller sunblinds are closed.
Pull out the roller sunblind at the strap and hook it onto the bracket.
Glass sunroof Button for the roller sunblind. General information The glass sunroof and the sun protection are op‐ erated using the same switch.
97 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 98
CONTROLS Opening and closing
The glass sunroof can be operated when the position. The sun protection standby state is switched on. does not move. ▷ The tilted glass sunroof closes. Safety information Opening/closing the glass WARNING sunroof and sun protection Body parts can be jammed when operating the separately glass sunroof. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the glass ▷ Press the switch in the desired sunroof is clear during opening and closing. direction to the resistance point and hold it there. Holding down the switch Overview opens the sun protection. If the sun protection is already fully open, the glass sunroof opens. The glass sunroof closes while the switch is being held. If the glass sunroof is already closed or in the tilted position, the sun protection closes. ▷ Press the switch in the desired direction past the resistance point. Opening/closing the glass sun‐ roof. The sun protection opens automatically. If the sun protection is already fully open, the glass sunroof opens automatically. The glass sunroof closes automatically. If the glass sunroof is already closed or in the tilted Functional requirements position, the sun protection closes automati‐ The glass sunroof can be operated under the fol‐ cally. lowing conditions. Pressing the switch upward stops the motion. ▷ Standby state is established. ▷ Drive-ready state is established. Opening/closing the glass ▷ The remote control is in the car's interior. sunroof and sun protection together Lifting/closing glass sunroof Briefly press the switch twice in Push switch briefly upward. succession in the desired direc‐ ▷ The closed glass sunroof tilts tion past the resistance point. and the sun protection opens The glass sunroof and sun pro‐ slightly. tection move together. Pressing ▷ The opened glass sunroof the switch upward stops the motion. closes until it is in the tilted
98 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 99
Opening and closing CONTROLS
Convenient opening via the remote control, refer Closing from the raised position to page 75. without jam protection Closing via Comfort Access, refer to page 84. If there is an external danger, proceed as follows:
Comfort position In some models, the wind noises in the car's in‐ terior are lowest when the glass sunroof is not fully open. In these models, the automatic func‐ tion initially only opens the glass sunroof up to 1. Close all doors. this comfort position. 2. Push the switch forward past the resistance Pressing the switch again opens the glass sun‐ point and hold. roof fully. Initializing after a power Jam protection system interruption
General information General information If the closing force exceeds a certain value when After a power failure during the opening or clos‐ closing the glass sunroof, the closing operation is ing process, the glass sunroof can only be oper‐ interrupted once the roof reaches the half-open ated to a limited extent. position, or it is stopped when closing from the tilted position. The system can be initialized under the following conditions. The glass sunroof opens slightly. ▷ The vehicle is parked in a horizontal position. Closing from the open position ▷ The drive-ready state is established. without jam protection ▷ The external temperature is above If there is an external danger, proceed as follows: 41 ℉/5 ℃. During initialization, the glass sunroof closes without jam protection. Make sure that the closing area is clear.
Initializing the system 1. Close all doors. Press the switch up and hold it 2. Push the switch forward past the resistance until initialization is complete. point and hold. The glass sunroof closes with limited jam protection. If the closing force exceeds a spe‐ cific threshold, closing is interrupted. Initialization begins within 15 seconds. 3. Push the switch forward again past the resist‐ ▷ If the glass sunroof is closed, it opens then ance point and hold until the glass sunroof closes again. closes without jam protection. Make sure that ▷ If the glass sunroof is open, it first closes, the closing area is clear. then opens and closes again.
99 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 100
CONTROLS Opening and closing
Initialization is complete once the glass sunroof and sun protection have opened then closed again.
100 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 101
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel CONTROLS
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
Vehicle features and WARNING options With a backrest inclined too far to the rear, the efficacy of the safety belt can no longer be en‐ This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ sured. There is a risk of sliding under the safety cific and optional features offered with the series. belt in an accident. There is a risk of injuries or It also describes features that are not necessarily danger to life. Adjust the seat prior to starting available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected the trip. Adjust the backrest so that it is in the options or country versions. This also applies to most upright position as possible and do not safety-related functions and systems. When us‐ adjust again while driving. ing these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.
WARNING Sitting safely There is a risk of jamming when moving the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage An ideal seating position that meets the needs of to property. Make sure that the area of move‐ the occupants can make a vital contribution to ment of the seat is clear prior to any adjust‐ relaxed, fatigue-free driving. ment. In the event of an accident, the correct seating position plays an important role. Follow the infor‐ mation in the following chapters: Electrically adjustable seats ▷ Seats, refer to page 101. General information ▷ Safety belts, refer to page 104. The seat adjustment for the driver's seat is ▷ Head restraints, refer to page 105. stored for the driver profile currently used. When ▷ Airbags, refer to page 163. the vehicle is unlocked via the remote control, the position is automatically retrieved if the func‐ tion, refer to page 93, is activated for this pur‐ Seats pose. The current seat position can be stored using Safety information the memory function, refer to page 111.
WARNING Seat adjustments while driving can lead to un‐ expected movements of the seat. Vehicle con‐ trol could be lost. There is a risk of an accident. Only adjust the seat on the driver's side when the vehicle is stationary.
101 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 102
CONTROLS Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
Overview Seat tilt
1 Thigh support Move switch up or down. 2 Forward/backward, height, seat tilt 3 Upper backrest Backrest tilt 4 Backrest width 5 Lumbar support 6 Backrest tilt, head restraint
Forward/backward
Move switch forward or backward.
Thigh support
Multifunctional seat
Push switch forward or backward.
Height
Push switch forward or backward.
Push switch up or down.
102 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 103
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel CONTROLS
Sport seat To make it easier to enter and exit the vehicle, the backrest width temporarily opens fully.
Settings ▷ Press the front section of the button: The backrest width de‐ creases. ▷ Press the rear section of the button: Pull the lever at the front of the seat and push The backrest width increases. the thigh support forward or back.
Upper backrest Lumbar support Concept Concept The upper backrest supports the back in the The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad‐ shoulder area. A correct setting leads to a re‐ justed in a way that it supports the lumbar region laxed seating position and reduces strain on the of the spine. The lower back and the spine are shoulder muscles. supported for upright posture. Settings Settings ▷ Press the front/rear section of the button: The curvature is increased/ decreased. ▷ Press the upper/lower section of the button: The curvature is shifted up/ down. ▷ Press the front section of the button: Backrest width The upper backrest is inclined forward. ▷ Press the rear section of the button: Concept The upper backrest is inclined backward. Adjusting the backrest width may improve lateral support when taking corners.
General information You can change the backrest width by adjusting the side wings of the backrest.
103 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 104
CONTROLS Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
Safety belts stance in the event of an accident or during braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that all Number of safety belts and occupants are wearing safety belts correctly. safety belt buckles The vehicle is fitted with five safety belts to en‐ sure occupant safety. However, they can only of‐ WARNING fer protection when adjusted correctly. The efficacy of safety gear, including safety The two outer safety belt buckles of the rear belts, may not be fully functional or fail in the seats are intended for the persons sitting on the following situations: left and right. ▷ The safety belts or safety belt buckles are The center safety belt buckle of the rear seats is damaged, soiled, or changed in any other intended for the person sitting in the middle. way. ▷ Belt tensioners or belt retractors were General information modified. Always make sure that safety belts are being Safety belts can be imperceptibly damaged in worn by the occupants before driving off. The the event of an accident. There is a risk of inju‐ airbags supplement the safety belts as an addi‐ ries or danger to life. Do not modify safety belts, tional safety device. The airbags are not a substi‐ safety belt buckles, belt tensioners, belt retrac‐ tute for safety belts. tors or belt anchors and keep them clean. Have The upper shoulder strap's anchorage point will the safety belts checked after an accident at be correct for adult seat occupants of every build the dealer’s service center or another qualified if the seat is correctly adjusted. service center or repair shop.
Safety information Correct use of safety belts ▷ Wear the safety belt twist-free and tight to WARNING your body over your lap and shoulders. Use of a safety belt to buckle more than one ▷ Wear the safety belt deep on your hips over person will potentially defeat the ability of the your lap. The safety belt may not press on safety belt to serve its protective function. your stomach. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Do ▷ Do not rub the safety belt against sharp not allow more than one person to wear a sin‐ edges, or guide it or jam it in across hard or gle safety belt. Infants and children are not al‐ fragile objects. lowed on an occupant's lap, but must be trans‐ ported and secured in designated child ▷ Avoid thick clothing. restraint systems. ▷ Re-tighten the safety belt frequently upward around your upper body.
WARNING Buckling the safety belt The efficacy of safety gear, including safety 1. Slowly guide the safety belt out of the holder belts, can be limited or lost when safety belts when fastening it. are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly fastened safety belt can cause additional injuries, for in‐
104 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 105
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel CONTROLS
2. Insert the tongue plate into the safety belt Display in the instrument cluster buckle. The safety belt buckle must engage The indicator light in the instrument cluster illu‐ audibly. minates after the engine is started. Symbol Description
Green: the safety belt is buckled on the corresponding rear seat.
Red: the safety belt is not buckled on the corresponding rear seat.
Safety mode When the safety belt is fastened, the driver's and passenger's belt straps are automatically tight‐ In critical situations, for instance during an emer‐ ened once after driving away. gency stop, the front safety belts tighten auto‐ matically. Unbuckling the safety belt If the situation passes without an accident occur‐ 1. Hold the safety belt firmly. ring, the belt tension relaxes. 2. Press the red button in the safety belt buckle. If the belt tension does not loosen automatically, stop the vehicle and unbuckle the safety belt us‐ 3. Guide the safety belt back into its roll-up ing the red button in the safety belt buckle. Fas‐ mechanism. ten the safety belt before continuing on your trip. Safety belt reminder for driver's seat and front passenger seat Front head restraints
Display in the instrument cluster General information The indicator light lights up and a signal The current head restraint position can be stored sounds. Make sure that the safety belts using the memory function, refer to page 111. are positioned correctly. The safety belt reminder can also be activated if objects are Safety information placed on the front passenger seat.
WARNING Safety belt reminder for rear A missing protective effect due to removed or seats not correctly adjusted head restraints can cause injuries in the head and neck area. There General information is a risk of injury. The safety belt reminder is automatically acti‐ ▷ Before driving, install the removed head vated each time the engine starts. restraints on the occupied seats. The safety belt reminder is also activated when a ▷ Adjust the head restraint so its center sup‐ passenger unbuckles a rear seat safety belt dur‐ ports the back of the head at as close to ing the trip. eye level as possible.
105 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 106
CONTROLS Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
▷ Adjust the distance so that the head re‐ Adjusting the height: power head straint is as close as possible to the back restraints of the head. Adjust the distance via the backrest tilt as needed.
WARNING Body parts can be jammed when moving the head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement is clear when moving the head restraint.
Push switch up or down. WARNING Objects on the head restraint reduce the pro‐ Adjusting the distance: manual tective effect in the head and neck area. There head restraints is a risk of injury. ▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers. ▷ Do not hang objects, for instance clothes hangers, directly on the head restraint. ▷ Only use accessories that have been de‐ termined to be safe for attachment to a head restraint. ▷ Do not use any accessories, for instance pillows, while driving. ▷ Back: press the button and push the head re‐ straint toward the rear. Active head restraint ▷ Forward: pull the head restraint toward the In the event of a rear-end collision with a certain front. severity, the active head restraint automatically After setting the distance, move the head re‐ reduces the distance from the head. straint forward or backward slightly, making sure Have the active head restraint checked and if it engages properly. necessary replaced in the case of damage or if it was exposed to an accident. Adjusting the distance: power head restraints The head restraint is automatically repositioned when the upper backrest is adjusted.
106 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 107
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel CONTROLS
Adjusting the side extensions WARNING Body parts can be jammed when moving the head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement is clear when moving the head restraint.
WARNING Objects on the head restraint reduce the pro‐ Fold the side extensions on the head restraint tective effect in the head and neck area. There forward for increased lateral support in the rest‐ is a risk of injury. ing position. ▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers. ▷ Do not hang objects, for instance clothes Removing hangers, directly on the head restraint. The head restraints cannot be removed. ▷ Only use accessories that have been de‐ termined to be safe for attachment to a head restraint. Rear head restraints ▷ Do not use any accessories, for instance pillows, while driving. Safety information Folding down the middle head WARNING restraint A missing protective effect due to removed or To improve the view to the rear, the center head not correctly adjusted head restraints can restraint can be folded to the rear. Only push the cause injuries in the head and neck area. There head restraint down if no one will be sitting in the is a risk of injury. center seat. ▷ Before driving, install the removed head restraints on the occupied seats. ▷ Adjust the head restraint so its center sup‐ ports the back of the head at as close to eye level as possible. ▷ Adjust the distance so that the head re‐ straint is as close as possible to the back of the head. Adjust the distance via the backrest tilt as needed. ▷ To the rear: press the button, arrow 1, and fold the head restraint backward. ▷ Forward: fold the head restraint toward the front as far as it will go. Make sure that the head restraint engages correctly.
107 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 108
CONTROLS Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
Adjusting the height Installing Proceed in the reverse order to install the head restraint.
Mirrors
Exterior mirrors
General information The height of the outer head restraints can be The mirror on the front passenger side is more adjusted. curved than the driver's side mirror. ▷ To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and push The mirror setting is stored for the driver profile the head restraint down. currently in use. When the vehicle is unlocked via ▷ To raise: push the head restraint up. the remote control, the position is automatically After setting the height, move the head restraint retrieved if the function, refer to page 93, is acti‐ up or down slightly, making sure it engages vated for this purpose. properly. The current exterior mirror position can be stored using the memory function, refer to page 111.
Removing Safety information With through-loading system: The outer head restraints can be removed. Only WARNING remove the head restraint if no one will be sitting in the seat in question. Objects reflected in the mirror are closer than they appear. The distance to the traffic behind could be incorrectly estimated, for instance while changing lanes. There is a risk of an acci‐ dent. Estimate the distance to the traffic behind by looking over your shoulder.
1. Fold down the rear seat backrest, refer to page 267, in question. 2. Raise the head restraint up against the resist‐ ance. 3. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the head restraint out completely.
108 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 109
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel CONTROLS
Overview Folding the mirrors in and out is helpful in the fol‐ lowing situations: ▷ In vehicle washes. ▷ On narrow roads. Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto‐ matically at a speed of approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.
Automatic heating Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated whenever drive-ready state is switched on. 1 Settings 2 Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Monitor Automatic dimming feature 3 Folding in and out The exterior mirror on the driver's side is auto‐ matically dimmed. Photocells in the car's interior Adjusting electrically mirror, refer to page 109, are used to control this. Press button. The selected mirror moves along with the Automatic Curb Monitor, exterior button movement. mirror
Selecting a mirror Concept If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass on To change over to the other mirror: the front passenger side is tilted downward. This Slide the switch. improves your view of the curb and other low-ly‐ ing obstacles when parking, for instance. Malfunction Activating In case of an electrical malfunction, adjust the mirror by pressing the edges of the mirror glass. 1. Slide the switch to the driver's side mirror position. Folding in and out 2. Engage selector lever position R.
NOTICE Deactivating Depending on the vehicle width, the vehicle Slide the switch to the passenger's side can be damaged in vehicle washes. There is a mirror position. risk of damage to property. Before washing, fold in the mirrors by hand or with the button. Interior mirror Press button. General information Folding is only possible up to a speed of approx. The interior mirror is dimmed automatically. 15 mph/20 km/h. Photocells are used for control:
109 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 110
CONTROLS Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
▷ In the mirror glass. The current steering wheel position can be ▷ On the back of the mirror. stored using the memory function, refer to page 111. Overview Settings
Functional requirements Move the steering wheel to the preferred height ▷ Keep the photocells clean. and angle to suit your seating position by press‐ ing the switch. ▷ Do not cover the area between the interior mirror and the windshield. Assistance getting in and out The steering wheel temporarily moves into the Steering wheel highest position to make it easier to enter and exit the vehicle. Safety information Heated steering wheel
WARNING Overview Steering wheel adjustments while driving can lead to unexpected steering wheel movements. Vehicle control could be lost. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the steering wheel while the vehicle is stationary only.
Electric steering wheel adjustment
General information Heated steering wheel The steering wheel setting is stored for the driver profile currently in use. When the drive-ready state is switched on, the position is automatically Switching on/off retrieved if the function, refer to page 93, is acti‐ Press button. vated for this purpose. A Check Control message is displayed.
110 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 111
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel CONTROLS
If the trip is resumed within approx. 15 minutes Overview after an intermediate stop, the heated steering wheel activates automatically if the function was switched on at the end of the last trip.
Memory function
Concept The following settings can be stored and, if nec‐ essary, retrieved using the memory function: The memory buttons are located on the front ▷ Seat position. doors. ▷ Exterior mirror position. ▷ Steering wheel position. Storing ▷ Height of the Head-up Display. 1. Set the desired position.
General information 2. Press button. The writing on the but‐ Two memory locations with different settings ton lights up. can be set for each driver profile, refer to 3. Press desired button 1 or 2 while the LED is page 90. lit. A signal sounds. The following settings are not stored: ▷ Backrest width. Calling up settings ▷ Lumbar support. The stored position is called up automatically. Press selected button 1 or 2. Safety information The procedure stops when a switch for setting the seat is pressed or one of the memory but‐ tons is pressed again. WARNING While driving, the seat position adjustment on Using the memory function while driving can the driver's side is interrupted after a short time. lead to unexpected seat or steering wheel movements. Vehicle control could be lost. There is a risk of an accident. Only retrieve the Massage function memory function when the vehicle is stationary. Concept WARNING Depending on the program, the massage func‐ tion ensures relaxed muscles and better blood There is a risk of jamming when moving the circulation and can avoid fatigue. seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of move‐ ment of the seat is clear prior to any adjust‐ General information ment. Eight different massage programs can be se‐ lected:
111 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 112
CONTROLS Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
▷ Pelvis activation. 5. "Seat massage" ▷ Upper body activation. 6. Select the desired setting. ▷ Full body activation. ▷ Back massage. Seat heating ▷ Shoulder massage. ▷ Lumbar massage. Overview ▷ Upper body training. ▷ Full body training. Front
Overview
Seat heating
Massage function Rear
Switching on Press button once for each intensity level. The maximum intensity level is reached when three LEDs are lit.
Switching off Press and hold the button, until the Seat heating LEDs go out. Switching on Adjusting the massage program Press button once for each temperature Via iDrive: level. 1. "My Vehicle" Highest level if three bars are shown on the cli‐ 2. "Vehicle settings" mate control display. 3. "Seat comfort" If the trip is continued within approx. 15 minutes 4. Select desired seat. after a stop, seat heating is activated automati‐ cally with the temperature selected last.
112 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 113
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel CONTROLS
When ECO PRO is activated, refer to page 280, Overview the heater output is reduced.
Switching off Press button and hold until bar display on the climate control display goes out.
Seat heating distribution The heating action in the seat cushion and the seat backrest can be distributed in different Active seat ventilation ways. Via iDrive: Switching on 1. "My Vehicle" 2. "Vehicle settings" Press button once for each ventilation level. 3. "Climate functions" Highest level if three bars are shown on the cli‐ 4. Select a menu item: mate control display. ▷ "Seat heating" The ventilation switches back by one level after a ▷ "Seat and steering wheel heating" short time. ▷ "Seat climate control" ▷ "Seat climate / steer. wheel heating" Switching off 5. Select the desired seat, if needed. Press button and hold until bar display 6. Press the Controller and turn it to set the seat on the climate control display goes out. heating distribution.
Active seat ventilation Individual activation
Concept Concept A number of heating and cooling functions can The seat cushion and backrest surfaces are be automatically activated depending on the ex‐ cooled by means of integrated fans. ternal temperature. The ventilation cools the seat, for instance if the car's interior is overheated or for continuous General information cooling at high temperatures. The external temperature at which the functions are to be automatically activated can be set via iDrive. Activation is performed if the external tempera‐ ture exceeds or falls below the set temperature in the first 2 minutes after drive-ready state has
113 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 114
CONTROLS Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
been switched on. A new alignment is carried out after the settings have been changed. Depending on the equipment package, the fol‐ lowing functions can be automatically activated: ▷ Seat heating. ▷ Heated steering wheel. ▷ Seat ventilation. If the trip is continued within approx. 15 minutes after a stop, the functions are activated automati‐ cally with the levels that were last selected.
Functional requirement The safety belt of the corresponding seat is buckled.
Activating/deactivating Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle" 2. "Vehicle settings" 3. "Climate functions" 4. Select a menu item: ▷ "Steering wheel heating" ▷ "Seat heating" ▷ "Seat and steering wheel heating" ▷ "Seat climate control" ▷ "Seat climate / steer. wheel heating" 5. Select desired seat. 6. Select the menu item of the desired function. 7. Set the external temperature at which the function is to be activated. 8. Set the desired level.
114 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 115
Transporting children safely CONTROLS
Transporting children safely
Vehicle features and Transport children younger than 13 years of age or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm only in the rear seat options in suitable child restraint systems designed for the age, weight and size of the child. Children This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ 13 years of age or older must wear a safety belt cific and optional features offered with the series. as soon as a suitable child restraint system can It also describes features that are not necessarily no longer be used due to their age, weight and available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected size. options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When us‐ Safety information ing these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed. WARNING The safety belt cannot be fastened correctly on The right place for children children shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm without suita‐ ble additional child restraint systems. The effi‐ Safety information cacy of safety gear, including safety belts, can be limited or lost when safety belts are fas‐ tened incorrectly. An incorrectly fastened safety WARNING belt can cause additional injuries, for instance in Unattended children or animals can cause the the event of an accident or during braking and vehicle to move and endanger themselves and evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injuries or traffic, for instance due to the following actions: danger to life. Secure children shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm using suitable child restraint systems. ▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button. ▷ Releasing the parking brake. ▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐ Children on the front passenger dows. seat ▷ Engaging selector lever position N. ▷ Using vehicle equipment. General information Before using a child restraint system on the front There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not passenger seat, ensure that the front, knee, and leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐ side airbags on the front passenger side are de‐ hicle. Take the remote control with you when activated. Automatic deactivation of front-seat exiting and lock the vehicle. passenger airbags, refer to page 165.
Always transport children in the rear seat
General information Accident research shows that the safest place for children is in the rear seat. 115 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 116
CONTROLS Transporting children safely
Safety information sure that the child restraint system fits securely against the backrest. If possible, adjust the backrest tilt for all affected backrests and cor‐ WARNING rectly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats Active front-seat passenger airbags can injure a and backrests are securely engaged or locked. child in a child restraint system when the air‐ If possible, adjust the height of the head re‐ bags are activated. There is a risk of injury. straints or remove them. Make sure that the front-seat passenger air‐ bags are deactivated and that the PASSEN‐ GER AIRBAG OFF indicator light lights up. On the front passenger seat
Deactivating airbags Installing child restraint systems WARNING Active front-seat passenger airbags can injure a child in a child restraint system when the air‐ General information bags are activated. There is a risk of injury. Pay attention to the specifications and the oper‐ Make sure that the front-seat passenger air‐ ating and safety information of the child restraint bags are deactivated and that the PASSEN‐ system manufacturer when selecting, installing, GER AIRBAG OFF indicator light lights up. and using child restraint systems. After installing a child restraint system in the Safety information front passenger seat, make sure that the front, knee and side airbags on the front passenger side are deactivated. WARNING Deactivate the front-seat passenger airbags au‐ The protective effect of damaged child restraint tomatically, refer to page 165. systems or of child restraint systems exposed to an accident and their fastening systems can Seat position and height be limited or lost. A child can e.g.,not suffi‐ ciently restrained, for instance in the event of Before installing a child restraint system, move an accident or braking and evasive maneuvers. the front passenger seat as far back as it will go There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Have and, if possible, bring it up to medium height. damaged child restraint systems or of child re‐ This seat position and height ensures the best straint systems exposed to an accident and possible position for the belt and offers optimal their fastening systems checked and possibly protection in the event of an accident. replaced by the dealer’s service center or an‐ If the upper anchor of the safety belt is located in other qualified service center or repair shop. front of the belt guide of the child seat, move the front passenger seat carefully forward until the best possible belt guide position is reached. WARNING Backrest width The stability of the child restraint system is lim‐ ited or compromised with incorrect seat adjust‐ Adjustable backrest width: before installing a ment or improper installation of the child seat. child restraint system in the front passenger seat, There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make open the backrest width completely. Do not
116 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 117
Transporting children safely CONTROLS
change the backrest width again and do not call Mounts for the lower LATCH up a memory position. anchors
Child seat security General information The lower anchors may be used to attach the CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child and CRS weight of 65 lb/30 kg when the child is restrained by the internal harnesses.
Safety information
WARNING
The safety belts in the rear and the front passen‐ If the LATCH child restraint fixing systems are ger safety belt can be permanently locked to fas‐ not correctly engaged, the protective effect of ten child restraint systems. the LATCH child restraint fixing system can be limited. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that the lower anchors are se‐ Locking the safety belt curely engaged and that the LATCH child re‐ 1. Pull out the belt strap completely. straint fixing system fits securely against the backrest. 2. Secure the child restraint system with the safety belt. 3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in and pull it Position tight against the child restraint system. The safety belt is locked. Symbol Meaning
Unlocking the safety belt The corresponding symbol shows the mounts for the lower 1. Unbuckle the safety belt buckle. LATCH anchors. 2. Remove the child restraint system. Seats equipped with lower an‐ 3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in com‐ chors are marked with a pair, 2, pletely. of LATCH symbols. For vehicles equipped with a LATCH child restraint fixing middle seat: It is not recommended to use system the inner lower anchors of standard outer LATCH positions General information to fasten a child restraint system on the middle seat. Use the ve‐ LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Children. hicle safety belt instead for the Pay attention to the specifications and the oper‐ middle seat. ating and safety information of the LATCH child restraint fixing system manufacturer when se‐ lecting, installing, and using child restraint sys‐ tems.
117 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 118
CONTROLS Transporting children safely
Before installing LATCH child child restraint systems to the upper retaining restraint fixing systems straps. Pull the safety belt away from the area of the child restraint system. Anchors Assembly of LATCH child The respective symbol shows the anchor for the upper retaining strap. Seats with restraint fixing systems an upper top tether are marked with this 1. Install child restraint system, see manufactur‐ symbol. It can be found on the rear seat backrest er's information. or the rear window shelf. 2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐ erly connected. Routing the retaining strap Child restraint systems with tether strap
Safety information
WARNING If the upper retaining strap is incorrectly used for the child restraint system, the protective ef‐ fect can be reduced. There is a risk of injury. 1 Direction of travel Make sure that the upper retaining strap is not 2 Head restraint guided across sharp edges and without twist‐ 3 Hook for upper retaining strap ing to the upper retaining strap. 4 Anchor 5 Rear window shelf WARNING 6 Seat backrest If the rear backrest is not locked, the protective 7 Upper retaining strap effect of the child restraint system is limited or there is none. In particular situations, for in‐ Attaching the upper retaining strap stance braking maneuvers or in case of an acci‐ to the anchor dent, the rear backrest can fold forward. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure 1. Open the anchor cover. that the rear backrests are locked. 2. Raise the head restraint. 3. Guide the upper retaining strap between the supports or along both sides of the head re‐ NOTICE straint to the anchor. The anchors for the upper retaining straps of For the middle seat, guide it over or along child restraint systems are only provided for both sides of the head restraint to the anchor these retaining straps. When other objects are where applicable. mounted, the anchors can be damaged. There 4. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to the is a risk of damage to property. Only mount anchor.
118 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 119
Transporting children safely CONTROLS
5. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it down. 6. Lower and lock head restraints as needed.
Locking the doors and windows in the rear
General information In certain situations it may be advisable to secure the rear doors and windows, for instance when transporting children.
Doors
Push the locking lever on the rear doors up.
The door can now be opened from the outside only.
Safety switch for the rear Press button on the driver's door.
This locks various functions so that they cannot be operated from the rear. Safety switch, refer to page 97.
119 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 120
CONTROLS Driving
Driving
Vehicle features and life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and ensure suf‐ ficient ventilation. options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ WARNING cific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected possibly roll away. There is a risk of an accident. options or country versions. This also applies to Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐ safety-related functions and systems. When us‐ ing. ing these functions and systems, the applicable In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured laws and regulations must be observed. against rolling away, follow the following: ▷ Set the parking brake. Start/Stop button ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, turn the front wheels in the direction of the curb. Concept ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, Pressing the Start/Stop button also secure the vehicle, for instance with a switches drive-ready state on or wheel chock. off, refer to page 39. Steptronic transmission: the drive-ready state is switched on NOTICE when you depress the brake pedal while press‐ In the case of repeated starting attempts or re‐ ing the Start/Stop button. peated starting in quick succession, the fuel is Pressing the Start/Stop button again switches not burned or is inadequately burned. The cata‐ drive-ready state back off and standby state, re‐ lytic converter can overheat. There is a risk of fer to page 39, is switched back on. damage to property. Avoid repeated starting in quick succession.
Drive-ready state Switching on drive-ready state
Safety information Steptronic transmission 1. Depress the brake pedal. DANGER 2. Press the Start/Stop button. If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventilation is in‐ The ignition is activated automatically for a brief sufficient, harmful exhaust gases can enter into time and is stopped as soon as the engine starts. the vehicle. The exhaust gases contain pollu‐ Most of the indicator/warning lights in the instru‐ tants which are colorless and odorless. In en‐ ment cluster light up for a varied length of time. closed areas, exhaust gases can also accumu‐ late outside of the vehicle. There is danger to
120 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 121
Driving CONTROLS
Diesel engine Depending on the selected driving mode, refer to If the engine is cold and temperatures are below page 136, the system is automatically activated approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃, the start process may be de‐ or deactivated. layed somewhat due to automatic preheating. Engine stop A Check Control message with yellow in‐ dicator light is displayed. Functional requirements
Gasoline engine Steptronic transmission Depending on the motorization, the full drive The engine is switched off automatically during a power may not be available for approximately stop under the following conditions: 30 seconds after starting the engine. In this case, ▷ The selector lever is in selector lever position the vehicle will not accelerate as usual. D. ▷ The brake pedal remains pressed while the Display in the instrument cluster vehicle is stationary or the vehicle is held by When drive-ready state is switched on, the tach‐ Automatic Hold. ometer shows the current engine speed. ▷ The driver's safety belt is buckled or the driv‐ er's door is closed. Switching off drive-ready state Steptronic transmission: manual Steptronic transmission engine stop 1. Engage selector lever position P with the ve‐ If the engine was not switched off automatically hicle stopped. when the vehicle stopped, the engine can be 2. Press the Start/Stop button. switched off manually: The engine is switched off. ▷ Press the brake pedal forcefully again from 3. Set the parking brake. the current pedal position. ▷ Engage selector lever position P. If all functional preconditions are fulfilled, the en‐ Auto Start/Stop function gine switches off.
Concept Air conditioner when the engine is The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel. switched off The system switches off the engine during a The air flow from the air conditioner is reduced stop, for instance in traffic congestion or at traffic when the engine is switched off. lights. Drive-ready state remains switched on. The engine starts automatically for driving off. Displays in the instrument cluster
General information General information After each engine start using the Start/Stop but‐ The display in the tachometer in‐ ton, the Auto Start/Stop function is ready. The dicates that the Auto Start/Stop function is activated from speeds of approx. function is ready for an Automatic 3 mph/5 km/h. engine start.
121 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 122
CONTROLS Driving
The display indicates that the ▷ After driving in reverse. conditions for an automatic en‐ ▷ Use of fuel with high ethanol content. gine stop have not been met. Starting the engine
Total time with switched-off engine Functional requirements
ECO PRO, refer to page 280, Steptronic transmission driving mode: depending on the The engine starts automatically under the follow‐ vehicle equipment, the total time ing preconditions: that the engine has been switched off using the Auto Start/ ▷ By releasing the brake pedal. Stop function is displayed on an automatic en‐ ▷ When Automatic Hold is activated: press the gine stop. accelerator pedal. The total time is automatically reset every time the vehicle is refueled. Driving away After the engine starts, accelerate as usual. Functional limitations Safety mode The engine is not switched off automatically in After the engine switches off automatically, it will the following situations: not start again automatically if any one of the fol‐ ▷ In case of a steep downhill grade. lowing conditions are met: ▷ Brake not engaged strongly enough. ▷ The driver's safety belt is unbuckled and the ▷ The external temperature is high and auto‐ driver's door is open. matic climate control is running. ▷ The hood was unlocked. ▷ The car's interior has not yet been heated or Some indicator lights light up for a varied length cooled to the required level. of time. ▷ Where there is a risk of window condensation The engine can only be started via the Start/Stop when the automatic climate control is button. switched on. ▷ Engine or other parts not at operating tem‐ System limits perature. Even if driving off was not intended, the deacti‐ ▷ Engine cooling is required. vated engine starts up automatically in the fol‐ ▷ The wheels are at a sharp angle or the steer‐ lowing situations: ing wheel is being turned. ▷ Excessive warming of the car's interior when ▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged. the air conditioning is switched on. ▷ At higher elevations. ▷ Excessive cooling of the car's interior when the heating is switched on. ▷ The hood is unlocked. ▷ Where there is a risk of window condensation ▷ The parking assistant is activated. when the automatic climate control is ▷ Stop-and-go traffic. switched on. ▷ Steptronic transmission: selector lever posi‐ ▷ The steering wheel is turned. tion in N or R.
122 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 123
Driving CONTROLS
▷ Steptronic transmission: Using the button Change from selector lever position D to N or R. ▷ Steptronic transmission: Change from selector lever position P to N, D, or R. ▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged. ▷ Start of an oil level measurement.
Intelligent Auto Start/Stop Press button. function Depending on the vehicle equipment and coun‐ try-specific version, the vehicle features a variety Steptronic transmission: via of sensors for assessing the traffic situation. The selector lever position Intelligent Auto Start/Stop function uses this in‐ The Auto Start/Stop function is also deactivated formation to adapt to various traffic situations in a in selector lever position M/S. proactive manner. For instance, this applies to the following situa‐ Via the Driving Dynamics Control tions: The Auto Start/Stop function is also deactivated ▷ If a situation is detected in which the stopping in SPORT driving mode of the Driving Dynamics time is expected to be very short, the engine Control. is not switched off automatically. A message appears on the Control Display, depending Display on the situation. ▷ LED comes on: auto Start/Stop function is ▷ If a situation is detected in which the vehicle deactivated. needs to drive off immediately, the engine is started automatically. ▷ LED goes out: auto Start/Stop function is ac‐ tivated. The function may be restricted if the navigation data is invalid, outdated or not available, for ex‐ Switching off the vehicle during an ample. automatic engine stop
Activating/deactivating the General information system manually During an automatic engine stop, the vehicle can be switched off permanently, for instance when Concept leaving it. The engine is not automatically switched off. The engine is started during an automatic engine Steptronic transmission stop. 1. Press the Start/Stop button. ▷ Drive-ready state is switched off. ▷ Standby state is switched on.
123 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 124
CONTROLS Driving
▷ Selector lever position P is engaged auto‐ matically. WARNING 2. Set the parking brake. Unattended children or animals can cause the vehicle to move and endanger themselves and Automatic deactivation traffic, for instance due to the following actions: ▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button. General information ▷ Releasing the parking brake. In certain situations, the Auto Start/Stop function ▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐ is deactivated automatically for safety reasons, dows. for instance if no driver is detected. ▷ Engaging selector lever position N. Malfunction ▷ Using vehicle equipment. The Auto Start/Stop function no longer switches There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not off the engine automatically. A Check Control leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐ message is displayed. It is possible to continue hicle. Take the remote control with you when driving. Have the system checked by a dealer’s exiting and lock the vehicle. service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. Overview Parking brake
Concept The parking brake is used to prevent the vehicle from rolling when it is parked.
Safety information
Parking brake WARNING An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an accident. Setting Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐ ing. With a stationary vehicle In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured Pull the switch. against rolling away, follow the following: The LED lights up. ▷ Set the parking brake. ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, The indicator light in the instrument clus‐ turn the front wheels in the direction of the ter illuminates red. The parking brake is curb. set. ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, also secure the vehicle, for instance with a While driving wheel chock. To use as emergency brake while driving:
124 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 125
Driving CONTROLS
Pull the switch and hold it. The vehicle brakes ▷ The driver's door is opened while the vehicle hard while the switch is being pulled. is stationary. The indicator light in the instrument clus‐ ▷ The moving vehicle is brought to a standstill ter illuminates red, a signal sounds, and using the parking brake. the brake lights illuminate. A Check Control message is displayed. Display The indicator light changes from green If the vehicle is slowed down to a speed of ap‐ to red. prox. 2 mph/3 km/h the parking brake is set.
Releasing Safety information
Releasing manually WARNING 1. Switch on drive-ready state. An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an accident. 2. Steptronic transmission: press the Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐ switch while the brake is pressed or selector ing. lever position P is set. In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured The LED and indicator light go out. against rolling away, follow the following: The parking brake is released. ▷ Set the parking brake. ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, Automatic release turn the front wheels in the direction of the The parking brake is released automatically curb. when you drive away. ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, The LED and indicator light go out. also secure the vehicle, for instance with a wheel chock. Automatic Hold
Concept WARNING This system assists the driver by automatically Unattended children or animals can cause the setting and releasing the brake, such as when vehicle to move and endanger themselves and moving in stop-and-go traffic. traffic, for instance due to the following actions: The vehicle is automatically held in place when it ▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button. is stationary. ▷ Releasing the parking brake. On uphill grades the system prevents the vehicle ▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐ from rolling backward when driving offf. dows. ▷ Engaging selector lever position N. General information ▷ Using vehicle equipment. Under the following conditions, the parking brake is automatically engaged: ▷ Drive-ready state is switched off.
125 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 126
CONTROLS Driving
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not After stepping on the brake pedal, for instance leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐ when stopping at a traffic light, the vehicle is au‐ hicle. Take the remote control with you when tomatically secured against rolling. exiting and lock the vehicle. The indicator light lights up green.
NOTICE Driving away If the vehicle is stationary, Automatic Hold en‐ gages the parking brake and prevents the vehi‐ Step on the accelerator pedal to drive off. cle from rolling in a vehicle wash. There is a risk The brake is released automatically and the indi‐ of damage to property. Deactivate Automatic cator light is no longer illuminated. Hold prior to entering the vehicle wash. Activating the parking brake automatically Overview The parking brake is automatically set if drive- ready state is switched off while the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold or if the vehicle is exited. The indicator light changes from green to red.
The parking brake is not set automatically, if the drive-ready state is switched off, while the vehi‐ cle is coasting to a halt. Automatic Hold is deacti‐ Automatic Hold vated.
Switching function readiness off Establishing function readiness of Press button. Automatic Hold The LED goes out. 1. Switch on drive-ready state. The indicator light goes out. 2. Press button. The LED lights up. Automatic Hold is switched off. The indicator light lights up green. If the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold, Automatic Hold is functional. press additionally on the brake pedal, when After every new vehicle start, the last se‐ switching off. lected setting is active. Malfunction Automatic Hold holding the vehicle In the event of a failure or malfunction of the Function readiness is established and the driv‐ parking brake: er's door is closed.
126 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 127
Driving CONTROLS
Secure the vehicle against rolling away, for in‐ Triple turn signal activation stance with a wheel chock, after existing the ve‐ Lightly tap the lever up or down. hicle. The triple turn signal duration can be adjusted. After a power failure Via iDrive: To reestablish parking brake functionality after a 1. "My Vehicle" power failure: 2. "Vehicle settings" 1. Switch on standby state. 3. "Lighting" 4. "Exterior lighting" 2. Pull the switch while stepping on the 5. "One-touch turn signal" brake pedal or selector lever position P is set and then push. 6. Select the desired setting. This process may take a few seconds. Any The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ sounds associated with this are normal. rently used.
The indicator light is no longer illumi‐ Signaling briefly nated as soon as the parking brake is ready for operation again. Press the lever to the resistance point and hold it there for as long as you want the turn signal to flash.
Turn signal, high beams, High beams, headlight flasher headlight flasher Push the lever forward or pull it backward.
Turn signal
Turn signal in exterior mirror When driving and during operation of the turn signals or hazard warning system, do not fold in the exterior mirrors, so that the signal lights on the exterior mirror are easy to see.
Using turn signals ▷ High beams on, arrow 1. The high beams light up when the low beams are switched on. ▷ High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2.
Press the lever past the resistance point.
127 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 128
CONTROLS Driving
Washer/wiper system ▷ Fast wiper speed, position 3. When travel is interrupted with the wiper system switched on: when travel continues, the wipers General information resume at their previous speed. Do not use the wipers if the windshield is dry, as this may damage the wiper blades or cause them Switching off and brief wipe to become worn more quickly.
Safety information
WARNING If the wipers start moving in the folded away state, body parts can be jammed or damage may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the vehicle is switched off when the Press the lever down. wipers are in the folded away state and the wip‐ ▷ Switching off: press the lever down until it ers are folded in when switching on. reaches its standard position. ▷ Brief wipe: press the lever down from the standard position. NOTICE The lever automatically returns to its initial If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, the position when released. wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper mo‐ tor can overheat when switching on. There is a Rain sensor risk of damage to property. Defrost the wind‐ shield prior to switching the wipers on. Concept The rain sensor automatically controls the time Switching on between wipes depending on the intensity of the rainfall.
General information The sensor is located on the windshield, directly in front of the interior mirror.
Safety information
NOTICE Press the lever up until the desired position is If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers can reached. accidentally start moving in vehicle washes. ▷ Resting position of the wipers, position 0. There is a risk of damage to property. Deacti‐ ▷ Rain sensor, position 1. vate the rain sensor in vehicle washes. ▷ Normal wiper speed, position 2.
128 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 129
Driving CONTROLS
Activating Windshield washer system
Safety information
WARNING The washer fluid can freeze onto the window at low temperatures and obstruct the view. There is a risk of an accident. Only use the washer systems, if the washer fluid cannot freeze. Use washer fluid with antifreeze, if needed. Press the lever up once from its standard posi‐ tion, arrow 1. Wiping is started. NOTICE The LED in the wiper lever is illuminated. When the washer fluid reservoir is empty, the If wipers are frozen to windshield, wiper opera‐ wash pump cannot work as intended. There is tion is deactivated. a risk of damage to property. Do not use the washer system when the washer fluid reservoir is empty. Deactivating Press the lever back into the standard position. Cleaning the windshield Adjusting the rain sensor sensitivity
Pull the lever. Turn the thumbwheel to adjust the sensitivity of The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐ the rain sensor. shield and activates the wipers briefly. Upward: high rain sensor sensitivity. Downward: low rains sensor sensitivity. Windshield washer nozzles The windshield washer nozzles are automatically heated while standby state is switched on.
129 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 130
CONTROLS Driving
Fold-away position of the wipers 2. Press and hold the wiper level down, until the wipers stop in a close to vertical position. Concept The fold-out position enables the wipers to be folded away from the windshield.
General information Important, for instance when changing the wiper blades or when folding out under frosty condi‐ tions.
Safety information 3. Fold the wipers all the way away from the windshield.
WARNING If the wipers start moving in the folded away state, body parts can be jammed or damage may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the vehicle is switched off when the wipers are in the folded away state and the wip‐ ers are folded in when switching on.
Folding down the wipers NOTICE After the wipers are folded back down, the wiper If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, the system must be reactivated. wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper mo‐ tor can overheat when switching on. There is a 1. Fold the wipers back down onto the wind‐ risk of damage to property. Defrost the wind‐ shield. shield prior to switching the wipers on. 2. Switch on standby state and press and hold the wiper lever down again. Folding away the wipers 3. Wipers return to their resting position and are ready again for operation. 1. Switch on standby state. Washer fluid
General information All washer nozzles are supplied from one reser‐ voir. Use a mixture of tap water and windshield washer concentrate. If desired, a windshield washer concentrate containing antifreeze can be used. 130 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 131
Driving CONTROLS
Recommended minimum fill quantity: 0.2 US gal/1 liter. NOTICE Mixing different windshield washer concen‐ Safety information trates or antifreeze can damage the washing system. There is a risk of damage to property. WARNING Do not mix different windshield washer concen‐ trates or antifreeze. Follow the information and Some antifreeze agents can contain harmful mixing ratios provided on the containers. substances and are flammable. There is a risk of fire and a risk of injury. Follow the instruc‐ tions on the containers. Keep antifreeze away Overview from ignition sources. Do not refill operating materials into different bottles. Store operating materials out of reach of children. United States: the washer fluid mixture ratio is regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual states; do not exceed the allowable washer fluid dilution ratio limits that apply. Follow the usage instructions on the washer fluid container. Use of BMW’s Windshield Washer Concentrate or the equivalent is recommended. The washer fluid reservoir is located in the en‐ gine compartment.
WARNING Washer fluid can ignite and catch fire on con‐ Malfunction tact with hot engine parts. There is a risk of in‐ The use of undiluted windshield washer concen‐ jury or risk of damage to property. Only add trate or alcohol-based antifreeze can lead to in‐ washer fluid when the engine is cooled down. correct readings at temperatures below Next, fully close the lid of the washer fluid res‐ +5 ℉/-15 ℃. ervoir. Steptronic transmission NOTICE Silicon-containing additives in the washer fluid Concept for the water-repelling effect on the windows The Steptronic transmission combines the func‐ can lead to damage to the washing system. tions of an automatic transmission with the pos‐ There is a risk of damage to property. Do not sibility of manual shifting, if needed. add silicon-containing additives to the washer fluid.
131 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 132
CONTROLS Driving
Safety information ▷ After the drive-ready state is switched off and selector lever position R, D or M/S is en‐ gaged. WARNING ▷ If the driver's safety belt is unbuckled, the An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and driver's door is opened, and the brake pedal possibly roll away. There is a risk of an accident. is not pressed while the vehicle is stationary Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐ and selector lever position D, M/S or R is en‐ ing. gaged. In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured ▷ After the standby state has been switched off against rolling away, follow the following: when selector lever position N is engaged. ▷ Set the parking brake. ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, Engaging selector lever turn the front wheels in the direction of the positions curb. ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, General information also secure the vehicle, for instance with a To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you wheel chock. select a drive mode, maintain pressure on the brake pedal until you are ready to start. Selector lever positions Functional requirements Drive mode D Only when the drive-ready state is switched on and the brake pedal is depressed is it possible to Selector lever position for normal vehicle opera‐ change from selector lever position P to another tion. All gears for forward travel are activated au‐ selector lever position. tomatically. The selection lever position P cannot be Reverse R changed until all technical requirements are met. Engage selector lever position R only when the Engaging selector lever position D, vehicle is stationary. N, R Neutral N A selector lever lock prevents the following faulty operation: The vehicle may be pushed or roll without power, for instance in vehicle washes, refer to ▷ Unintentional shifting into selector lever posi‐ page 133, in selector lever position N. tion R. ▷ Unintentional shifting from selector lever po‐ Parking position P sition P into another selector lever position. Selector lever position, for instance for parking 1. Fasten driver's safety belt. the vehicle. The transmission blocks the drive wheels in selector lever position P. Engage selector lever position P only when the vehicle is stationary. Selector lever position P is engaged automati‐ cally in situations such as the following:
132 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 133
Driving CONTROLS
2. Press and hold the button to release the se‐ Engaging selector lever position N lector lever lock. 1. Switch on drive-ready state while pressing on the brake pedal. 2. If necessary, release the parking brake. 3. If necessary, switch off Automatic Hold, refer to page 125. 4. Depress the brake pedal. 5. Touch the selector lever lock and engage se‐ lector lever position N. 6. Switch off drive-ready state. 3. Push the selector lever in the desired direc‐ In this way, standby state remains switched tion, past a resistance point, if needed. The on, and a Check Control message is dis‐ selector lever automatically returns to the played. center position when released. The vehicle may roll.
NOTICE Selector lever position P is automatically en‐ gaged when standby state is switched off. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not switch standby state off in vehicle washes.
Irrespective of standby state, the selector lever position P is automatically engaged after approx. Engaging selector lever position P 35 minutes. If there is a malfunction, you may not be able to change the selector lever position. Electronically unlock the transmission lock, if needed, refer to page 135.
Kickdown Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving performance. Step on the accelerator pedal beyond the resist‐ Press button P. ance point at the full throttle position.
Rolling or pushing the vehicle Sport program M/S
General information Concept In some situations, the vehicle is to roll without The shifting points and shifting times in the its own power for a short distance, for instance in Sport program are designed for a sportier driving a vehicle wash, or be pushed.
133 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 134
CONTROLS Driving
style. The transmission, for instance shifts up 2. Push the selector lever forward or pull it later and the shifting times are shorter. backward, arrows 2. Manual mode becomes active and the gear is Activating the sport program changed. The engaged gear is displayed in the instrument cluster, for instance M1.
Shifting ▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐ ward. ▷ To shift up: pull the selector lever rearwards. The transmission continues shifting automati‐ cally in certain situations, for instance when Press the selector lever to the left out of selector speed limits are reached. lever position D. The engaged gear is displayed in the instrument Steptronic Sport transmission: cluster, for instance S1. prevent automatic upshifting in M/S The sport program of the transmission is acti‐ manual mode vated. If driving mode SPORT, refer to page 137, is se‐ lected, the Steptronic Sport transmission does Ending the Sport program not automatically upshift in M/S manual mode Push the selector lever to the right. once the maximum speed is reached. D is displayed in the instrument cluster. Depending on the BMW M drive configuration, this function is active independently of the driv‐ Manual mode M/S ing mode. In addition, there is no downshifting for kick‐ Concept down. Manual gear-shifting is possible in manual mode. Ending the manual mode Activating manual mode Push the selector lever to the right. 1. Press the selector lever to the left out of se‐ D is displayed in the instrument cluster. lector lever position D, arrow 1. Shift paddles
Concept The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow you to shift gears quickly while keeping both hands on the steering wheel.
134 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 135
Driving CONTROLS
General information ▷ The lowest possible gear can be selected by pulling and holding the left shift paddle. Shifting The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐ The vehicle only shifts at suitable engine and strument cluster, followed by the current gear. road speeds. Displays in the instrument Short-term manual mode cluster In selector lever position D, actuating a shift pad‐ dle switches into manual mode temporarily. The selector lever position is dis‐ After conservative driving in manual mode with‐ played, for example P. out acceleration or shifting via the shift paddles for a certain amount of time, the transmission switches back to automatic mode. It is possible to switch into automatic mode as Electronic unlocking of the follows: transmission lock ▷ Pull and hold right shift paddle. ▷ In addition to the briefly pulled right shift pad‐ General information dle, briefly pull the left shift paddle. Electronically unlock the transmission lock to maneuver vehicle from a danger area. Continuous manual mode Unlocking is possible, if the starter can spin the In selector lever position S, actuating a shift pad‐ engine. dle switches into manual mode permanently. Before unlocking the transmission lock, set the Steptronic Sport transmission parking brake to prevent the vehicle from rolling away. With the appropriate transmission version, the lowest possible gear can be selected by simulta‐ neously activating kickdown and operating the Engaging selector lever position N left shift paddles. This is not possible in short- 1. Press and hold down brake pedal. term manual mode. 2. Press the Start/Stop button. The starter must audibly start. Hold the Start/Stop button Shifting pressed. 3. With your free hand, press the button on the selector lever, arrow 1, and press the selector lever into selector lever position N and hold, arrow N, until selector lever position N is dis‐ played in the instrument cluster.
▷ To shift up: briefly pull right shift paddle. ▷ To shift down: briefly pull left shift paddle.
135 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 136
CONTROLS Driving
A Check Control message is displayed. TRACTION is displayed in the instrument cluster and the indicator light for DSC OFF lights up. 3. Engage selector lever position S. 4. With the left foot, forcefully press down on the brake. 5. Press and hold down the accelerator pedal beyond the resistance point at the full throttle position, kickdown. A flag symbol is displayed in the instrument 4. Release Start/Stop button and selector lever. cluster. 5. Release brake, as soon as the starter stops. 6. The starting engine speed adjusts. Within 6. Maneuver the vehicle from the danger area 3 seconds, release the brake. and secure it against moving on its own. For additional information, see the chapter on Repeated use during a trip tow-starting and towing, refer to page 350. After Launch Control has been used, the trans‐ mission must cool down for approx. 5 minutes Launch Control before Launch Control can be used again. Launch Control adjusts to the surrounding con‐ Concept ditions, when used again. Launch Control enables optimum acceleration on surfaces with good traction under dry sur‐ After using Launch Control rounding conditions. To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC Dy‐ namic Stability Control again as soon as possible. General information The use of Launch Control causes premature System limits component wear since this function represents a An experienced driver may be able to achieve very heavy load for the vehicle. better acceleration values in DSC OFF mode. Do not use Launch Control during the break-in, refer to page 274, period. Driving Dynamics Control Do not steer the steering wheel when driving off with Launch Control. Concept Functional requirements The Driving Dynamics Control influences the Launch Control is available when the engine is at driving dynamics properties of the vehicle. The operating temperature. The engine is at operat‐ vehicle can be adjusted depending on the situa‐ ing temperature after an uninterrupted trip of at tion using various driving modes. least 6 miles/10 km. General information Start with launch control The following systems are affected, for instance: 1. Switch on drive-ready state. ▷ Engine characteristics. ▷ Steptronic transmission. 2. Press button. 136 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 137
Driving CONTROLS
▷ Adaptive chassis. Driving modes ▷ Adaptive Drive. ▷ Active roll stabilization. Button Driving Configuration mode ▷ Adaptive M chassis. ▷ M Dynamic Professional SPORT INDIVIDUAL ▷ Integral Active Steering. SPORT PLUS ▷ Display in the instrument cluster. ▷ Cruise control. COMFORT ▷ Backrest width for comfort seats. ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL
When the drive-ready state is switched on, the ADAPTIVE COMFORT or ECO PRO driving mode is se‐ lected automatically, depending on the equip‐ ment. Driving modes in detail
Overview COMFORT
Concept Balanced tuning between dynamic and con‐ sumption-optimized driving.
Switching on Press button repeatedly until COM‐ FORT is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Displays in the instrument SPORT cluster The selected driving mode is dis‐ Concept played in the instrument cluster. Dynamic tuning for higher agility with an opti‐ mized chassis and suspension.
Switching on Press button repeatedly until SPORT is displayed in the instrument cluster.
SPORT INDIVIDUAL
Concept Individual settings can be adjusted in the SPORT INDIVIDUAL driving mode.
137 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 138
CONTROLS Driving
Configuration Configuration Via iDrive: Via iDrive: 1. "My Vehicle" 1. "My Vehicle" 2. "Vehicle settings" 2. "Vehicle settings" 3. If necessary, "Driving Experience Control" 3. If necessary, "Driving Experience Control" 4. "Configure SPORT INDIVIDUAL" 4. "Configure ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL" 5. Select the desired setting. 5. Select the desired setting. The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ rently used. rently used. Reset SPORT INDIVIDUAL to the standard set‐ Reset ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL to the standard tings: settings: "Reset to SPORT STANDARD". "Reset to ECO PRO STANDARD".
SPORT PLUS ADAPTIVE
Concept Concept Dynamic tuning for maximum agility with an ad‐ Comfort-oriented driving mode, whose tuning is justed drive. automatically modified to the driving situation and driving style. Switching on If the navigation system is active, upcoming road Press the button repeatedly until sections are considered. SPORT PLUS is displayed in the instru‐ The function may be restricted if the navigation ment cluster. data is invalid, outdated or not available, for ex‐ ample. ECO PRO Switching on Concept Press button. ADAPTIVE is displayed in Consumption-optimized tuning. the instrument cluster.
Switching on INDIVIDUAL configuration Press button repeatedly until ECO PRO is displayed in the instrument cluster. General information The individual configuration of the driving mode ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL is stored for the active driver profile. The last set configuration is activated directly when the driv‐ Concept ing mode is called up again. Individual settings can be adjusted in the ECO Activating configuration of the PRO INDIVIDUAL driving mode. driving mode Press button for the desired driving mode several times.
138 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 139
Displays CONTROLS
Displays
Vehicle features and Variable displays options Service requirements 146 4 Instrument cluster with enhanced features: This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ tachometer 144 cific and optional features offered with the series. Instrument cluster with enhanced features: It also describes features that are not necessarily ECO PRO displays 280 available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected 5 Engine temperature 145 options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When us‐ 6 Navigation display ing these functions and systems, the applicable Transmission display laws and regulations must be observed. Status, Driving Dynamics Control 136 7 Check Control 140 Instrument cluster Onboard Computer 149 8 Variable displays General information Speed Limit Info 147 Depending on the vehicle equipment, it may be Instrument cluster without enhanced fea‐ possible to deactivate the display change in the tures: range 145 instrument cluster via iDrive. 9 Reset miles 150 Some of the displays in the instrument cluster may differ from the illustrations in this Owner's Instrument cluster with Manual. enhanced features: setting the Overview operating mode Concept Depending on the equipment, the instrument cluster can be set to three different operating modes in addition to the driving mode.
Settings Via iDrive: 1. "My Vehicle" 1 Fuel gauge 144 2. "iDrive settings" Instrument cluster with enhanced features: 3. "Displays" range 145 4. "Instrument panel" 2 Speedometer 5. Select desired setting: 3 Time 145 External temperature 145
139 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 140
CONTROLS Displays
▷ "STANDARD": all displays on the instru‐ General information ment cluster are active. A Check Control message is displayed as a com‐ ▷ "REDUCED" all displays on the instru‐ bination of indicator or warning lights and SMS ment cluster are reduced to the essential. text messages in the instrument cluster and, if ▷ "INDIVIDUAL": all displays on the instru‐ applicable, in the Head-up Display. ment cluster are active. Individual displays In addition, an acoustic signal may sound and an can be individually selected. SMS text message may appear on the Control Display. Configuring INDIVIDUAL ▷ "Driving mode display": when the driving Indicator/warning lights mode is switched into ECO PRO or SPORT, the instrument cluster automatically switches Concept into the respective view. Indicator/warning lights in the instrument cluster ▷ "Speed limit exceeded": if the speed recog‐ display the status of some functions in the vehi‐ nized by Speed Limit Info is exceeded, the cle and indicate when a malfunction is present in exceeded range is marked red in the speed‐ the monitored systems. ometer. ▷ Instrument cluster with enhanced features: General information "Magnifier function": the current speed is The indicator/warning lights can light up in a vari‐ shown enlarged in the speedometer. ety of combinations and colors. Several of the lights are checked for proper func‐ Instrument cluster without tioning and light up temporarily when drive-ready enhanced features: selecting state is switched on. displays in the instrument cluster Red lights Via iDrive: Safety belt reminder 1. "My Vehicle" Indicator light flashes or is illuminated: 2. "iDrive settings" safety belt on the driver or passenger 3. "Displays" side is not buckled. The safety belt re‐ minder can also be activated if objects are placed 4. "Instrument panel" on the front passenger seat. 5. Select desired setting: Make sure that the safety belts are positioned ▷ "Road signs": display Speed Limit Info. correctly.
Check Control Safety belt reminder for rear seats The safety belt is not buckled on the cor‐ Concept responding rear seat. The Check Control system monitors functions in the vehicle and notifies you of malfunctions in the monitored systems.
140 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 141
Displays CONTROLS
Airbag system DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated or DTC Dynamic Traction Airbag system and belt tensioner are not Control is activated working. Have the vehicle checked immediately DSC is deactivated or DTC is activated. by a dealer’s service center or another qualified DSC, refer to page 195, and DTC, refer service center or repair shop. to page 197.
Parking brake Flat Tire Monitor FTM The parking brake is set. The Flat Tire Monitor signals a loss of Release the parking brake, refer to tire inflation pressure in a tire. page 125. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers. Brake system Flat Tire Monitor, refer to page 319. Braking system impaired. Continue to drive moderately. Tire Pressure Monitor TPM Have the vehicle checked immediately The indicator light lights up: the Tire by a dealer’s service center or another Pressure Monitor reports a low tire infla‐ qualified service center or repair shop. tion pressure or a flat tire. Follow the in‐ formation in the Check Control message. Yellow lights The indicator light flashes and then continuously lights up: no flat tire or loss of tire inflation pres‐ Anti-lock Braking System ABS sure can be detected. ▷ Interference caused by systems or devices Braking force boost may not be working. with the same radio frequency: after leaving Avoid abrupt braking. Take the longer the area of the interference, the system auto‐ braking distance into account. matically becomes active again. Have the system immediately checked ▷ In the case of tires with special approval: by a dealer’s service center or another TPM was unable to complete the reset. Re‐ qualified service center or repair shop. set the system again. ▷ A wheel without TPM wheel electronics is DSC Dynamic Stability Control mounted: have it checked by a dealer’s serv‐ The indicator light flashes: DSC controls ice center or another qualified service center the drive and braking forces. The vehicle or repair shop as needed. is stabilized. Reduce speed and modify ▷ Malfunction: have the system checked by a your driving style to the driving circumstances. dealer’s service center or another qualified The indicator light lights up: DSC has malfunc‐ service center or repair shop. tioned. Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 313. Have the system immediately checked by a deal‐ er’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. DSC, refer to page 195.
141 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 142
CONTROLS Displays
Steering system Parking light/low beams, automatic headlight control, refer to page 156. Steering system may not be working. Have the system checked by a dealer’s service center or another qualified serv‐ Lane departure warning ice center or repair shop. The indicator light lights up: the system is activated. At least one lane marking Emissions was detected and warnings can be is‐ sued. ▷ The warning light lights up: Lane departure warning, refer to page 181. Emissions are deteriorating. Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible. Front fog lights ▷ The warning light flashes under certain cir‐ cumstances: Front fog lights are switched on. This indicates that there is excessive misfiring Front fog lights, refer to page 160. in the engine. Reduce the vehicle speed and have the sys‐ High-beam Assistant tem checked immediately; otherwise, serious High-beam Assistant is switched on. engine misfiring within a brief period can seri‐ ously damage emission control components, High beams are switched on and off au‐ in particular the catalytic converter. tomatically depending on the traffic sit‐ uation. Socket for Onboard Diagnosis, refer to High-beam Assistant, refer to page 158. page 338.
Green lights Automatic Hold Automatic Hold is activated. The vehicle Safety belt reminder for rear seats is automatically held in place when it is The safety belt is buckled on the corre‐ stationary. sponding rear seat. Automatic Hold, refer to page 125.
Turn signal Blue lights Turn signal switched on. High beams Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator light indicates that a turn signal bulb has High beams are switched on. failed. High beams, refer to page 127. Turn signal, refer to page 127.
Parking lights, headlight Parking lights or headlights are switched on.
142 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 143
Displays CONTROLS
Hiding Check Control messages Display
Check Control At least one Check Control message is displayed or is stored.
SMS text messages SMS text messages in combination with a sym‐ bol in the instrument cluster explain a Check Press and hold button on signal lever. Control message and the meaning of the indica‐ tor/warning lights.
Continuous display Supplementary SMS text messages Some Check Control messages are displayed Additional information, such as the reason for an continuously and are not cleared until the mal‐ error or malfunction or the required action, can function is eliminated. If several malfunctions oc‐ be called up via Check Control. cur at once, the messages are displayed consec‐ With urgent messages the added text will be au‐ utively. tomatically displayed on the Control Display. The messages can be hidden for approx. 8 sec‐ onds. After this time, they are displayed again Further help automatically. Depending on the Check Control message, fur‐ ther help can be selected. Temporary display Via iDrive: Some Check Control messages are hidden auto‐ matically after approx. 20 seconds. The Check 1. "My Vehicle" Control messages are stored and can be dis‐ 2. "Vehicle status" played again later. 3. Move the Controller to the left. Displaying stored Check Control 4. "Check Control" messages 5. Select the desired text message. Via iDrive: 6. Select desired setting: ▷ "Call BMW Accident Assistance" 1. "My Vehicle" Contact BMW Group Accident Assis‐ 2. "Vehicle status" tance. 3. Move the Controller to the left. ▷ "Service request" 4. "Check Control" Contact a dealer’s service center or an‐ 5. Select the SMS text message. other qualified service center or repair shop. ▷ "BMW Roadside Assistance" Contact Roadside Assistance. ▷ "Owner's Manual"
143 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 144
CONTROLS Displays
Display additional information about the Tachometer Check Control message in the Integrated Owner's Manual. Always avoid engine speeds in the red warning field. In this range, the fuel supply is reduced to Messages after trip completion protect the engine. Special messages displayed while driving are displayed again after drive-ready state is switched off. Shift point indicator
Fuel gauge Concept Depending on the vehicle equipment, the shift point indicators on the tachometer indicate the Concept maximum shift point at which the best possible The current fill level of the fuel tank is displayed. acceleration can be achieved.
General information Functional requirement Vehicle tilt position may cause the display to Shift lights are shown when the SPORT or vary. SPORT PLUS driving program is activated. Information on refueling, refer to page 288. Switching on shift lights Instrument cluster without Steptronic Sport transmission: enhanced features: display 1. Select SPORT or SPORT PLUS using Driv‐ An arrow beside the fuel pump ing Dynamics Control. symbol shows which side of the 2. Activate the M/S manual mode of the trans‐ vehicle the fuel filler flap is on. mission.
Display Instrument cluster with enhanced features: display An arrow beside the fuel pump symbol shows which side of the vehicle the fuel filler flap is on. The current range is displayed as numerical value.
Indicator light In the instrument ▷ Current engine speed is displayed in the cluster tachometer. ▷ Arrow 1: successive yellow illuminated fields The yellow indicator light illuminates, indicate an increase in the speed. once the fuel reserve is reached. ▷ Arrow 2: successive orange illuminated fields indicate the upcoming shift moment.
144 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 145
Displays CONTROLS
▷ Arrow 3: the field lights up red. Do not wait Indicator light In the instrument any further to shift. cluster When the maximum possible speed is reached, A red indicator light is displayed. the entire display flashes. The fuel supply is re‐ duced to protect the engine.
Standby state and drive- External temperature ready state General information The letters OFF in the tachome‐ If the indicator drops to +37 ℉/+3 ℃ or lower, a ter indicate that drive-ready state signal sounds. is switched off and standby state A Check Control message is displayed. is switched on. There is an increased risk of ice on roads. The letters READY in the tach‐ ometer indicate that the Auto Safety information Start/Stop function is ready to start the engine automatically. WARNING Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃ For further information, see Idle state, standby there can be a risk of icy roads, for instance on state, and drive-ready state, refer to page 39. bridges or shady sections of road. There is a risk of an accident. Modify your driving style to Engine temperature the weather conditions at low temperatures.
Display Time ▷ Cold engine: the pointer is at the low temperature end. The time is displayed in the instrument cluster. Drive at moderate engine and Setting the time and time format, refer to vehicle speeds. page 57. ▷ Normal operating tempera‐ ture: the pointer is in the mid‐ dle or in the lower half of the Range temperature display. ▷ Hot engine: the pointer is at the high end of Concept the temperature range. In addition, a Check The range indicates the distance that can still be Control message is displayed. covered with the current fuel level. Check the coolant level, refer to page 335. General information The estimated range available with the remaining fuel is permanently displayed in the instrument cluster. 145 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 146
CONTROLS Displays
With a low remaining range, a Check Control tance or time to the next scheduled mainte‐ message is briefly displayed. With a dynamic nance. driving style, for instance taking curves aggres‐ A service advisor can read out the current serv‐ sively, the engine function is not always ensured. ice requirements from your remote control. The Check Control message appears continu‐ Some information on service requirements can ously below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km. also be shown on the BMW display key.
Safety information Display
NOTICE Detailed information on service With a driving range of less than requirements 30 miles/50 km the engine may no longer have More information on the type of service required sufficient fuel. Engine functions are not en‐ may be displayed on the Control Display. sured anymore. There is a risk of damage to Via iDrive: property. Refuel promptly. 1. "My Vehicle" 2. "Vehicle status" Instrument cluster without 3. Move the Controller to the left. enhanced features: display 4. "Service required" The current range is displayed as Required maintenance procedures and le‐ numerical value at the bottom of gally mandated inspections are displayed. the speedometer. 5. Select an entry to call up detailed information.
Symbols Instrument cluster with Sym‐ Description enhanced features: display bols The current range is displayed as No service is currently required. numerical value next to the fuel gauge. The deadline for scheduled mainte‐ nance or a legally mandated inspec‐ tion is approaching. Service requirements The service deadline has already passed. Concept The function displays the service requirements Entering appointment dates and the corresponding maintenance scopes. Enter the dates for the mandatory vehicle in‐ spections. General information Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are After switching on drive-ready state, the instru‐ set correctly. ment cluster briefly displays available driving dis‐
146 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 147
Displays CONTROLS
Via iDrive: On vehicles without a gear shift indicator, the en‐ gaged gear is displayed. 1. "My Vehicle" 2. "Vehicle status" Example Description 3. Move the Controller to the left. Fuel efficient gear is set. 4. "Service required" 5. "Vehicle inspection" Shift into fuel efficient gear. 6. "Date:" 7. Select the desired setting.
Automatic Service Request Speed Limit Info Data regarding the service status or legally man‐ dated vehicle inspections is automatically trans‐ mitted to your dealer’s service center before your Speed Limit Info vehicle is due for service. Concept You can check when your dealer’s service center was notified. Speed Limit Info shows the current maximum permitted speed in the instrument cluster. Via iDrive: 1. "My Vehicle" General information 2. "Vehicle status" The camera in the area of the interior mirror de‐ 3. Move the Controller to the left. tects traffic signs at the edge of the road as well as variable overhead sign posts. 4. "Teleservice Call" Traffic signs with extra symbols are considered and compared with the vehicle's onboard data. Gear shift indicator The traffic sign will then be either displayed or ig‐ nored depending on the situation. Concept The system takes into account the information stored in the navigation system and also displays The system recommends the most fuel efficient speed limits present on routes without signs. gear for the current driving situation. Safety information General information Depending on the vehicle equipment and coun‐ WARNING try version, the gear shift indicator is active in the manual mode of the Steptronic transmission and The system cannot serve as a substitute for the with manual transmission. driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility and traffic situation. There is a risk of an acci‐ Steptronic transmission: dent. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. displaying Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate. Suggestions to shift gear up or down are dis‐ played in the instrument cluster.
147 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 148
CONTROLS Displays
Overview 4. "Instrument panel" 5. "Road signs" Camera Display
General information Speed Limit Info is displayed in the instrument cluster and, if applicable, in the Head-up Display.
Speed Limit Info Current speed limit.
The camera is installed near the interior mirror. Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror clean and clear. Speed Limit Info not available. Displaying Speed Limit Info
General information Depending on the vehicle equipment, Speed Limit Info is displayed via the operating mode of System limits the instrument cluster or via iDrive. The system may not be fully functional and may Display via operating mode of the provide incorrect information in the following sit‐ instrument cluster uations: The Speed Limit Info displays are shown or hid‐ ▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall. den via the operating mode of the instrument ▷ When signs are fully or partially concealed by cluster. objects, stickers or paint. The Speed Limit Info is displayed in the following ▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in front operating modes: "STANDARD" or of you. "INDIVIDUAL" ▷ When driving toward bright lights or strong Speed Limit Info is not displayed in the following reflections. operating mode: "REDUCED" ▷ When the windshield in front of the interior Adjusting the operating mode of the instrument mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered by a cluster, refer to page 139. sticker, etc. ▷ If the camera has overheated and been tem‐ Display via iDrive porarily switched off due to excessively high 1. "My Vehicle" temperatures. 2. "iDrive settings" ▷ In the event of incorrect detection by the camera. 3. "Displays" ▷ If the speed limits or road data stored in the navigation system are incorrect.
148 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 149
Displays CONTROLS
▷ If the speed limits vary with the time of day Activating a list and adjusting and the day of the week. the setting ▷ In areas not covered by the navigation sys‐ tem. ▷ When roads differ from the navigation, such as due to changes in road routing. ▷ In case of electronic traffic signs. ▷ When passing buses or trucks with traffic signs applied to them. ▷ If the traffic signs are non-conforming. ▷ When signs that are valid for a parallel road On the right side of the steering wheel, turn the are detected. thumbwheel to activate the corresponding list. ▷ In the presence of country-specific signs and road configurations. 1. Turn the thumbwheel and select the desired ▷ During calibration of the camera immediately setting. after vehicle delivery. 2. Press the thumbwheel.
Display Selection lists
General information Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the fol‐ lowing can be displayed or operated using the buttons and the thumbwheel on the steering wheel as well as the displays in the instrument cluster and the Head-up Display: ▷ Current audio source. ▷ Redial phone feature. Depending on the equipment version, the list in the instrument cluster may differ from the illus‐ tration.
Onboard Computer in the instrument cluster
Concept The Onboard Computer displays different vehi‐ cle data in the instrument cluster, such as aver‐ age values.
149 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 150
CONTROLS Displays
Calling up information Information in detail
Odometer and trip odometer
Displaying/resetting miles ▷ Press the knob to display the trip miles. When the drive-ready state is switched off, miles and trip miles are displayed. Press and hold button on signal lever. ▷ Keep the knob pressed down to reset the trip Information is displayed in the instrument cluster. miles. Pressing the button repeatedly displays addi‐ tional information. Display
Information at a glance The following information can be displayed on the Onboard Computer: ▷ Miles and trip miles. ▷ Navigation data. When destination guidance is activated in the navigation system.
▷ Fuel consumption display. ▷ Odometer, arrow 1. ▷ Average fuel consumption and average ▷ Trip odometer, arrow 2. speed.
Adjusting information for Navigation data Onboard Computer General information For some information of the Onboard Computer, The estimated time of arrival and the distance re‐ it is possible to set whether it can be called up in maining to the destination are displayed if a des‐ the instrument cluster. tination is entered in the navigation system be‐ Via iDrive: fore the trip is started. 1. "My Vehicle" 2. "iDrive settings" 3. "Displays" 4. "Instrument panel" 5. "Onboard info" 6. Select the desired setting. The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ rently used.
150 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 151
Displays CONTROLS
Display ▷ Current fuel consumption, arrow 3.
Average speed and average fuel consumption
General information Average speed and average fuel consumption are calculated for the distance traveled since the last reset in the Onboard Computer. Periods in which the vehicle is parked with the ▷ Time of arrival, arrow 1. engine manually stopped are not included in the ▷ Distance to destination, arrow 2. calculation of the average speed.
Consumption display Resetting average values
Concept During energy recovery, the kinetic energy of the vehicle is converted into electric energy during coasting. The vehicle battery is partially charged and fuel consumption can be reduced. The current fuel consumption displays the cur‐ rent consumption of fuel. Check whether you are currently driving in an efficient and environmen‐ tally-friendly manner. Press and hold button on turn signal lever.
General information Display Energy recovery and current fuel consumption can be displayed as bar displays in the Onboard Computer.
Display
▷ Average speed, arrow 1. ▷ Average fuel consumption, arrow 2.
▷ Energy recovery, arrow 1. ▷ Average fuel consumption, arrow 2.
151 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 152
CONTROLS Displays
Onboard Computer on the 3. "Trip computer" Control Display 4. Move the Controller to the left, if needed. ▷ "Reset": all values are reset. Concept ▷ "Automatic reset": all values are reset approx. 4 hours after the vehicle has The Onboard Computer displays different vehi‐ come to a standstill. cle data on the Control Display, such as average 5. If necessary, "OK" values.
General information Sport displays Two types of Onboard Computers are available on the Control Display: General information ▷ "Onboard info": average values, such as the Depending on the vehicle equipment, the current fuel consumption, are displayed. The values values for performance and torque can be dis‐ can be reset individually. played on the Control Display. ▷ "Trip computer": the values deliver an over‐ view of a certain distance and can be reset as Displays often as necessary. Via iDrive: Calling up the Onboard 1. "My Vehicle" Computer or trip computer 2. "Technology in action" Via iDrive: 3. "Sport displays" 1. "My Vehicle" 2. "Driving information" Speed warning 3. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer" Concept Resetting the Onboard A speed limit can be set that when reached will Computer cause a warning to be issued. Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle" General information 2. "Driving information" The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed ex‐ ceeds the set speed limit again, after it has drop‐ 3. "Onboard info" ped below it by 3 mph/5 km/h. 4. "Consumption" or "Speed" 5. "OK" Displaying, setting or changing the speed warning Resetting the trip computer Via iDrive: Via iDrive: 1. "My Vehicle" 1. "My Vehicle" 2. "Vehicle settings" 2. "Driving information" 3. "Speed warning"
152 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 153
Displays CONTROLS
4. "Warning at:" ▷ "Engine oil level": Electronic engine oil 5. Turn the Controller until the desired speed is level check, refer to page 331. displayed. ▷ "Diesel exhaust fluid": BMW Advanced 6. Press the Controller. Diesel, refer to page 292. ▷ "Check Control": Check Control mes‐ Activating/deactivating the sages are stored in the background and can speed warning be displayed on the Control Display. Display‐ ing stored Check Control messages, refer to Via iDrive: page 143. 1. "My Vehicle" ▷ "Service required": Displaying service 2. "Vehicle settings" requirements, refer to page 146. 3. "Speed warning" ▷ "Teleservice Call": service request. 4. "Speed warning" Head-up Display Setting your current speed as the speed warning Concept Via iDrive: This system projects important information into 1. "My Vehicle" the driver's field of vision, for instance the speed. 2. "Vehicle settings" The driver can get information without averting 3. "Speed warning" his or her eyes from the road. 4. "Select current speed" General information Read the information for cleaning the Head-up Vehicle status Display, refer to page 356.
General information Overview The status can be displayed and actions per‐ formed for several systems.
Opening the vehicle status Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle" 2. "Vehicle status"
Information at a glance Switching on/off ▷ "Flat Tire Monitor": Status of the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to page 319. Via iDrive: ▷ "Tire Pressure Monitor": Status of the 1. "My Vehicle" Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 313. 2. "iDrive settings"
153 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 154
CONTROLS Displays
3. "Displays" Selecting displays in the Head-up 4. "Head-Up Display" Display 5. "Head-Up Display" Via iDrive: 1. "My Vehicle" Display 2. "iDrive settings" Overview 3. "Displays" The following information is displayed on the 4. "Head-Up Display" Head-up Display: 5. "INDIVIDUAL" ▷ Speed. 6. Select the desired setting. ▷ Navigation instructions. The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ ▷ Check Control messages. rently used. ▷ Selection list in the instrument cluster. Setting the brightness ▷ Driver assistance systems. The brightness is automatically adjusted to the Some of this information is only displayed briefly ambient brightness. as needed. The basic setting can be adjusted manually. Selecting the view Via iDrive: Various views are available for the Head-up Dis‐ 1. "My Vehicle" play. 2. "iDrive settings" Via iDrive: 3. "Displays" 1. "My Vehicle" 4. "Head-Up Display" 2. "iDrive settings" 5. "Brightness" 3. "Displays" 6. Turn the Controller until the desired bright‐ 4. "Head-Up Display" ness is set. 5. Select desired setting: 7. Press the Controller. ▷ "STANDARD": all displays in the Head-up When the low beams are switched on, the Display are active. brightness of the Head-up Display can be addi‐ tionally influenced using the instrument lighting. ▷ "REDUCED": the displays in the Head-up Display are reduced to the minimum. Adjusting the height ▷ "INDIVIDUAL": all displays in the Head-up Via iDrive: Display are active. Individual displays such as Check Control messages can be 1. "My Vehicle" selected individually. 2. "iDrive settings" The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ 3. "Displays" rently used. 4. "Head-Up Display" 5. "Height"
154 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 155
Displays CONTROLS
6. Turn the Controller until the desired height is For this reason, it is strongly suggested to have reached. the special windshield replaced by a dealer’s 7. Press the Controller. service center or another qualified service center or repair shop, if necessary. The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ rently used. The height of the Head-up Display can also be stored using the memory function, refer to page 111.
Setting the rotation The Head-up Display view can be rotated. Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle" 2. "iDrive settings" 3. "Displays" 4. "Head-Up Display" 5. "Rotation" 6. Turn the Controller until the desired setting is selected. 7. Press the Controller.
Visibility of the display The visibility of the displays in the Head-up Dis‐ play is influenced by the following factors: ▷ Seat position. ▷ Objects on the cover of the Head-up Display. ▷ Sunglasses with certain polarization filters. ▷ Wet roads. ▷ Unfavorable light conditions. If the image is distorted, have the basic settings checked by a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.
Special windshield The windshield is part of the system. The shape of the windshield makes it possible to display a precise image. A film in the windshield prevents double images from being generated.
155 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 156
CONTROLS Lights
Lights
Vehicle features and Symbol Function options Parking lights.
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ cific and optional features offered with the series. Automatic headlight control. It also describes features that are not necessarily Adaptive light functions. available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to Low beams. safety-related functions and systems. When us‐ ing these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed. Instrument lighting.
Overview Right roadside parking light.
Switches in the vehicle Left roadside parking light.
Parking lights, low beams and roadside parking lights
General information Position of switch: , , The light switch element is located next to the steering wheel. If the driver's door is opened when the drive- ready state is switched off, the exterior lighting is Symbol Function automatically switched off. Front fog lights. Parking lights Position of switch: Night Vision, refer to page 177. The vehicle is illuminated on all sides. Do not use the parking lights for extended peri‐ ods; otherwise, they might drain the battery and Lights off. it would then be impossible to switch on drive- Daytime running lights. ready state.
156 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 157
Lights CONTROLS
Low beams Headlight courtesy delay feature Position of switch: General information The low beams illuminate when drive-ready state is switched on. The low beams stay lit for a particular time if the high beams are switched on after standby state Roadside parking lights is switched on. When the vehicle is parked, a one-sided roadside Setting the duration parking light can be switched on. Via iDrive: Button Function 1. "My Vehicle" Right roadside parking light on/off. 2. "Vehicle settings" 3. "Lighting" Left roadside parking light on/off. 4. "Exterior lighting" 5. "Pathway lighting" 6. Select the desired setting. Welcome lights and headlight courtesy delay Automatic headlight feature control Welcome lights Concept General information The low beams are switched on and off automat‐ ically depending on the ambient brightness, for Depending on the equipment, the exterior light‐ instance in tunnels, in twilight or if there is pre‐ ing of the vehicle can be set individually. cipitation. Activating/deactivating General information Position of switch: , A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can Via iDrive: cause the lights to be switched on. 1. "My Vehicle" 2. "Vehicle settings" Activating 3. "Lighting" Position of switch: 4. "Exterior lighting" The indicator light in the instrument cluster is il‐ luminated when the low beams are switched on. 5. Select desired setting: ▷ "Welcome lights" System limits Individual light functions are switched on The automatic headlight control cannot serve as for a limited time. a substitute for your personal judgment of light‐ ing conditions.
157 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 158
CONTROLS Lights
For example, the sensors are unable to detect Activating fog or hazy weather. In these situations, switch Position of switch: the light on manually. The adaptive light functions are active when the drive-ready state is switched on. Daytime running lights Adaptive Light Control General information Depending on the steering angle and other pa‐ rameters, the light from the headlight follows the Position of switch: , , course of the road. The daytime running lights light up when drive- To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adaptive ready state is switched on. After drive-ready Light Control does not swivel to the opposite state is switched off, the parking lights light up in lane when the vehicle is at a standstill. position . Cornering light Activating/deactivating In tight curves, for instance on mountainous In some countries, daytime running lights are roads or when turning, an additional, cornering mandatory, so it may not be possible to deacti‐ light is switched on that lights up the inside of vate the daytime running lights. the curve when the vehicle is moving below a Via iDrive: certain speed. 1. "My Vehicle" The cornering light is automatically switched on 2. "Vehicle settings" depending on the steering angle or the use of turn signals. 3. "Lighting" When driving in reverse, the cornering lights may 4. "Exterior lighting" be automatically switched on regardless of the 5. "Daytime running lamps" steering angle. The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ rently used. Adaptive headlight range control Adaptive light functions The adaptive headlight range control compen‐ Concept sates for acceleration and braking operations in order not to blind the oncoming traffic and to Adaptive light functions enable dynamic illumina‐ achieve optimum illumination of the roadway. tion of the roadway.
General information High-beam Assistant The adaptive light functions may consist of one system or multiple systems, depending on the equipment version: Concept The high-beam Assistant detects other traffic ▷ Adaptive Light Control, refer to page 158. participants early on and automatically switches ▷ Cornering light, refer to page 158. the high beams on or off depending on the traffic situation.
158 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 159
Lights CONTROLS
General information Sensitivity of the high-beam The high-beam Assistant ensures that the high Assistant beams are switched on, whenever the traffic sit‐ uation allows. In the low speed range, the high General information beams are not switched on by the system. The sensitivity of the high-beam Assistant can The system responds to light from oncoming be adjusted. traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to am‐ bient lighting, for instance in towns and cities. Safety information The high beams can be switched on and off manually at any time. WARNING Activating/deactivating If adjustments have been made or the sensitiv‐ ity has been modified, oncoming traffic may be momentarily blinded. There is a risk of an acci‐ dent. If adjustments have been made and the sensitivity has been modified, make sure that oncoming traffic is not momentarily blinded. Switch off the high beams manually if required.
Adjusting the sensitivity Pull the turn signal lever for approxi‐ Position of switch: mately 10 seconds. The system responds more sensitively. Press and hold button on signal lever. A Check Control message is displayed. The indicator light in the instrument clus‐ ter is illuminated when the low beams are Resetting the sensitivity switched on. Pull the turn signal lever again for approx. 10 sec‐ onds. The sensitivity of the high-beam Assistant The headlights are automatically switched be‐ is reset to the factory settings. tween low beams and high beams. The blue indicator light in the instrument System limits cluster lights up when the system The high-beam Assistant cannot serve as a sub‐ switches on the high beams. stitute for the driver's personal judgment of when The high-beam Assistant is deactivated when to use the high beams. In situation that require manually switching the high beams on and off, this, therefore switch off manually. refer to page 127. The system is not fully functional in the following To reactivate the high-beam Assistant, press the situations, and driver intervention may be neces‐ button on the turn signal lever. sary: ▷ In very unfavorable weather conditions, such as fog or heavy precipitation. ▷ When detecting poorly-lit road users such as pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders and
159 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 160
CONTROLS Lights
wagons; when driving close to train or ship Settings traffic; or at animal crossings. Adjust the brightness with the ▷ In tight curves, on hilltops or in depressions, thumbwheel. in cross traffic or half-obscured oncoming traffic on highways. ▷ In poorly-lit towns and cities or in the pres‐ ence of highly reflective signs. ▷ When the windshield in front of the interior mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered with Interior lights stickers, etc. General information Fog lights Depending on the equipment version, interior lights, footwell lights, entry lights, ambient light‐ ing, and speaker lighting are automatically con‐ Front fog lights trolled.
Concept Overview The front fog lights work alongside the low beams to illuminate a wider area of the roadway. Buttons in the vehicle
Functional requirement The low beams must be switched on before switching on the front fog lights.
Switching on/off Press button. The green indicator light lights up if the front fog lights are switched on. Interior lights If the automatic headlight control, refer to page 157, is activated, the low beams will come Reading lights on automatically when you switch on the front fog lights. When the high beams or headlight flasher are Switching the interior lights activated, the front fog lights are not switched on/off on. Press the button.
Instrument lighting To switch off permanently: press the button and hold for approx. 3 seconds. Functional requirement The interior lights in the rear of the vehicle can The parking lights or low beams must be be switched on and off independently. The but‐ switched on to adjust the brightness. ton is located in the rear roofliner.
160 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 161
Lights CONTROLS
Switching the reading lights Setting the brightness on/off Via iDrive: Press button. 1. "My Vehicle" 2. "Vehicle settings" Depending on the vehicle equipment, the read‐ 3. "Lighting" ing lights are located next to the interior lights in the front and rear. 4. "Interior lighting" 5. "Brightness" Ambient light 6. Select the desired setting.
General information Dimmed while driving Depending on the equipment version, lighting Via iDrive: can be adjusted for some lights in the car's inte‐ 1. "My Vehicle" rior. 2. "Vehicle settings" Switching on/off 3. "Lighting" The ambient light is switched on when the vehi‐ 4. "Interior lighting" cle is unlocked, and switched off when the vehi‐ 5. "Dimmed for night driving" cle is locked. Some lights of the interior lighting are dimmed If the ambient light was deactivated via iDrive, it when the vehicle is driven in the dark. will not be switched on when the vehicle is un‐ The selected setting is stored for the driver pro‐ locked. file currently used. Via iDrive: 1. "My Vehicle" Bowers & Wilkins Diamond 2. "Vehicle settings" Surround Sound System 3. "Lighting" General information 4. "Interior lighting" Some speakers in the vehicle are illuminated. 5. "Ambient lighting" Brightness can be individually set. The selected setting is stored for the driver pro‐ If the speakers are muted, speaker lighting will be file currently used. switched off.
Selecting color scheme Switching on/off Via iDrive: The speaker lighting is switched on when the ve‐ 1. "My Vehicle" hicle is unlocked, and switched off when the ve‐ hicle is locked. 2. "Vehicle settings" Via iDrive: 3. "Lighting" 4. "Interior lighting" 1. "My Vehicle" 5. "Color" 2. "Vehicle settings" 6. Select the desired setting. 3. "Lighting"
161 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 162
CONTROLS Lights
4. "Interior lighting" 5. "Bowers & Wilkins" The selected setting is stored for the driver pro‐ file currently used.
Setting the brightness Via iDrive: 1. "My Vehicle" 2. "Vehicle settings" 3. "Lighting" 4. "Interior lighting" 5. "Brightness" 6. Select the desired setting.
162 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 163
Safety CONTROLS
Safety
Vehicle features and It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected options options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When us‐ This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ ing these functions and systems, the applicable cific and optional features offered with the series. laws and regulations must be observed.
Airbags
1 Front airbag, driver 4 Side airbag 2 Front airbag, front passenger 5 Knee airbag 3 Head airbag
Front airbags Side airbag Front airbags help protect the driver and the In a lateral impact, the side airbag supports the front passenger by responding to frontal impacts side of the body in the chest and lap area. in which safety belts alone would not provide ad‐ equate protection. Head airbag In a lateral impact, the head airbag supports the head.
163 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 164
CONTROLS Safety
Ejection Mitigation ▷ There should be no additional persons, ani‐ The head airbag system is designed as an ejec‐ mals or objects between an airbag and a per‐ tion mitigation countermeasure to reduce the son. likelihood of ejections of vehicle occupants ▷ Dashboard and windshield on the front pas‐ through side windows during rollovers or side im‐ senger side must stay clear - do not attach pact events. adhesive labels or coverings and do not at‐ tach brackets or cables, for instance for GPS Knee airbag devices or mobile phones. The knee airbag supports the legs in a frontal im‐ ▷ Do not apply adhesive materials to the airbag pact. cover panels, do not cover them or modify them in any way. Protective action ▷ Do not use the cover of the front airbag on the front passenger side as a storage area. General information ▷ Do not place slip covers, seat cushions or Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa‐ other objects on the front passenger seat tion, for instance in less severe accidents or rear- that are not specifically suited for seats with end collisions. integrated side airbags. ▷ Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as jack‐ Information on optimum effect of the ets, over the backrests. airbags ▷ Never modify either the individual compo‐ nents or the wiring in the airbag system. This also applies to steering wheel covers, the WARNING dashboard, and the seats. If the seat position is incorrect or the deploy‐ ▷ Do not remove the airbag system. ment area of the airbags is impaired, the airbag system cannot provide protection as intended Even when you follow all instructions very and may cause additional injuries due to trig‐ closely, injury from contact with the airbags can‐ gering. There is a risk of injuries or danger to not be fully ruled out in certain situations. life. Follow the information on achieving the op‐ The ignition and inflation noise may lead to timum protective effect of the airbag system. short-term and, in most cases, temporary hear‐ ing impairment in sensitive occupants. ▷ Keep a distance from the airbags. Vehicle modifications for a person with disabili‐ ▷ Always grasp the steering wheel on the ties may affect the air bag system; contact BMW steering wheel rim. Hold your hands at the Customer Relations for further information. 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to keep the Warnings and information on the airbags are also risk of injury to your hands or arms as low as found on the sun visors. possible when the airbag is triggered. ▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sitting correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and legs in the floor area and does not support them on the dashboard. ▷ Make sure that occupants keep their heads away from the side airbag.
164 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 165
Safety CONTROLS
Functional readiness of the Automatic deactivation of the airbag system front-seat passenger airbags
Safety information Concept The system reads if the front passenger seat is WARNING occupied by measuring the human body's resist‐ ance. Individual components can be hot after trigger‐ ing of the airbag system. There is a risk of in‐ Front, knee, and side airbag on the front pas‐ jury. Do not touch individual components. senger's side are activated or deactivated.
General information WARNING Before transporting a child on the front passen‐ ger seat, refer to the safety information and in‐ Improperly executed work can lead to failure, structions for children on the front passenger malfunction or unintentional triggering of the seat, see Children. airbag system. In the case of a malfunction, the airbag system might not trigger as intended de‐ spite the accident severity. There is a risk of in‐ Safety information juries or danger to life. Have the airbag system checked, repaired, dismantled and scrapped by WARNING a dealer’s service center or another qualified To ensure the front-seat passenger airbag service center or repair shop. function, the system must be able to detect whether a person is sitting in the front passen‐ Display in the instrument cluster ger seat. The entire seat cushion area must be used for this purpose. There is a risk of injuries When drive-ready state is switched on, or danger to life. Make sure that the front pas‐ the warning light in the instrument clus‐ senger keeps his or her feet in the floor area. ter lights up briefly and thereby indicates the function readiness of the entire airbag sys‐ tem and the belt tensioners. Malfunction of the automatic deactivation system Malfunction When transporting older children and adults, the front-seat passenger airbags may be deactivated ▷ Warning light does not come on in certain sitting positions. In this case, the indi‐ when drive-ready state is switched cator light for the front-seat passenger airbags on. lights up. ▷ The warning light lights up continuously. In this case, change the sitting position so that Have the system checked. the front-seat passenger airbags are activated and the indicator light goes out. If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have the person sit in the rear. To enable correct recognition of the occupied seat cushion.
165 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 166
CONTROLS Safety
▷ Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats or restraint system has been detected and the other items to the front passenger seat un‐ front-seat passenger airbags are not activated. less they are specifically determined to be safe for use on the front passenger seat. Strength of the driver's and ▷ Do not place any electronic devices on the front-seat passenger airbag front passenger seat if a child restraint sys‐ The explosive power that activates driver's/front- tem is to be installed on it. seat passenger airbags very much depends on ▷ Do not place objects under the seat that the positions of the driver's/front passenger seat. could press against the seat from below. To maintain the accuracy of this function over ▷ No moisture in or on the seat. the long term, calibrate the front seats as soon as a respective message appears on the Control Indicator light for the front-seat Display. passenger airbags The indicator light for the front-seat passenger Calibrating the front seats airbag in the roofliner indicates the operating state of the front-seat passenger airbag. WARNING The light indicates whether the airbags are either There is a risk of jamming when moving the activated or deactivated. seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage After drive-ready state is switched on, the light to property. Make sure that the area of move‐ briefly lights up and then indicates whether the ment of the seat is clear prior to any adjust‐ airbags are either activated or deactivated. ment. ▷ The indicator light lights up A corresponding message appears on the Con‐ when a child is properly trol Display. seated in a child restraint sys‐ tem or when the seat is 1. Press the switch and move the respective empty. The airbags on the seat all the way forward, until it stops. front passenger side are not 2. Press the switch forward again. The seat still activated. moves forward slightly. ▷ The indicator light does not light up when, for 3. Readjust the seat to the desired position. instance a correctly seated person of suffi‐ cient size is detected on the seat. The air‐ The calibration procedure is completed when the bags on the front passenger side are acti‐ message on the Control Display disappears. vated. If the message continues to be displayed, repeat the calibration. Detected child restraint systems If the message does not disappear after a repeat calibration, have the system checked as soon as The system generally detects children seated in possible. a child restraint system, particularly in child re‐ straint systems required by NHTSA at the point in time when the vehicle was manufactured. Af‐ ter installing a child restraint system, make sure that the indicator light for the front-seat passen‐ ger airbags lights up. This indicates that the child
166 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 167
Safety CONTROLS
Intelligent Safety conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐ tervene where appropriate. Concept Intelligent Safety enables central operation of the WARNING driver assistance system. Due to system limits, individual functions can malfunction during tow-starting/towing with the General information Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, Intel‐ risk of an accident. Switch all Intelligent Safety ligent Safety consists of one or more systems systems off prior to tow-starting/towing. that can help prevent an imminent collision. ▷ Approach control warning with light braking function, refer to page 168. Overview ▷ Evasion assistance, refer to page 172. Button in the vehicle ▷ Person warning with City light braking func‐ tion, refer to page 174. ▷ Night Vision with pedestrian and animal de‐ tection, refer to page 177. ▷ Lane departure warning, refer to page 181. ▷ Active Blind Spot Detection, refer to page 184. ▷ Side collision warning, refer to page 188.
Safety information Intelligent Safety
WARNING Switching on/off The system cannot serve as a substitute for the Some Intelligent Safety systems are automati‐ driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility cally active after every departure. Some Intelli‐ and traffic situation. There is a risk of an acci‐ gent Safety systems activate according to the dent. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. last setting. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate. Button Status
Button lights up green: all Intelligent Safety systems are switched on. WARNING Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐ Button lights up orange: some Intelli‐ stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due gent Safety systems are switched off to its limits, the system might not output warn‐ or currently unavailable. ings or reactions or these might be output late, Button does not light up: all Intelligent incorrectly, or without justification. There is a Safety systems are switched off. risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traffic
167 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 168
CONTROLS Safety
Press the button: If the vehicle is equipped with a radar sensor, the The menu for the intelligent safety sys‐ approach control warning is additionally control‐ tem is displayed. led via the cruise control radar sensor. If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched off, Intersection warning when equipped with a radar all systems are now switched on. sensor: in addition, a warning is issued at inter‐ sections and junctions if a risk of collision with "Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the crossing traffic is detected. equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐ tems can be individually configured. The individ‐ The approach control warning is available even if ual settings are activated and stored for the cruise control has been deactivated. driver profile currently used. As soon as a setting With the vehicle approaching another vehicle in‐ is changed on the menu, all settings of the menu tentionally, the approach control warning and are activated. braking are delayed in order to avoid false sys‐ tem reactions. Press the button repeatedly. The follow‐ The system issues a two-phase warning of a ing settings are switched between: possible risk of collision with vehicles at speeds "ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h. Time of warnings switched on. Basic settings are activated for the may vary with the current driving situation. sub-functions, for instance setting for warning time. Detection range "INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems are switched on according to the individual settings. Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be indi‐ vidually switched off.
Press and hold this button: All Intelligent Safety systems are switched off.
Objects that the system can detect are taken Approach control warning into account. with light braking function Intersection warning: the system is also able to detect vehicles crossing your direction of travel when these vehicles enter into the detection Concept range of the system. The system can help prevent accidents. If an ac‐ cident cannot be prevented, the system will help reduce the collision speed. Safety information The system sounds a warning before an immi‐ nent collision and activates brakes independ‐ WARNING ently, if needed. The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility General information and traffic situation. There is a risk of an acci‐ The system is controlled using a camera. dent. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions.
168 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 169
Safety CONTROLS
Watch traffic closely and actively intervene Camera where appropriate.
WARNING Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐ stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due to its limits, the system might not output warn‐ ings or reactions or these might be output late, incorrectly, or without justification. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traffic The camera is installed near the interior mirror. conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐ Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror tervene where appropriate. clean and clear.
WARNING With Active Cruise Control: radar Due to system limits, individual functions can sensor malfunction during tow-starting/towing with the Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a risk of an accident. Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to tow-starting/towing.
Overview
Button in the vehicle The radar sensor is located in the lower area of the front bumper. Always keep radar sensor clean and unob‐ structed.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
Intelligent Safety The system is automatically active after every driving off.
Switching on/off manually Press the button. The menu for the intelligent safety sys‐ tem is displayed.
169 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 170
CONTROLS Safety
If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched off, The selected time is stored for the driver profile all systems are now switched on. currently used. "Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐ Warning with braking function tems can be individually configured. The individ‐ ual settings are activated and stored for the Display driver profile currently used. As soon as a setting A warning symbol appears in the instrument is changed on the menu, all settings of the menu cluster and in the Head-up Display if a collision are activated. with a detected vehicle is imminent.
Press the button repeatedly. Symbol Measure The following settings are switched be‐ Symbol lights up red: prewarning. tween: Brake and increase distance. "ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are switched on. Basic settings are activated for the Symbol flashes red and an acoustic subfunctions. signal sounds: acute warning. "INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems are Brake and make an evasive maneu‐ switched on according to the individual settings. ver, if necessary. Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be indi‐ Crossing traffic warning: vidually switched off. Symbol flashes red and an acoustic signal sounds: acute warning when Press and hold this button. vehicles cross your direction of All Intelligent Safety systems are travel. switched off. Brake and make an evasive maneu‐ ver, if necessary. Button Status
Button lights up green: all Intelligent Prewarning Safety systems are switched on. This warning is issued, for instance when there is Button lights up orange: some Intelli‐ the impending danger of a collision or the dis‐ gent Safety systems are switched off tance to the vehicle ahead is too small. or currently unavailable. If a prewarning is issued, intervene in the situa‐ Button does not light up: all Intelligent tion yourself. Safety systems are switched off. Acute warning with braking function Setting the warning time Acute warning is displayed in case of the immi‐ nent danger of a collision when the vehicle ap‐ Via iDrive: proaches another object at a high differential 1. "My Vehicle" speed. 2. "Vehicle settings" If an acute warning is issued, intervene in the sit‐ 3. "Intelligent Safety" uation yourself. If necessary, the system provides assistance, such as with an automatic braking in‐ 4. "Frontal Collision Warn." tervention, in a possible risk of collision. 5. Select the desired setting.
170 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 171
Safety CONTROLS
Acute warnings can also be triggered without At speeds above approx. 130 mph/210 km/h, the previous forewarning. braking intervention occurs as a brief braking pressure. No automatic delay occurs. Brake intervention, City light The driver may cancel the braking intervention braking function by stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐ The warning prompts the driver to react. During tively moving the steering wheel. a warning, the maximum braking force is used Cross-traffic warning: brake intervention is not when the brake is actuated. Prerequisite is suffi‐ performed in the event of cross traffic. ciently quick and hard stepping on the brake Object detection can be restricted. Follow the pedal. limitations of the detection range and functional The system can additionally assist possibly with restrictions. automatic braking intervention if there is a risk of a collision. System limits When the vehicle is traveling at a low speed, the vehicle may come to a complete stop. Safety information The braking intervention takes place up to ap‐ prox. 50 mph/80 km/h. WARNING The braking intervention occurs only if vehicle The system can react not at all, too late, incor‐ stability has not been restricted, for instance by rectly, or without justification due to the system deactivating the DSC Dynamic Stability Control. limits. There is a risk of accidents or risk of The driver may cancel the braking intervention damage to property. Follow the information re‐ by stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐ garding the system limits and actively intervene tively moving the steering wheel. if needed. Object detection can be restricted. Follow the limitations of the detection range and functional restrictions. Upper speed limit If the vehicle speed exceeds approx. With radar sensor and Active Cruise 155 mph/250 km/h, the system is deactivated Control: braking intervention temporarily. As soon as the speed drops back down below this value, the system once again The warning prompts the driver to react. During responds according to the setting. a warning, the maximum braking force is used when the brake is actuated. Prerequisite is suffi‐ Intersection warning: the vehicle responds to ciently quick and hard stepping on the brake crossing traffic if its own speed is below approx. pedal. 40 mph/65 km/h. The system can assist with automatic braking in‐ tervention if there is a risk of a collision. Detection range The system's detection potential is limited. The braking intervention can bring the vehicle to a complete stop. Thus, a system reaction might not come or might come late. The braking intervention occurs only if vehicle stability has not been restricted, for instance by The following situations may not be detected, for deactivating the DSC Dynamic Stability Control. instance: ▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach them at high speed.
171 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 172
CONTROLS Safety
▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of you, Evasion assistance or sharply decelerating vehicles. ▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance. Concept ▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you. The system supports the driver in making eva‐ ▷ Intersection warning: crossing vehicles if their sive maneuvers in certain situations, such as speed is higher than your own speed. when obstacles suddenly appear.
Functional limitations General information The system may not be fully functional in the fol‐ The system issues a warning and intervenes to lowing situations: support the driver if a lateral evasive maneuver is ▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall. possible. Sensors monitor and detect the clear‐ ▷ In tight curves. ance around the vehicle. If the system identifies ▷ If the driving stability control systems are lim‐ space alongside the vehicle, it supports an eva‐ ited or deactivated, for instance DSC OFF. sive maneuver begun by the driver by safely pro‐ viding targeted steering support. ▷ If the field of view of the camera or the wind‐ shield is dirty or covered in the area of the in‐ Detection range terior mirror. ▷ If the camera has overheated and been tem‐ porarily switched off due to excessively high temperatures. ▷ Depending on the equipment: if the radar sensors are dirty or covered. ▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the engine via the Start/Stop button. ▷ During calibration of the camera immediately after vehicle delivery. Objects that the system can detect are taken ▷ If there are constant blinding effects because into account. of oncoming light, for instance from the sun low in the sky. Safety information Warning sensitivity The more sensitive the warning settings are, for WARNING example the warning time, the more warnings are The system cannot serve as a substitute for the displayed. Therefore, there may also be an ex‐ driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility cess of premature or unjustified warnings and re‐ and traffic situation. There is a risk of an acci‐ actions. dent. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.
172 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 173
Safety CONTROLS
WARNING Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐ stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due to its limits, the system might not output warn‐ ings or reactions or these might be output late, incorrectly, or without justification. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐ tervene where appropriate. Rear bumper. Always keep the bumper in the area of the radar sensors clean and unobstructed. Overview
Radar sensors Camera The radar sensors are located in the bumpers.
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Front center bumper. Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror clean and clear.
Functional requirements ▷ Approach control warning with light braking function, refer to page 168, is switched on. ▷ Sensors detect sufficient clearance around the vehicle.
Switching on/off Front side bumper. The system is automatically active after every driving off.
173 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 174
CONTROLS Safety
Warning with evasion support Thus, a system reaction might not come or might come late. Display in the instrument cluster E.g., the following situations may not be de‐ A warning symbol appears in the instrument tected: cluster and in the Head-up Display if a collision ▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach with a detected vehicle is imminent. them at high speed. Symbol Measure ▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of you, or sharply decelerating vehicles. Symbol lights up red: prewarning. ▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance. Brake and increase distance. ▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you. Symbol flashes red and an acoustic signal sounds: acute warning. Functional limitations Brake and make an evasive maneu‐ The system may not be fully functional in the fol‐ ver, if necessary. lowing situations: ▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall. Acute warning with evasion support ▷ In tight curves. Acute warning is displayed in case of the immi‐ ▷ If the driving stability control systems are lim‐ nent danger of a collision when the vehicle ap‐ ited or deactivated, for instance DSC OFF. proaches another object at a high differential ▷ If the field of view of the camera or the wind‐ speed. shield is dirty or covered in the area of the in‐ If an acute warning is issued, intervene in the sit‐ terior mirror. uation yourself. If there is a risk of collision, the ▷ If the camera has overheated and been tem‐ driver's evasive maneuvers are supported by the porarily switched off due to excessively high system. temperatures. Acute warnings can also be triggered without ▷ Depending on the equipment: if the radar previous forewarning. sensors are dirty or covered. ▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the engine System limits via the Start/Stop button. ▷ During calibration of the camera immediately Safety information after vehicle delivery. ▷ If there are constant blinding effects because WARNING of oncoming light, for instance from the sun The system can react not at all, too late, incor‐ low in the sky. rectly, or without justification due to the system limits. There is a risk of accidents or risk of damage to property. Follow the information re‐ Person warning with City garding the system limits and actively intervene light braking function if needed. Concept Detection range The system can help prevent accidents with pe‐ The system's detection potential is limited. destrians.
174 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 175
Safety CONTROLS
When driving at city speeds, the system will is‐ Watch traffic closely and actively intervene sue a warning if there is imminent risk of a colli‐ where appropriate. sion with pedestrians, and support with a braking function. WARNING General information Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐ The system is active at speeds of approx. stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due 3 mph/5 km/h up to approx. 40 mph/65 km/h. to its limits, the system might not output warn‐ The system reacts to people who are within the ings or reactions or these might be output late, detection range of the system. incorrectly, or without justification. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traffic The camera in the area of the interior mirror con‐ conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐ trols the system. tervene where appropriate. Detection range
WARNING Due to system limits, individual functions can malfunction during tow-starting/towing with the Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a risk of an accident. Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to tow-starting/towing.
Overview The detection area in front of the vehicle is div‐ ided into two areas: Button in the vehicle ▷ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the vehicle. ▷ Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and left of the central area. A collision is imminent if pedestrians are located within the central area. A warning is issued about pedestrians who are located within the extended area only if they are moving in the direction of the central area. Intelligent Safety Safety information
WARNING The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility and traffic situation. There is a risk of an acci‐ dent. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions.
175 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 176
CONTROLS Safety
Camera Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be indi‐ vidually switched off.
Press and hold this button. All Intelligent Safety systems are switched off.
Button Status
Button lights up green: all Intelligent Safety systems are switched on. The camera is installed near the interior mirror. Button lights up orange: some Intelli‐ Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror gent Safety systems are switched off clean and clear. or currently unavailable.
Button does not light up: all Intelligent Switching on/off Safety systems are switched off.
Switching on automatically Warning with braking function The system is automatically active after every driving off. Display If a collision with a person detected in this way is Switching on/off manually imminent, a warning symbol appears on the in‐ Press the button. strument cluster and in the Head-up Display. The menu for the intelligent safety sys‐ The red symbol is displayed and a signal tem is displayed. sounds. If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched off, all systems are now switched on. Alternatively, depending on the vehicle "Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the equipment, a red warning triangle lights equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐ up in the instrument cluster. tems can be individually configured. The individ‐ Intervene immediately by braking or make an ual settings are activated and stored for the evasive maneuver. driver profile currently used. As soon as a setting is changed on the menu, all settings of the menu Braking intervention are activated. The warning prompts the driver to react. During Press the button repeatedly. a warning, the maximum braking force is used when the brake is actuated. Prerequisite for the The following settings are switched be‐ brake booster is sufficiently quick and hard step‐ tween: ping on the brake pedal. "ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are If there is a risk of collision, the system may also switched on. Basic settings are activated for the assist with braking. subfunctions. When the vehicle is traveling at a low speed, the "INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems are vehicle may come to a complete stop. switched on according to the individual settings.
176 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 177
Safety CONTROLS
The braking intervention occurs only if vehicle ▷ If the driving stability control systems are de‐ stability has not been restricted, for instance by activated, for instance DSC OFF. deactivating the DSC Dynamic Stability Control. ▷ If the field of view of the camera or the wind‐ The driver may cancel the braking intervention shield is dirty or covered in the area of the in‐ by stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐ terior mirror. tively moving the steering wheel. ▷ If the camera has overheated and been tem‐ Object detection can be restricted. Follow the porarily switched off due to excessively high limitations of the detection range and functional temperatures. restrictions. ▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the engine via the Start/Stop button. System limits ▷ During calibration of the camera immediately after vehicle delivery. Safety information ▷ If there are constant blinding effects because of oncoming light, for instance from the sun WARNING low in the sky. The system can react not at all, too late, incor‐ ▷ When it is dark outside. rectly, or without justification due to the system limits. There is a risk of accidents or risk of damage to property. Follow the information re‐ Night Vision with garding the system limits and actively intervene pedestrian and animal if needed. detection
Detection range Concept The detection potential of the camera is limited. Night Vision with pedestrian and animal detec‐ Thus, a warning might not be issued or be is‐ tion is a night vision system. sued late. An infrared camera scans the area in front of the The following situations may not be detected, for vehicle and issues a warning if it detects pedes‐ instance: trians and animals on the street. The system de‐ ▷ Partially covered pedestrians. tects warm objects that are similar in shape to ▷ Pedestrians that are not detected as such be‐ human beings or animals. If necessary, the ther‐ cause of the viewing angle or contour. mal image can be displayed on the Control Dis‐ play. ▷ Pedestrians outside of the detection range. ▷ Pedestrians having a body size less than 32 in/80 cm.
Functional limitations The system may not be fully functional or may not be available in the following situations: ▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall. ▷ In tight curves.
177 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 178
CONTROLS Safety
General information In addition, the system also detects animals above a certain minimum size, for instance deer. Thermal image Display on the Control Display with thermal im‐ age activated: ▷ People detected by the system: in light yel‐ low. ▷ Animals detected by the system: in dark yel‐ low.
Range of object detection, with good ambient conditions: ▷ Pedestrian detection: up to approx. The image shows the heat radiated by objects in 330 ft/100 m. the field of view of the camera. ▷ Detection of large animals: up to approx. Warm objects have a light appearance and cold 490 ft/150 m. objects a dark appearance. ▷ Detection of medium animals: up to approx. The ability to detect an object depends on the 230 ft/70 m. temperature difference between the object and Environmental influences can limit the availability the background and on the level of heat radiation of object detection. emitted by the object. Objects that are similar in If the vehicle systems detect that the vehicle is temperature to the environment or that radiate located in a residential area, the animal detection very little heat are difficult to detect. is temporarily switched off. For safety reasons, when driving at speeds above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h and in low ambient Safety information light, the image is only displayed when the low beams are switched on. WARNING A still image is displayed at regular intervals for a The system cannot serve as a substitute for the fraction of a second. driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility and traffic situation. There is a risk of an acci‐ Pedestrian and animal detection dent. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.
WARNING Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐ stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due to its limits, the system might not output warn‐ ings or reactions or these might be output late, Object detection and warning only functions in incorrectly, or without justification. There is a darkness. risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traffic Objects whose form is similar to people with suf‐ ficient heat radiation are detected. 178 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 179
Safety CONTROLS
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐ When the vehicle lighting is switched on, the tervene where appropriate. camera objective is cleaned at regular intervals when the windshield washer system, refer to page 129, is activated. Overview Switching on Buttons in the vehicle Switching on automatically When it is dark outside, the system is automati‐ cally active after every driving off.
Switching on the thermal image The thermal image from the Night Vision camera can be displayed on the Control Display in addi‐ tion to the warning function. This function has no effect on object detection. Intelligent Safety Press button.
The image from the camera is displayed on the Control Display.
Adjusting the thermal image Brightness and contrast can be adjusted, when the thermal image is switched on. Via iDrive: 1. Select brightness or contrast. Thermal image ▷ "Brightness". ▷ "Contrast". 2. Set the desired value. Camera Warning function
Display
Symbol Meaning
Person warning.
Animal warning. The camera is automatically heated when the ex‐ ternal temperatures are low.
179 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 180
CONTROLS Safety
Symbol Meaning With animal warnings, no distinction is made be‐ tween the central or expanded area. Symbol lights up Prewarning. The entire area moves along with the vehicle in red. the direction of the steering angle and changes Symbol flashes Acute warning. with the vehicle speed. As the vehicle speed in‐ red and a signal creases, the area becomes, for instance longer sounds. and wider.
Alternatively, depending on the vehicle equipment, a Prewarning red warning triangle lights Prewarning for persons is displayed when a per‐ up or flashes in the instru‐ son is detected in the central area immediately in ment cluster. front of the vehicle as well as on the left or right side in the extended area. The displayed symbol may vary and shows the Prewarning for animals is displayed when an ani‐ side of the road on which the person or animal mal is detected in the front of the vehicle. was detected. If a prewarning is issued, intervene by braking or making an evasive maneuver. Warning of people or animals in danger Acute warning If a collision with a person or an animal detected Acute warning is displayed if a person or an ani‐ in this way is imminent, a warning symbol ap‐ mal is detected in direct proximity in front of the pears on the instrument cluster and in the Head- vehicle. up Display. If an acute warning is issued, brake or make an Although both the shape and the heat radiation evasive maneuver immediately. are analyzed, false warnings cannot be ruled out. Display in the Head-up Display Warning area in front of the vehicle The warning is displayed simultaneously in the Head-up Display and on the instrument cluster.
System limits
Basic limits The system may not be fully functional in the fol‐ lowing situations: ▷ On steep hills, in steep depressions or in tight curves. The warning area for the person warning con‐ sists of two parts: ▷ If the camera is soiled or damaged. ▷ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the ▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall. vehicle. ▷ At very high external temperatures. ▷ Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and left of the central area.
180 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 181
Safety CONTROLS
Limits of pedestrian and animal Vehicles with side collision warning: if in the detection speed range up to 130 mph/210 km/h a lane marking is crossed, the system intervenes with a In some situations, it may occur that pedestrians brief active steering intervention in addition to vi‐ are detected as animals or animals as pedes‐ brating. The system thus helps keep the vehicle trians. in the lane. Small animals are not detected by the object de‐ tection function, even if they are clearly visible in Safety information the image. Limited detection, for instance in the following circumstances: WARNING ▷ People or animals who are fully or partially The system cannot serve as a substitute for the covered, especially when their heads are cov‐ driver’s personal judgment in assessing road ered. and traffic safety. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch ▷ People who are not in an upright position, for traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐ instance lying down. propriate. Do not jerk the steering wheel in re‐ ▷ Cyclists on unconventional bicycles (e.g., re‐ sponse to a warning. cumbent bicycles). ▷ After physical damage to the system, for in‐ stance after an accident. WARNING Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐ Lane departure warning stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due to its limits, the system might not output warn‐ ings or reactions or these might be output late, Concept incorrectly, or without justification. There is a The lane departure warning alerts when the vehi‐ risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traffic cle on roads with lane markings is about to leave conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐ the lane. tervene where appropriate.
General information Functional requirements This camera-based system warns starting at a The camera must detect the lane markings for minimum speed. the lane departure warning to be active. The minimum speed is country-specific and is displayed in the menu for the Intelligent Safety systems. Warnings are issued by means of a steering wheel vibration. The severity of the steering wheel vibration can be adjusted. The time of the warning may vary depending on the current driv‐ ing situation. The system does not provide a warning if the turn signal is set before leaving the lane.
181 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 182
CONTROLS Safety
Overview "Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐ Button in the vehicle tems can be individually configured. The individ‐ ual settings are activated and stored for the driver profile currently used. As soon as a setting is changed on the menu, all settings of the menu are activated.
Press the button repeatedly. The following settings are switched be‐ tween: "ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are switched on. Basic settings are activated for the Intelligent Safety subfunctions. "INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems are switched on according to the individual settings. Camera Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be indi‐ vidually switched off.
Press and hold this button. All Intelligent Safety systems are switched off.
Button Status
Button lights up green: all Intelligent Safety systems are switched on. The camera is installed near the interior mirror. Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror Button lights up orange: some Intelli‐ clean and clear. gent Safety systems are switched off or currently unavailable. Switching on/off Button does not light up: all Intelligent Safety systems are switched off. Switching on automatically The lane departure warning activates automati‐ Setting the warning frequency cally after departure if the function was switched Via iDrive: on at the end of the last trip. 1. "My Vehicle" Switching on/off manually 2. "Vehicle settings" Press the button. 3. "Intelligent Safety" The menu for the intelligent safety sys‐ 4. "Lane Departure Warn." tem is displayed. 5. Select the desired setting. If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched off, all systems are now switched on.
182 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 183
Safety CONTROLS
▷ "Always": the system issues a warning Display in the instrument cluster whenever a hazardous situation is de‐ tected. The system illuminates green: at least one lane marking was detected and ▷ "Reduced": some warnings are sup‐ warnings can be issued. pressed depending on the situation, for instance during passing without a turn signal or when purposely driving over lane Warning function markings in curves. ▷ "Off": no warnings are issued. If you leave the lane The selected setting is stored for the driver pro‐ If you leave the lane and if a lane marking has file currently used. been detected, the steering wheel vibrates in ac‐ cordance with the steering wheel vibration set‐ Setting the force of the steering ting. wheel vibration If the turn signal is switched on before changing Via iDrive: the lane, a warning is not issued. 1. "My Vehicle" With side collision warning 2. "Vehicle settings" If in the speed range up to 130 mph/210 km/h a 3. "Steering wheel vibration" lane marking is crossed, the system intervenes 4. Select the desired setting. with a brief active steering intervention in addi‐ tion to vibrating. The steering intervention helps The setting is applied to all Intelligent Safety sys‐ keep the vehicle in the lane. The steering inter‐ tems and stored for the driver profile currently vention can be noticed on the steering wheel used. and can be manually overridden at any time.
Vehicles with side collision warning: End of warning switching steering intervention The warning is canceled in the following situa‐ on/off tions: The steering intervention can be switched on ▷ Automatically after approx. 3 seconds. and off separately for Active Blind Spot Detec‐ tion and lane departure warning. ▷ When returning to your own lane. Via iDrive: ▷ When braking hard. ▷ When using the turn signal. 1. "My Vehicle" ▷ If DSC Dynamic Stability Control intervenes. 2. "Vehicle settings" 3. "Intelligent Safety" 4. "Steering intervention" The selected setting is stored for the driver pro‐ file currently used.
183 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 184
CONTROLS Safety
System limits Active Blind Spot Detection Safety information Concept Active Blind Spot Detection detects vehicles in WARNING the blind spot or vehicles approaching from be‐ The system can react not at all, too late, incor‐ hind in the adjacent lane. A warning is issued in rectly, or without justification due to the system various gradations in these situations. limits. There is a risk of accidents or risk of damage to property. Follow the information re‐ General information garding the system limits and actively intervene if needed.
Functional limitations The system may not be fully functional in the fol‐ lowing situations: ▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall. ▷ In the event of missing, worn, poorly visible, merging, diverging, or multiple lane markings Two radar sensors in the rear bumper monitor such as in construction areas. the area behind and next to the vehicle when ▷ When lane markings are covered in snow, ice, traveling faster than a minimum speed. dirt or water. The minimum speed is shown in the menu for ▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes. the Intelligent Safety systems. ▷ When the lane markings are covered by ob‐ The system indicates whether there are vehicles jects. in the blind spot, arrow 1, or approaching from ▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in front behind in the adjacent lane, arrow 2. of you. The light in the exterior mirror lights up dimmed. ▷ If there are constant blinding effects because Before you change lanes after setting the turn of oncoming light, for instance from the sun signal, the system issues a warning in the situa‐ low in the sky. tions described above. ▷ If the field of view of the camera or the wind‐ The light in the exterior mirror flashes and the shield is dirty or covered in the area of the in‐ steering wheel vibrates. terior mirror. Vehicles with side collision warning: at speeds ▷ If the camera has overheated and been tem‐ between 45 mph/70 km/h and porarily switched off due to excessively high 130 mph/210 km/h, the system can intervene temperatures. with a brief active steering intervention and help ▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the engine to return the vehicle into the lane. via the Start/Stop button. ▷ During calibration of the camera immediately after vehicle delivery. A Check Control message is displayed when the system is not fully functional.
184 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 185
Safety CONTROLS
Safety information Radar sensors
WARNING The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility and traffic situation. There is a risk of an acci‐ dent. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.
The radar sensors are located in the rear bumper. WARNING Always keep the bumper in the area of the radar Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐ sensors clean and unobstructed. stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due to its limits, the system might not output warn‐ ings or reactions or these might be output late, Switching on/off incorrectly, or without justification. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traffic Switching on automatically conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐ The Active Blind Spot Detection is automatically tervene where appropriate. activated after departure if the function was switched on at the end of the last trip. Overview Switching on/off manually Button in the vehicle Press the button. The menu for the intelligent safety sys‐ tem is displayed. If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched off, all systems are now switched on. "Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐ tems can be individually configured. The individ‐ ual settings are activated and stored for the driver profile currently used. As soon as a setting Intelligent Safety is changed on the menu, all settings of the menu are activated.
Press the button repeatedly. The following settings are switched be‐ tween: "ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are switched on. Basic settings are activated for the subfunctions.
185 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 186
CONTROLS Safety
"INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems are Vehicles with side collision warning: switched on according to the individual settings. switching steering intervention Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be indi‐ on/off vidually switched off. The steering intervention can be switched on and off separately for Active Blind Spot Detec‐ Press and hold this button. tion and lane departure warning. All Intelligent Safety systems are Via iDrive: switched off. 1. "My Vehicle" Button Status 2. "Vehicle settings" Button lights up green: all Intelligent 3. "Intelligent Safety" Safety systems are switched on. 4. "Steering intervention" Button lights up orange: some Intelli‐ The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ gent Safety systems are switched off rently used. or currently unavailable. Warning function Button does not light up: all Intelligent Safety systems are switched off. Light in the exterior mirror Setting the warning time Via iDrive: 1. "My Vehicle" 2. "Vehicle settings" 3. "Intelligent Safety" 4. "Blind Spot Detection" 5. Select the desired setting. "Off": with this setting, no warning is output. Prewarning The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ rently used. The dimmed light in the exterior mirror indicates when there are vehicles in the blind spot or ap‐ Setting the force of the steering proaching from behind. wheel vibration Acute warning Via iDrive: If the turn signal is switched on while a vehicle is 1. "My Vehicle" in the critical zone, the steering wheel vibrates 2. "Vehicle settings" briefly and the light in the exterior mirror flashes brightly. 3. "Steering wheel vibration" The warning stops when the turn signal is 4. Select the desired setting. switched off, or the other vehicle leaves the criti‐ The setting is applied to all Intelligent Safety sys‐ cal zone. tems and stored for the driver profile currently used.
186 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 187
Safety CONTROLS
With side collision warning ▷ If the bumper is dirty, iced up, or covered, If at speeds between 45 mph/70 km/h and for instance by stickers. 130 mph/210 km/h the vibrating steering wheel ▷ If cargo protrudes. is ignored and the lane marking crossed, the sys‐ For vehicles with side collision warning, the tem intervenes with a brief active steering inter‐ steering intervention can be limited, for instance vention. The steering intervention helps return in the following situation: the vehicle into the lane. The steering interven‐ ▷ In the event of missing, worn, poorly visible, tion can be noticed on the steering wheel and merging, diverging, or multiple lane markings can be manually overridden at any time. such as in construction areas. Flashing of the light ▷ When lane markings are covered in snow, ice, dirt or water. A flashing of the light during vehicle unlocking serves as system self-test. ▷ When the lane markings are not white. ▷ When the lane markings are covered by ob‐ System limits jects. ▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in front Safety information of you. ▷ If there are constant blinding effects because WARNING of oncoming light, for instance from the sun low in the sky. The system can react not at all, too late, incor‐ rectly, or without justification due to the system ▷ If the field of view of the camera or the wind‐ limits. There is a risk of accidents or risk of shield is dirty or covered in the area of the in‐ damage to property. Follow the information re‐ terior mirror. garding the system limits and actively intervene ▷ If the camera has overheated and been tem‐ if needed. porarily switched off due to excessively high temperatures. ▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the engine Upper speed limit via the Start/Stop button. If the vehicle speed exceeds approx. ▷ During calibration of the camera immediately 155 mph/250 km/h, the system is deactivated after vehicle delivery. temporarily. A Check Control message is displayed when the If the vehicle speed falls below approx. system is not fully functional. 155 mph/250 km/h, the system once again re‐ sponds according to the setting. Displaying warnings Functional limitations Depending on the selected warning settings, for instance warning time, more warnings can be The system may not be fully functional in the fol‐ displayed. However, there may also be an excess lowing situations: of premature warnings of critical situations. ▷ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed much faster than your own. ▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall. ▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.
187 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 188
CONTROLS Safety
Side collision warning WARNING Concept Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐ stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due The system helps to avoid imminent side colli‐ to its limits, the system might not output warn‐ sions. ings or reactions or these might be output late, incorrectly, or without justification. There is a General information risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐ tervene where appropriate.
Functional requirements The camera must detect the lane markings for the side collision warning with steering interven‐ tion to be active.
Four radar sensors in the bumpers monitor the Overview area next to the vehicle in the speed range from approx. 45 mph/70 km/h to ap‐ Button in the vehicle prox. 130 mph/210 km/h. The front camera determines the lane marking positions. If, for instance another vehicle is detected next to the vehicle and if there is a risk of collision with this vehicle, the system helps avoid the collision via steering intervention.
Safety information Intelligent Safety
WARNING The system cannot serve as a substitute for the Radar sensors driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility The radar sensors are located in the bumpers. and traffic situation. There is a risk of an acci‐ dent. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.
188 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 189
Safety CONTROLS
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically The side collision warning activates automatically after departure if the function was switched on at the end of the last trip.
Switching on/off manually
Front bumper. Press the button. The menu for the intelligent safety sys‐ tem is displayed. If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched off, all systems are now switched on. "Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐ tems can be individually configured. The individ‐ ual settings are activated and stored for the driver profile currently used. As soon as a setting is changed on the menu, all settings of the menu Rear bumper. are activated. Always keep the bumper in the area of the radar sensors clean and unobstructed. Press the button repeatedly. The following settings are switched be‐ Camera tween: "ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are switched on. Basic settings are activated for the subfunctions. "INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems are switched on according to the individual settings. Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be indi‐ vidually switched off.
Press and hold this button. The camera is installed near the interior mirror. All Intelligent Safety systems are Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror switched off. clean and clear.
189 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 190
CONTROLS Safety
Button Status garding the system limits and actively intervene if needed. Button lights up green: all Intelligent Safety systems are switched on. Functional limitations Button lights up orange: some Intelli‐ gent Safety systems are switched off The system may not be fully functional in the fol‐ or currently unavailable. lowing situations: ▷ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed Button does not light up: all Intelligent much faster than your own. Safety systems are switched off. ▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall. Warning function ▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes. ▷ If the bumper is dirty, iced up, or covered, Light in the exterior mirror for instance by stickers. ▷ If cargo protrudes. ▷ In the event of missing, worn, poorly visible, merging, diverging, or multiple lane markings such as in construction areas. ▷ When lane markings are covered in snow, ice, dirt or water. ▷ When the lane markings are covered by ob‐ jects. ▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in front of you. If there is a risk of collision ▷ If there are constant blinding effects because If there is a risk of collision, the light in the exte‐ of oncoming light, for instance from the sun rior mirror flashes and the steering wheel vi‐ low in the sky. brates. An active steering intervention takes place to prevent collisions and maintain the vehi‐ ▷ If the field of view of the camera or the wind‐ cle within its own lane. The steering intervention shield is dirty or covered in the area of the in‐ can be noticed on the steering wheel and can be terior mirror. manually overridden at any time. ▷ If the camera has overheated and been tem‐ porarily switched off due to excessively high System limits temperatures. ▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the engine Safety information via the Start/Stop button. ▷ During calibration of the camera immediately WARNING after vehicle delivery. The system can react not at all, too late, incor‐ A Check Control message is displayed when the rectly, or without justification due to the system system is not fully functional. limits. There is a risk of accidents or risk of damage to property. Follow the information re‐
190 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 191
Safety CONTROLS
Rear collision prevention conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐ tervene where appropriate. Concept The system reacts to vehicles approaching from Overview behind. Radar sensors General information
The radar sensors are located in the rear Two radar sensors in the rear bumper monitor bumper. the area behind the vehicle. Always keep the bumper in the area of the radar If a vehicle approaches from the rear at a certain sensors clean and unobstructed. speed, the system responds as follows: ▷ Active Protection, refer to page 192: if a colli‐ Switching on/off sion seems to be unavoidable, PreCrash The system is automatically active after every functions are triggered. driving off. The system is deactivated in the following situa‐ Safety information tions: ▷ When driving in reverse. WARNING ▷ If the trailer power socket is in use or trailer The system cannot serve as a substitute for the towing is activated, for instance during opera‐ driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility tion with trailer or bicycle rack. and traffic situation. There is a risk of an acci‐ dent. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. System limits Watch traffic closely and actively intervene The system may not be fully functional in the fol‐ where appropriate. lowing situations: ▷ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed much faster than your own. WARNING ▷ When the approaching vehicle approaches Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐ slowly. stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due ▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall. to its limits, the system might not output warn‐ ings or reactions or these might be output late, ▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes. incorrectly, or without justification. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traffic
191 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 192
CONTROLS Safety
▷ If the bumper is dirty, iced up, or covered, traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐ for instance by stickers. propriate. ▷ If cargo protrudes. Function Active Protection When the safety belt is fastened, the driver's and passenger's belt straps are automatically tight‐ Concept ened once after driving away. In accident-critical situations, the following indi‐ Active Protection prepares occupants and the vidual functions become active as needed: vehicle for a possible accident in critical driving or collision situations. ▷ Automatic pretensioning of the front safety belts. General information ▷ Automatic window closing up to a narrow Active Protection consists of various PreCrash gap. functions, which can vary depending on the ▷ Automatic closing of the glass sunroof, in‐ equipment. cluding sun protection. The system is used to detect certain critical driv‐ ▷ For vehicles equipped with comfort seats in ing situations that might lead to an accident. This the front: automatic positioning of the back‐ includes the following critical driving situations: rest for the front passenger seat. ▷ Emergency stop. After a critical driving situation without an acci‐ ▷ Severe understeering. dent, the front safety belts are loosened again. ▷ Severe oversteering. If the belt tension does not loosen automatically, stop the vehicle and unbuckle the safety belt us‐ Certain functions of several systems can, within ing the red button in the buckle. Fasten the the system limits, lead to Active Protection trig‐ safety belt before continuing on your trip. gering: All other systems can be restored to the desired ▷ Approach control warning with braking func‐ setting. tion: automatic brake intervention. ▷ Approach control warning with braking func‐ tion: brake booster. PostCrash – iBrake ▷ Night Vision with pedestrian and animal de‐ tection: brake booster. Concept ▷ Rear collision prevention: detection of immi‐ In the event of an accident, the system can bring nent rear collisions. the vehicle to a halt automatically without inter‐ vention by the driver in certain situations. This Safety information can reduce the risk of a further collision and the consequences thereof. WARNING At standstill The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due to the system After coming to a halt, the brake is released auto‐ limits, critical situation could not be detected matically. reliably or in time. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch 192 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 193
Safety CONTROLS
Harder vehicle braking After travel has begun, the system monitors cer‐ tain aspects of the driver's behavior, so that de‐ It can be necessary to bring the vehicle in certain creasing alertness or fatigue can be detected. situations to a halt quicker. This procedure takes the following criteria into To do this, for a short time the braking pressure account: applied when stepping on the brake pedal must be higher than the braking pressure achieved by ▷ Personal driving style, for instance steering the automatic braking function. This interrupts behavior. automatic braking. ▷ Driving conditions, for instance length of trip. Starting at approx. 43 mph/70 km/h, the system Interrupting automatic braking is active and can also display a recommendation It can be necessary to interrupt automatic brak‐ to take a break. ing in certain situations, for instance for an eva‐ sive maneuver. Break recommendation Interrupt automatic braking: ▷ By pressing the brake pedal. Switching on/off, adjusting ▷ By pressing the accelerator pedal. The alertness assistant is active automatically with each switching on of drive-ready state and can thus display a break recommendation. Alertness assistant The break recommendation can also be switched on or off and adjusted via iDrive. Concept Via iDrive: The system can detect decreasing alertness or 1. "My Vehicle" fatigue of the driver during long, monotonous 2. "Vehicle settings" trips, for instance on highways. In this situation, it 3. "Driver attention control" is recommended that the driver takes a break. 4. Select desired setting: Safety information ▷ "Off": no break recommendation is made. ▷ "Standard": the break recommendation is WARNING made with a defined value. The system cannot serve as a substitute for the ▷ "Sensitive": the break recommendation is driver’s personal judgment in assessing one's issued earlier. physical state. An increasing lack of alertness or fatigue may not be detected or not be detected Display in time. There is a risk of an accident. Make If the driver becomes less alert or fatigued, a sure that the driver is rested and alert. Adjust message is displayed in the Control Display with driving style to traffic conditions. the recommendation to take a break. During the display, the following settings can be selected: Function ▷ "Do not ask again" The system is switched on each time drive-ready ▷ "Places to stop" state is switched on. ▷ "Remind me later"
193 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 194
CONTROLS Safety
The break recommendation is repeated after 20 minutes. After a break, another recommendation to take a break cannot be displayed until after approxi‐ mately 45 minutes.
System limits The function may be limited in the following sit‐ uations, for instance and will either output an in‐ correct warning or no warning at all: ▷ When the clock is set incorrectly. ▷ When the vehicle speed is mainly below about 43 mph/70 km/h. ▷ With a sporty driving style, such as during rapid acceleration or when cornering fast. ▷ In active driving situations, such as when changing lanes frequently. ▷ When the road surface is poor. ▷ In the event of strong side winds. The system is reset approx. 45 minutes after parking the vehicle, for instance in the case of a break during longer trips on highways.
194 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 195
Driving stability control systems CONTROLS
Driving stability control systems
Vehicle features and Adaptive brake assistant options In combination with Active Cruise Control, this system ensures that the brakes respond even This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ more rapidly when braking in critical situations. cific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to Drive-off assistant safety-related functions and systems. When us‐ ing these functions and systems, the applicable Concept laws and regulations must be observed. This system supports driving off on uphill grades.
Anti-lock Braking System Driving away ABS 1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot brake. 2. Release the foot brake and drive off without delay. ABS prevents locking of the wheels during brak‐ ing. After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is held in place for approx. 2 seconds. The vehicle maintains its steering power even during full brake applications, thus increasing ac‐ Depending on the vehicle loading or when a tive safety. trailer is used, the vehicle may roll back slightly. ABS is operational every time you start the en‐ gine. DSC Dynamic Stability Control Brake assistant Concept When you apply the brakes rapidly, the system automatically produces the greatest possible Within the physical limits, the system helps to braking force boost. It reduces the braking dis‐ keep the vehicle on a steady course by reducing tance to a minimum during emergency stop. engine speed and by braking the individual This system utilizes all of the capabilities pro‐ wheels. vided by the Antilock Brake System ABS. General information Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal for the duration of the emergency stop. DSC detects the following unstable driving con‐ ditions, for instance: ▷ Fishtailing, which can lead to oversteering. ▷ Loss of traction of the front wheels, which can lead to understeering.
195 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 196
CONTROLS Driving stability control systems
Safety information Deactivating/activating DSC
General information WARNING When DSC is deactivated, driving stability is re‐ The system cannot serve as a substitute for the duced during acceleration and when driving in driver’s personal judgment in assessing the curves. traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐ tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again situations. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust as soon as possible. driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropri‐ Deactivating DSC ate. Hold the button down until DSC OFF is displayed in the instrument cluster and the DSC OFF indicator light is illuminated. WARNING When driving with a roof load, for instance with Activating DSC roof-mounted luggage rack, the vehicle's cen‐ ter of gravity is higher, which increases the risk Press button. of the vehicle tipping in critical driving situa‐ DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator tions. There is a risk of accidents or risk of light go out. damage to property. Do not deactivate DSC Dynamic Stability Control when driving with roof load. Display In the instrument cluster Overview When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is displayed in the instrument cluster. Button in the vehicle Indicator/warning lights The indicator light lights up: DSC is de‐ activated.
The indicator light flashes: DSC controls the drive and braking forces. The indicator light lights up: DSC has malfunctioned.
DSC OFF
196 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 197
Driving stability control systems CONTROLS
DTC Dynamic Traction Activating/deactivating DTC Control Activating DTC Press button. Concept TRACTION is displayed in the instru‐ DTC is a version of the DSC Dynamic Stability ment cluster and the indicator light for DSC OFF Control where forward momentum is optimized. lights up. The system ensures maximum headway on spe‐ cial road conditions or loose road surfaces, for in‐ stance unplowed snowy roads, but with some‐ Deactivating DTC what limited driving stability. Press button again. TRACTION and the DSC OFF indicator General information light go out. When DTC is activated, the vehicle has maxi‐ mum traction. Driving stability is limited during Display acceleration and when driving in curves. You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC in Display in the instrument cluster the following situations: If DTC is activated, TRACTION is displayed in ▷ When driving in slush or on uncleared, snow- the instrument cluster. covered roads. ▷ When driving off from deep snow or loose Indicator/warning lights ground. The indicator light lights up: DTC is acti‐ ▷ When driving with snow chains. vated. Overview Automatic program change Button in the vehicle The system automatically switches to "DSC ON" in the following situations: ▷ If Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go func‐ tion ACC is activated. ▷ On a braking intervention by the Intelligent Safety systems. ▷ The vehicle has a flat tire.
xDrive DSC OFF Concept xDrive is the all-wheel-drive system of the vehi‐ cle. The interaction of xDrive and DSC Dynamic Stability Control further optimizes traction and driving dynamics. xDrive variably distributes the
197 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 198
CONTROLS Driving stability control systems
driving forces to the front and rear axles as de‐ Using snow chains manded by the driving situation and road surface. In order to guarantee free running of the wheels when operating with snow chains, rear axle steering of the integral active steering must be Integral Active Steering switched off when snow chains are mounted. Set operation with snow chains, refer to Concept page 312. The Integral Active Steering increases the ma‐ neuverability and makes a more direct steering Malfunction response possible. In the event of a malfunction, the steering wheel must be turned further, while the vehicle re‐ General information sponds more sensitively to steering wheel move‐ Integral Active Steering is a combination of Ac‐ ments in the higher speed range. tive Steering and rear axle steering. The stability-enhancing intervention may be de‐ The variable steering ratio amplifies the steering activated. angle when maneuvering, thus making the steer‐ Proceed cautiously and drive defensively. ing more direct. The rear axle steering acts to in‐ Have the system checked by a dealer’s service crease maneuverability at low speeds by turning center or another qualified service center or re‐ the rear wheels slightly in the opposite direction pair shop. to the front wheels. At higher speeds, the rear wheels are turned in the same direction as the front wheels. This re‐ sults in, for instance better directional stability and a more harmonious change of direction. In critical driving situations, the Integral Active Steering can stabilize the vehicle through pur‐ poseful steering of the rear wheels before the driver intervenes, for instance in case of over‐ steering.
Tuning The system offers several different tunings. Driving mode Integral Active Steering
COMFORT comfortable, for optimal ECO PRO travel comfort
SPORT dynamic, for greater agility
The different tunings are assigned to the differ‐ ent driving modes of the Driving Dynamics Con‐ trol, refer to page 136.
198 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 199
Driver assistance systems CONTROLS
Driver assistance systems
Vehicle features and WARNING options The use of the system can lead to an increased risk of accidents in the following situations, This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ for instance: cific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily ▷ On winding roads. available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected ▷ In heavy traffic. options or country versions. This also applies to ▷ On slippery roads, in fog, snow, or wet safety-related functions and systems. When us‐ conditions, or on a loose road surface. ing these functions and systems, the applicable There is a risk of accidents or risk of damage to laws and regulations must be observed. property. Only use the system if driving at con‐ stant speed is possible. Cruise control
WARNING Concept The desired speed can be incorrectly adjusted Using this system, a desired speed can be ad‐ or called up by mistake. There is a risk of an ac‐ justed using the buttons on the steering wheel. cident. Adjust the desired speed to the traffic The system maintains the desired speed. The conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐ system accelerates and brakes automatically as tervene where appropriate. needed.
General information Overview Depending on the vehicle setting, the cruise control characteristic can change in certain Buttons on the steering wheel ranges. For instance, the acceleration in ECO PRO driving mode is more gentle. Button Function
Safety information Cruise control on/off, refer to page 200.
Pause cruise control, refer to WARNING page 200. The system cannot serve as a substitute for the Continue cruise control with the last driver’s personal judgment in assessing the setting, refer to page 201. traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐ tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic Store speed, refer to page 200. situations. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic Rocker switch: closely and actively intervene where appropri‐ ate. Set speed, refer to page 200.
199 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 200
CONTROLS Driver assistance systems
Switching cruise control on/off Setting the speed
Switching on Maintaining and storing the speed Press button on the steering wheel.
The indicator lights in the instrument cluster light up and the mark in the speedometer is set to the current speed. Cruise control is active. The current speed is maintained and stored as desired speed. DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if necessary. Press the rocker switch up or down once while Switching off the system is interrupted. When the system is switched on, the current Press button on the steering wheel. speed is maintained and stored as the desired speed. The displays go out. The stored desired speed is The stored speed is displayed, refer to deleted. page 201, in the speedometer and briefly in the instrument cluster. Pausing cruise control DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if necessary. Interrupting manually The speed can also be stored by pressing a but‐ When active, press the button. ton. Press button. Interrupting automatically The system is automatically interrupted in the Changing the speed following situations, for example: ▷ When the driver applies the brakes. ▷ Steptronic transmission: when selector lever position D is disengaged. ▷ Dynamic Traction Control DTC is activated or DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated. ▷ If DSC Dynamic Stability Control intervenes. ▷ When SPORT PLUS is activated with Driving Dynamics Control. Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly until the desired speed is set. If active, the displayed speed is stored and the vehicle reaches the stored speed when the road is clear.
200 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 201
Driver assistance systems CONTROLS
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to the ▷ Orange/white marking: system is interrupted, resistance point, the desired speed increases the marking indicates the stored speed. or decreases by 1 mph/1 km/h. ▷ No marking: system is switched off. ▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed past the resistance point, the desired speed Indicator light changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h. The maximum speed that can be set de‐ ▷ Indicator light green: system is active. pends on the vehicle. ▷ Gray indicator light: the system has ▷ Pressing the rocker switch to the resistance been interrupted. point and holding it accelerates or deceler‐ ▷ No indicator light: system is switched off. ates the vehicle without requiring pressure on the accelerator pedal. Status display After the rocker switch is released, the vehi‐ cle maintains its final speed. Pressing the The selected desired speed is hidden af‐ switch beyond the resistance point causes ter a brief time. the vehicle to accelerate more rapidly. Displays in the Head-up Display Continuing cruise control Some system information can also be displayed An interrupted cruise control can be continued in the Head-up Display. by calling up the stored speed. The symbol is displayed when the set Make sure that the difference between current desired speed is reached. speed and stored speed is not too large before calling up the stored speed. Otherwise, uninten‐ tional braking or accelerating may occur. System limits Press button with the system inter‐ The desired speed is also maintained downhill. rupted. The speed may not be maintained on uphill Cruise control is continued with the stored val‐ grades if the engine power is insufficient. ues. In ECO PRO driving mode, the vehicle may ex‐ ceed or drop below the set desired speed in In the following cases, the stored speed value is some situations, for instance on downhill or uphill deleted and cannot be called up again: grades. ▷ When the system is switched off. ▷ When drive-ready state is switched off. Active Cruise Control with Displays in the instrument Stop & Go function ACC cluster Concept Display in the speedometer Using this system, a desired speed and a dis‐ ▷ Green marking: system is ac‐ tance to a vehicle ahead can be adjusted using tive, the marking indicates the the buttons on the steering wheel. desired speed.
201 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 202
CONTROLS Driver assistance systems
The system maintains the desired speed on In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured clear roads. For this purpose, the vehicle acceler‐ against rolling away, follow the following: ates or brakes automatically. ▷ Set the parking brake. If a vehicle is driving ahead of you, the system ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, adjusts the speed of your vehicle so that the set turn the front wheels in the direction of the distance to the vehicle ahead is maintained. The curb. speed is adjusted as far as the given situation al‐ ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, lows. also secure the vehicle, for instance with a wheel chock. General information A radar sensor is located in the front bumper and a camera on the interior mirror to detect vehicles WARNING driving ahead of you. The desired speed can be incorrectly adjusted Depending on the vehicle setting, the cruise or called up by mistake. There is a risk of an ac‐ control characteristic can change in certain cident. Adjust the desired speed to the traffic ranges. For instance, the acceleration in ECO conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐ PRO driving mode is more gentle. tervene where appropriate. The distance can be adjusted in several steps. For safety reasons, it depends on the respective speed. WARNING If the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a halt, and Risk of accident due to too high speed differen‐ then proceeds to drive again within a brief period, ces to other vehicles, for instance in the follow‐ the system is able to detect this within the given ing situations: system limits. ▷ When fast approaching a slowly moving vehicle. Safety information ▷ Vehicle suddenly swerving into own lane. ▷ When fast approaching standing vehicles. WARNING There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. The system cannot serve as a substitute for the Watch traffic closely and actively intervene driver’s personal judgment in assessing the where appropriate. traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐ tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust Overview driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropri‐ Buttons on the steering wheel ate. Button Function
WARNING Cruise control on/off, refer to page 203. An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an accident. Store/maintain speed, refer to Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐ page 204. ing.
202 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 203
Driver assistance systems CONTROLS
Button Function Camera
Pause cruise control, refer to page 204. Continue cruise control with the last setting, refer to page 205.
Without steering and lane control as‐ sistant: Increase distance, refer to page 205.
Without steering and lane control as‐ The camera is installed near the interior mirror. sistant: Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror Reduce distance, refer to page 205. clean and clear. With steering and lane control assis‐ tant: Area of application Adjust distance, refer to page 205. The system is best used on well-constructed Rocker switch: roads. Set speed, refer to page 204. The minimum speed that can be set is 20 mph/30 km/h. With steering and lane control assis‐ The maximum speed that can be set is tant: 115 mph/180 km/h. Steering and lane control assistant The system can also be activated when station‐ incl. Traffic Jam Assist on/off, refer to ary. page 208. Switching on/off and interrupting Radar sensor cruise control
Switching on Press button on the steering wheel.
The indicator lights in the instrument cluster light up and the mark in the speedometer is set to the current speed. Cruise control is active. The current speed is The radar sensor is located in the front bumper. maintained and stored as desired speed. Always keep radar sensor clean and unob‐ DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if structed. necessary.
Switching off To switch off the system while standing, step on brake pedal at the same time.
203 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 204
CONTROLS Driver assistance systems
Press the button on the steering wheel. Setting the speed
The displays go out. The stored desired speed is Maintaining and storing the speed deleted.
Interrupting manually When active, press the button on the steering wheel.
If interrupting the system while stationary, press on the brake pedal at the same time.
Interrupting automatically Press the rocker switch up or down once while The system is automatically interrupted in the the system is interrupted. following situations: ▷ When the driver applies the brakes. When the system is switched on, the current speed is maintained and stored as the desired ▷ When selector lever position D is disengaged. speed. ▷ Dynamic Traction Control DTC is activated or The stored speed is displayed, refer to DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated. page 205, in the speedometer and briefly in the ▷ If DSC Dynamic Stability Control intervenes. instrument cluster. ▷ If the safety belt is unbuckled and the driver's DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if door is opened while the vehicle is standing necessary. still. The speed can also be stored by pressing a but‐ ▷ If the system has not detected objects for an ton. extended period, for instance on a road with very little traffic without curb or shoulder Press button. markings. ▷ If the detection range of the radar is impaired, Changing the speed for instance by dirt or heavy fog. ▷ After a longer stationary period when the ve‐ hicle has been braked to a stop by the sys‐ tem.
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly until the desired speed is set.
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the vehicle reaches the stored speed when the road is clear.
204 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 205
Driver assistance systems CONTROLS
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to the With steering and lane control resistance point, the desired speed increases assistant: adjusting distance or decreases by 1 mph/1 km/h. Press button repeatedly until the de‐ ▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed past sired distance is set. the resistance point, the desired speed changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h. Hold the rocker switch in position to repeat the Continuing cruise control action. An interrupted cruise control can be continued by calling up the stored speed. Adjusting distance Make sure that the difference between current speed and stored speed is not too large before Safety information calling up the stored speed. Otherwise, uninten‐ tional braking or accelerating may occur. WARNING Press button with the system inter‐ The system cannot serve as a substitute for the rupted. driver’s personal judgment. Due to the system Cruise control is continued with the stored val‐ limits, braking can be late. There is a risk of ac‐ ues. cidents or risk of damage to property. Be aware to the traffic situation at all times. Adjust the In the following cases, the stored speed value is distance to the traffic and weather conditions deleted and cannot be called up again: and maintain the prescribed safety distance, ▷ When the system is switched off. possibly by braking. ▷ When drive-ready state is switched off.
Displays in the instrument Without steering and lane control assistant: reducing distance cluster Press button repeatedly until the de‐ Display in the speedometer sired distance is set. ▷ Green marking: system is ac‐ Instrument cluster will display selected distance, tive, the marking indicates the refer to page 206. desired speed. ▷ Orange/white marking: system Without steering and lane control is interrupted, the marking in‐ assistant: increasing distance dicates the stored speed. Press button repeatedly until the de‐ ▷ No marking: system is switched off. sired distance is set.
Instrument cluster will display selected distance, Status display refer to page 206. The selected desired speed is hidden af‐ ter a brief time.
205 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 206
CONTROLS Driver assistance systems
Distance to vehicle ahead of you Detected vehicle Selected distance to the vehicle ahead of you is shown. Symbol Description Symbol Description Green symbol: A vehicle has been detected Distance 1 ahead of you. The system main‐ tains the set distance to the ve‐ hicle in front.
As soon as the detected vehicle drives off, the Distance 2 vehicle symbol in the distance indicator will move away. To accelerate, activate ACC, for instance by briefly stepping on the accelerator pedal or pressing the rocker switch. Distance 3 Indicator/warning lights
Symbol Description
Vehicle symbol flashes: Distance 4 The conditions are not adequate This value is set automatically for the system to work. after the system is switched on. The system was deactivated but applies the brakes until you ac‐ System interrupted. tively resume control by press‐ ing on the brake pedal or accel‐ erator pedal.
The vehicle symbol and dis‐ tance bars flash red and an No distance control display, as acoustic signal sounds: the accelerator pedal is being Brake and make an evasive ma‐ pressed. neuver, if necessary.
Displays in the Head-up Display
Desired speed Some system information can also be displayed in the Head-up Display. The symbol is displayed when the set desired speed is reached.
206 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 207
Driver assistance systems CONTROLS
Distance information Swerving vehicles The symbol is displayed when the dis‐ tance from the vehicle traveling ahead is too short.
The distance information is active in the follow‐ ing situations: ▷ Active Cruise Control switched off. ▷ Display in the Head-up Display selected, refer to page 153. ▷ Distance too short. A vehicle driving in front of you is not detected until it is completely within the same lane as your ▷ Speed greater than approx. 40 mph/70 km/h. vehicle. System limits If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly swerves into your lane, the system may not be Detection range able to automatically restore the selected dis‐ tance. It may not be possible to restore the se‐ lected distance in certain situations, including if you are driving significantly faster than vehicles driving ahead of you, for instance when rapidly approaching a truck. When a vehicle driving ahead of you is reliably detected, the system re‐ quests that the driver intervene by braking and carrying out evasive maneuvers, if needed.
Cornering The detection capacity of the system and the automatic braking capacity are limited. Two-wheeled vehicles for instance might not be detected.
Deceleration The system does not decelerate in the following situations: ▷ For pedestrians or similarly slow-moving road users. If the desired speed is too high for a curve, the speed is reduced slightly, although curves can‐ ▷ For red traffic lights. not be anticipated in advance. Therefore, drive ▷ For cross traffic. into a curve at an appropriate speed. ▷ For oncoming traffic. The system has a limited detection range. Situa‐ tions can arise in tight curves where a vehicle driving ahead will not be detected or will be de‐ tected very late.
207 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 208
CONTROLS Driver assistance systems
Engine power The desired speed is also maintained downhill. The speed may not be maintained on uphill grades if the engine power is insufficient. In ECO PRO driving mode, the vehicle may in‐ tentionally exceed or drop below the set desired speed in some situations, for instance on down‐ hill or uphill grades.
When you approach a curve the system may Malfunction briefly report vehicles in the next lane due to the bend of the curve. If the system decelerates you The system cannot be activated if the radar sen‐ may compensate it by briefly accelerating. After sor is not aligned correctly. This may be caused releasing the accelerator pedal the system is re‐ by damage incurred, for instance during parking. activated and controls speed independently. A Check Control message is displayed if the sys‐ tem fails. Driving away Have the system checked by a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or re‐ In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive off pair shop. automatically; for example: The function for detecting and responding when ▷ On steep uphill grades. approaching stationary vehicles may be limited in ▷ From bumps in the road. the following situations: In these cases, step on the accelerator pedal. ▷ During calibration of the camera immediately after vehicle delivery. Weather ▷ If the camera is malfunctioning or dirty. A The following restrictions can occur under unfav‐ Check Control message is displayed. orable weather or light conditions: ▷ Poorer vehicle recognition. ▷ Short-term interruptions for vehicles that are Steering and lane control already recognized. assistant Examples of unfavorable weather or light condi‐ tions: Concept ▷ Wet conditions. The system assists the driver in keeping the ve‐ ▷ Snowfall. hicle within the lane. For this purpose, the sys‐ ▷ Slush. tem executes supporting steering movements, for instance when driving in a curve. ▷ Fog. ▷ Glare. General information Drive attentively, and react to the current traffic The system determines the position of the lane situation. If necessary, intervene actively, for in‐ markings and the vehicle driving ahead using five stance by braking, steering or evading. radar sensors and a camera.
208 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 209
Driver assistance systems CONTROLS
Depending on the speed, the system orients it‐ self according to the lane markings or vehicles in front. Sensors on the steering wheel detect whether the steering wheel is being touched.
Safety information
WARNING Front side bumper. The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in assessing the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐ tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropri‐ ate.
Overview Rear bumper. Always keep the bumper in the area of the radar Button on the steering wheel sensors clean and unobstructed.
Button Function Camera Steering and lane control assistant incl. Traffic Jam Assist on/off, refer to page 210.
Radar sensors The radar sensors are located in the bumpers.
The camera is installed near the interior mirror. Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror clean and clear.
Functional requirements Front center bumper. ▷ Speed below 130 mph/210 km/h. ▷ Sufficient lane width.
209 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 210
CONTROLS Driver assistance systems
▷ Above approx. 43 mph, 70 km/h: lane mark‐ ▷ At a speed above 130 mph/210 km/h. ing on both sides is detected. ▷ When the steering wheel is released. ▷ Below approx. 43 mph, 70 km/h: lane marking ▷ When you manipulate steering. on both sides or a vehicle driving ahead is de‐ ▷ When you leave your own lane. tected. ▷ When the turn signal is switched on. ▷ Hands on the steering wheel rim. ▷ When the lane is too narrow. ▷ Wide curves. ▷ If for a particular time no lane marking is de‐ ▷ Drive in the center of the lane. tected and there is no vehicle driving in front. ▷ Turn signal switched off. Steering wheel symbol lights up gray. ▷ Camera calibration immediately after vehicle delivery is completed. The system is on standby and does not manipulate steering.
Switching on/off System activates automatically as soon as all function conditions are fulfilled, refer to Switching on page 209. Press button on the steering wheel. Displays in the instrument Steering wheel symbol lights up gray. cluster The system is on standby and does not Symbol Description manipulate steering. Gray steering wheel symbol: System activates automatically as soon as all The system is on standby. function conditions are fulfilled, refer to page 209. Green steering wheel symbol: Steering wheel symbol lights up green. The system is activated. The system is active. Yellow steering wheel symbol With the system switched on, the person warn‐ and a signal sounds, if applica‐ ing with City braking function and the side colli‐ ble: sion warning are active. System interruption is imminent.
Switching off Green steering wheel symbol and lane marking symbol: Press button on the steering wheel. The system supports the driver in keeping the vehicle within the The indicator goes out. lane. The system does not perform supportive steer‐ ing wheel movements.
Interrupting automatically The system is automatically interrupted in the following situations:
210 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 211
Driver assistance systems CONTROLS
Symbol Description ▷ Active Blind Spot Detection and steering in‐ tervention are switched on, refer to page 184. Green steering wheel symbol, ▷ Speed between approx. 43 mph, 70 km/h gray lane marking symbol: and approx. 110 mph, 180 km/h. No lane marking detected, the vehicle follows the vehicle Changing lanes ahead. 1. Ensure that the traffic situation permits The limits of steering support changing lanes. when cornering may have been 2. Press the turn indicator lever, refer to reached. page 127, in the required direction to the Yellow steering wheel symbol: pressure point for signaling briefly and hold it The hands are not grasping the there. steering wheel. The system is Steering support in the required direction can still active. be detected a short time later.
Red steering wheel symbol and a signal sounds: The hands are not grasping the steering wheel. System interrup‐ tion is imminent. The system does not perform supportive steering wheel move‐ ments. With Active Cruise Control, the After the lane change, the system helps keep the system may reduce the speed. vehicle in the new lane.
Displays in the Head-up Display Canceling a lane change If the turn signal lever is released too soon, the All system information can also be displayed in system helps the driver keep to the original lane. the Head-up Display. System limits Lane change assistant General information Concept The system cannot be activated or meaningfully The system additionally supports the driver when used in certain situations. changing lanes on multilane roads. Safety information Functional requirements ▷ The functional requirements of the steering and lane control assistant are fulfilled, refer to WARNING page 209. The system can react not at all, too late, incor‐ ▷ Trip on a road with structural separation. rectly, or without justification due to the system limits. There is a risk of accidents or risk of ▷ Lane markings have been detected. damage to property. Follow the information re‐ 211 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 212
CONTROLS Driver assistance systems
garding the system limits and actively intervene PDC Park Distance Control if needed. Concept Hands on the steering wheel PDC is a support when parking. Objects that you The sensors cannot detect hand-steering wheel are approaching slowly in front of or behind the contact in the following situations: vehicle are indicated by signal tones and a dis‐ ▷ Driving with gloves. play on the Control Display. ▷ Protective covers on the steering wheel. With parking assistant: obstacles on the side of the vehicle that are detected by the sensors of Narrow lanes the parking assistant, may also be reported by the side protection function, refer to page 215. When driving within narrow lanes, the system cannot be activated or effectively used, for in‐ General information stance in the following situations: The ultrasound sensors for distance measure‐ ▷ In construction areas. ments are located in the bumpers and possibly ▷ In rescue lanes. on the sides of the vehicle. ▷ Within city limits. The maneuvering range, depending on the ob‐ stacle and environmental conditions, is approx. Weather 6 ft/2 m. The following restrictions can occur under unfav‐ An acoustic warning sounds in case of an im‐ orable weather or light conditions: pending collision at a distance to the object of ▷ Poorer recognition of vehicles and lane mark‐ approx. 27 in/70 cm. ings. For objects behind the vehicle, the acoustic ▷ Short-term interruptions for vehicles that are warning is already issued at a distance to the ob‐ already recognized. ject of approx. 5 ft/1.50 m. Examples of unfavorable weather or light condi‐ tions: Safety information ▷ Wet conditions. ▷ Snowfall. WARNING ▷ Slush. The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in assessing the ▷ Fog. traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐ ▷ Glare. tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic Drive attentively, and react to the current traffic situations. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust situation. If necessary, intervene actively, for in‐ driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic stance by braking, steering or evading. closely and actively intervene where appropri‐ ate.
212 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 213
Driver assistance systems CONTROLS
Switching on/off WARNING Due to high speeds when PDC Park Distance Switching on automatically Control is activated, the warning can be de‐ The system switches on automatically in the fol‐ layed due to physical circumstances. There is a lowing situations: risk of injury or risk of damage to property. ▷ If selector lever position R is engaged when Avoid approaching an object too fast. Avoid the engine is running. driving off fast while PDC Park Distance Control is not yet active. ▷ While approaching detected obstacles if the speed is slower than approx. 2.5 mph/4 km/h. The activation distance depends on the situa‐ Overview tion in question. You may switch automatic activation on and off Button in the vehicle when obstacles are detected. Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle" 2. "Vehicle settings" 3. "Parking" 4. "Automatic PDC activation": depending on the vehicle equipment. 5. "Automatic PDC activation" The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ Park assistance button rently used. Depending on equipment, an additional camera view is also switched on. Ultrasound sensors Ultrasound sensors of the PDC, Automatic deactivation during for instance in the bumpers. forward travel The system switches off when a certain driving distance or speed is exceeded. Switch the system back on, if needed. Functional requirements Switching on/off manually Ensure full functionality: Press park assistance button. ▷ Do not cover sensors, for instance with stick‐ ers, bicycle racks. ▷ On: the LED lights up. ▷ Keep the sensors clean and unobstructed. ▷ Off: the LED goes out. The rearview camera image is displayed if the re‐ verse gear is engaged when pressing the park assistance button.
213 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 214
CONTROLS Driver assistance systems
WARNING Visual warning
Signal tones
General information When approaching an object, an intermittent sound indicates the position of the object. E.g., if an object is detected to the left rear of the vehi‐ cle, a signal tone sounds from the left rear speaker. The shorter the distance to the object, the The approach of the vehicle to an object is shorter the intervals. shown on the Control Display. Objects that are If the distance to a detected object is less than farther away are already displayed on the Control approx. 10 inches/25 cm, a continuous tone is Display before a signal sounds. sounded. The display appears as soon as PDC is activated. If there are objects in front of and behind the ve‐ The range of the sensors is represented in the hicle at the same time, with a distance smaller colors green, yellow and red. than approx. 10 in/25 cm, an alternating constant tone will sound. Pathway lines are faded in for better estimation of the required space. Steptronic transmission: the intermittent tone and constant tone are switched off if the selector When the image of the rearview camera is dis‐ lever position P is engaged. played, the switch can be made to PDC or to a different view with obstacle markings as needed: The intermittent tone is switched off after a short time when the vehicle is stationary. "Rear view camera" Crossing traffic warning, refer to page 235: de‐ Volume pending on the equipment, it is warned in the The ratio of the PDC signal tone volume to the PDC display against vehicles approaching in the entertainment volume can be adjusted. front or rear from the side. Via iDrive: With parking assistant and 1. "My Vehicle" Steptronic transmission: 2. "iDrive settings" emergency braking function, 3. "Tone" Active PDC 4. "Volume settings" 5. "PDC" Concept 6. Set the desired value. The emergency braking function of PDC initiates an emergency braking in case of acute risk of The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ collision. rently used. General information Due to system limits, a collision cannot be pre‐ vented under all circumstances.
214 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 215
Driver assistance systems CONTROLS
The function is available from walking speed With parking assistant: side while backing up or rolling backward. protection A press of the accelerator pedal interrupts the braking intervention. Concept After emergency braking to a stop, further creep‐ The system warns of obstacles on the side of ing toward an obstacle is possible. To creep to‐ the vehicle. ward the obstacle, lightly press the accelerator pedal and release it again. General information If the accelerator pedal is heavily depressed, the The system uses the ultrasound sensors of PDC vehicle drives off as usual. Manual braking is pos‐ and parking assistant. sible at any time. The system uses the ultrasound sensors of PDC Display and parking assistant.
Safety information
WARNING The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in assessing the traffic situation. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic and vehicle surroundings closely and ac‐ To protect the sides of the vehicle, obstacle tively intervene where appropriate. markings are displayed on the vehicle at the sides. ▷ Color markings: warning against detected ob‐ Activating/deactivating the system stacles. Via iDrive: ▷ Gray markings, hatched area: no obstacles 1. "My Vehicle" were detected. 2. "Vehicle settings" ▷ No markings, black area: the area next to the vehicle was not yet captured. 3. "Parking" 4. "Active PDC with braking interv." 5. "Active PDC with braking interv." Limits of side protection The system only displays stationary obstacles The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ that were previously detected by sensors while rently used. passing them. System limits The system does not detect whether an obstacle moves later on. If the vehicle is stationary, the The system cannot be used in the following sit‐ markings are shown in black after a certain time. uations, for example: The area next to the vehicle must be newly cap‐ ▷ When driving with a trailer. tured. If required, deactivate the system via iDrive where applicable.
215 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 216
CONTROLS Driver assistance systems
System limits ▷ With obstacles and persons at the edge of the lane. Safety information ▷ With soft obstacles or obstacles covered in foam material. WARNING ▷ With plants and bushes. The system can react not at all, too late, incor‐ ▷ Low objects already displayed, for instance rectly, or without justification due to the system curbs, can move into the blind area of the limits. There is a risk of accidents or risk of sensors before or after a continuous tone damage to property. Follow the information re‐ sounds. garding the system limits and actively intervene ▷ Cargo that extends beyond the perimeter of if needed. the vehicle is not taken into account by the system.
Limits of ultrasonic measurement False warnings Ultrasonic measurements might not function in The system may issue a warning under the fol‐ the following situations: lowing conditions even though there is no obsta‐ ▷ For small children and animals. cle within the detection range: ▷ For persons with certain clothing, for instance ▷ In heavy rain. coats. ▷ When sensors are very dirty or covered with ▷ With external interference of the ultrasound, ice. for instance from passing vehicles or loud ▷ When sensors are covered in snow. machines. ▷ On rough road surfaces. ▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, damaged ▷ On uneven surfaces, such as speed bumps. or out of position. ▷ In large buildings with right angles and ▷ Under certain weather conditions such as smooth walls, for instance in underground ga‐ high relative humidity, wet conditions, snow‐ rages. fall, extreme heat, or strong wind. ▷ In automatic vehicle washes. ▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other vehicles. ▷ Due to heavy exhaust. ▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects. ▷ Due to other ultrasound sources, for instance sweeping machines, high pressure steam ▷ With moving objects. cleaners or neon lights. ▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as To prevent false alarms, switch off automatic ledges. PDC activation on obstacle detection, refer to ▷ With objects with corners, edges, and page 213, for instance in automatic vehicle smooth surfaces. washes. ▷ With objects with a fine surface structure such as fences. Malfunction ▷ For objects with porous surfaces. A Check Control message is displayed. ▷ With small and low objects, for instance White symbol is displayed, and the range boxes. of the sensors is dimmed on the Control Display.
216 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 217
Driver assistance systems CONTROLS
PDC has failed. Have the system checked by a Camera dealer’s service center or another qualified serv‐ ice center or repair shop.
Without Surround View: rearview camera
Concept The rearview camera provides assistance in parking and maneuvering backwards. The area The camera lens is located in the handle of the behind the vehicle is shown on the Control Dis‐ tailgate. play. The image quality may be impaired by dirt. If necessary, clean the camera lens. Safety information Switching on/off WARNING The system cannot serve as a substitute for the Switching on automatically driver’s personal judgment in assessing the The system is switched on automatically if selec‐ traffic situation. There is a risk of an accident. tor lever position R is engaged when the engine Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch is running. traffic and vehicle surroundings closely and ac‐ tively intervene where appropriate. Automatic deactivation during forward travel Overview The system switches off when a certain driving distance or speed is exceeded. Depending on the vehicle Switch the system back on, if needed. equipment: button in the vehicle Depending on the vehicle equipment: switching on/off manually Press park assistance button.
▷ On: the LED lights up. ▷ Off: the LED goes out. The parking assistance functions are shown on the Control Display. Park assistance button
217 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 218
CONTROLS Driver assistance systems
Switching the view via iDrive Parking aid lines If the rearview camera view is not displayed, change the view via iDrive: Pathway lines 1. Move the Controller to the left, if needed. 2. "Rear view camera" The rearview camera image is displayed.
Functional requirements ▷ The rearview camera is switched on. ▷ The tailgate is fully closed. ▷ Keep the recording range of the camera Pathway lines help you to estimate the space re‐ clear. Protruding cargo or carrier systems and quired when parking and maneuvering on level trailers that are not connected to a trailer roads. power socket can restrict the visibility range of the camera. Pathway lines depend on the steering angle and are continuously adjusted to the steering wheel Assistance functions movements.
General information Turning radius lines More than one assistance function can be active at the same time. The assistance functions can be manually acti‐ vated. ▷ "Parking aid lines". Pathway lines and turning radius lines are dis‐ played, refer to page 218. ▷ "Obstacle marking". Depending on the vehicle equipment, the ob‐ Turning radius lines can only be superimposed stacles detected by PDC Park Distance Con‐ on the camera image together with pathway trol are displayed, refer to page 219, by lines. markings. Turning radius lines show the course of the smallest possible turning radius on a level road. Only one turning radius line is displayed after the steering wheel is turned past a certain angle.
Parking using pathway and turning radius lines 1. Position the vehicle so that the red turning ra‐ dius line leads to within the limits of the park‐ ing space.
218 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 219
Driver assistance systems CONTROLS
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where Depending on the vehicle equipment, some as‐ the green pathway line covers the corre‐ sistance functions also consider data from the sponding turning radius line. PDC Park Distance Control. Follow the notes in the PDC Park Distance Con‐ Obstacle marking trol chapter. The objects displayed on the Control Display may be closer than they appear. Do not estimate the distance from the objects on the display.
Surround View with parking assistant Plus
Concept Depending on the vehicle equipment, obstacles behind the vehicle are detected by the PDC Park The system provides assistance in parking and Distance Control sensors. maneuvering. The area around the vehicle is shown on the Control Display. Obstacle markings can be faded into the image of the rearview camera. General information The colored thresholds of the obstacle markings match the markings of the PDC Park Distance Several cameras capture the area from different Control. selectable perspectives. In addition, assistance functions, for instance guidelines, can be faded into the display. Setting brightness and contrast The following camera perspectives can be dis‐ via iDrive played: With the rearview camera switched on: ▷ Automatic camera perspective, refer to page 221: the system shows the camera 1. Move the Controller to the left. perspective suitable for the respective driving 2. ▷ "Brightness" situation. ▷ "Contrast" ▷ Rearview camera, refer to page 221: for rep‐ 3. Set the desired value. resenting the areas behind the vehicle. ▷ Right-hand and left-hand side view, refer to System limits page 223: for representing the areas on the sides of the vehicle. Deactivated camera ▷ Camera perspective movable via iDrive, refer If the camera is deactivated, for instance if the to page 221. tailgate is open, the camera image is displayed ▷ Panorama View, refer to page 224: to hatched in gray. present cross traffic, for instance at junctions and driveways, depending on the currently Detection of objects engaged gear. Very low obstacles as well as high, protruding Depending on the view, the environment around objects such as ledges may not be detected by the vehicle or a part of it is depicted. the system. 219 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 220
CONTROLS Driver assistance systems
Safety information
WARNING The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in assessing the traffic situation. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic and vehicle surroundings closely and ac‐ tively intervene where appropriate. Rearview camera
Overview
Buttons in the vehicle
One camera is located at the bottom of each ex‐ terior mirror housing.
The image quality may be impaired by dirt on the camera lenses. If required, clean the camera Park assistance button lenses.
Panorama View Switching on/off
Switching on automatically Cameras The system is switched on automatically if selec‐ tor lever position R is engaged when the engine is running. The camera perspective suitable for the respec‐ tive driving situation is displayed.
Switching on/off manually Press park assistance button.
▷ On: the LED lights up. Front camera ▷ Off: the LED goes out. The rearview camera cannot be switched off if the reverse gear is engaged.
220 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 221
Driver assistance systems CONTROLS
Automatic deactivation during Automatic camera perspective forward travel The automatic camera perspective shows a The system switches off when a certain driving steering-dependent view in the respective driv‐ distance or speed is exceeded. ing direction. Switch the system back on, if needed. This perspective adapts to the respective driving situation. Camera perspective As soon as obstacles are detected, the view changes to a fixed display of the area in front or Overview at the rear behind the bumper or, if necessary, changes to a side view. When reverse gear is engaged, the automatic camera perspective is closed and the system uses a fixed perspective of the rearview camera. If necessary, manually select the automatic cam‐ era perspective when reverse gear is engaged. The automatic camera perspective will be re‐ tained for the current parking maneuver.
Movable camera perspective 1 Function bar With selection of the movable camera perspec‐ 2 Selection window tive, a circle appears on the Control Display. 3 Side view By turning the Controller or via touch function, 4 Automatic camera perspective specified perspectives on the circle can be se‐ 5 Movable camera perspective lected. 6 Camera image The current perspective is marked with a camera 7 Rearview camera symbol. With BMW Gesture Control: the movable camera perspective can be moved around the circle us‐ Selection window ing BMW Gesture Control, refer to page 51. The individual camera perspectives can be se‐ To leave the circle, move the Controller sideways lected in the selection window via iDrive. and press or tap the active camera symbol via the touchscreen. Side view The side view can be selected for the right or left Rearview camera vehicle side. This view shows the picture of the rearview cam‐ This view helps when positioning the vehicle at era. the curb or with other obstacles on the side by displaying the side surroundings. Function bar The side view looks from rear to front and in case Assistance functions, refer to page 222, can be of danger, focuses automatically on possible ob‐ activated via the function bar and settings ap‐ stacles. plied. ▷ "Parking Assistant", refer to page 226.
221 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 222
CONTROLS Driver assistance systems
▷ "Brightness", refer to page 225. Turning radius lines ▷ "Contrast", refer to page 225. ▷ "Parking aid lines", refer to page 222. ▷ "Obstacle marking", refer to page 222. ▷ "Car wash", refer to page 223. ▷ "Settings": apply settings, for instance to use the activation points for Panorama View.
Assistance functions Turning radius lines can only be superimposed General information on the camera image together with pathway More than one assistance function can be active lines. at the same time. Turning radius lines show the course of the The following assistance functions can be man‐ smallest possible turning radius on a level road. ually activated: Only one turning radius line is displayed after the ▷ "Parking aid lines". steering wheel is turned past a certain angle. ▷ "Obstacle marking". ▷ "Car wash". Parking using pathway and turning radius lines The following assistance functions are automati‐ cally displayed: 1. Position the vehicle so that the red turning ra‐ dius line leads to within the limits of the park‐ ▷ Side protection, refer to page 223. ing space. ▷ Door opening angle, refer to page 223. 2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where the green pathway line covers the corre‐ Parking aid lines sponding turning radius line. Pathway lines Obstacle marking
Pathway lines help you to estimate the space re‐ Obstacles behind the vehicle are detected by the quired when parking and maneuvering on level PDC Park Distance Control sensors. roads. Obstacle markings can be shown in the camera Pathway lines depend on the steering angle and image. are continuously adjusted to the steering wheel movements.
222 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 223
Driver assistance systems CONTROLS
The colored thresholds of the obstacle markings Limits of side protection match the markings of the PDC Park Distance The system only displays stationary obstacles Control. that were previously detected by sensors while passing them. Vehicle wash view The system does not detect whether an obstacle moves later on. For this reason, at standstill, the markings are not shown anymore in the display after a certain time. The area next to the vehicle must be newly captured.
Door opening angle
Concept If obstacle marking is activated, the system indi‐ cates fixed obstacles that obstruct the opening The vehicle wash view assists when entering a angles of the doors. vehicle wash by displaying the floor and the vehi‐ cle's own track. The system does not provide a warning of ap‐ proaching traffic. Side protection
Concept The system warns of obstacles on the side of the vehicle.
Display
Steptronic transmission: the maximum opening angles of the doors are displayed in selector lever position P.
As soon as the vehicle begins moving, the open‐ ing angles are replaced by parking aid lines.
Limits of the display To protect the sides of the vehicle, obstacle The vehicle surroundings are displayed with dis‐ markings are displayed on the vehicle at the torted image for technical reasons. sides. Even if the symbols for the door opening angles ▷ No markings: no obstacles were detected. do not cross other objects on the Control Dis‐ ▷ Color markings: warning against detected ob‐ play, the following needs to be noted when park‐ stacles. ing next to other objects: Because of the perspective, higher, protruding objects may be closer than they appear on the Control Display.
223 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 224
CONTROLS Driver assistance systems
Panorama View With navigation system: activation points Concept Concept Positions at which Panorama View is to switch on automatically can be stored as activation points as soon as a GPS signal is received.
General information Up to ten activation points can be stored. Activation points can be used when driving for‐ ward for the front camera. The system provides an early look at cross traffic at blind driveways and intersections. Storing activation points 1. Drive to the position at which the system is to General information be switched on, and stop. Road users concealed by obstacles to the left 2. Press button. and right of the vehicle can only be detected rel‐ atively late from the driver's seat. The cameras in 3. Move the Controller to the left. the front and rear capture the sideways traffic 4. "Add activation point" area to improve the view. The current position is displayed. Yellow lines in the screen display mark the front 5. "Add activation point" and rear end of the vehicle. Activation points are, if possible, stored with The camera image shows different levels of dis‐ town/city and street address, or else with the tortion in some areas and is thus not suitable for GPS coordinates. distance estimations. Using activation points Display on the Control Display The use of activation points can be switched on Press the button when the engine is run‐ and off. ning. 1. Press button. Depending on the driving direction, the image of the respective camera is displayed: 2. Move the Controller to the left. ▷ "front": front camera image. 3. "Settings" ▷ "rear": rear camera image. 4. "Panorama view, GPS-based" Depending on the vehicle equipment, the cross‐ 5. "Panorama view, GPS-based" ing traffic warning, refer to page 235, can addi‐ tionally warn against oncoming vehicles using ra‐ Displaying activation points dar sensors. 1. Press button. 2. Move the Controller to the left. 3. "Show activation points"
224 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 225
Driver assistance systems CONTROLS
A list of all activation points is displayed. Detection of objects Very low obstacles as well as high, protruding Renaming or deleting activation points objects such as ledges may not be detected by the system. 1. Press button. Some assistance functions also consider data 2. Move the Controller to the left. from the PDC Park Distance Control. 3. "Show activation points" Follow, refer to page 212, the notes in the PDC A list of all activation points is displayed. Park Distance Control chapter. 4. Select an activation point as needed. The objects displayed on the Control Display 5. ▷ "Rename" may be closer than they appear. Do not estimate the distance from the objects on the display. ▷ "Delete this activation point" ▷ "Delete all activation points" Malfunction Setting brightness and contrast A camera malfunction is displayed on the Control Display. Brightness and contrast can be adjusted with Surround View or Panorama View switched on. A yellow symbol is displayed and the re‐ cording range of the malfunctioning cam‐ Via iDrive: era is displayed in black on the Control 1. Move the Controller to the left. Display. 2. ▷ "Brightness" ▷ "Contrast" Remote 3D View 3. Set the desired value. Concept Functional limitations Using the BMW Connected App and the camera images from Surround View, the vehicle sur‐ The system can be used only to a limited extent roundings can be displayed on a mobile device, in the following situations: for instance a smartphone. ▷ In poor light. The function displays a momentary view of the ▷ In case of soiled cameras. situation. ▷ With a door open. ▷ With the tailgate open. Functional requirements ▷ With exterior mirrors folded in. ▷ Data transmission must be activated, refer to page 60. Gray hatched areas with symbol, for instance open door, in the camera image mark areas that ▷ BMW Connected App must be installed on are currently not displayed. the mobile device.
System limits Switching the function on/off Via iDrive: Non-visible areas 1. With the standby state switched on: "My Because of the camera angle, the areas under Vehicle" the vehicle cannot be viewed by the cameras. 2. "iDrive settings"
225 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 226
CONTROLS Driver assistance systems
3. "Data privacy" with the middle of the parking space during 4. "Remote 3D View" diagonal parking.
Functional limitations General information The system may not be fully functional or may not be available in the following situations: Handling ▷ In poor light. Parking assistant handling is divided into three steps: ▷ In case of soiled cameras. ▷ Switching on and activating. ▷ With a door or the tailgate open. Dark fields in the display indicate areas that are not re‐ ▷ Parking space search. corded by the system. ▷ Parking. ▷ With exterior mirrors folded in. System status and instructions on required ac‐ ▷ When other camera functions are being per‐ tions are displayed on the Control Display. formed in the vehicle. Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces on ▷ When the vehicle moves faster than walking both sides of the vehicle. speed. Steptronic transmission ▷ It may not be possible to use the function in every country. The parking assistant calculates the best possi‐ ble parking line and takes control of the following ▷ For reasons of data protection, the function functions during the parking procedure: can only be used three times within two hours. ▷ Steering. ▷ Accelerating and braking. Parking assistant ▷ Changing the gears. Press and hold the park assistance button for the duration of the parking procedure. Parking is au‐ Concept tomatic.
Remote Control Parking The vehicle can be remotely parked and driven out, refer to page 231, in reverse if suitable for‐ ward-parking spaces are available.
Safety information
WARNING The system supports parking in the following sit‐ uations: The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in assessing the ▷ When parking parallel to the road, parallel traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐ parking. tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic ▷ When reverse parking diagonally to the road, situations. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust diagonal parking. The system orients itself driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
226 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 227
Driver assistance systems CONTROLS
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐ Functional requirements ate. Ultrasound sensors Ensure full functionality: NOTICE ▷ Do not cover sensors, for instance with stick‐ The parking assistant can steer the vehicle over ers. or onto curbs. There is a risk of damage to ▷ Keep the sensors clean and unobstructed. property. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐ tervene where appropriate. For measuring parking spaces The safety information of the PDC Park Distance ▷ Maximum speed while driving forward approx. Control, refer to page 212, applies in addition. 22 mph/35 km/h. ▷ Maximum distance to row of parked vehicles: Overview 5 ft/1.5 m.
Button in the vehicle Suitable parking space General information: ▷ Gap behind an object that has a min. length of 1.7 ft/0.5 m. ▷ Gap between two objects with a minimum length of approx. 1.7 ft/0.5 m. Parallel parking to the road: ▷ Min. length of gap between two objects: your vehicle's length plus approx. 2.6 ft/0.8 m. ▷ Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m. Park assistance button Diagonal parking: ▷ Minimum width of the gap: own vehicle's Ultrasound sensors width plus approx. 2.3 ft/0.7 m. ▷ Minimum depth: your vehicle's length. The depth of diagonal parking spaces must be estimated by the driver. Due to technical limitations, the system is only able to approxi‐ mate the depth of diagonal parking spaces.
For parking ▷ Doors and tailgate are closed. ▷ The parking brake is released. With the four side ultrasound sensors, arrows, and the ultrasound sensors of PDC Park Dis‐ Steptronic transmission: tance Control in the bumpers, the parking ▷ Driver's safety belt is fastened. spaces are measured and the distances to ob‐ stacles determined.
227 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 228
CONTROLS Driver assistance systems
Switching on and activating ▷ Control Display shows suitable parking spaces at the edge of the road next to the ve‐ Switching on with the button hicle symbol. When the parking assistant is active, suitable parking spaces are high‐ Press park assistance button. lighted in color and a signal sounds. Switch The LED lights up. signal tone on/off, refer to page 229. ▷ If a diagonal or parallel parking space is clearly The current status of the parking space search is detected, the system automatically adjusts indicated on the Control Display. the suitable parking method. In the case of Parking assistant is activated automatically. parking spaces suitable for parallel and diago‐ nal parking, a selection menu is displayed. In Switching on with reverse gear this case, the desired parking method must Shift into reverse. be selected manually. The current status of the parking space search is ▷ The parking procedure is ac‐ indicated on the Control Display. tive. Steering control has been To activate: "Parking Assistant" taken over by system.
Display on the Control Display ▷ Parking space search is always active when‐ System activated/deactivated ever the vehicle is moving forward slow and straight, even if the system is deactivated. When the system is deactivated, the displays Sym‐ Meaning on the Control Display are shown in gray. bol Gray: the system is not available. Parking using the parking White: the system is available but not assistant activated.
The system is activated. Parking 1. Switching on and activating the parking assis‐ tant. Parking space search and system status Engage the reverse gear and activate the system or press the parking assistance but‐ ton, refer to page 228, on the Control Display. Parking assistant is activated. 2. Drive by the row of parked vehicles at a speed of up to approx. 22 mph/35 km/h and at a distance of maximum 5 ft/1.5 m. The status of the parking space search and possible parking spaces are displayed on the Control Display, refer to page 228. ▷ Symbol P on the vehicle image: the parking 3. Confirm the suggested parking space for the assistant is activated and the parking space parking procedure: switch on the turn signal search is active. on the corresponding side.
228 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 229
Driver assistance systems CONTROLS
The system takes over the steering. ▷ If the tailgate is open. 4. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐ ▷ If doors are open. play. ▷ When setting the parking brake. Steptronic transmission: ▷ During acceleration. Press and hold the park assistance button for ▷ When the brake pedal remains pressed for an the duration of the parking procedure. At the extended period while the vehicle is station‐ end of the parking procedure, the P selector ary. lever position is set. ▷ When unfastening the driver's safety belt. The end of the parking procedure is indicated A Check Control message is displayed. on the Control Display. 5. Adjust the parking position yourself, if Resuming needed. An interrupted parking procedure can be contin‐ Interrupting manually ued, if needed. Reactivate the parking assistant, refer to The parking assistant can be interrupted at any page 228, and follow the instructions on the time: Control Display. ▷ Steptronic transmission: release the park assistance button during the park‐ Switching off ing procedure. The system can be switched off manually: ▷ "Parking Assistant" Select the symbol on the Control Display. Press park assistance button.
Interrupting automatically The system is interrupted automatically in the Switching signal tone for following situations: suitable parking spaces on/off ▷ If the driver grasps the steering wheel or Via iDrive: takes over steering. 1. "My Vehicle" ▷ Possibly on snow-covered or slippery road 2. "Vehicle settings" surfaces. 3. "Parking" ▷ When there are obstacles that are hard to overcome, such as curbs. 4. "Parking Assistant" ▷ When there are obstacles that suddenly ap‐ 5. "Sound if parking space detected" pear. The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ ▷ If the PDC Park Distance Control displays rently used. clearances that are too small. ▷ If a maximum number of parking attempts or the time taken for parking is exceeded. ▷ When switching to another function on the Control Display. Steptronic transmission: ▷ When the park assistance button is released.
229 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 230
CONTROLS Driver assistance systems
System limits ▷ With external interference of the ultrasound, for instance from passing vehicles or loud Safety information machines. ▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, damaged or out of position. WARNING ▷ Under certain weather conditions such as The system can react not at all, too late, incor‐ high relative humidity, wet conditions, snow‐ rectly, or without justification due to the system fall, extreme heat, or strong wind. limits. There is a risk of accidents or risk of damage to property. Follow the information re‐ ▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other garding the system limits and actively intervene vehicles. if needed. ▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects. ▷ With moving objects. No parking assistance ▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as ledges. The parking assistant does not offer assistance in the following situations: ▷ With objects with corners, edges, and smooth surfaces. ▷ In tight curves. ▷ With objects with a fine surface structure ▷ For diagonal parking spaces. such as fences. Functional limitations ▷ For objects with porous surfaces. ▷ With small and low objects, for instance The system may not be fully functional in the fol‐ boxes. lowing situations: ▷ With obstacles and persons at the edge of ▷ On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel the lane. roads. ▷ With soft obstacles or obstacles covered in ▷ On slippery ground. foam material. ▷ On steep uphill or downhill grades. ▷ With plants and bushes. ▷ With accumulations of leaves/snow in the ▷ Low objects already displayed, for instance parking space. curbs, can move into the blind area of the ▷ With a mounted emergency wheel. sensors before or after a continuous tone ▷ In case of changes to an already-measured sounds. parking space. ▷ Cargo that extends beyond the perimeter of ▷ With ditches or edges, for instance an edge the vehicle is not taken into account by the of a port. system. Parking spaces that are not suitable may be de‐ Limits of ultrasonic measurement tected or suitable parking spaces may not be de‐ Ultrasonic measurements might not function in tected at all. the following situations: ▷ For small children and animals. Malfunction ▷ For persons with certain clothing, for instance A Check Control message is displayed. coats.
230 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 231
Driver assistance systems CONTROLS
The parking assistant failed. Have the system Safety information checked by a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. WARNING The system cannot serve as a substitute for the Remote Control Parking driver’s personal judgment in assessing traffic and parking situation. Based on the limits of the Concept system, it cannot independently react to all sit‐ uations. There is a risk of an accident. Watch The vehicle can be remotely parked and driven traffic and parking situation closely and actively out in reverse in the case of suitable forward- intervene where appropriate. parking spaces, for instance a garage. The driver is not in the vehicle, but controls the parking pro‐ cedure responsibly from the outside using the BMW display key, refer to page 78. WARNING Stop the vehicles manually in the case of obsta‐ Unauthorized persons, for instance children, cles. can move the vehicle using the BMW display key without anybody in the vehicle. There is a Using the BMW display key, the vehicle can be risk of an accident. Protect the BMW display moved by approx. 1.5 times the vehicle length. key against unauthorized use. The speed does not exceed 1.1 mph/1.8 km/h.
General information NOTICE The following systems are included in the sys‐ The parking assistant can steer the vehicle over tem: or onto curbs. There is a risk of damage to ▷ Parking assistant, refer to page 226. property. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐ ▷ BMW display key, refer to page 78. tervene where appropriate. ▷ PDC Park Distance Control, refer to page 212. Overview Button on the BMW display key: the button on the side of the BMW display key must be Ultrasound sensors pressed and held for the duration of the parking procedure so that the vehicle can move. Release the button for obstacles to manually stop the ve‐ hicle. The vehicle stops with emergency braking. If the ultrasound sensors detect obstacles in the parking space or the end of the parking space, the system automatically stops the vehicle as needed. The headlight is switched on for the duration of the procedure. With the four side ultrasound sensors, arrows, and the ultrasound sensors of PDC Park Dis‐ tance Control in the bumpers, the parking
231 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 232
CONTROLS Driver assistance systems
spaces are measured and the distances to ob‐ Functional requirements stacles determined. Cameras and ultrasound sensors Cameras ▷ Do not cover sensors, for instance with stick‐ In addition to the ultrasonic sensors, the parking ers. situation during Remote Control Parking is de‐ ▷ Keep sensors clean and unobstructed. Clean tected using four cameras. them as needed. ▷ Keep camera lenses clean and unobstructed. Clean them as needed.
Suitable parking space
Front camera.
▷ It is possible to forward-park into the parking space in a straight, centered line. ▷ Width of the parking space: vehicle's own width without exterior mirrors, plus approx. 1.3 ft/0.4 m on each side, arrow 1. ▷ Distance to parking space, max. 6.5 ft/2 m, ar‐ Rearview camera. row 2. ▷ The driver with the BMW display key is out‐ side the vehicle during Remote Control Park‐ ing. Maximum distance to the vehicle: ▷ Behind the vehicle, approx. 10–13 ft/3– 4 m, arrow 3. ▷ To the side of the vehicle, approx. 5 ft/1.5 m, arrow 4. ▷ Uphill or downhill grades max. 5 %. One camera is located at the bottom of each ex‐ ▷ No duplex garages. terior mirror housing.
232 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 233
Driver assistance systems CONTROLS
Forward parking Cancel, pause, continue the parking procedure Parking To cancel or pause the parking procedure: While driving forward, the system applies minor Release button. The vehicle stops with emer‐ steering corrections as needed. gency braking. 1. Approach the parking space driving forward, To resume the parking procedure: press the centered and in a straight line. Stop at a dis‐ button again within 30 seconds. tance of maximum 6.5 ft/2 m. Driving out in reverse 2. Apply parking brake and switch drive-ready state off using the Start/Stop button. Driving out of parking spaces 3. Have all occupants exit and close the doors. When driving in reverse, the vehicle drives back‐ 4. If necessary, switch on the display on the ward in a straight line without steering. BMW display key, refer to page 78, and can‐ cel the display block. 1. If necessary, switch on the display on the On the BMW display key, change to the BMW display key, refer to page 78, and can‐ menu: "R/C parking" cel the display block. 5. Press and hold the button on the side of 2. Unlock the vehicle. the BMW display key for the duration of the 3. On the BMW display key, change to the parking procedure. menu: "R/C parking" 6. Wait, until function readiness is indicated on 4. Press and hold the button on the side of the display. Observe possible SMS text mes‐ the BMW display key for the duration of the sages. parking procedure. 7. "ENGINE START": tap the button. The en‐ 5. Wait, until function readiness is indicated on gine starts. the display. Observe possible SMS text mes‐ 8. To start the parking procedure: touch the ar‐ sages. row symbol for "drive forward" on the display. 6. "ENGINE START": tap the button. The en‐ Press and hold the button: the vehicle gine starts. moves as long as the button is pressed. Re‐ 7. To start the reversing out procedure: touch lease the button for obstacles within the driv‐ the arrow symbol for "drive backward" on the ing range to stop the vehicle. display. For approach movements: touch the arrow Press and hold the button: the vehicle symbol for "drive backward". moves as long as the button is pressed. Re‐ 9. At the end of the parking procedure, release lease the button for obstacles within the driv‐ the button on the side of the BMW display ing range to stop the vehicle. key. The vehicle stops. 8. At the end of the reversing out procedure, re‐ "ENGINE STOP": tap the button. The engine lease the button on the side of the BMW dis‐ is switched off. play key. The vehicle stops. Lock the vehicle. 9. "ENGINE STOP": tap the button. The engine is switched off. The parking brake is engaged and standby state switched off. The parking brake is engaged and drive- ready state switched off. Lock vehicle if it is unlocked. 233 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 234
CONTROLS Driver assistance systems
Cancel, pause, continue the parking ▷ With a mounted emergency wheel. procedure ▷ In case of changes to an already-measured To cancel or pause the parking procedure: parking space. Release button. The vehicle stops with emer‐ ▷ With ditches or edges, for instance an edge gency braking. of a port. To resume the parking procedure: press the button again within 30 seconds. Function restrictions due to radio interference Messages on the BMW display In the case of radio interference, function restric‐ key tions may occur, refer to page 81, during Remote Control Parking with the BMW display key. The symbol identifies system messages. Limits of ultrasonic measurement Ultrasonic measurements might not function in System limits the following situations: ▷ For small children and animals. Safety information ▷ For persons with certain clothing, for instance coats. WARNING ▷ With external interference of the ultrasound, The system can react not at all, too late, incor‐ for instance from passing vehicles or loud rectly, or without justification due to the system machines. limits. There is a risk of accidents or risk of ▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, damaged damage to property. Follow the information re‐ or out of position. garding the system limits and actively intervene ▷ Under certain weather conditions such as if needed. high relative humidity, wet conditions, snow‐ fall, extreme heat, or strong wind. No parking assistance ▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other The parking assistant does not offer assistance vehicles. in the following situations: ▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects. ▷ In tight curves. ▷ With moving objects. ▷ For diagonal parking spaces. ▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as ledges. Functional limitations ▷ With objects with corners, edges, and The system may not be fully functional in the fol‐ smooth surfaces. lowing situations: ▷ With objects with a fine surface structure ▷ On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel such as fences. roads. ▷ For objects with porous surfaces. ▷ On slippery ground. ▷ With small and low objects, for instance ▷ On steep uphill or downhill grades. boxes. ▷ With accumulations of leaves/snow in the ▷ With obstacles and persons at the edge of parking space. the lane.
234 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 235
Driver assistance systems CONTROLS
▷ With soft obstacles or obstacles covered in Safety information foam material. ▷ With plants and bushes. WARNING ▷ Low objects already displayed, for instance The system cannot serve as a substitute for the curbs, can move into the blind area of the driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility sensors before or after a continuous tone and traffic situation. There is a risk of an acci‐ sounds. dent. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. ▷ Cargo that extends beyond the perimeter of Watch traffic closely and actively intervene the vehicle is not taken into account by the where appropriate. system. Parking spaces that are not suitable may be de‐ tected or suitable parking spaces may not be de‐ Overview tected at all. Button in the vehicle Crossing traffic warning
Concept At blind driveways or when driving out of diago‐ nal parking spaces, approaching cross traffic is detected sooner by the system than is possible from the driver's seat.
General information Park assistance button
Radar sensors
Two radar sensors in the rear bumper monitor the area behind the vehicle. The system indicates approaching traffic. The radar sensors are located in the rear Depending on the vehicle equipment, the traffic bumper. area in front of the vehicle is monitored as well. Two additional radar sensors are located in the front bumpers.
235 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 236
CONTROLS Driver assistance systems
▷ With the steering and lane control assistant active: when a certain driving distance is ex‐ ceeded. ▷ With an active parking operation of the park‐ ing assistant.
WARNING
General information Depending on the vehicle equipment, two addi‐ The respective display is called up on the Con‐ tional radar sensors are located in the front trol Display. A signal tone may sound and the bumpers. light in the exterior mirror may flash. Always keep the bumper in the area of the radar sensors clean and unobstructed. Light in the exterior mirror
Switching on/off
Activating/deactivating the system
1. Press park assistance button. 2. Move the Controller to the left. 3. "Settings" 4. "Cross traffic alert" The light in the exterior mirror flashes if vehicles 5. "Cross traffic alert" are detected by the rear sensors and your own vehicle is moving backwards. Switching on automatically If the system was activated on the Control Dis‐ Display in the PDC Park Distance play, it is automatically switched on as soon as PDC Park Distance Control or Panorama View is Control view active and a gear is engaged. If reverse gear is engaged, the rear system is switched on. Depending on the vehicle equipment, the front system is switched on when a forward gear is engaged.
Switching off automatically The system is automatically switched off in the In the PDC Park Distance Control view, the re‐ following situations: spective boundary area flashes red, if vehicles ▷ When the speed exceeds walking speed. are detected by the sensors.
236 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 237
Driver assistance systems CONTROLS
Display in the camera view
The respective boundary area, arrow 1, in the camera view flashes red, if vehicles are detected by the sensors. Yellow lines, arrow 2, mark the bumper of your own vehicle.
Acoustic warning In addition to the optical indicator, a warning sig‐ nal sounds if your own vehicle moves into the re‐ spective direction.
System limits The system may not be fully functional in the fol‐ lowing situations: ▷ If the speed of the approaching vehicle is very high. ▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall. ▷ In tight curves. ▷ If the bumper is dirty, iced up, or covered, for instance by stickers. ▷ If cargo protrudes. ▷ If crossing objects move at a very slow speed. ▷ If other objects are in the capture range of the sensors, that hide cross traffic.
237 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 238
CONTROLS Driving comfort
Driving comfort
Vehicle features and Adaptive Drive options Concept This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ Adaptive Drive is an actively controlled chassis/ cific and optional features offered with the series. suspension. The system increases driving com‐ It also describes features that are not necessarily fort and minimizes the lateral tilt when driving available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected around curves. options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When us‐ General information ing these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed. For active control, this system uses the available information, for instance from the navigation sys‐ tem or the driving style analysis. Adaptive chassis In particular in the ADAPTIVE driving mode, refer to page 138, this information is used to influence Concept the adaptive chassis, refer to page 238, control and the active roll stabilization, refer to This system reduces undesirable vehicle motion page 238, control. This further increases both when using a dynamic driving style or traveling the agility of the vehicle as well as the lane stabil‐ on uneven road surfaces. ity. The function may be restricted if the navigation General information data is invalid, outdated or not available, for ex‐ This enhances the driving dynamics and driving ample. comfort depending on the road surface condition and driving style. Active roll stabilization Tuning The system offers several different damping set‐ Concept tings. The system reduces the lateral tilt of the vehicle The damping settings are assigned to the differ‐ that occurs during rapid driving in curves or dur‐ ent driving modes of the Driving Dynamics Con‐ ing quick evasive maneuvers. trol, refer to page 136. Driving mode Damper tuning General information The lateral tilt of the vehicle is balanced out by COMFORT Balanced out permanent adjustment on the front and rear ECO PRO axles. The vehicle is thus always stabilized. SPORT Firm Agility and driving comfort are increased under all driving conditions. SPORT PLUS
238 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 239
Driving comfort CONTROLS
Tuning M Dynamic Professional The system offers several different tunings. The tunings are assigned to the different driving Concept modes of the Driving Dynamics Control, refer to M Dynamic Professional is an actively controlled page 136. sport chassis/suspension. The system increases Driving mode Tuning driving comfort and minimizes the lateral tilt when driving around curves. COMFORT Comfortable M Dynamic Professional encompasses the fol‐ ECO PRO lowing systems: SPORT Firm ▷ Low-lying sport chassis. SPORT PLUS ▷ Adaptive chassis. ▷ Active roll stabilization. Adaptive M chassis ▷ Integral Active Steering. General information Concept For active control, this system uses the available The Adaptive M chassis is a controllable sport information, for instance from the navigation sys‐ chassis/suspension. This system reduces unde‐ tem or the driving style analysis. sirable vehicle motion when using a dynamic This information influences the control of the fol‐ driving style or traveling on uneven road surfa‐ lowing systems, especially in ADAPTIVE driving ces. mode, refer to page 138: This enhances the driving dynamics and driving ▷ Adaptive chassis, refer to page 238 comfort depending on the road surface condition ▷ Active roll stabilization, refer to page 238 and driving style. ▷ Integral Active Steering, refer to page 198 General information This further increases the agility and comfort of The system offers several different damping set‐ the vehicle. tings. The function may be restricted if the navigation These are assigned to the different driving data is invalid, outdated or not available, for ex‐ modes of the Driving Dynamics Control, refer to ample. page 136. Driving mode Damper tuning
SPORT Firm
SPORT PLUS Sporty and tight
COMFORT/ECO PRO Balanced out
239 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 240
CONTROLS Climate control
Climate control
Vehicle features and Automatic climate control options Overview This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ cific and optional features offered with the series. Buttons in the vehicle It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When us‐ ing these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.
Interior air quality
The air quality in the vehicle is improved by the following components: Climate control functions ▷ Emission tested car's interior. Button Function ▷ Microfilter. Temperature, refer to page 241. ▷ Air conditioning system to control the tem‐ perature, air flow and recirculated-air mode. Depending on the equipment specification: ▷ Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter ▷ Ionization Climate control operation, refer ▷ Fragrancing to page 241. ▷ Automatic recirculated-air control AUC Maximum cooling, refer to ▷ Parked-car ventilation page 242. AUTO program, refer to page 242.
Recirculated-air mode, refer to page 243.
Air flow, manual, refer to page 243.
Air distribution, manual, refer to page 243.
SYNC program, refer to page 244.
240 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 241
Climate control CONTROLS
Button Function Press and hold the left button on the driver's side until the system Defrost and defog window, refer switches off. to page 244. ▷ On the front passenger side: Rear window defroster, refer to Press and hold the left button on the page 244. front passenger side. Active seat ventilation, refer to page 113. Temperature
Seat heating, refer to page 112. Concept The automatic climate control achieves the set Open the Climate menu, refer to temperature as quickly as possible, if needed, by page 241. using the maximum cooling or heating capacity, For the following settings, for in‐ and then keeps it constant. stance: upper body temperature adjustment, parked-car ventila‐ Settings tion. Turn the ring to set the desired temperature. Opening the Climate menu Do not rapidly switch between dif‐ Press button. ferent temperature settings. Oth‐ erwise, the automatic climate control will not have sufficient time to adjust the The Climate menu is displayed. set temperature. All the climate control functions which can ad‐ justed via iDrive can be called up via the Climate menu, e.g., upper body temperature adjustment, Air conditioning parked-car ventilation. Concept Switching on/off The air in the car's interior will be cooled and de‐ humidified and, depending on the temperature Switching on setting, warmed again. Press any button except for the following: The car's interior can only be cooled with the ▷ Rear window defroster. drive-ready state switched on. ▷ Left side of air flow button. Switching on/off ▷ SYNC program. Press button. ▷ Seat heating. The LED is illuminated with air condi‐ ▷ Seat ventilation. tioning switched on. Switching off Air conditioning is switched on with the engine running. When equipped with automatic climate control with enhanced features: ▷ Complete system:
241 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 242
CONTROLS Climate control
Depending on the weather, the windshield and Switching on/off side windows may fog up briefly when drive- Press button. ready state is switched on. The LED is illuminated with the AUTO The air conditioning is switched on automatically program switched on. with the AUTO program. Depending on the selected temperature, the in‐ When using the automatic climate control, con‐ tensity of the AUTO program, and outside influ‐ densation water develops and collects under‐ ences, the air is directed to the windshield, side neath the vehicle. windows, upper body, and into the floor area.
Maximum cooling The air conditioning, refer to page 241, is switched on automatically with the AUTO pro‐ Concept gram. The system is set to the lowest temperature, op‐ At the same time, a condensation sensor con‐ timum air flow and recirculated-air mode with the trols the program so as to prevent window con‐ drive-ready state switched on. densation as much as possible. The AUTO program is switched off automati‐ General information cally, when manual air distribution is set. The function is available with external tempera‐ tures above approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ and with the Intensity drive-ready state switched on. With the AUTO program switched on, the inten‐ sity can be set. This changes the automatic con‐ Switching on/off trol for the air flow and air distribution. Press button. Press the left or right side of the button: The LED is illuminated with the system decrease or increase intensity. switched on. The selected intensity is shown on the display of Air flows out of the vents to the upper body re‐ the automatic climate control. gion. The vents need to be open for this. Adjust air flow on the driver's side with the pro‐ Automatic recirculated-air gram active. control AUC
AUTO program Concept The automatic recirculated-air control AUC rec‐ Concept ognizes odors or pollutants in the outside air. The AUTO program cools, ventilates or heats The outside air supply is shut off and the interior the car's interior automatically. air is recirculated. The air distribution and temperature are control‐ led automatically depending on the temperature General information in the car's interior and the desired temperature If the system is activated, a sensor detects pollu‐ setting including the selected intensity of the air tants in the outside air and controls the shut-off flow. automatically. If the system is deactivated, outside air continu‐ ously flows into the car's interior.
242 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 243
Climate control CONTROLS
With constant recirculated-air mode, the air qual‐ Controlling the air flow manually ity in the car's interior deteriorates and the fog‐ ging of the windows increases. Concept The air flow for climate control can be adjusted Switching on/off manually. Via iDrive: 1. "My Vehicle" General information 2. "Vehicle settings" To manually adjust air flow switch off AUTO pro‐ gram first. 3. "Climate functions" 4. If necessary, "Air quality" Operation 5. "Automatic air recirculation" Press the left or right side of the button: If there is window condensation, switch off recir‐ decrease or increase air flow. culated-air mode or defog the windows, refer to page 244. The selected air flow is shown on the display of the automatic climate control. Recirculated-air mode The air flow of the automatic climate control may be reduced automatically to save battery power. Concept You may react to unpleasant odors or pollutants Controlling the air distribution in the immediate environment by temporarily manually suspending the supply of outside air. The system then recirculates the air flow within the vehicle. Concept The air distribution for climate control can be ad‐ Operation justed manually. Press button repeatedly to select an op‐ erating mode: Operation ▷ LED off: outside air flows in continuously. Press button repeatedly to select a pro‐ ▷ LED on: the supply of outside air is perma‐ gram: nently shut off. ▷ Windows, upper body region, and floor area. To prevent window fogging, recirculated-air ▷ Upper body region and floor area. mode switches off automatically after a certain amount of time, depending on the environmental ▷ Floor area. conditions. ▷ Windows and floor area. With constant recirculated-air mode, the air qual‐ ▷ Windows: driver's side only. ity in the car's interior deteriorates and the fog‐ ▷ Windows and upper body. ging of the windows increases. ▷ Upper body region. If there is window condensation, switch off recir‐ The selected air distribution is shown on the dis‐ culated-air mode or defog the windows, refer to play of the automatic climate control. page 244. If there is window condensation, defog the win‐ dows, refer to page 244.
243 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 244
CONTROLS Climate control
SYNC program Rear window defroster Press the button. The LED lights up. Concept Depending on the equipment, the following set‐ The function is available with the engine running. tings of the driver's side can be transferred to the The rear window defroster switches off automat‐ front-passenger side and the rear: ically after a certain period of time. ▷ Temperature. ▷ Air flow. Microfilter/activated-charcoal ▷ Air distribution. filter ▷ AUTO program. The microfilter removes dust and pollen from the incoming air. Switching on/off The activated-charcoal filter also removes gas‐ Press button. eous pollutants from the outside air that enters the vehicle. The LED is illuminated with the SYNC program switched on. Have this combined filter changed during vehicle maintenance, refer to page 337. The program is switched off automatically if the settings on the front passenger side or in the rear are changed. Ventilation
Defrosting windows and Concept removing condensation The air flow directions can be individually ad‐ justed. Concept Ice and condensation are quickly removed from Adjusting the ventilation the windshield and the front side windows. General information Switching on/off The air flow directions can be adjusted for direct Press button. or indirect ventilation. The LED is illuminated with the system switched on. Direct ventilation The air flow is directed towards the passengers. Point the side vents towards the side windows, The air flow heats or cools noticeably, depending as needed. The air flow can be adjusted man‐ on the adjusted temperature. ually with the system switched on. If there is window condensation, press Indirect ventilation the button on the driver's side or switch The air flow is not directed towards the passen‐ on air conditioning to utilize the condensation gers. The car's interior is warmed or cooled indi‐ sensor. Make sure that air can flow to the wind‐ rectly, depending on the set temperature. shield.
244 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 245
Climate control CONTROLS
Front ventilation Ventilation in rear, center
Overview
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction, ar‐ row 1. ▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction, ar‐ ▷ Thumbwheel for variable opening and closing row 1. of the vents, arrow 2. ▷ Thumbwheel for variable opening and closing ▷ Thumbwheel for varying the temperature, ar‐ of the vents, arrow 2. row 3. Toward blue: colder. Varying the temperature of the Toward red: warmer. ventilation
General information Ventilation in the rear, on the The temperature of the ventilation in the upper side body area can be varied. The temperature is individually adjusted, e.g. colder toward blue, warmer toward red. The air flow of the ventilation in the upper body range heats or cools noticeably, depending on the adjusted temperature. This does not change the set interior tempera‐ ture for the driver and front passenger.
Settings ▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction, ar‐ row 1. Via iDrive: ▷ Thumbwheel for variable opening and closing 1. "My Vehicle" of the vents, arrow 2. 2. "Vehicle settings" 3. If necessary, "Climate functions" 4. "Temperature adjustment, upper body" 5. Set the desired temperature. ▷ Toward blue: colder. ▷ Toward red: warmer.
245 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 246
CONTROLS Climate control
Rear automatic climate 3. "Climate functions" control 4. "Rear climate" The rear automatic climate control is not ready for operation if the automatic climate control is Overview switched off or if the function for defrosting the windows and removing condensation is active. Buttons in the vehicle Using the button: switching on Press any button except for the following: ▷ Left side of air flow button. ▷ Seat heating.
Using the button: switching off Press and hold the left side of the but‐ ton.
Climate control functions Temperature Button Function Concept Temperature, refer to page 246 The automatic climate control achieves the set temperature as quickly as possible, if needed, by using the maximum cooling or heating capacity, and then keeps it constant.
Maximum cooling, refer to Settings page 246. Turn the ring to set the desired AUTO program, refer to temperature. page 247. Do not rapidly switch between dif‐ ferent temperature settings. Oth‐ Air flow, manual, refer to erwise, the automatic climate page 247. control will not have sufficient time to adjust the Air distribution, manual, refer to set temperature. page 247. Seat heating, refer to page 112. Maximum cooling
Concept Switching on/off The system is set to the lowest temperature, op‐ timum air flow and recirculated-air mode with the Via iDrive drive-ready state switched on. 1. "My Vehicle" 2. "Vehicle settings"
246 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 247
Climate control CONTROLS
General information General information The function is available with external tempera‐ To manually adjust air flow switch off AUTO pro‐ tures above approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ and with the gram first. drive-ready state switched on. Operation Switching on/off Press the left or right side of the button: Press button. decrease or increase air flow. The LED is illuminated with the system The selected air flow is shown on the display of switched on. the automatic climate control. Air flows out of the vents to the upper body re‐ gion. The vents need to be open for this. Controlling the air distribution manually AUTO program Concept Concept The air distribution for climate control can be ad‐ Air flow, air distribution and temperature are con‐ justed manually. trolled automatically. Operation Switching on/off Press the button repeatedly to select a Press button. program:
The LED is illuminated with the AUTO ▷ Upper body region. program switched on. ▷ Upper body region and floor area. Depending on the selected temperature, the AUTO intensity, and outside influences, the air is ▷ Floor area. directed to the upper body and into the floor area. Parked-car ventilation
Intensity Concept With the AUTO program activated, the automatic The car's interior can be cooled or heated before intensity control can be changed: driving off with the parked-car ventilation. De‐ Press the left or right side of the button: pending on set temperature and ambient tem‐ decrease or increase intensity. perature, the car's interior is ventilated or possi‐ bly heated using the residual engine heat. The selected intensity is shown on the display of the automatic climate control. General information Controlling the air flow manually The system can be switched on and off directly or via a preset departure time. Concept The activation time is determined based on the external temperature. The system promptly The air flow for climate control can be adjusted switches on before the selected departure time. manually.
247 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 248
CONTROLS Climate control
Functional requirements 3. If necessary, "Climate functions" ▷ The vehicle is in idle state or standby state 4. "Comfort ventilation" or "Comfort heating/ and not in drive-ready state. ventilation" ▷ Battery is sufficiently charged. 5. "Activate now" If parked-car ventilation is switched on, the vehicle battery will be discharged. Thus, limit Via BMW display key the maximum activation time to save the ve‐ hicle battery. The system will be available Switching on again after the engine is started or after a 1. Switch on the display of the BMW display short trip. key. ▷ Make sure that the vehicle's date and time 2. "Precondit. setting" are set correctly. 3. Tap the symbol or the symbol. ▷ Open the vents to allow air to flow out. 4. "Activate now" 5. "Start" Switching on/off directly Switching off General information 1. Switch on the display of the BMW display There are different ways to switch the system on key. or off. 2. "Precondit. setting" The system switches off automatically after a 3. Tap the symbol or the symbol. certain period of time. The system continues to run for some time after being switched off. 4. "Stop"
Using the button Display When the vehicle is in standby state, the parked- symbol on the automatic climate control indi‐ car ventilation can be switched on or off via the cates the system is switched on. automatic climate control buttons. REST is displayed on the automatic climate con‐ Press any button except: trol. The residual engine heat is used. ▷ Rear window defroster. Departure time ▷ Left side of air flow button. ▷ Seat heating. Concept ▷ Seat ventilation. Different departure times can be adjusted to en‐ ▷ SYNC program. sure a comfortable interior temperature in the ve‐ ▷ MENU. hicle at the time of departure. The system switches off after leaving and lock‐ ▷ One-time departure time: the time can be ing the vehicle. set. The system is switched on once. Via iDrive ▷ Departure time with weekday: time and day 1. "My Vehicle" of the week can be set. 2. "Vehicle settings"
248 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 249
Climate control CONTROLS
On the desired weekdays, the system will be 4. "Comfort ventilation" or "Comfort heating/ switched on promptly before the set depar‐ ventilation" ture time. 5. "For departure time" The departure time is preselected in two steps: 6. Activate the desired departure time. ▷ Set departure times. ▷ Activate departure times. Via BMW display key 1. Switch on the display of the BMW display Setting the departure time key. 2. "Precondit. setting" Via iDrive 3. Tap the symbol or the symbol. 1. "My Vehicle" 4. Tap on symbol. 2. "Vehicle settings" 5. Activate the desired departure time. 3. If necessary, "Climate functions" 4. "Comfort ventilation" or "Comfort heating/ Display ventilation" The symbol on the automatic climate 5. Select the desired departure time. control signals an activated departure time. 6. Set the departure time. 7. Select day of the week, if needed. Ambient air package Via BMW display key 1. Switch on the display of the BMW display Concept key. The Ambient Air Package can be used to clean 2. "Precondit. setting" and scent the interior air with high-quality fra‐ grances. 3. Tap the symbol or the symbol. Ionization is used to clean the air from sus‐ 4. Select the desired departure time. pended particles. Together with the selected fra‐ 5. Set the departure time. grance, ionization contributes to well-being and 6. Select day of the week, if needed. relaxation while driving. 7. "OK" General information Activating the departure time Two different fragrances can be selected in the vehicle. A variety of other fragrances is possible Functional requirement by replacing the fragrance cartridges. If a departure time is to influence the switching The following criteria can influence the percep‐ on of parked-car ventilation, the respective de‐ tion of scents in the car's interior: parture time must be activated first. ▷ Automatic climate control settings. ▷ Temperature and air humidity. Via iDrive ▷ Time of day and season. 1. "My Vehicle" ▷ Physical condition of the vehicle occupants, 2. "Vehicle settings" for instance fatigue. 3. If necessary, "Climate functions"
249 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 250
CONTROLS Climate control
BMW recommends the use of genuine BMW The fragrance cartridges are located in the glove fragrance cartridges. compartment. The genuine BMW fragrance cartridges are not To ensure a pleasant fragrance inside of the ve‐ suitable for refilling. When a cartridge is empty, hicle when starting the trip, fragrancing can occur replace it with a new fragrance cartridge. prior to the trip. The system is automatically switched on with the parked-car ventilation if fra‐ Safety information grancing was switched on at the end of the last trip.
WARNING Functional requirements Refilled genuine BMW fragrance cartridges can ▷ Fragrance cartridges are sufficiently filled. cause the emission of harmful substances, mal‐ functions, and damage to the system. There is ▷ Interior temperature between 41 ℉/+5 ℃ a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do and 104 ℉/+40 ℃. not refill genuine fragrance cartridges. When a ▷ Open the vents to allow the fragrance to flow cartridge is empty, replace it with a new fra‐ out. grance cartridge. Selecting the fragrance Two different fragrances can be selected in the Ionization vehicle. Via iDrive: Concept Ionization cleans the car's interior air of sus‐ 1. "My Vehicle" pended particles. 2. "Vehicle settings" 3. "Climate functions" Switching on/off 4. "Fragrance" Via iDrive: 5. Select the desired setting. 1. "My Vehicle" The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ 2. "Vehicle settings" rently used. 3. "Climate functions" Switching fragrancing on/off, 4. If necessary, "Air quality" adjusting intensity 5. "Ionization" Via iDrive: The climate control display indicates that ioniza‐ tion is switched on. 1. "My Vehicle" 2. "Vehicle settings" Fragrancing 3. "Climate functions" 4. "Fragrance" General information 5. "Level" Fragrancing is done at intervals in order to avoid a habituation effect. 6. Select the desired setting. Two fragrance cartridges in the vehicle allow switching between the fragrances.
250 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 251
Climate control CONTROLS
Display 3. Remove the cover of the fragrance cartridge. The illustrations on the Control Display show the Hold the cover on the top to slide it from the actual filling level of the fragrance cartridges. fragrance cartridge. Via iDrive: 1. "My Vehicle" 2. "Vehicle settings" 3. "Climate functions" 4. "Fragrance" The fill level of the current fragrance is dis‐ played.
5. Select the desired setting. 4. Insert the removed cover on the back side of When an empty fragrance cartridge is indicated, the fragrance cartridge. the cartridge still contains a fluid carrying the fra‐ grance. However, it is not sufficient for fragranc‐ ing. When a fragrance cartridge requires replace‐ ment, a Check Control message is displayed
Inserting fragrance cartridges The fragrance cartridges are located in the glove compartment.
1. Open the glove compartment, refer to 5. Position fragrance cartridge such that the page 261. chip faces away from the cartridge holder. 2. Press on the bottom of the cartridge holder. The cartridge holder slides down.
251 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 252
CONTROLS Climate control
6. Insert the fragrance cartridge without pres‐ Fragrance cartridge, arrow 2: second fra‐ sure into the cartridge holder. The cartridge grance indicated on the Control Display. snaps lightly into place.
4. Pull desired fragrance cartridge from the 7. Push the cartridge holder up, until it engages. holder. Make sure that no objects press against the cartridge holder from below, otherwise the function of the ambient air package could be impacted. 8. Close the glove compartment.
Removing the fragrance cartridge The fragrance cartridges are located in the glove compartment. 1. Open the glove compartment, refer to Recycling page 261. Empty fragrance cartridges can be taken 2. Press on the bottom of the cartridge holder. to a dealer’s service center or another The cartridge holder slides down. qualified service center or repair shop for recycling.
3. Pull desired fragrance cartridge from the holder. Fragrance cartridge, arrow 1: first fragrance indicated on the Control Display.
252 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 253
Interior equipment CONTROLS
Interior equipment
Vehicle features and Safety information options WARNING This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ Body parts can be jammed when operating re‐ cific and optional features offered with the series. mote-controlled systems, such as the garage It also describes features that are not necessarily door, using the integrated Universal Remote available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected Control. There is a risk of injury or risk of dam‐ options or country versions. This also applies to age to property. Make sure that the area of safety-related functions and systems. When us‐ movement of the respective system is clear ing these functions and systems, the applicable during programming and operation. Also follow laws and regulations must be observed. the safety information of the hand-held trans‐ mitter. Integrated Universal Remote Control Compatibility If this symbol is printed on the packaging Concept or in the owner's manual of the system to be controlled, the system is generally The integrated Universal Remote Control in the compatible with the integrated Universal Remote interior mirror can operate up to 3 functions of Control. remote-controlled systems, such as garage door If you have any questions, please contact: drives, barriers, or lighting systems. ▷ A dealer’s service center or another qualified General information service center or repair shop. The Integrated Universal Remote Control repla‐ ▷ www.homelink.com on the Internet. ces up to 3 different hand-held transmitters. To HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gentex operate the remote control, the buttons on the Corporation. interior mirror must be programmed with the de‐ sired functions. The hand-held transmitter for the particular system is required in order to program the remote control. Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored func‐ tions for the sake of security.
253 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 254
CONTROLS Interior equipment
Control elements on the interior If the LED does not flash faster after at least mirror 60 seconds, change the distance between the interior mirror and the hand-held trans‐ mitter and repeat the step. Several more at‐ tempts at different distances may be neces‐ sary. Wait at least 15 seconds between attempts. Canada: if programming with the hand-held transmitter was interrupted, hold down the in‐ terior mirror button and repeatedly press and release the hand-held transmitter button for 2 seconds. ▷ Buttons, arrow 1. 7. To program other functions on other buttons, ▷ LED, arrow 2. repeat steps 3 to 5. ▷ The hand-held transmitter, arrow 3, is re‐ The systems can be controlled using the interior quired for programming. mirror buttons.
Programming Special feature of the rolling code wireless system General information If you are unable to operate the system after re‐ peated programming, please check if the system 1. Switch on standby state. to be controlled features a rolling code radio sys‐ 2. Initial setup: tem. Press and hold the two outer buttons on the Read the system's owner's manual, or press the interior mirror simultaneously for approxi‐ programmed button on the interior mirror longer. mately 10 seconds until the LED flashes If the LED on the interior mirror starts flashing green rapidly. This erases all programming of rapidly and then stays lit constantly for 2 sec‐ the buttons on the interior mirror. onds, the system features a rolling code radio 3. Press the interior mirror button to be pro‐ system. Flashing and continuous illumination of grammed. The LED on the interior mirror will the LED will repeat for approximately 20 sec‐ slowly begin flashing orange. onds. 4. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the system For systems with a rolling code radio system, the to be controlled approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to 8 cm integrated Universal Remote Control and the away from the buttons of the interior mirror. system also have to be synchronized. The required distance depends on the hand- Please read the owner's manual to find out how held transmitter. to synchronize the system. 5. Press and hold the button of the desired Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a second function on the hand-held transmitter. person. 6. As soon as the LED flashes green more rap‐ idly or lights up continuously, release the but‐ tons. Green light indicates that the button on the interior mirror has been programmed. Faster green flashing indicates that it is a roll‐ ing code wireless system.
254 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 255
Interior equipment CONTROLS
Synchronizing the universal remote control with Canada: if programming with the hand-held the system: transmitter was interrupted, hold down the in‐ terior mirror button and repeatedly press and 1. Park the vehicle within range of the remote- release the hand-held transmitter button for controlled system. 2 seconds. 2. Program the relevant button on the interior mirror as described. Operation 3. Locate and press the synchronizing button on the system being programmed. You have approx. 30 seconds for the next step. WARNING 4. Hold down the programmed button on the in‐ Body parts can be jammed when operating re‐ terior mirror for approximately 3 seconds and mote-controlled systems, such as the garage then release it. If necessary, repeat this step door, using the integrated Universal Remote up to three times in order to finish synchroni‐ Control. There is a risk of injury or risk of dam‐ zation. Once synchronization is complete, the age to property. Make sure that the area of programmed function will be carried out. movement of the respective system is clear during programming and operation. Also follow Reprogramming individual the safety information of the hand-held trans‐ mitter. buttons 1. Switch on standby state. The system, such as the garage door, can be op‐ 2. Press and hold the interior mirror button to be erated using the button on the interior mirror programmed. while the drive-ready or standby state is switched on. To do this, hold down the button 3. As soon as the interior mirror LED starts within receiving range of the system until the flashing slowly, hold the hand-held transmit‐ function is activated. The interior mirror LED ter for the system to be controlled approx. 1 stays lit while the wireless signal is being trans‐ to 3 in/2.5 to 8 cm away from the buttons of mitted. the interior mirror. The required distance de‐ pends on the hand-held transmitter. Deleting stored functions 4. Likewise, press and hold the button of the desired function on the hand-held transmit‐ Press and hold the two outer buttons on the in‐ ter. terior mirror simultaneously for approximately 10 seconds until the LED on the interior mirror 5. Release both buttons as soon as the interior flashes green rapidly. All stored functions will be mirror LED flashes more rapidly or lights up deleted. The functions cannot be deleted individ‐ continuously. The LED flashing more rapidly ually. or being continuously lit up indicates that the button on the interior mirror has been pro‐ grammed. The system can then be controlled Sun visor by the button on the interior mirror. If the LED does not flash faster after at most 60 seconds, change the distance and repeat Glare shield the programming starting with step 4. Several Fold the sun visor down or up. more attempts at different distances may be necessary. Wait at least 15 seconds between attempts.
255 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 256
CONTROLS Interior equipment
Glare shield from the side Emptying
Folding out 1. Fold the sun visor down. 2. Unhook it from the holder and swing it to the side.
Folding up Proceed in the reverse order to close the sun vi‐ sor. Pull the ashtray with the closed cover out of the Vanity mirror cup holder. A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor behind a cover. When the cover is opened, the mirror lighting switches on. Cigarette lighter
Safety information Ashtray
WARNING Front center console Contact with the hot heating element or the hot socket of the cigarette lighter can cause burns. Opening Flammable materials can ignite if the cigarette 1. Push the cover forward until it engages. lighter falls down or is held against the respec‐ tive objects. There is a risk of fire and injuries. Take hold of the cigarette lighter by its handle. Make sure that children do not use the ciga‐ rette lighter and burn themselves.
NOTICE If metal objects fall into the socket, they can cause a short circuit. There is a risk of damage 2. The ashtray is located in a cup holder. Fold to property. Replace the cigarette lighter or the ashtray cover upward. socket cover again after using the socket.
256 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 257
Interior equipment CONTROLS
Front center console Sockets
Concept The lighter socket can be used as a socket for electrical equipment when standby and drive- ready state are switched on.
General information The total load of all sockets must not exceed 140 watts at 12 volts. Push the cover forward until it engages. Do not damage the socket by using non-com‐ patible connectors.
Safety information
WARNING Devices and cables in the unfolding area of the airbags, such as portable navigation devices, can hinder the unfolding of the airbag or be thrown around in the car's interior during un‐ The cigarette lighter is located between the cup folding. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that holders. devices and cables are not in the airbag's area of unfolding. Rear center console
NOTICE Battery chargers for the vehicle battery can work with high voltages and currents, which means that the 12 volt on-board network can be overloaded or damaged. There is a risk of damage to property. Only connect battery chargers for the vehicle battery to the starting aid terminals in the engine compartment. The cigarette lighter is located in the socket.
Operation NOTICE If metal objects fall into the socket, they can Push in the cigarette lighter. cause a short circuit. There is a risk of damage The cigarette lighter can be re‐ to property. Replace the cigarette lighter or moved as soon as it pops back socket cover again after using the socket. out.
257 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 258
CONTROLS Interior equipment
Front center armrest Rear center console
The center armrest contains a socket. The center console contains one or two sockets. Pull off the respective cover. Front center console In the cargo area
Push the cover forward until it engages. A socket is located on the right side in the cargo area. Unfold the cover.
USB interface
General information Follow the information regarding the connection of mobile devices to the USB interface in the A socket is located between the cup holders. section on USB connections, refer to page 64. Pull off the cover.
258 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 259
Interior equipment CONTROLS
In the center armrest
A USB interface is located in the center console.
A USB interface is located in the center armrest.
Steptronic transmission: in the center console
NOTICE Objects in the storage compartment, e.g., large USB connectors, may block or damage the cover when it is being opened or closed. There is a risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the cover is clear while opening and closing it.
Push the cover forward until it engages.
259 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 260
CONTROLS Storage compartments
Storage compartments
Vehicle features and ▷ Glove compartment on the driver's side, refer to page 261. options ▷ Compartments in the doors, refer to page 261. This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ ▷ Steptronic transmission: storage compart‐ cific and optional features offered with the series. ment in the center console, refer to It also describes features that are not necessarily page 262. available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to ▷ Center armrest, refer to page 262. safety-related functions and systems. When us‐ ▷ Storage compartment in the rear center con‐ ing these functions and systems, the applicable sole, refer to page 262. laws and regulations must be observed. ▷ Pockets on the backrests of the front seats.
Safety information Glove compartment
WARNING Front passenger side Loose objects or devices with a cable connec‐ Safety information tion to the vehicle, for instance mobile phones, can be thrown into the car's interior while driv‐ ing, for instance in the event of an accident or WARNING during braking and evasive maneuvers. There is Folded open, the glove compartment protrudes a risk of injury. Secure loose objects or devices in the car's interior. Objects in the glove com‐ with a cable connection to the vehicle in the partment can be thrown into the car's interior car's interior. while driving, for instance in the event of an ac‐ cident or during braking and evasive maneu‐ vers. There is a risk of injury. Always close the NOTICE glove compartment immediately after using it. Anti-slip pads such as anti-slip mats can dam‐ age the dashboard. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not use anti-slip pads.
Storage compartments
The following storage compartments are availa‐ ble in the car's interior: ▷ Glove compartment on the front passenger side, refer to page 260.
260 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 261
Storage compartments CONTROLS
Opening Opening
Pull the handle. Pull the handle. The light in the glove compartment switches on. Closing Closing Fold cover closed. Fold cover closed.
Locking Compartments in the doors The glove compartment can be locked with an integrated key. This prevents access to the glove General information compartment. There are storage compartments in the doors. After the glove compartment is locked, the re‐ mote control can be handed over without the Safety information integrated key, for instance when the vehicle is parked by valet parking. WARNING Driver's side Breakable objects, such as glass bottles or glasses, can break in the event of an accident Safety information or a braking or evasive maneuver. Broken glass can be scattered in the car's interior. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do WARNING not use any breakable objects while driving. Folded open, the glove compartment protrudes Only stow breakable objects in closed storage in the car's interior. Objects in the glove com‐ compartments. partment can be thrown into the car's interior while driving, for instance in the event of an ac‐ cident or during braking and evasive maneu‐ vers. There is a risk of injury. Always close the glove compartment immediately after using it.
261 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 262
CONTROLS Storage compartments
Steptronic transmission: Opening storage compartment in the center console
Opening
Press button.
Closing Press cover down until it engages.
Push the cover forward until it engages. Cup holders Closing Touch the cover on the handle bar. The cover Safety information closes.
NOTICE Storage compartment in Unsuitable containers in the cup holder and hot beverages can damage the cup holder and in‐ the rear center console crease the risk of injury in the event of an acci‐ dent. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage The back of the center console contains one or to property. Use light-weight, unbreakable, and two storage compartments. sealable containers. Do not transport hot bever‐ ages. Do not force objects into the cup holder. Center armrest
Front
General information A storage compartment is located in the center armrest between the seats.
262 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 263
Storage compartments CONTROLS
Front Opening and closing
Opening General information The cup holder can be adjusted for three differ‐ ent container sizes.
Opening
Push the cover forward until it engages.
Fold the center armrest forward. Press the button and fold out the cup holder fully.
Reducing the size To make it smaller, the cup holder can be folded Two cup holders are located in the center con‐ in in 2 steps. sole. Enlarging Closing To make a smaller cup holder bigger, first fold it in completely. Then fold the cup holder out again Touch the cover on the handle bar. The cover fully. closes. Closing Rear Fold in the cup holder fully, until it engages. Safety information
NOTICE With an open cup holder, the center armrest cannot be folded back up. There is a risk of damage to property. Press back the covers be‐ fore the center armrest is folded up.
263 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 264
CONTROLS Storage compartments
Clothes hooks
Safety information
WARNING Clothing articles on the clothes hooks can ob‐ struct the view while driving. There is a risk of an accident. When suspending clothing articles from the clothes hooks, ensure that they will not obstruct the driver's view.
WARNING Improper use of the clothes hooks can lead to a risk of objects flying about during braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to property. Only hang light‐ weight objects, for instance clothing articles, from the clothes hooks.
General information The clothes hooks are located in the grab han‐ dles in the rear and on the door pillar in the rear.
264 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 265
Cargo area CONTROLS
Cargo area
Vehicle features and WARNING options Improperly stowed objects can shift and be thrown into the car's interior, for instance in the This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ event of an accident or during braking and eva‐ cific and optional features offered with the series. sive maneuvers. Vehicle occupants can be hit It also describes features that are not necessarily and injured. There is a risk of injury. Stow and available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected secure objects and cargo properly. options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When us‐ ing these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed. NOTICE Fluids in the cargo area can cause damage. There is a risk of damage to property. Make Loading sure that no fluids leak in the cargo area.
Safety information Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit WARNING 1. Locate the statement “The combined weight High gross weight can overheat the tires, dam‐ of occupants and cargo should never exceed age them internally and cause a sudden drop in XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard. tire inflation pressure. Driving characteristics 2. Determine the combined weight of the driver may be negatively impacted, reducing lane sta‐ and passengers that will be riding in your ve‐ bility, lengthening the braking distances and hicle. changing the steering response. There is a risk of an accident. Pay attention to the permitted 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver load capacity of the tires and never exceed the and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs. permitted gross weight. 4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals WARNING 1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb pas‐ sengers in your vehicle, the amount of availa‐ Loose objects or devices with a cable connec‐ ble cargo and luggage load capacity is tion to the vehicle, for instance mobile phones, 650 lbs. (1,400–750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.) can be thrown into the car's interior while driv‐ ing, for instance in the event of an accident or 5. Determine the combined weight of luggage during braking and evasive maneuvers. There is and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That a risk of injury. Secure loose objects or devices weight may not safely exceed the available with a cable connection to the vehicle in the car's interior.
265 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 266
CONTROLS Cargo area
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Lashing eyes in the cargo Step 4. 6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load area from your trailer will be transferred to your ve‐ hicle. Consult this manual to determine how General information this reduces the available cargo and luggage Attach load securing aids, such as lashing straps, load capacity of your vehicle. retaining straps, draw straps or cargo nets, to the lashing eyes in the cargo area. Load Lashing eyes
The maximum load is the sum of the weight of the occupants and the cargo. There are four lashing eyes in the cargo area for The greater the weight of the occupants, the securing cargo. less cargo that can be transported.
Stowing and securing cargo Storage compartments in ▷ Cover sharp edges and corners on the cargo. the cargo area ▷ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possible, directly behind and at the bottom of the rear Multi-function hook passenger seat backrests. ▷ Very heavy cargo: stow as far forward as pos‐ General information sible, directly behind and at the bottom of the A multi-function hook is located on the left side rear passenger seat backrests. When the rear in the cargo area. seat is not occupied, secure each of the outer safety belts in the opposite buckle. Safety information ▷ If necessary, fold down the rear backrests to stow large cargo. WARNING ▷ Do not stack cargo above the top edge of the backrests. Improper use of the multi-function hooks can lead to a risk of objects flying about during ▷ Smaller and lighter cargo: secure with ratchet braking and evasive maneuvers, for example. straps or with a cargo net or draw straps. There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to ▷ Larger and heavy cargo: secure with cargo property. Only hang lightweight objects, straps. such as shopping bags, from the multi-function
266 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 267
Cargo area CONTROLS
hooks. Only transport heavy luggage in the Opening cargo area if it has been appropriately secured.
Folding down
Pull the handle.
With an emergency wheel: Press on the multi-function hook and turn until it storage compartment under the engages. cargo area floor There is a storage compartment under the cargo Net floor panel. Small objects can be stowed in the net on the left side.
Storage compartment on the right side A storage compartment is available on the right side of the cargo area.
Left side storage compartment Fold up the cargo floor panel. General information A storage compartment is located on the left side in the cargo area. Through-loading system
Concept The cargo area can be enlarged by folding down the rear seat backrest.
General information The rear seat backrest is divided at a ratio of 40– 20–40. The side rear seat backrests and the center section can be folded down separately. The rear seat backrests can be folded down from the cargo area. The center section can be sepa‐ rately folded down from the rear. 267 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 268
CONTROLS Cargo area
Safety information Folding down the rear seat backrest from the cargo area WARNING 1. Unlock the belt lock of the center safety belt Danger of jamming with folding down the back‐ in the rear using the latch plate of another rests. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage safety belt. to property. Make sure that the area of move‐ 2. Insert the latch plate at the end of the belt ment of the rear backrest and the of the head into the specially designated fixture on the restraint is clear prior to folding down. rear window shelf.
WARNING If a rear seat backrest is not locked, unsecured cargo can be thrown into the car's interior; for instance, in the event of an accident, braking or an evasive maneuver. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the rear seat backrest is locked after folding it back. 3. Push the corresponding head restraint down as far as it will go. WARNING 4. Pull the corresponding lever in the cargo area The stability of the child restraint system is lim‐ to release the rear seat backrest. ited or compromised with incorrect seat adjust‐ ment or improper installation of the child seat. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that the child restraint system fits securely against the backrest. If possible, adjust the backrest tilt for all affected backrests and cor‐ rectly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats and backrests are securely engaged or locked. If possible, adjust the height of the head re‐ straints or remove them. 5. The unlocked rear seat backrest moves for‐ ward slightly. 6. Fold the rear seat backrest forward. NOTICE Vehicle parts can be damaged when folding down the rear backrest. There is a risk of dam‐ age to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the rear backrest including head restraint is clear when folding down.
268 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 269
Cargo area CONTROLS
Fold back the backrest Removing the emergency wheel 1. Return the rear seat backrest to the upright and the storage compartments seating position and engage it. 1. Remove the cargo floor panel. To do this, pull 2. Release the belt tongue from the fixture on the cargo floor panel upward directly behind the rear window shelf. the rear backrests. 3. Insert the belt tongue in the belt lock of the center safety belt. Make sure you hear the latch plate engage.
Fold down the center section 1. Fold down the center head restraint. 2. Press the switch and pull the center section forward.
2. Open the ratchet strap. 3. Remove the tool holder.
With an emergency wheel: enlarging the cargo area 4. Remove the emergency wheel from the stor‐ age well. Concept 5. Loosen the ratchet strap from the lashing eyes. The emergency wheel and any related compo‐ nents can be temporarily removed to enlarged 6. Remove the storage compartment. the cargo area.
269 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 270
CONTROLS Cargo area
7. Remove the storage well
8. Insert the cargo floor panel.
Inserting the emergency wheel and the storage compartments Proceed in reverse order to insert the emergency wheel and the storage compartments.
Ski and snowboard bag
The ski and snowboard bag is contained in a protective jacket in the cargo area. Follow the installation and owner's manual in‐ cluded in the protective jacket. Depending on the vehicle equipment: remove the emergency wheel from the vehicle to mount the ski and snowboard bag.
270 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 271
Cargo area CONTROLS
271 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18
272 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 DRIVING TIPS
Things to remember when driving ...... 274 Saving fuel ...... 279
273 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 274
DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving
Things to remember when driving
Vehicle features and Engine, transmission, and axle options drive Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ cific and optional features offered with the series. Do not exceed the maximum engine and road It also describes features that are not necessarily speed: available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected ▷ For gasoline engine 4,500 rpm and options or country versions. This also applies to 100 mph/160 km/h. safety-related functions and systems. When us‐ ▷ For diesel engine 3,500 rpm and ing these functions and systems, the applicable 93 mph/150 km/h. laws and regulations must be observed. Avoid full load or kickdown under all circumstan‐ ces. Breaking-in period From 1,200 miles/2,000 km General information The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be increased. Moving parts need to begin working together smoothly. Tires The following instructions will help you to ach‐ Tire traction is not optimal due to manufacturing ieve a long vehicle life and good efficiency. circumstances when tires are brand-new; they During break-in, do not use the Launch Control, achieve their full traction potential after a break-in refer to page 136. time. Drive conservatively for the first Safety information 200 miles/300 km.
WARNING Brake system Due to new parts and components, safety and Brake discs and brake pads only reach their full driver assistance systems can react with a de‐ effectiveness after approx. 300 miles/500 km. lay. There is a risk of an accident. After instal‐ Drive moderately during this break-in period. ling new parts or with a new vehicle, drive con‐ servatively and intervene early if necessary. Following part replacement Observe the break-in procedures of the re‐ Observe the break-in procedures again, if com‐ spective parts and components. ponents mentioned above are replaced.
274 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 275
Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS
General driving notes Exhaust gas particulate filter Concept Closing the tailgate The exhaust gas particulate filter collects soot Safety information particles. The soot particles are burned at high temperatures to clean the exhaust gas particu‐ late filter as necessary. WARNING An open trunk lid protrudes from the vehicle General information and can endanger occupants and other traffic During several minutes of cleaning the following participants or damage the vehicle in the event may occur: of an accident, braking or evasive maneuvers. ▷ Temporarily, the engine may run less In addition, exhaust fumes may enter the car's smoothly. interior. There is a risk of injury or risk of dam‐ age to property. Do not drive with the trunk lid ▷ A somewhat higher engine speed is neces‐ open. sary to reach usual performance. ▷ A slight amount of smoke coming from the exhaust system, even after the engine is Driving with the tailgate open switched off. If driving with the tailgate open cannot be ▷ Noises, such as those caused by the radiator avoided: fan running, even several minutes after the ▷ Close all windows and the glass sunroof. engine is switched off. ▷ Greatly increase the air flow from the vents. After-running of the radiator fan for several mi‐ nutes is normal even after short trips. ▷ Drive moderately.
Hot exhaust gas system Mobile communication devices in the vehicle
WARNING WARNING During driving operation, high temperatures can occur underneath the vehicle body, for instance Vehicle electronics and mobile phones can in‐ caused by the exhaust gas system. If combusti‐ fluence one another. There is radiation due to ble materials, such as leaves or grass, come in the transmission operations of mobile phones. contact with hot parts of the exhaust gas sys‐ There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to tem, these materials can ignite. There is a risk property. If possible, in the car's interior use of injury or risk of damage to property. Do not only mobile phones with direct connections to remove the heat shields installed and never ap‐ an exterior antenna in order to exclude mutual ply undercoating to them. Make sure that no interference and deflect the radiation from the combustible materials can come in contact with car's interior. hot vehicle parts in driving operation, idle or during parking. Do not touch the hot exhaust gas system. Hydroplaning On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can form between the tires and road surface.
275 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 276
DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving
This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplaning. tional noises have no effect on the performance It is characterized by a partial or complete loss of and operational reliability of the brake. contact between the tires and the road surface, ultimately undermining your ability to steer and Objects in the area around the brake the vehicle. pedals
Driving through water WARNING General information Objects in the driver's floor area can limit the pedal distance or block a depressed pedal. When driving through water, follow the following: There is a risk of an accident. Stow objects in ▷ Drive through calm water only. the vehicle such that they are secured and can‐ ▷ Drive through water only if it is not deeper not enter into the driver's floor area. Use floor than maximum 9.8 inches/25 cm. mats that are suitable for the vehicle and can ▷ Drive through water no faster than walking be safely attached to the floor. Do not use speed, up to 3 mph/5 km/h. loose floor mats and do not layer several floor mats. Make sure that there is sufficient clear‐ Safety information ance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats are securely fastened again after they were re‐ moved, for instance for cleaning. NOTICE When driving too quickly through too deep wa‐ ter, water can enter into the engine compart‐ Driving in wet conditions ment, the electrical system or the transmission. When roads are wet, salted, or in heavy rain, gen‐ There is a risk of damage to property. When tly press the brake pedal every few miles. driving through water, do not exceed the maxi‐ Ensure that this action does not endanger other mum indicated water level and the maximum traffic. speed for driving through water. The heat generated during braking dries brake discs and brake pads and protects them against Braking safely corrosion. In this way braking efficiency will be available General information when you need it. The vehicle is equipped with the Antilock Brake Hills System ABS as a standard feature. Perform an emergency stop in situations that re‐ General information quire such. Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the gear Steering is still responsive. You can still avoid any that requires least braking effort. Otherwise, the obstacles with a minimum of steering effort. brakes may overheat and reduce brake effi‐ Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from the ciency. hydraulic circuits indicate that the Antilock Brake You can increase the engine's braking effect by System ABS is in its active mode. shifting down, going all the way to first gear, if In certain braking situations, the perforated brake needed. discs can emit functional noises. However, func‐
276 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 277
Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS
Safety information Roof-mounted luggage rack WARNING Light but consistent brake pressure can lead to General information high temperatures, brakes wearing out and possibly even brake failure. There is a risk of an Roof racks are available as special accessories. accident. Avoid placing excessive stress on the brake system. Roof drip rail with flaps
WARNING In idle state or with the engine switched off, safety-relevant functions, for instance engine braking effect, braking force boost and steering assistance, are restricted or not available at all. There is a risk of an accident. Do not drive in idle state or with the engine switched off. The fixing points are located in the roof drip rail above the doors. Brake disc corrosion Fold the cover outward. Corrosion on the brake discs and contamination on the brake pads are increased by the following circumstances: Mounting ▷ Low mileage. Follow the installation instructions of the roof ▷ Extended periods when the vehicle is not rack. used at all. Be sure that adequate clearance is maintained ▷ Infrequent use of the brakes. for tilting and opening the glass sunroof. ▷ Aggressive, acidic, or alkaline cleaning agents. Magnetic roof-mounted luggage racks Corrosion buildup on the brake discs will cause a pulsating effect on the brakes in their response - Because of the aluminum roof, magnetic roof- generally this cannot be corrected. mounted luggage racks cannot be used.
Condensation water under the Loading parked vehicle Because roof-mounted luggage racks raise the vehicle's center of gravity when loaded, they When using the automatic climate control, con‐ have a major effect on vehicle handling and densation water develops and collects under‐ steering response. neath the vehicle. Therefore, note the following when loading and driving: ▷ Do not exceed the approved roof/axle loads and the approved gross vehicle weight.
277 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 278
DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving
▷ Be sure that adequate clearance is main‐ tained for tilting and opening the glass sun‐ roof. ▷ Distribute the roof load uniformly. ▷ The roof load should not extend past the loading area. ▷ Always place the heaviest pieces on the bot‐ tom. ▷ Secure the roof luggage firmly, for instance using ratchet straps. ▷ Do not let objects project into the opening path of the tailgate. ▷ Drive cautiously and avoid sudden accelera‐ tion and braking maneuvers. Take corners gently.
Driving on racetracks
Higher mechanical and thermal loads during racetrack operation lead to increased wear. This wear is not covered by the warranty. The vehicle is not designed for use in motor sports competi‐ tion.
278 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 279
Saving fuel DRIVING TIPS
Saving fuel
Vehicle features and Close the windows and glass options sunroof Driving with the glass sunroof and windows open This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ results in increased air resistance and raises fuel cific and optional features offered with the series. consumption. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected Tires options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When us‐ General information ing these functions and systems, the applicable Tires can affect fuel consumption in various laws and regulations must be observed. ways, for instance tire size may influence fuel consumption.
Reducing fuel consumption Check the tire inflation pressure regularly General information Check and, if needed, correct the tire inflation The vehicle contains advanced technologies for pressure at least twice a month and before start‐ the reduction of fuel consumption and emission ing on a long trip. values. Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re‐ Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif‐ sistance and thus raises fuel consumption and ferent factors. tire wear. Carrying out certain measures, such as a moder‐ ate driving style and regular maintenance, can in‐ Drive away without delay fluence fuel consumption and the environmental Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while the impact. vehicle remains stationary. Start driving right away, but at moderate engine speeds. Remove unnecessary cargo This is the quickest way of warming the cold en‐ Additional weight increases fuel consumption. gine up to operating temperature.
Remove attached parts following Look well ahead when driving use Driving smoothly and proactively reduces fuel Remove auxiliary mirrors, roof-mounted or rear consumption. luggage racks which are no longer required fol‐ Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking. lowing use. By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehicle Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aerody‐ driving ahead of you. namics and increase the fuel consumption. Avoid high engine speeds Driving at low engine speeds lowers fuel con‐ sumption and reduces wear.
279 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 280
DRIVING TIPS Saving fuel
If necessary, observe the vehicle's gear shift indi‐ Have maintenance carried out cator, refer to page 147. Have the vehicle maintained regularly to achieve optimal vehicle efficiency and service life. BMW Use coasting conditions recommends that maintenance work be per‐ When approaching a red light, take your foot off formed by a BMW dealer’s service center. the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to a halt. For information on the BMW Maintenance Sys‐ For going downhill take your foot off the acceler‐ tem, refer to page 337. ator and let the vehicle roll. The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting. ECO PRO Switch off the engine during longer stops Concept ECO PRO supports a driving style that saves on Switching off the engine fuel consumption. For this purpose, the engine Switch off the engine during longer stops, for in‐ control and comfort features, for instance the cli‐ stance at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in mate control output, are adjusted. traffic congestion. Steptronic transmission: under certain conditions the engine is automatically decoupled from the Auto Start/Stop function transmission in the D selector lever position. The The Auto Start/Stop function of the vehicle auto‐ vehicle continues traveling with the engine idling matically switches off the engine during a stop. to reduce fuel consumption. The D selector lever position remains engaged. If the engine is switched off and then restarted rather than leaving the engine running con‐ In addition, context-sensitive information, ECO stantly, fuel consumption and emissions are re‐ PRO tips, are displayed to assist with an opti‐ duced. Savings can begin within a few seconds mized fuel consumption driving style. of switching off the engine. The achieved extended range is displayed in the In addition, fuel consumption is also determined instrument cluster as bonus range. by other factors, such as driving style, road con‐ ditions, maintenance or environmental factors. General information The system includes the following Switch off any functions that are EfficientDynamics functions and not currently needed EfficientDynamics displays: Functions such as seat heating and the rear win‐ ▷ ECO PRO bonus range, refer to page 282. dow defroster require a lot of energy and in‐ ▷ ECO PRO climate control, refer to page 281. crease fuel consumption, especially in city and ▷ Coasting driving condition, refer to page 283. stop-and-go traffic. ▷ Driving style analysis, refer to page 284. Switch off these functions if they are not needed. The ECO PRO driving mode supports the en‐ ergy conserving use of comfort features. These functions are automatically deactivated partially or completely.
280 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 281
Saving fuel DRIVING TIPS
Overview ▷ "ECO PRO seat climate control" ▷ "ECO PRO climate control" ▷ "ECO PRO sight" Settings are stored for the driver profile currently used.
ECO PRO limit ▷ Activate the ECO PRO limit: "ECO PRO speed warning" An ECO PRO tip is displayed if the speed of Button the set ECO PRO limit is exceeded. ▷ Adjust the ECO PRO limit speed: Activating ECO PRO "Tip at:" Press button. ECO PRO is displayed in Select the desired speed. the instrument cluster. Coasting Configuring ECO PRO Fuel-efficiency can be optimized by disengaging the engine and coasting with the engine idling. INDIVIDUAL Deactivate the function to use the braking effect of the engine when traveling downhill. Opening via the Driving Dynamics Control ECO PRO seat climate control 1. Activate ECO PRO. The output of seat heating and, where applica‐ 2. "Configure ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL" ble, seat ventilation is reduced when ECO PRO is activated. Opening via iDrive 1. "My Vehicle" ECO PRO climate control 2. "Vehicle settings" Climate control is set to be fuel-efficient. 3. "Driving Experience Control" That is, it is possible to deviate slightly from the 4. "Configure ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL" set temperature or to heat or cool the car's inte‐ rior more slowly, to economize on fuel consump‐ 5. Select the desired setting. tion. The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ The mirror heating is made available when exter‐ rently used. nal temperatures are very cold.
Activating/deactivating ECO PRO ECO PRO Sight functions The output of exterior mirror heating and rear The following ECO PRO functions can be acti‐ window defroster is reduced. vated/deactivated: ▷ "ECO PRO speed warning" ▷ "Coasting"
281 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 282
DRIVING TIPS Saving fuel
Resetting the settings Instrument cluster with enhanced features Reset ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL to the standard settings: "Reset to ECO PRO STANDARD"
Display in the instrument cluster
General information When ECO PRO driving mode is activated, the display switches to a special configuration. Some of the displays may differ from the display Information about the current driving style in the instrument cluster. A pointer in the fuel consumption display informs about the current driving style: ECO PRO bonus range ▷ The current fuel consumption in relation to A modified driving style helps you the average fuel consumption is displayed. extend your driving range. ▷ Pointer in the area of arrow 1: display of the The range extension can be dis‐ energy recovered by coasting or when brak‐ played as the bonus range in the ing. instrument cluster. ▷ Pointer in the area of arrow 2: display when The bonus range is shown in the range display. accelerating. Depending on the equipment, the blue bar seg‐ If the acceleration is inefficient, the area between ments symbolize the gained range in stages. the average fuel consumption and the current If the bonus range appears in gray, the current fuel consumption is colored red. driving style is inefficient. In addition, the following information is displayed, The display turns blue as soon as all conditions depending on the situation: for efficient driving are met. ▷ Depending on the equipment: the total dis‐ The bonus range is automatically reset every tance driven while coasting, refer to time the vehicle is refueled. page 284. ▷ The total time that the engine has been Fuel consumption display switched off, refer to page 122, during auto‐ matic engine stops. Instrument cluster without enhanced ▷ A gear shift indicator, refer to page 147, rec‐ features ommending the use of a more fuel-efficient gear.
Indications on the Control Display
Displaying EfficientDynamics information The current efficiency of the ECO PRO functions can be displayed on the Control Display. 282 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 283
Saving fuel DRIVING TIPS
Via iDrive: Coasting 1. "My Vehicle" 2. "Technology in action" Concept 3. "EfficientDynamics" Under certain conditions the engine is automati‐ 4. Select the symbol. cally decoupled from the transmission in the D selector lever position. The vehicle continues The following functions are displayed: traveling with the engine idling to reduce con‐ ▷ Auto Start/Stop function. sumption. Selector lever position D remains en‐ ▷ Energy recovery. gaged. ▷ Coasting. This driving condition is referred to as coasting. As soon as you step on the brake or accelerator Displaying fuel consumption history pedal, the engine is automatically coupled again. The following functions can be shown on the Control Display: General information ▷ Average consumption. Coasting is a component of the ECO PRO driv‐ ▷ The distance traveled while coasting. ing mode. ▷ The duration for which the Auto Start/Stop Coasting is automatically activated when ECO function has switched off the engine. PRO mode is called via the Driving Dynamics Control. Via iDrive: A proactive driving style helps the driver to use 1. "My Vehicle" the function often and supports the efficient ef‐ 2. "Technology in action" fect of coasting. 3. "EfficientDynamics" 4. Select the symbol. Functional requirements Vertical bars show consumption for the selected In ECO PRO mode, this function is available in a route. speed range from approximately 30 mph/50 km/h to 100 mph/160 km/h, if the fol‐ Selecting route length lowing conditions are met: ▷ Accelerator pedal and brake pedal are not op‐ Via iDrive: erated. ▷ The selector lever is in selector lever position 1. Press button. D. 2. "Scaling:" ▷ Engine and transmission are at operating 3. Select the desired setting. temperature.
Resetting fuel consumption history Operation via shift paddles Via iDrive: Concept 1. Press button. The coasting driving condition can be influenced 2. "Reset consumption history" with the shift paddles.
283 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 284
DRIVING TIPS Saving fuel
Activating/deactivating coasting via shift paddles 1. Shift to the highest gear by pulling the right shift paddle. 2. To activate coasting mode, actuate the right shift paddle again. To deactivate, actuate the left shift paddle.
Display Color code blue: coasting mode.
Instrument cluster without Display EfficientDynamics enhanced features information The mark in the fuel consumption Via iDrive: display below the tachometer is located at the zero point and is 1. "My Vehicle" backlit in blue. The tachometer 2. "Technology in action" approximately indicates idle 3. "EfficientDynamics" speed. System limits Instrument cluster with enhanced The function is not available under one of the fol‐ features lowing conditions. The mark in the fuel consumption ▷ DSC OFF or TRACTION activated. display is located at the zero point ▷ Driving in the dynamic limit range and on and is backlit in blue. steep uphill or downhill grades. ▷ Battery charge status temporarily too low or vehicle electrical system drawing excessive The distance traveled is indicated in coast‐ current. ing mode. Display on the Control Display Driving style analysis The coasting mode is displayed in EfficientDynamics while driving. Concept The distance traveled in coasting mode is shown The function helps develop an especially effi‐ in the consumption history. The counter is reset cient driving style and to conserve fuel. with every refueling. For this purpose, the driving style is analyzed. The assessment is done in various categories and is displayed on the Control Display. This display will help you adjust your driving style and save some fuel.
284 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 285
Saving fuel DRIVING TIPS
General information If, on the other hand, the driving style is ineffi‐ cient, a more wavy road and a reduced number The current trip is assessed. of stars are displayed. To assist with an efficient driving style, ECO PRO tips are displayed during driving. The range of the vehicle can be extended by ad‐ justing your driving style. This gain in range is displayed as a bonus range in the instrument cluster and on the Control Dis‐ play.
Functional requirement This function is available in ECO PRO mode.
Calling up ECO PRO driving style analysis Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle" 2. "Technology in action" 3. "Driving style analysis"
Display on the Control Display
The display of the ECO PRO driving style analy‐ sis consists of a symbolized route and a lookup table. The road symbolizes the efficiency of the driving style. The more efficient the driving style, the smoother the depicted route becomes, arrow 1. The table of values contains stars. The more effi‐ cient the driving style, the more stars are in‐ cluded in the table, arrow 2, and the faster the bonus range increases.
285 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18
286 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 MOBILITY
Refueling ...... 288 Fuel ...... 290 Wheels and tires ...... 296 Engine compartment ...... 328 Engine oil ...... 331 Coolant ...... 335 Maintenance ...... 337 Replacing components ...... 339 Breakdown assistance ...... 346 Care ...... 353
287 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 288
MOBILITY Refueling
Refueling
Vehicle features and Fuel cap options Opening This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ 1. Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel filler cific and optional features offered with the series. flap. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When us‐ ing these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.
General information
Follow the fuel recommendation, refer to 2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise. page 290, prior to refueling. In vehicles with a diesel engine, the filler neck is designed for refueling at diesel fuel pumps.
Safety information
NOTICE With a driving range of less than 30 miles/50 km the engine may no longer have 3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached to sufficient fuel. Engine functions are not en‐ the fuel filler flap. sured anymore. There is a risk of damage to property. Refuel promptly.
288 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 289
Refueling MOBILITY
Closing Safety information
WARNING NOTICE The retaining strap of the fuel cap can be jam‐ Fuels are toxic and aggressive. Overfilling of the med and crushed during closing. The cap can‐ fuel tank can damage the fuel system. Painted not be correctly closed. Fuel or fuel vapors can surfaces may be damaged by contact with fuel. escape. There is a risk of injury or risk of dam‐ Escaping fuel can harm the environment. There age to property. Pay attention that the retaining is a risk of damage to property. Avoid overfilling. strap is not jammed or crushed when closing the cap.
1. Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you clearly hear a click. 2. Close the fuel filler flap.
Manually unlocking fuel filler flap E.g., in the event of an electrical malfunction. Have fuel filler flap unlocked by a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or re‐ pair shop.
Follow the following when refueling
General information When refueling, insert the filler nozzle completely into the filler pipe. Lifting up the fuel pump nozzle during refueling causes: ▷ Premature switching off. ▷ Reduced return of the fuel vapors. The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks off the first time. Make sure that the fuel cap is closed properly af‐ ter refueling, otherwise the emissions warning light may light up. Follow safety regulations posted at the gas sta‐ tion.
289 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 290
MOBILITY Fuel
Fuel
Vehicle features and Safety information options CAUTION This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ The use of poor-quality fuels may result in cific and optional features offered with the series. harmful engine deposits or damage. Addition‐ It also describes features that are not necessarily ally, problems relating to drivability, starting and available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected stalling, especially under certain environmental options or country versions. This also applies to conditions such as high ambient temperature safety-related functions and systems. When us‐ and high altitude, may occur. ing these functions and systems, the applicable If drivability problems are encountered, we rec‐ laws and regulations must be observed. ommend switching to a high quality gasoline brand and a higher octane grade — AKI num‐ ber — for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful en‐ Fuel recommendation gine deposits, it is highly recommended to pur‐ chase gasoline from Top Tier retailers. General information Failure to comply with these recommendations Depending on the region, many gas stations sell may result in the need for unscheduled mainte‐ fuel that has been customized to winter or nance. summer conditions. Fuel that is available in win‐ ter, for instance helps make a cold start easier. NOTICE Gasoline Even small quantities of the wrong fuel or wrong fuel additives can damage the fuel sys‐ General information tem and engine. Furthermore, the catalytic For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline should converter is permanently damaged. There is a be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content. risk of damage to property. Do not refuel or add the following in the case of gasoline engines: Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as con‐ taining metal must not be used. ▷ Leaded gasoline. Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of 10 %, ▷ Metallic additives, for instance manganese i. e., E10, may be used for refueling. or iron. Ethanol should meet the following quality stan‐ Do not press the Start/Stop button after refuel‐ dards: ing with the wrong fuel. Contact a dealer’s serv‐ ice center or another qualified service center or US: ASTM 4806–xx repair shop. CAN: CGSB-3.511–xx xx: comply with the current standard in each case.
290 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 291
Fuel MOBILITY
▷ Do not use gasoline. NOTICE ▷ The vehicle manufacturer recommends Incorrect fuels can damage the fuel system and only using diesel additives which have the engine. There is a risk of damage to prop‐ been classified as suitable. erty. Do not use fuels with a higher percentage Do not press the Start/Stop button after refuel‐ of ethanol than recommended. Do not refuel ing with the wrong fuel. Contact a dealer’s serv‐ with fuels containing methanol, e.g. M5 to ice center or another qualified service center or M100. repair shop.
NOTICE Low-Sulfur Diesel Fuel that does not comply with the minimum The engine of your BMW is designed for diesel quality can compromise engine function or with low sulfur content: cause engine damage. There is a risk of dam‐ Ultra-Low Sulfur Diesel ASTM D 975-xx. age to property. Do not fill with fuel that does xx: comply with the current standard in each not comply with the minimum quality. case. Use only Ultra-Low Sulfur Diesel. Recommended fuel grade The fraction of biodiesel in the fuel must not ex‐ BMW recommends AKI 91. ceed 5 %, referred to as B5. Do not use gaso‐ line. If you do fill the tank with the wrong fuel, for Minimum fuel grade instance gasoline, do not start the engine as this may damage the engine. BMW recommends AKI 89. In the case of incorrect refueling, contact a deal‐ If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rating, er’s service center or another qualified service the engine may produce knocking sounds when center or repair shop or Roadside Assistance. starting at high external temperatures. This has If the fuel pump nozzle does not fit in the filler no effect on the engine life. pipe of your BMW, please check to ensure that you are refueling at a diesel fuel pump that is Diesel equipped with a diesel fuel pump nozzle. Safety information In the event the Ultra-Low Sulfur Diesel fuel can‐ not be fully inserted into the fuel filler neck, please contact BMW Roadside Assistance for in‐ NOTICE structions on how to add fuel. For more informa‐ Even small quantities of the wrong fuel or tion on Roadside Assistance, refer to page 346. wrong fuel additives can damage the fuel sys‐ tem and engine. There is a risk of damage to property. Follow the following for diesel engines: ▷ Use only Ultra-Low Sulfur Diesel. ▷ Do not refuel with pure methyl ester. ▷ Only refuel with biodiesel with a maximum of B5/5 % according to ASTM D975.
291 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 292
MOBILITY Fuel
BMW Advanced Diesel sible to activate the drive-ready state again after switching off. Concept ▷ Light white: refill with diesel exhaust fluid at the next op‐ BMW Advanced Diesel reduces nitrogen oxides portunity. in the diesel emissions by injecting diesel ex‐ ▷ Light yellow: not enough die‐ haust fluid into the exhaust system. A chemical sel exhaust fluid present. The reaction takes place inside the catalytic converter remaining range is displayed that minimizes nitrogen oxides. in the instrument cluster. Im‐ mediately refill with Diesel ex‐ General information haust fluid, refer to page 293. The vehicle has a tank that must be refilled. To be able to establish the drive-ready state as Diesel exhaust fluid on minimum usual, there must be an adequate amount of die‐ sel exhaust fluid. The remaining range is displayed in the instrument cluster. Add at Diesel exhaust fluid can be refilled at any time. least 10 liters of diesel exhaust Diesel exhaust fluid is available at many gas sta‐ fluid. The engine will continue to tions. run as long as it is not switched If possible, refill diesel exhaust fluid using a fuel off and all other operating conditions are satis‐ pump, refer to page 293. fied; sufficient fuel, for instance.
Diesel exhaust fluid at low System malfunction temperatures A Check Control message is displayed when Due to its physical properties, it is possible that there is a system not working. the diesel exhaust fluid may need to be replen‐ Visit the nearest dealer’s service center or an‐ ished more frequently if exposed to tempera‐ other qualified service center or repair shop. tures under +23 ℉/-5 ℃. At temperatures below +12 ℉/-11 ℃, it may Have the diesel exhaust fluid only be possible to measure and display the fill‐ replenished ing level after a short drive. BMW recommends that diesel exhaust fluid be At low temperatures, add diesel exhaust fluid added by the dealer’s service center within the only immediately before driving off. course of regular maintenance. Displays in the instrument In addition, it may be necessary to have the fluid cluster replenished several times between maintenance appointments under particular circumstances, for instance if the vehicle is driven in a particularly Reserve level indicator sporty style or if it is operated with a trailer. The reserve level indicator in the instrument The diesel exhaust fluid must be replenished as cluster provides information about the distance soon as the reserve level indicator appears in the that can still be driven with the current reserve instrument cluster to avoid not being able to re‐ level. establish the drive-ready state. Do not continue driving to the limit of the remain‐ ing travel distance, otherwise it may not be pos‐ 292 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 293
Fuel MOBILITY
Replenishing diesel exhaust fluid exhaust fluid can be replenished simply and yourself in exceptional cases safely. ▷ Alternatively recommended: NOx Diesel ex‐ General information haust fluid AUS 32. You can replenish Diesel exhaust fluid yourself in Diesel exhaust fluid can be purchased at a deal‐ exceptional cases, for instance to get to your er’s service center or another qualified service scheduled service. center or repair shop.
Safety information Refill quantity When the reserve level indicator starts, add at least 1.3 US gal/5 liters. WARNING Small amounts of ammonia fumes can escape Tank for diesel exhaust fluid when opening the diesel exhaust fluid con‐ tainer. Ammonia fumes have a pungent odor and irritate skin, mucous membranes, and eyes. There is a risk of injury. Do not inhale escaping ammonia fumes. Avoid the contact of articles of clothing, skin or eyes with diesel exhaust fluid. Do not swallow any diesel exhaust fluid. Keep children away from diesel exhaust fluids.
WARNING The fuel cap for diesel exhaust fluids is next to the fuel cap for the fuel tank. Operating materials, for instance oils, greases, coolants, fuels, can contain harmful ingredients. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Fol‐ Adding diesel exhaust fluid at the low the instructions on the containers. Avoid fuel pump the contact of articles of clothing, skin or eyes with operating materials. Do not refill operating General information materials into different bottles. Store operating When refueling, insert the filler nozzle completely materials out of reach of children. into the filler pipe. Lifting up the fuel pump nozzle during refueling causes: ▷ Premature switching off. NOTICE ▷ Overflow of diesel exhaust fluid. The diesel exhaust fluid ingredients are very aggressive. There is a risk of damage to prop‐ The tank for diesel exhaust fluid is full when the erty. Avoid contact of diesel exhaust fluid with filler nozzle clicks off the first time. surfaces of the vehicle. Depending on the filling nozzle, it may not be possible to fill the tank for the diesel exhaust fluid completely. Suitable diesel exhaust fluid Follow safety regulations posted at the gas sta‐ ▷ Recommended: BMW Diesel Exhaust Fluid. tion. With this bottle and its special adapter, diesel
293 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 294
MOBILITY Fuel
Adding diesel exhaust fluid Adding diesel exhaust fluid using a 1. Open the fuel filler flap, refer to page 288. bottle 2. Turn the fuel cap of the diesel exhaust fluid 1. Open the fuel filler flap, refer to page 288. tank counterclockwise and remove. 2. Turn the fuel cap of the diesel exhaust fluid tank counterclockwise and remove. 3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached to the fuel filler flap.
3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached to the fuel filler flap.
4. Place the bottle on it and turn it clockwise as far as it will go.
4. Using the fuel pump nozzle, add at least the recommended refilling quantity, refer to page 293. The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle 5. Press the bottle down. clicks off the first time. The vehicle tank will be filled. The tank is full when the fill level in the bottle no longer changes. It is not possible to over‐ fill.
5. Replace the fuel cap and turn it clockwise. 6. Close the fuel filler flap.
294 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 295
Fuel MOBILITY
6. Pull back the bottle and unscrew it. Diesel exhaust fluid on minimum After filling, the indicator is still displayed. The drive-ready state can only be established after the indicator goes out.
1. Press the Start/Stop button three times. The indicator goes out after approx. 1 minute. 2. Press the Start/Stop button and establish the 7. Replace the fuel cap and turn it clockwise. drive-ready state. 8. Close the fuel filler flap. Disposing of bottles Filling with an incorrect fluid Have bottles for diesel exhaust fluid dis‐ posed of by a dealer's service center or General information another qualified service center or repair A Check Control message is displayed when an shop or take them to a collection point. incorrect fluid is added. Do not dispose of empty bottles with household In the case that an incorrect fluid was refilled, waste unless this is permitted by local regula‐ contact a dealer’s service center or another tions. qualified service center or repair shop.
Safety information
WARNING After adding an incorrect fluid, for instance anti‐ freeze for washer fluid, the system can heat and ignite. There is a risk of fire and injuries. Do not add incorrect fluids. Do not start the engine after adding an incorrect fluid.
After filling diesel exhaust fluid
Reserve level indicator The reserve level indicator will still appear along with the remaining range after refilling. The drive-ready state can be es‐ tablished. After several minutes of driving, the reserve level indicator goes out.
295 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 296
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
Wheels and tires
Vehicle features and Tire inflation pressure options specifications In the tire inflation pressure table This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ cific and optional features offered with the series. The tire inflation pressure table, refer to It also describes features that are not necessarily page 298, contains all tire inflation pressure available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected specifications for the specified tire sizes at the options or country versions. This also applies to ambient temperature. The tire inflation pressure safety-related functions and systems. When us‐ values apply to tire sizes approved by the manu‐ ing these functions and systems, the applicable facturer of the vehicle for the vehicle type. laws and regulations must be observed. To identify the correct tire inflation pressure, please note the following: Tire inflation pressure ▷ Tire sizes of your vehicle. ▷ Maximum permitted driving speed.
General information On the Control Display The tire characteristics and tire inflation pressure The current tire inflation pressure values and the influence the following: intended tire inflation pressure values for the ▷ The service life of the tires. mounted tires can be displayed on the Control ▷ Road safety. Display. ▷ Driving comfort. To ensure that they are displayed correctly, the tire sizes must be stored in the system and must ▷ Fuel consumption. have been set, refer to page 313, for the mounted tires. Safety information The current tire inflation pressure value is lo‐ cated on each tire. WARNING The intended tire inflation pressure value is lo‐ A tire with too little or no tire inflation pressure cated in the lower area of the Control Display. may heat up significantly and sustain damage. This will have a negative impact on aspects of Checking the tire inflation handling, such as steering and braking re‐ pressure sponse. There is a risk of an accident. Regularly check the tire inflation pressure, and correct it General information as needed, for instance twice a month and be‐ fore a long trip. Tires heat up while driving. The tire inflation pressure increases with the tire temperature. Tires have a natural, consistent loss of tire infla‐ tion pressure. The displays of inflation devices may under-read by up to 0.1 bar/2 psi.
296 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 297
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
Checking using tire inflation After correcting the tire inflation pressure specifications in the tire pressure inflation pressure table For run-flat tires: reinitialize run-flat tires. The tire inflation pressure specifications in the For the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM: in the case tire inflation pressure table only relate to cold of tires that are not included in the tire inflation tires or tires at the same temperature as the am‐ pressure specifications on the Control Display, bient temperature. reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM. Only check the tire inflation pressure levels when the tires are cold, i.e.: Tire inflation pressures up to ▷ Driving range of max. 1.25 miles/2 km has not 100 mph/160 km/h been exceeded. For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and for ▷ If the vehicle has not moved again for at least optimum driving comfort, note the pressure val‐ 2 hours after a trip. ues in the tire inflation pressure table, refer to Check the tire inflation pressure of the emer‐ page 298, and adjust as necessary. gency wheel in the cargo area regularly, and cor‐ rect it as needed.
1. Determine, refer to page 296, the intended tire inflation pressure levels for the mounted tires. 2. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four tires, using a pressure gage, for example. 3. Correct the tire inflation pressure if the cur‐ rent tire inflation pressure value deviates from These pressure values can also be found on the the specified value. tire inflation pressure label on the driver's door 4. Check whether all valve caps are screwed pillar. onto the tire valves. Do not exceed a speed of 100 mph/160 km/h. Checking using the tire inflation pressure specifications on the Control Display 1. "My Vehicle" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Tire Pressure Monitor" 4. Check whether the current tire inflation pres‐ sure levels deviate from the intended tire pressure value. 5. Correct the tire inflation pressure if the cur‐ rent tire inflation pressure value deviates from the intended value.
297 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 298
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
Tire inflation pressure values up Tire size Pressure specifica‐ to 100 mph/160 km/h tions in bar/PSI Front: 245/40 R 19 2.4 / 35 - 530i, 530i xDrive 98 V M+S XL RSC
Tire size Pressure specifica‐ Rear: 275/35 R 19 - 2.6 / 38 tions in bar/PSI 100 V M+S XL RSC
Specifications in Front: 245/35 R 20 2.5 / 36 - bar/PSI with cold 95 Y XL Std/RSC tires Rear: 275/30 R 20 - 3.0 / 44 97 Y XL Std/RSC
225/55 R 17 97 H 2.2 / 32 2.4 / 35 Emergency wheel: Speed up to a max. of M+S A/S RSC T 135/80 R 18 104 50 mph / 80 km/h 225/55 R 17 97 Y M 4.2 / 60 RSC 225/55 R 17 97 H 540i, 540i xDrive, 540d xDrive M+S RSC
245/45 R 18 100 H 2.2 / 32 2.6 / 38 Tire size Pressure specifica‐ M+S XL A/S tions in bar/PSI Std/RSC Specifications in 245/45 R 18 100 Y bar/PSI with cold XL RSC tires 245/45 R 18 100 V M+S XL RSC 225/55 R 17 97 H 2.2 / 32 2.4 / 35 245/40 R 19 98 H 2.4 / 35 2.8 / 41 M+S RSC M+S XL A/S RSC 245/45 R 18 100 H 2.2 / 32 2.6 / 38 245/40 R 19 98 V M M+S XL A/S +S XL RSC Std/RSC 245/40 R 19 98 H 245/45 R 18 100 Y M+S XL RSC XL RSC Front: 245/45 R 18 2.2 / 32 - 245/45 R 18 100 V 100 Y XL RSC M+S XL RSC
Rear: 275/40 R 18 - 2.4 / 35 245/40 R 19 98 H 2.4 / 35 2.8 / 41 99 Y RSC M+S XL A/S RSC Front: 245/40 R 19 2.2 / 32 - 245/40 R 19 98 V 98 Y XL RSC M+S XL RSC 245/40 R 19 98 H Rear: 275/35 R 19 - 2.6 / 38 M+S XL RSC 100 Y XL RSC
298 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 299
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
Tire size Pressure specifica‐ Tire size Pressure specifica‐ tions in bar/PSI tions in bar/PSI
Front: 245/45 R 18 2.2 / 32 - 245/40 R 19 98 H 2.4 / 35 2.8 / 41 100 Y XL RSC M+S XL A/S RSC Rear: 275/40 R 18 - 2.4 / 35 245/40 R 19 98 V 99 Y RSC M+S XL RSC 245/40 R 19 98 H Front: 245/40 R 19 2.2 / 32 - M+S XL RSC 98 Y XL RSC Front: 245/45 R 18 2.2 / 32 - Rear: 275/35 R 19 - 2.6 / 38 100 Y XL RSC 100 Y XL RSC Rear: 275/40 R 18 - 2.4 / 35 Front: 245/40 R 19 2.4 / 35 - 99 Y RSC 98 V M+S XL RSC Front: 245/40 R 19 2.4 / 35 - Rear: 275/35 R 19 - 2.6 / 38 98 Y XL RSC 100 V M+S XL RSC Rear: 275/35 R 19 - 2.6 / 38 Front: 245/35 R 20 2.5 / 36 - 100 Y XL RSC 95 Y XL Std/RSC Front: 245/40 R 19 2.4 / 35 - Rear: 275/30 R 20 - 3.0 / 44 98 V M+S XL RSC 97 Y XL Std/RSC Rear: 275/35 R 19 - 2.6 / 38 Emergency wheel: Speed up to a max. of 100 V M+S XL RSC T 135/80 R 18 104 50 mph / 80 km/h M 4.2 / 60 Front: 245/35 R 20 2.6 / 38 - 95 Y XL Std/RSC M550i xDrive Rear: 275/30 R 20 - 2.9 / 42 97 Y XL Std/RSC Tire size Pressure specifica‐ Emergency wheel: Speed up to a max. of tions in bar/PSI T 135/80 R 18 104 50 mph / 80 km/h Specifications in M 4.2 / 60 bar/PSI with cold tires Tire inflation pressures at max. speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h 245/45 R 18 100 H 2.2 / 32 2.6 / 38 M+S XL A/S WARNING Std/RSC In order to drive at maximum speeds in excess 245/45 R 18 100 Y of 100 mph/160 km/h, please observe, and, if XL RSC necessary, adjust tire pressures for speeds ex‐ 245/45 R 18 100 V ceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from the relevant M+S XL RSC
299 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 300
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
table on the following pages. Otherwise, tire Tire size Pressure specifica‐ damage and accidents could occur. tions in bar/PSI
For speeds over 100 mph/160 km/h and for opti‐ Rear: 275/40 R 18 - 2.7 / 39 mum driving comfort, note the pressure values in 99 Y RSC the tire inflation pressure table, refer to Front: 245/40 R 19 2.6 / 38 - page 300, and adjust as necessary. 98 Y XL RSC Tire inflation pressure values Rear: 275/35 R 19 - 2.9 / 42 over 100 mph/160 km/h 100 Y XL RSC Front: 245/40 R 19 2.9 / 42 - 530i, 530i xDrive 98 V M+S XL RSC Rear: 275/35 R 19 - 3.1 / 45 Tire size Pressure specifica‐ 100 V M+S XL RSC tions in bar/PSI Front: 245/35 R 20 2.9 / 42 - Specifications in 95 Y XL Std/RSC bar/PSI with cold tires Rear: 275/30 R 20 - 3.4 / 49 97 Y XL Std/RSC
225/55 R 17 97 H 2.2 / 32 2.7 / 39 Emergency wheel: Speed up to a max. of M+S A/S RSC T 135/80 R 18 104 50 mph / 80 km/h 225/55 R 17 97 Y M 4.2 / 60 RSC 225/55 R 17 97 H 540i M+S RSC Tire size Pressure specifica‐ 245/45 R 18 100 H 2.4 / 35 2.9 / 42 tions in bar/PSI M+S XL A/S Std/RSC Specifications in 245/45 R 18 100 Y bar/PSI with cold XL RSC tires
245/40 R 19 98 H 2.6 / 38 3.1 / 45 M+S XL A/S RSC 225/55 R 17 97 H 2.2 / 32 2.7 / 39 245/45 R 18 100 V M+S RSC M+S XL RSC 245/45 R 18 100 H 2.4 / 35 2.9 / 42 245/40 R 19 98 H M+S XL A/S M+S XL RSC Std/RSC
245/40 R 19 98 V 2.9 / 42 3.4 / 49 245/45 R 18 100 Y M+S XL RSC XL RSC
Front: 245/45 R 18 2.4 / 35 - 100 Y XL RSC
300 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 301
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
Tire size Pressure specifica‐ 540i xDrive, 540d xDrive tions in bar/PSI Tire size Pressure specifica‐ 245/40 R 19 98 H 2.6 / 38 3.1 / 45 tions in bar/PSI M+S XL A/S RSC Specifications in 245/45 R 18 100 V bar/PSI with cold M+S XL RSC tires 245/40 R 19 98 H M+S XL RSC 225/55 R 17 97 H 2.4 / 35 2.7 / 39 245/40 R 19 98 V 2.9 / 42 3.4 / 49 M+S RSC M+S XL RSC 245/45 R 18 100 H 2.4 / 35 2.9 / 42 Front: 245/45 R 18 2.4 / 35 - M+S XL A/S 100 Y XL RSC Std/RSC Rear: 275/40 R 18 - 2.7 / 39 245/45 R 18 100 Y 99 Y RSC XL RSC
Front: 245/40 R 19 2.6 / 38 - 245/40 R 19 98 H 2.6 / 38 3.1 / 45 98 Y XL RSC M+S XL A/S RSC Rear: 275/35 R 19 - 2.9 / 42 245/45 R 18 100 V 100 Y XL RSC M+S XL RSC
Front: 245/40 R 19 2.9 / 42 - 245/40 R 19 98 H 98 V M+S XL RSC M+S XL RSC Rear: 275/35 R 19 - 3.1 / 45 245/40 R 19 98 V 2.9 / 42 3.4 / 49 100 V M+S XL RSC M+S XL RSC
Front: 245/35 R 20 2.9 / 42 - Front: 245/45 R 18 2.4 / 35 - 95 Y XL Std/RSC 100 Y XL RSC Rear: 275/30 R 20 - 3.4 / 49 Rear: 275/40 R 18 - 2.7 / 39 97 Y XL Std/RSC 99 Y RSC
Emergency wheel: Speed up to a max. of Front: 245/40 R 19 2.6 / 38 - 98 Y XL RSC T 135/80 R 18 104 50 mph / 80 km/h M 4.2 / 60 Rear: 275/35 R 19 - 2.9 / 42 100 Y XL RSC
Front: 245/40 R 19 2.9 / 42 - 98 V M+S XL RSC Rear: 275/35 R 19 - 3.1 / 45 100 V M+S XL RSC
Front: 245/35 R 20 2.9 / 42 - 95 Y XL Std/RSC
301 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 302
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
Tire size Pressure specifica‐ Tire size Pressure specifica‐ tions in bar/PSI tions in bar/PSI
Rear: 275/30 R 20 - 3.4 / 49 Rear: 275/35 R 19 - 3.1 / 45 97 Y XL Std/RSC 100 V M+S XL RSC Emergency wheel: Speed up to a max. of T 135/80 R 18 104 50 mph / 80 km/h Front: 245/35 R 20 3.0 / 44 - M 4.2 / 60 95 Y XL Std/RSC Rear: 275/30 R 20 - 3.4 / 49 M550i xDrive 97 Y XL Std/RSC Emergency wheel: Speed up to a max. of Tire size Pressure specifica‐ 50 mph / 80 km/h tions in bar/PSI T 135/80 R 18 104 M 4.2 / 60 Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires Tire identification marks
245/45 R 18 100 H 2.5 / 36 2.9 / 42 Tire size M+S XL A/S 245/45 R 18 96 Y Std/RSC 245: nominal width in mm 245/45 R 18 100 Y 45: aspect ratio in % XL RSC R: radial tire code 245/45 R 18 100 V 2.7 / 39 3.1 / 45 18: rim diameter in inches M+S XL RSC 96: load rating, not for ZR tires 245/40 R 19 98 H 2.6 / 38 3.1 / 45 Y: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires M+S XL A/S RSC 245/40 R 19 98 V 2.9 / 42 3.4 / 49 Maximum tire load M+S XL RSC Maximum tire load is the maximum permissible Front: 245/45 R 18 2.5 / 36 - weight for which the tire is approved. 100 Y XL RSC Locate the maximum tire load on the tire sidewall and the Gross Axle Weight Rating – GAWR – on Rear: 275/40 R 18 - 2.7 / 39 the certification label on the driver door B-pillar. 99 Y RSC Divide the tire load by 1.1. It must be greater Front: 245/40 R 19 2.7 / 39 - than one-half of the vehicle’s Gross Axle Weight 98 Y XL RSC Rating – GAWR. Note, front vs. rear GAWR and tire loads, respectively. Rear: 275/35 R 19 - 2.9 / 42 100 Y XL RSC Speed letter Front: 245/40 R 19 2.9 / 42 - Q = up to 100 mph/160 km/h 98 V M+S XL RSC R = up to 106 mph/170 km/h
302 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 303
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
S = up to 112 mph/180 km/h All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Fed‐ T = up to 118 mph/190 km/h eral Safety Requirements in addition to these grades. H = up to 131 mph/210 km/h V = up to 150 mph/240 km/h Treadwear W = up to 167 mph/270 km/h The treadwear grade is a comparative rating Y = up to 186 mph/300 km/h based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified gov‐ Tire Identification Number ernment test course. E.g., a tire graded 150 DOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 2118 would wear one and one-half, 1 g, times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand The relative performance of tires depends upon xxx: tire size and tire design the actual conditions of their use, however, and 2118: tire age may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of the differences in road characteristics and climate. U.S. Department of Transportation.
Tire age Traction The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are Recommendation AA, A, B, and C. Regardless of the tire tread, replace tires at least Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop every 6 years. on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfa‐ Manufacture date ces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. You can find the manufacture date of the tire on the tire's sidewall. The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and Designation Manufacture date does not include acceleration, cornering, hydro‐ planing, or peak traction characteristics. DOT … 2118 21st week 2018 Temperature Uniform Tire Quality Grading The temperature grades are A, the highest, B, Quality grades can be found where applicable on and C, representing the tire's resistance to the the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat maximum section width. when tested under controlled conditions on a E.g.: Treadwear 200; Traction AA; Temperature specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained A high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and exces‐ DOT Quality Grades sive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of perform‐ Treadwear ance which all passenger vehicle tires must meet Traction AA A B C under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard Temperature A B C No. 109. Grades Band A represent higher levels
303 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 304
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
of performance on the laboratory test wheel than Minimum tread depth the minimum required by law.
WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is estab‐ lished for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in com‐ bination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. Wear indicators are distributed around the tire's circumference and have the legally required min‐ RSC – Run-flat tires imum height of 0.063 inches/1.6 mm. Run-flat tires, refer to page 307, are labeled with a circular symbol containing the letters RSC The positions of the wear indicators are marked marked on the sidewall. on the tire sidewall with TWI, Tread Wear Indica‐ tor. M+S Winter and all-season tires with better cold Tire damage weather performance than summer tires. General information Tire tread Inspect your tires regularly for damage, foreign objects lodged in the tread, and tread wear. Summer tires Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces, as well as debris, curbs and other obstacles can Do not drive with a tire tread of less than cause serious damage to wheels, tires and sus‐ 0.12 in/3 mm, otherwise there is an increased pension parts. This is more likely to occur with risk of hydroplaning. low-profile tires, which provide less cushioning between the wheel and the road. Be careful to Winter tires avoid road hazards and reduce your speed, es‐ Do not drive with a tire tread of less than pecially if your vehicle is equipped with low-pro‐ 0.16 in/4 mm, as such tires are less suitable for file tires. winter operation. Indications of tire damage or other vehicle mal‐ functions: ▷ Unusual vibrations. ▷ Unusual tire or running noises. ▷ Unusual handling such as a strong tendency to pull to the left or right. Damage can be caused by the following situa‐ tions, for instance: ▷ Driving over curbs. ▷ Road damage.
304 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 305
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
▷ Tire inflation pressure too low. about the correct wheel/tire combination and ▷ Vehicle overloading. wheel rim versions for the vehicle. ▷ Incorrect tire storage. Safety information Safety information WARNING
WARNING Wheels and tires which are not suitable for your vehicle can damage parts of the vehicle, for in‐ Damaged tires can lose tire inflation pressure, stance due to contact with the body due to tol‐ which can lead to loss of vehicle control. There erances despite the same official size rating. is a risk of an accident. If tire damage is sus‐ There is a risk of an accident. The manufac‐ pected while driving, immediately reduce speed turer of your vehicle strongly suggests that you and stop. Have wheels and tires checked. For use wheels and tires that have been recom‐ this purpose, drive carefully to the nearest deal‐ mended by the vehicle manufacturer for your er’s service center or another qualified service vehicle type. center or repair shop. Have vehicle towed or transported as needed. Do not repair damaged tires, but have them replaced. WARNING Mounted steel wheels can cause technical WARNING problems, for instance independent loosening of the lug bolts, damage to the brake discs. Tires can become damaged by driving over ob‐ There is a risk of an accident. Do not mount stacles, e.g., curbs or road damage, at high steel wheels. speed. Larger wheels have a smaller tire cross- section. The smaller the tire cross-section, the higher the risk of tire damage. There is a dan‐ ger of accidents and property damage. If possi‐ WARNING ble, drive around obstacles, or drive over them Incorrect wheel/tire combinations will have a slowly and carefully. negative impact on the vehicle's handling and on the function of a variety of systems, such as the Anti-lock Brake System or Dynamic Stabil‐ ity Control. There is a risk of an accident. To Changing wheels and tires maintain good handling and vehicle response, use only tires with a single tread configuration Mounting and wheel balancing from a single manufacturer. The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends that you use Have mounting and wheel balancing carried out wheels and tires that have been recommended by a dealer’s service center or another qualified by the vehicle manufacturer for your vehicle service center or repair shop. type. Following tire damage, have the original wheel/tire combination remounted on the vehi‐ Wheel and tire combination cle as soon as possible.
General information You can ask the dealer’s service center or an‐ other qualified service center or repair shop
305 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 306
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
Recommended tire brands usually do not provide the same level of perform‐ ance as winter tires.
Maximum speed of winter tires If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher than the permissible speed for the winter tires, then attach a label showing the permissible maxi‐ mum speed in the field of view. The label is avail‐ able from a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.
For each tire size, the manufacturer of the vehi‐ With winter tires mounted, observe and do not cle recommends certain tire brands. The tire exceed the permissible maximum speed. brands can be identified by a star on the tire sidewall. Changing runflat tires For your own safety, use only runflat tires. No New tires spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire. Fur‐ ther information is available from a dealer’s serv‐ Tire traction is not optimal due to manufacturing ice center or another qualified service center or circumstances when tires are brand-new; they repair shop. achieve their full traction potential after a break-in time. Rotating wheels between axles Drive conservatively for the first Different wear patterns can occur on the front 200 miles/300 km. and rear axles depending on individual driving conditions. The tires can be rotated in pairs be‐ Retreaded tires tween the axles to achieve even wear. Further in‐ formation is available from a dealer’s service cen‐ WARNING ter or another qualified service center or repair shop. After rotating, check the tire pressure and Retreaded tires can have different tire casing correct, if needed. structures. With advanced age the service life can be limited. There is a risk of an accident. Rotating the tires is not permissible on vehicles The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec‐ with different tire sizes or rim sizes on the front ommend the use of retreaded tires. and rear axles.
The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec‐ Storing tires ommend the use of retreaded tires. Air pressure Winter tires Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres‐ sure indicated on the side wall of the tire. General information Winter tires are recommended for operating on Storage winter roads. Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry and dark Although so-called all-season M+S tires provide place. better winter traction than summer tires, they
306 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 307
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
Always protect tires against all contact with oil, Label grease, and solvents. Do not leave tires in plastic bags. Remove dirt from wheels or tires.
Run-flat tires
Concept Run-flat tires permit continued driving under re‐ stricted conditions even in the event of a com‐ The tires are marked on the tire sidewall with plete loss of tire inflation pressure. RSC Run-flat System Component.
General information The wheels consist of tires that are self-support‐ Repairing a flat tire ing, to a limited degree, and possibly special rims. Safety measures The support of the sidewall allows the tire to re‐ ▷ Park the vehicle as far away as possible from main drivable to a restricted degree in the event passing traffic and on solid ground. of a tire inflation pressure loss. ▷ Switch on the hazard warning system. Follow the instructions for continued driving with ▷ Secure the vehicle against rolling away by a flat tire. setting the parking brake. Safety information ▷ Turn the steering wheel until the front wheels are in the straight-ahead position and engage the steering wheel lock. WARNING ▷ Have all vehicle occupants get out of the ve‐ Your vehicle handles differently with a run-flat hicle and ensure that they remain outside the with no or low inflation pressure; for instance, immediate area in a safe place, such as be‐ your lane stability when braking is reduced, hind a guardrail. braking distances are longer and the self-steer‐ ▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle at an ing properties will change. There is a risk of an appropriate distance. accident. Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. Mobility System
Concept With the Mobility System, minor tire damage can be sealed temporarily to enable continued travel. To accomplish this, sealant is pumped into the tires, which seals the damage from the inside.
307 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 308
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
General information Sealant container ▷ Follow the instructions on using the Mobility System found on the compressor and sealant container. ▷ Use of the Mobility System may be ineffec‐ tive if the tire puncture measures approx. 1/8 inches/4 mm or more. ▷ Contact a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop if the tire cannot be made drivable. ▷ If possible, do not remove foreign bodies that ▷ Sealant container, arrow 1. have penetrated the tire. Only remove foreign ▷ Filling hose, arrow 2. objects if they are visibly protruding from the Observe use-by date on the sealant container. tire. ▷ Pull the speed limit sticker off the sealant Compressor container and apply it to the steering wheel. ▷ The use of a sealant can damage the TPM wheel electronics. In this case, have the elec‐ tronics checked and replaced at the next op‐ portunity. ▷ The compressor can be used to check the tire inflation pressure.
Overview 1 Sealant container unlocking Storage 2 Sealant container holder 3 Tire pressure gage 4 Reduce tire inflation pressure button 5 On/off switch 6 Compressor 7 Connector/cable for socket 8 Connection hose
The Mobility System is in the left storage com‐ Safety measures partment of the cargo area. ▷ Park the vehicle as far away as possible from passing traffic and on solid ground. ▷ Switch on the hazard warning system. ▷ Secure the vehicle against rolling away by setting the parking brake.
308 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 309
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
▷ Turn the steering wheel until the front wheels 2. Pull filling hose completely out of the cover of are in the straight-ahead position and engage the sealant container. Do not kink the hose. the steering wheel lock. ▷ Have all vehicle occupants get out of the ve‐ hicle and ensure that they remain outside the immediate area in a safe place, such as be‐ hind a guardrail. ▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle at an appropriate distance.
Filling the tire with sealant 3. Slide the sealant container into the holder on Safety information the compressor housing, ensuring that it en‐ gages audibly. DANGER If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventilation is in‐ sufficient, harmful exhaust gases can enter into the vehicle. The exhaust gases contain pollu‐ tants which are colorless and odorless. In en‐ closed areas, exhaust gases can also accumu‐ late outside of the vehicle. There is danger to life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and ensure suf‐ ficient ventilation.
4. Screw the filling hose of the sealant container onto the tire valve of the nonworking wheel. NOTICE The compressor can overheat during extended operation. There is a risk of damage to prop‐ erty. Do not run the compressor for more than 10 minutes.
Filling 1. Shake the sealant container.
309 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 310
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
5. With the compressor switched off, insert the Removing and stowing the sealant plug into the power socket inside the vehicle. container 1. Unscrew the filling hose of the sealant con‐ tainer from the tire valve. 2. Press the red unlocking device. 3. Remove the sealant container from the com‐ pressor. 4. Wrap and store the sealant container in suita‐ ble material to avoid dirtying the cargo area.
Minimum tire inflation pressure is 6. With standby state switched on or the engine not reached running, switch on the compressor. 1. Pull the connector out of the power socket inside the vehicle. 2. Drive 33 ft/10 m forward and back to distrib‐ ute the sealant in the tire. 3. Screw the connection hose of the compres‐ sor directly onto the tire valve stem.
Let the compressor run for max. 10 minutes to fill the tire with sealant and achieve a tire inflation pressure of approx. 2.0 bar. While the tire is being filled with sealant, the tire inflation pressure may sporadically reach approx. 5 bar. Do not switch off the compressor at this point. 4. Insert the connector into the power socket in‐ side the vehicle. Checking and adjusting the tire inflation pressure
Checking 1. Switch off the compressor. 2. Read the tire inflation pressure on the tire pressure gage. To continue the trip, a tire inflation pressure of at least 2 bar must be reached. 5. With standby state switched on or the engine running, switch on the compressor. If a tire inflation pressure of at least 2 bar can‐ not be reached, contact your dealer’s service
310 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 311
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
center or another qualified service center or 3. Insert the connector into the power socket in‐ repair shop. side the vehicle. If a tire inflation pressure of at least 2 bar is reached, see Minimum tire inflation pressure is reached. 6. Unscrew the connection hose of the com‐ pressor from the tire valve. 7. Pull the connector out of the power socket inside the vehicle. 8. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.
Minimum tire inflation pressure is 4. Correct the tire inflation pressure to at least reached 2.0 bar. ▷ Increase tire inflation pressure: with 1. Unscrew the connection hose of the com‐ standby state switched on or the engine pressor from the tire valve. running, switch on the compressor. 2. Pull the connector out of the power socket ▷ Reduce tire inflation pressure: press the inside the vehicle. button on the compressor. 3. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle. 5. Unscrew the connection hose of the com‐ 4. Immediately drive approx. 5 miles/10 km to pressor from the tire valve. ensure that the sealant is evenly distributed in 6. Pull the connector out of the power socket the tire. inside the vehicle. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. 7. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle. If possible, do not drive at speeds less than 12 mph/20 km/h. Continuing the trip Adjustment Do not exceed the maximum permissible speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. 1. Stop at a suitable location. Reinitialize the run-flat tires, refer to page 319. 2. Screw the connection hose of the compres‐ sor directly onto the tire valve stem. Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM, refer to page 313. Replace the nonworking tire and the sealant con‐ tainer of the Mobility System promptly.
311 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 312
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
Snow chains Do not initialize the run-flat tires after mounting snow chains, as doing so may result in incorrect readings. Safety information Do not reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM af‐ ter mounting snow chains, as doing so may re‐ WARNING sult in incorrect readings. With the mounting of snow chains on unsuita‐ When driving with snow chains, briefly activate ble tires, the snow chains can come into con‐ Dynamic Traction Control DTC to optimize the tact with vehicle parts. There is a risk of acci‐ forward momentum. dents or risk of damage to property. Only mount snow chains on tires that are designated Maximum speed with snow by their manufacturer as suitable for the use of chains snow chains. Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h when using snow chains.
WARNING Rear axle steering during Insufficiently tight snow chains may damage operation with snow chains tires and vehicle components. There is a risk of accidents or risk of damage to property. Make General information sure that the snow chains are always suffi‐ In order to guarantee free running of the wheels ciently tight. Re-tighten as needed according to when operating with snow chains, rear axle the snow chain manufacturer's instructions. steering of the integral active steering must be switched off when snow chains are mounted. Fine-link snow chains Safety information The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends use of fine-link snow chains. Certain types of fine-link snow chains have been tested by the WARNING manufacturer of the vehicle and recommended When rear axle steering is switched on and as road-safe and suitable. snow chains are mounted, there can be contact Information regarding suitable snow chains is between snow chains and the chassis. There is available from a dealer’s service center or an‐ a risk of accidents or risk of damage to prop‐ other qualified service center or repair shop. erty. With mounted snow chains, switch off the rear axle steering. Use Use only in pairs on the rear wheels, equipped Switching off rear axle steering with the tires of the following size: The rear axle steering is switched off by specify‐ ▷ 225/55 R 17. ing that snow chains are installed. ▷ 245/45 R 18. Via iDrive: ▷ 245/40 R 19. 1. "My Vehicle" Follow the snow chain manufacturer's instruc‐ tions. 2. "Vehicle settings"
312 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 313
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
3. "Tire chains" that the tire sizes of the mounted tires are en‐ 4. "Tire chains installed" tered correctly and match the details on the tires and on the vehicle. Starting with the permissible maximum speed with snow chains of 30 mph/50 km/h the rear axle steering will be switched on again automati‐ Functional requirements cally. The following conditions must be met for the system; otherwise, reliable flagging of a loss of Tire Pressure Monitor TPM tire inflation pressure is not assured: ▷ Every time a tire or wheel is changed, the Concept correct details on the mounted tires must be entered in the tire settings, refer to The system monitors tire inflation pressure in the page 313. four mounted tires. The system warns you if ▷ For tires with special approval: there is a loss of pressure in one or more tires. ▷ After a tire or wheel replacement, a reset General information was performed with the correct tire infla‐ tion pressure. Sensors in the tire valves measure the tire infla‐ tion pressure and tire temperature. ▷ After the tire inflation pressure was ad‐ justed to a new value, a reset was per‐ Using the tire settings in iDrive, the system can formed. automatically display the specified target pres‐ sures and compare them with the actual tire in‐ ▷ Wheels with TPM wheel electronics. flation pressures. Tire settings If tires are being used that are not specified on the tire inflation pressure details on the vehicle, refer to page 296, such as tires with special ap‐ General information proval, the system needs to be actively reset. The tire sizes of the mounted tires can be gath‐ The system will then take over the actual tire in‐ ered from the tire inflation pressure details on the flation pressures as the target pressures. vehicle, refer to page 296, or directly on the tires. When operating the system, also note the addi‐ The tire details do not need to be re-entered tional information found in the Tire inflation pres‐ when the tire inflation pressure is corrected. sure, refer to page 296, chapter. For summer and winter tires, the tire details en‐ tered last are stored. After a tire or wheel re‐ Safety information placement, the settings of the tire sets used last can be selected.
WARNING Opening the menu The display of the target pressures is not a Via iDrive: substitute for the tire inflation pressure details on the vehicle. Incorrect entries in the tire set‐ 1. "My Vehicle" tings can lead to incorrect target tire inflation 2. "Vehicle status" pressure values. In this case, it cannot be guar‐ anteed that the notification of a loss of tire infla‐ 3. "Tire Pressure Monitor" tion pressure will be reliable. There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to property. Ensure
313 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 314
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
Changing settings The current tire temperatures may change while Via iDrive: driving or due to the external temperature. 1. "Tire settings" Target pressure 2. Selecting tires: The target pressure for the tires on the front and ▷ "Summer tires" rear axles is displayed. ▷ "Winter tires/all-season tires" The target pressures are values stored in the ve‐ 3. "Current:" hicle. 4. Select the tire type that is mounted on the The specified target pressures take the influence rear axle: of driving operation and external temperature on the tire temperature into account. The appropri‐ ▷ Tire size, e.g., 245/45 R18 96 Y. ate target pressure is always displayed, inde‐ ▷ For tires with special approval: "Other tire" pendent of the weather situation, tire tempera‐ 5. Select the maximum road speed that will be tures and driving times. used with the tires. The displayed target pressure may change and 6. "Confirm settings" may differ from the tire inflation pressure details on the door pillar of the driver's door. The tire in‐ The measurement of the current tire inflation flation pressure can thus be corrected to the pressure is started. The measurement progress value of the displayed target pressures. is displayed. The target pressure is immediately adjusted if Status display the vehicle load is changed in the tire settings.
Current status Tire conditions The system status can be displayed on the Con‐ General information trol Display, e.g., whether or not the system is ac‐ tive. Tire and system status are indicated by the color of the wheels and a SMS text message on the Via iDrive: Control Display. 1. "My Vehicle" Any existing messages are not deleted if the dis‐ 2. "Vehicle status" played target pressure is not reached after the 3. "Tire Pressure Monitor" tire inflation pressure is corrected. The current status is displayed. All wheels green Current tire inflation pressure ▷ The system is active and bases warnings on the displayed target pressures. The current tire inflation pressure is displayed for each tire. ▷ For tires with special approval: the system is active and bases warnings on the tire inflation The current tire inflation pressures may change pressures stored during the last reset. during driving operation or depending on the ex‐ ternal temperature. One to four yellow wheels Current tire temperature A flat tire or major drop in the tire inflation pres‐ sure has occurred in the indicated tires. Depending on the model, the current tire tem‐ peratures are displayed. 314 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 315
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
Gray wheels Safety information It may not be possible to identify tire inflation pressure losses. WARNING Possible causes: A damaged regular tire with low or missing tire ▷ Malfunction. inflation pressure impacts handling, such as ▷ During tire inflation pressure measurement, steering and braking response. Run-flat tires after confirmation of the tire settings. can maintain limited stability. There is a risk of an accident. Do not continue driving if the vehi‐ ▷ For tires with special approval: the system is cle is equipped with normal tires. Follow the in‐ being reset. formation on run-flat tires and continued driving with these tires. For tires with special approval: performing a reset Via iDrive: If a tire inflation pressure check is required 1. "My Vehicle" 2. "Vehicle status" Message 3. "Tire Pressure Monitor" A symbol with a Check Control message ap‐ 4. Switch on drive-ready state and do not drive pears on the Control Display. off. Symbol Possible cause 5. Reset tire inflation pressure: "Perform reset". Inflation was not carried out accord‐ 6. Drive away. ing to specifications, e.g., the tire has The wheels are displayed in gray and the follow‐ not been sufficiently inflated. ing is displayed "Resetting Tire Pressure The tire settings were not updated. Monitor…".
After driving faster than 19 mph/30 km/h for a Measure short period, the set tire inflation pressures are 1. Check the tire pressure and correct as accepted as the target tire inflation pressures. needed. The reset is completed automatically while driv‐ ing. 2. Update the tire settings. After a successfully completed reset, the wheels on the Control Display are shown in green and If the tire inflation pressure is too the following is displayed: "Tire Pressure Monitor low active. See label for recommended pressures.". Message You may interrupt this trip at any time. When you continue the reset resumes automatically. A yellow warning light is illuminated in the instrument cluster. Messages: for tires without In addition, a symbol with a Check Control mes‐ special approval sage appears on the Control Display. General information A low tire inflation pressure may cause the DSC Dynamic Stability Control to be switched on. 315 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 316
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
Symbol Possible cause Messages: for tires with special approval There is a tire inflation pressure loss. General information A low tire inflation pressure may cause the DSC Measure Dynamic Stability Control to be switched on. 1. Reduce the vehicle speed. Do not exceed a speed of 80 mph/130 km/h. Safety information 2. At the next opportunity, for instance at a gas station, check the tire inflation pressure in all WARNING four tires and correct if necessary. A damaged regular tire with low or missing tire inflation pressure impacts handling, such as If there is a significant loss of tire steering and braking response. Run-flat tires inflation pressure can maintain limited stability. There is a risk of an accident. Do not continue driving if the vehi‐ Message cle is equipped with normal tires. Follow the in‐ A yellow warning light is illuminated in formation on run-flat tires and continued driving the instrument cluster. with these tires.
In addition, a symbol with the affected tire ap‐ pears in a Check Control message on the Con‐ If a tire inflation pressure check is trol Display. required Symbol Possible cause Message There is a flat tire or a major loss in A symbol with a Check Control message ap‐ tire inflation pressure. pears on the Control Display. Sym‐ Possible cause Measure bol
1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Inflation was not carried out accord‐ Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ ing to specifications, e.g., the tire has vers. not been sufficiently inflated. 2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with nor‐ The system has detected a wheel mal tires or run-flat tires. change, but no reset was done. Run-flat tires, refer to page 307, are labeled The tire inflation pressure has fallen with a circular symbol containing the letters below the level of the last reset. RSC marked on the tire's sidewall. No reset was performed for the sys‐ tem. The system issues a warning based on the tire inflation pressures stored during the last reset.
316 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 317
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
Measure Symbol Possible cause 1. Check the tire pressure and correct as There is a flat tire or a major loss in needed. tire inflation pressure. 2. Perform a system reset. No reset was performed for the sys‐ tem. The system issues a warning If the tire inflation pressure is too based on the tire inflation pressures low stored during the last reset.
Message Measure A yellow warning light is illuminated in 1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. the instrument cluster. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ In addition, a symbol with a Check Control mes‐ vers. sage appears on the Control Display. 2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with nor‐ mal tires or run-flat tires. Symbol Possible cause Run-flat tires, refer to page 307, are labeled There is a tire inflation pressure loss. with a circular symbol containing the letters No reset was performed for the sys‐ RSC marked on the tire's sidewall. tem. The system issues a warning based on the tire inflation pressures Actions in the event of a flat tire stored during the last reset. Normal tires Measure 1. Identify the damaged tire. 1. Reduce the vehicle speed. Do not exceed a Check the tire inflation pressure in all four speed of 80 mph/130 km/h. tires, for instance using the tire pressure gage 2. At the next opportunity, for instance at a gas of a flat tire kit. station, check the tire inflation pressure in all For tires with special approval: if the tire infla‐ four tires and correct if necessary. tion pressure in all four tires is correct, the 3. Reset the system. TPM may not have been reset. In this case, perform the reset. If there is a significant loss of tire If tire damage cannot be found, contact a inflation pressure dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. Message 2. Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a flat tire kit or by A yellow warning light is illuminated in changing the wheel. the instrument cluster. Use of sealant, for instance from the flat tire kit, may damage the TPM wheel electronics. Have In addition, a symbol with the affected tire ap‐ the electronics replaced at the next opportunity. pears in a Check Control message on the Con‐ trol Display.
317 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 318
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
Run-flat tires Vehicle handling with damaged tires Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will handle Safety information differently, potentially leading to conditions such as the following: WARNING ▷ Greater likelihood of swerving off course. Your vehicle handles differently with a run-flat ▷ Longer braking distances. with no or low inflation pressure; for instance, ▷ Changed self-steering properties. your lane stability when braking is reduced, Modify your driving style. Avoid abrupt steering braking distances are longer and the self-steer‐ maneuvers or driving over obstacles, for instance ing properties will change. There is a risk of an curbs or potholes. accident. Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. Final tire failure Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indi‐ Maximum speed cate the final failure of a tire. You may continue driving with a damaged tire at Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h. tire could come loose and cause an accident. Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’s serv‐ Continued driving with a flat tire ice center or another qualified service center or Follow the following when continuing to drive repair shop. with a damaged tire:
1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ System limits vers. Temperature 2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. The tire inflation pressure depends on the tire's 3. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four temperature. tires at the next opportunity. Driving or exposure to the sun will increase the For tires with special approval: if the tire infla‐ tire's temperature, thus increasing the tire infla‐ tion pressure in all four tires is correct, the tion pressure. Tire Pressure Monitor may not have been re‐ set. In this case, perform the reset. The tire inflation pressure is reduced when the tire temperature falls again. Possible driving range with a These circumstances may cause a warning depressurized tire when temperatures fall very sharply. The distance for which it may be possible to Following a temperature-related warning, the tar‐ drive safely varies depending on how the vehicle get pressures are displayed on the Control Dis‐ is loaded and used, e.g., speed, road conditions, play again after a short distance. external temperature. The driving range may be less but may also be more if an economical driv‐ Sudden tire pressure loss ing style is used. The system cannot indicate sudden serious tire If the vehicle is loaded with an average weight damage caused by external circumstances. and used under favorable conditions, the dis‐ tance for which it may be safe to drive may be up to 50 miles/80 km.
318 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 319
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
Failure to perform a reset ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi‐ Tires with special approval: the system will not nates, you should stop and check your tires as function correctly if a reset was not performed, soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper for example a flat tire may be indicated although pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated the tire inflation pressures are correct. tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel effi‐ Malfunction ciency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehi‐ cle's handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire Message maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility The yellow warning light flashes and is to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under- then illuminated continuously. A Check inflation has not reached the level to trigger illu‐ Control message is displayed. It may not mination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. be possible to identify tire pressure losses. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS Measure malfunction indicator is combined with the low ▷ A wheel without TPM wheel electronics, such tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a as an emergency wheel, is mounted: have malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi‐ the wheels checked, if needed. mately one minute and then remain continuously ▷ Malfunction: have the system checked. illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal‐ ▷ Interference caused by systems or devices function exists. When the malfunction indicator is with the same radio frequency: after leaving illuminated, the system may not be able to de‐ the area of the interference, the system auto‐ tect or signal low tire pressure as intended. matically becomes active again. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of ▷ For tires with special approval: the system reasons, including the installation of replacement was unable to complete the reset. Perform a or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that system reset again. prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Al‐ ways check the TPMS malfunction telltale after Declaration according to NHTSA/ replacing one or more tires or wheels on your ve‐ FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure hicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate Monitoring System tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to Each tire, including the spare (if provided) should function properly. be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehi‐ cle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire in‐ FTM Flat Tire Monitor flation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the ve‐ Concept hicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you The system detects tire inflation pressure loss should determine the proper tire inflation pres‐ on the basis of rotation speed differences be‐ sure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, tween the individual wheels while driving. your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pres‐ sure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates In the event of a tire inflation pressure loss, the a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of diameter and therefore the rotational speed of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accord‐
319 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 320
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
the corresponding wheel changes. The differ‐ Via iDrive: ence will be detected and reported as a flat tire. 1. "My Vehicle" The system does not measure the actual infla‐ 2. "Vehicle status" tion pressure in the tires. 3. "Flat Tire Monitor" Functional requirements 4. Switch on drive-ready state and do not drive The following conditions must be met for the off. system; otherwise, reliable flagging of a loss of 5. Start the initialization with: "Perform reset" tire inflation pressure is not assured: 6. Drive away. ▷ After a tire or wheel replacement, an initializa‐ The initialization is completed while driving, tion was performed with the correct tire infla‐ which can be interrupted at any time. tion pressure. The initialization automatically continues when ▷ After the tire inflation pressure was adjusted driving resumes. to a new value, an initialization was per‐ formed. Messages
Status display General information The current status of the flat tire monitor can be When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Sta‐ displayed, for instance whether the RPA is active. bility Control is switched on, if needed. Via iDrive: Safety information 1. "My Vehicle" 2. "Vehicle status" WARNING 3. "Flat Tire Monitor" A damaged regular tire with low or missing tire The status is displayed. inflation pressure impacts handling, such as steering and braking response. Run-flat tires Initialization required can maintain limited stability. There is a risk of An initialization must be performed in the follow‐ an accident. Do not continue driving if the vehi‐ ing situations: cle is equipped with normal tires. Follow the in‐ ▷ After the tire inflation pressure has been ad‐ formation on run-flat tires and continued driving justed. with these tires. ▷ After a tire or wheel replacement. Indication of a flat tire Performing initialization A yellow warning light is illuminated in When initializing, the set tire inflation pressures the instrument cluster. serve as reference values in order to detect a flat tire. Initialization is started by confirming the tire In addition, a symbol with a Check Control mes‐ inflation pressures. sage appears on the Control Display. Do not initialize the system when driving with snow chains.
320 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 321
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
Symbol Possible cause ing properties will change. There is a risk of an accident. Drive moderately and do not exceed a There is a flat tire or a major loss in speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. tire inflation pressure.
Maximum speed Measure You may continue driving with a damaged tire at 1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ vers. Continued driving with a flat tire 2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with nor‐ Follow the following when continuing to drive mal tires or run-flat tires. with a damaged tire: Run-flat tires, refer to page 307, are labeled 1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ with a circular symbol containing the letters vers. RSC marked on the tire's sidewall. 2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. Actions in the event of a flat tire 3. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four tires at the next opportunity. Normal tires If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is 1. Identify the damaged tire. correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have been initialized. In this case, initialize the sys‐ To do this, check the tire inflation pressure in tem. all four tires, for instance using the tire pres‐ sure gage of a flat tire kit. Possible driving range with a If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is depressurized tire correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have The distance for which it may be possible to been initialized. In this case, initialize the sys‐ drive safely varies depending on how the vehicle tem. is loaded and used, e.g., speed, road conditions, If identification of flat tire damage is not pos‐ external temperature. The driving range may be sible, please contact a dealer’s service center less but may also be more if an economical driv‐ or another qualified service center or repair ing style is used. shop. If the vehicle is loaded with an average weight 2. Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a flat tire kit or by and used under favorable conditions, the dis‐ changing the wheel. tance for which it may be safe to drive may be up to 50 miles/80 km. Run-flat tires Vehicle handling with damaged tires Safety information Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will handle differently, potentially leading to conditions such WARNING as the following: Your vehicle handles differently with a run-flat ▷ Greater likelihood of swerving off course. with no or low inflation pressure; for instance, ▷ Longer braking distances. your lane stability when braking is reduced, ▷ Changed self-steering properties. braking distances are longer and the self-steer‐
321 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 322
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
Modify your driving style. Avoid abrupt steering Safety information maneuvers or driving over obstacles, for instance curbs or potholes. DANGER Final tire failure The vehicle jack is only provided for short-term Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indi‐ lifting of the vehicle for wheel changes. Even if cate the final failure of a tire. all safety measures are observed, there is a risk of the raised vehicle falling, if the vehicle jack Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tips over. There is a risk of injuries or danger to tire could come loose and cause an accident. life. If the vehicle is raised, do not lie under the Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’s serv‐ vehicle and do not start the engine. ice center or another qualified service center or repair shop. DANGER System limits Supports such as wooden blocks under the ve‐ The system could be delayed or malfunction in hicle jack reduce the capacity of the vehicle the following situations: jack to bear weight. They have the potential to ▷ A natural, even tire inflation pressure loss in exert too much strain on the vehicle jack, caus‐ all four tires will not be recognized. Therefore, ing it to tip over and the vehicle to fall. There is check the tire inflation pressure regularly. a risk of injuries or danger to life. Do not place ▷ Sudden serious tire damage caused by exter‐ supports under the vehicle jack. nal circumstances cannot be recognized in advance. ▷ When the system has not been initialized. WARNING ▷ When driving on a snowy or slippery road sur‐ The jack, issued by the vehicle manufacturer, is face. provided in order to perform a wheel change in the event of a breakdown. The jack is not de‐ ▷ Sporty driving style: spinning traction wheels, signed for frequent use; for example, changing high lateral acceleration (drifting). from summer to winter tires. Using the jack fre‐ ▷ When driving with snow chains. quently may cause it to become jammed or damaged. There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to property. Only use the jack to attach Changing wheels/tires an emergency or spare wheel in the event of a breakdown. General information When using run-flat tires or a flat tire kit, a wheel does not always need to be changed immedi‐ WARNING ately when there is a loss of tire inflation pressure On soft, uneven or slippery ground, for example due to a flat tire. snow, ice, tiles, etc., the vehicle jack can slip If needed, the tools for changing wheels are away. There is a risk of injury. If possible, available as accessories from a dealer’s service change the wheel on a flat, solid, and slip-re‐ center or another qualified service center or re‐ sistant surface. pair shop.
322 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 323
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
On a level surface WARNING The vehicle jack is optimized for lifting the vehi‐ cle and for the jacking points on the vehicle only. There is a risk of injury. Do not lift any other vehicle or cargo using the vehicle jack.
WARNING If the vehicle jack is not inserted into the jacking point provided for this purpose, the vehicle may Place wheel chocks or other suitable objects in be damaged or the vehicle jack may slip when front and behind the wheel that is diagonal to the it is being cranked up. There is a risk of injury or wheel to be changed. risk of damage to property. When cranking up the vehicle jack, ensure that it is inserted in the On a slight downhill gradient jacking point next to the wheel housing.
WARNING A vehicle that is raised on a vehicle jack may fall off of the jack if lateral forces are exerted on it. There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to property. While the vehicle is raised, do not ex‐ ert lateral forces on the vehicle or pull abruptly on the vehicle. Have a stuck wheel removed by a dealer’s service center or another qualified If you need to change a wheel on a slight down‐ service center or repair shop. hill grade, place chocks and other suitable ob‐ jects, for instance a rock, under the wheels of both the front and rear axles against the rolling Securing the vehicle against direction. rolling Lug bolt lock General information The vehicle manufacturer recommends to addi‐ Concept tionally secure the vehicle against rolling away The wheel lug bolts have a special coding. The when changing a wheel. lug bolts can only be released with the adapter which matches the coding.
Overview The adapter of the lug bolt lock is in the onboard vehicle tool kit or in a storage compartment close to the onboard vehicle tool kit.
323 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 324
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
▷ Depending on the vehicle equipment, get wheel change tools and, if necessary, the emergency wheel from the vehicle. ▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle or port‐ able hazard warning light at an appropriate distance. ▷ Secure the vehicle additionally against rolling. ▷ Loosen the lug bolts a half turn. ▷ Lug bolt, arrow 1. Jacking points for the vehicle ▷ Adapter, arrow 2. jack
Unscrewing 1. Attach the adapter to the lug bolt. 2. Unscrew the lug bolt. 3. Remove the adapter after unscrewing the lug bolt.
Screwing on 1. Attach the adapter to the lug bolt. If neces‐ sary, turn the adapter until it fits on the lug The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo‐ bolt. cated at the indicated positions. 2. Screw on the lug bolt. The tightening torque is 140 Nm. 3. Remove the adapter and stow it after screw‐ ing on the lug bolt.
Preparing the vehicle ▷ Park the vehicle on solid and non-slip ground at a safe distance from traffic. ▷ Switch on the hazard warning system. ▷ Set the parking brake. ▷ Engage a gear or move the selector lever to position P. ▷ As soon as permitted by the traffic flow, have all vehicle occupants get out of the vehicle and ensure that they remain outside the im‐ mediate area in a safe place, such as behind a guardrail.
324 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 325
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
Jacking up the vehicle 3. Extend the vehicle jack by turning the vehicle jack crank or lever clockwise.
WARNING Hands and fingers can be jammed when using the vehicle jack. There is a risk of injury. Com‐ ply with the described hand position and do not change this position while using the vehicle jack.
1. Hold the vehicle jack with one hand, arrow 1, and grasp the vehicle jack crank or lever with your other hand, arrow 2. 4. Take your hand away from the vehicle jack as soon as the vehicle jack is under load and continue turning the vehicle jack crank or lever with one hand. 5. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot stands vertically and at a right angle beneath the jacking point.
2. Insert the vehicle jack into the rectangular re‐ cess of the jacking point closest to the wheel to be changed.
6. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot stands vertically and perpendicularly beneath the jacking point after extending the vehicle jack.
7. Crank the vehicle up, until the vehicle jack is with the entire surface on the ground and the relevant wheel is maximum 1.2 inches/3 cm above ground.
325 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 326
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
Mounting a wheel tive tire. The emergency wheel is only intended for temporary use until the defective tire/wheel Mount one emergency wheel only, as required. has been replaced. 1. Unscrew the lug bolts. 2. Remove the wheel. General information 3. Put the new wheel or emergency wheel on Mount one emergency wheel only. and screw in at least two lug bolts in a cross‐ Also check the tire inflation pressure of the wise pattern until hand-tight. emergency wheel in the cargo area regularly, and If non-original light-alloy wheels of the vehicle correct it as needed. manufacturer are mounted, the accompany‐ ing lug bolts may have to be used as well. Safety information 4. Hand-tighten the remaining lug bolts and tighten all lug bolts well in a crosswise pat‐ WARNING tern. The emergency wheel has particular dimen‐ 5. Turn the vehicle jack crank counterclockwise sions. When driving with an emergency wheel, to retract the vehicle jack and lower the vehi‐ changed driving properties may occur, for in‐ cle. stance reduced lane stability when braking, lon‐ 6. Remove the vehicle jack and stow it securely. ger braking distance, and changed self-steering properties in the limit area. There is a risk of an After the wheel change accident. Drive moderately and do not exceed a 1. Tighten the lug bolts crosswise. The tighten‐ speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. ing torque is 101 lb ft/140 Nm. 2. Stow the nonworking wheel in the cargo area, Overview if necessary. The nonworking wheel cannot be stored un‐ der the cargo floor panel because of its size. 3. Check tire inflation pressure at the next op‐ portunity and correct as needed. 4. Reinitialize the run-flat tires. Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM. 5. Check to make sure the lug bolts are tight with a calibrated torque wrench. The emergency wheel and the wheel change 6. Have the damaged tire replaced at the near‐ tools are located in the cargo area under the est dealer’s service center or another quali‐ cargo floor panel. fied service center or repair shop.
Emergency wheel
Concept In the event of a flat tire, the emergency wheel can be used in place of the wheel with the defec‐
326 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 327
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
Removing the emergency wheel 1. Remove the cargo floor panel. To do this, pull the cargo floor panel upward directly behind the rear backrests.
2. Open the ratchet strap.
3. Remove the tool holder. 4. Remove the emergency wheel from the stor‐ age well. Do not remove any covers.
Inserting the emergency wheel 1. Place the emergency wheel in the storage well. 2. Insert the tool holder. 3. Tie the ratchet strap. Make sure that it is cor‐ rectly and firmly seated. 4. Insert the cargo floor panel.
327 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 328
MOBILITY Engine compartment
Engine compartment
Vehicle features and It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected options options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When us‐ This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ ing these functions and systems, the applicable cific and optional features offered with the series. laws and regulations must be observed.
Overview
1 Filler neck for washer fluid 5 Gasoline engine only: coolant reservoir, auxili‐ 2 Jump-starting, positive battery terminal ary cooling 3 Oil filler neck 6 Jump-starting, negative battery terminal 4 Coolant reservoir, engine 7 Vehicle identification number
328 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 329
Engine compartment MOBILITY
Hood WARNING Safety information Body parts can be jammed when opening and closing the hood. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the hood is WARNING clear during opening and closing. Improperly executed work in the engine com‐ partment can damage vehicle components and impair vehicle functions. There is a risk of per‐ NOTICE sonal and property damage. The manufacturer Folded-away wipers can be jammed when the of your vehicle recommends that, in the effort hood is opened. There is a risk of damage to to avoid such risks, work in the engine com‐ property. Make sure that the wipers with the partment be performed by a dealer’s service wiper blades mounted are folded down onto center or another qualified service center or re‐ the windshield before opening the hood. pair shop.
Opening WARNING 1. Pull lever, arrow 1. The engine compartment accommodates mov‐ Hood is unlocked. ing components. Certain components in the engine compartment can also move with the vehicle switched off, for instance the radiator fan. There is a risk of injury. Do not reach into the area of moving parts. Keep articles of cloth‐ ing and hair away from moving parts.
WARNING There are protruding parts, for instance locking 2. After the lever is released, pull the lever again, hook, on the inside of the hood. There is a risk arrow 2. of injury. If the hood is open, pay attention to protruding parts and keep clear of these areas. Hood can be opened. 3. Be careful of protruding parts on the hood.
WARNING An incorrectly locked hood can open while driv‐ ing and restrict visibility. There is a risk of an ac‐ cident. Stop immediately and correctly close the hood.
329 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 330
MOBILITY Engine compartment
Closing
Let the hood drop from a height of approx. 16 in‐ ches/40 cm and push down on it to lock it fully. The hood must engage on both sides.
330 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 331
Engine oil MOBILITY
Engine oil
Vehicle features and NOTICE options Too much engine oil can damage the engine or the catalytic converter. There is a risk of dam‐ This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ age to property. Do not add too much engine cific and optional features offered with the series. oil. When too much engine oil is added, have It also describes features that are not necessarily the engine oil level corrected by a dealer’s serv‐ available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected ice center or another qualified service center or options or country versions. This also applies to repair shop. safety-related functions and systems. When us‐ ing these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed. Electronic oil measurement General information General information The engine oil consumption is dependent on The electronic oil measurement has two measur‐ your driving style and driving conditions. ing principles: Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level af‐ ▷ Monitoring. ter refueling by taking a detailed measurement. ▷ Detailed measurement. The engine oil consumption can increase in the When making frequent short-distance trips or following situations, for example: using a dynamic driving style, for instance when ▷ Sporty driving style. taking curves aggressively, regularly perform a ▷ Break-in of the engine. detailed measurement. ▷ Idling of the engine. Monitoring ▷ With use of engine oil types that are classified as not suitable. Concept Different Check Control messages appear on the The engine oil level is monitored electronically Control Display depending on the engine oil while driving and can be shown on the Control level. Display. If the engine oil level is outside its permissible Safety information operating range, a Check Control message is displayed. A red indicator light indicates that the en‐ NOTICE gine oil pressure is too low. An engine oil level that is too low causes en‐ gine damage. There is a risk of damage to Functional requirements property. Immediately add engine oil. A current measured value is available after ap‐ prox. 30 minutes of normal driving.
331 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 332
MOBILITY Engine oil
Displaying the engine oil level 4. "Measure engine oil level" Via iDrive: 5. "Start measurement" 1. "My Vehicle" The engine oil level is checked and displayed via a scale. 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Engine oil level" The engine oil level is displayed. Adding engine oil
System limits General information When making frequent short-distance trips or Only add engine oil when the message is dis‐ using a dynamic driving style, it may not be pos‐ played in the instrument cluster. The quantity to sible to calculate a measured value. In this case, be added is indicated in the message shown on the measured value for the last, sufficiently long the Control Display. trip is displayed. Only add suitable types of engine oil, refer to page 333. Detailed measurement Safely park the vehicle and switch off drive-ready state before adding engine oil. Concept Take care not to add too much engine oil. The engine oil level is checked when the vehicle is stationary and displayed via a scale. Safety information If the engine oil level is outside its permissible operating range, a Check Control message is displayed. WARNING Operating materials, for instance oils, greases, General information coolants, fuels, can contain harmful ingredients. During the measurement, the idle speed is in‐ There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Fol‐ creased somewhat. low the instructions on the containers. Avoid the contact of articles of clothing, skin or eyes Functional requirements with operating materials. Do not refill operating materials into different bottles. Store operating ▷ Vehicle is parked in a horizontal position. materials out of reach of children. ▷ Steptronic transmission: selector lever in se‐ lector lever position N or P and accelerator pedal not depressed. NOTICE ▷ Engine is running and is at operating temper‐ An engine oil level that is too low causes en‐ ature. gine damage. There is a risk of damage to property. Immediately add engine oil. Performing a detailed measurement Via iDrive: 1. "My Vehicle" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Engine oil level"
332 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 333
Engine oil MOBILITY
Safety information NOTICE
Too much engine oil can damage the engine or NOTICE the catalytic converter. There is a risk of dam‐ age to property. Do not add too much engine Oil additives can damage the engine. There is a oil. When too much engine oil is added, have risk of damage to property. Do not use oil addi‐ the engine oil level corrected by a dealer’s serv‐ tives. ice center or another qualified service center or repair shop. NOTICE Incorrect engine oil can cause malfunctions in Overview the engine or damage it. There is a risk of dam‐ The oil filler neck is located in the engine com‐ age to property. When selecting an engine oil, partment, refer to page 328. make sure that the engine oil has the correct oil rating. Adding engine oil 1. Open the hood, refer to page 329. Suitable engine oil types 2. Open the lid counterclockwise. Add engine oils that meet the following oil rating standards: Gasoline engine
BMW Longlife-01 FE.
BMW Longlife-14 FE+.
Diesel engine
BMW Longlife-12 FE. 3. Add engine oil. 4. Close the cap. Alternative engine oil types If an engine oil suitable for continuous use is not Engine oil types to add available, up to 1 US quart/liter of an engine oil with the following oil rating can be added: General information Oil rating The engine oil quality is critical for the life of the API SL. engine. API SM. Only add the types of engine oil which are listed. API SN.
333 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 334
MOBILITY Engine oil
Viscosity grades
Viscosity grades
SAE 0W-20.
SAE 0W-30.
More information about suitable engine oil rat‐ ings and viscosities of engine oils can be re‐ quested from a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.
Engine oil change
NOTICE Engine oil that is not changed in timely fashion can cause increased engine wear and thus en‐ gine damage. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not exceed the service data indi‐ cated in the vehicle.
The vehicle manufacturer recommends that you have a dealer’s service center or another quali‐ fied service center or repair shop change the en‐ gine oil.
334 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 335
Coolant MOBILITY
Coolant
Vehicle features and Coolant level options General information This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ Vehicles with gasoline engine feature two cool‐ cific and optional features offered with the series. ing circuits. Always check the coolant levels of It also describes features that are not necessarily both coolant reservoirs and refill as needed. available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected The coolant level is indicted using minimum and options or country versions. This also applies to maximum markings. Depending on the coolant safety-related functions and systems. When us‐ reservoir, the minimum and maximum markings ing these functions and systems, the applicable are located at different locations. laws and regulations must be observed. Depending on the engine installation, the coolant reservoir is located on the right side or the left General information side of the engine compartment, refer to page 328. Coolant consists of water and additives. Not all commercially available additives are suita‐ Checking the coolant level on the ble for the vehicle. Information about suitable ad‐ side markings ditives is available from a dealer’s service center 1. Let the engine cool. or another qualified service center or repair shop. 2. The coolant level is correct if it lies between the minimum and maximum marks on the Safety information coolant reservoir. Symbol Meaning
WARNING Maximum. With the engine hot and the cooling system Minimum. open, coolant can escape and lead to scalding. There is a risk of injury. Only open the cooling system with the engine cooled down. Checking the coolant level in the filler neck 1. Let the engine cool. WARNING 2. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly Additives are harmful and incorrect additives counterclockwise to allow any excess pres‐ can damage the engine. There is a risk of injury sure to dissipate, then open it. and risk of damage to property. Do not allow additives to come into contact with skin, eyes or articles of clothing. Use suitable additives only.
335 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 336
MOBILITY Coolant
3. Open the coolant reservoir lid. 4. The coolant level is correct if it lies between the minimum and maximum marks in the filler neck.
Adding 1. Let the engine cool. 2. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly counterclockwise to allow any excess pres‐ sure to dissipate, then open it. 3. Open the coolant reservoir lid. 4. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up to the specified level; do not overfill. 5. Close the cap. 6. Have the cause of the coolant loss eliminated as soon as possible.
Disposal
Comply with the relevant environmental protection regulations when disposing of coolant and coolant additives.
336 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 337
Maintenance MOBILITY
Maintenance
Vehicle features and General information options Information on service requirements, refer to page 146, can be displayed on the Control Dis‐ play. This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ cific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily Service data in the remote available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected control options or country versions. This also applies to Information on the required maintenance is con‐ safety-related functions and systems. When us‐ tinuously stored in the remote control. The deal‐ ing these functions and systems, the applicable er’s service center can read this data out and laws and regulations must be observed. suggest a maintenance scope for the vehicle. Therefore, hand the service advisor the remote control with which the vehicle was driven most BMW maintenance system recently.
The maintenance system indicates required maintenance measures, and thereby provides Storage periods support in maintaining road safety and the opera‐ Storage periods during which the vehicle battery tional reliability of the vehicle. was disconnected are not taken into account. In some cases, scopes and intervals of the main‐ If this occurs, have a dealer's service center or tenance system may vary according to the coun‐ another qualified service center or repair shop try version. Replacement work, spare parts, fuels update the time-dependent maintenance proce‐ and lubricants, and wear materials are calculated dures, such as checking brake fluid and, if neces‐ separately. Further information is available from a sary, changing the engine oil and the microfilter/ dealer’s service center or another qualified serv‐ activated-charcoal filter. ice center or repair shop. Service and Warranty Condition Based Service Information Booklet for US CBS models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Concept Canadian models Sensors and special algorithms take into account the driving conditions of the vehicle. CBS uses Please consult your Service and Warranty Infor‐ these to calculate the need for maintenance. mation Booklet for US models and Warranty and The system makes it possible to adapt the Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models for amount of maintenance corresponding to your additional information on service requirements. user profile. The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that maintenance and repair be performed by a dealer’s service center or another qualified serv‐
337 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 338
MOBILITY Maintenance
ice center or repair shop. Records of regular Position maintenance and repair work should be retained.
Socket for OBD Onboard Diagnosis
General information Devices connected to the OBD socket trigger the alarm system when the vehicle is locked. Re‐ move any devices connected at the OBD socket There is an OBD socket on the driver's side for before locking the vehicle. checking the primary components in the vehi‐ cle's emissions. Safety information Emissions NOTICE ▷ The warning light lights up: The socket for Onboard Diagnosis is an intri‐ Emissions are deteriorating. Have the cate component intended to be used in con‐ vehicle checked as soon as possible. junction with specialized equipment to check ▷ The warning light flashes under certain cir‐ the vehicle’s primary emissions system. Im‐ cumstances: proper use of the socket for Onboard Diagno‐ sis, or contact with the socket for Onboard Di‐ This indicates that there is excessive misfiring agnosis for other than its intended purpose, in the engine. can cause vehicle malfunctions and creates Reduce the vehicle speed and have the sys‐ risks of personal and property damage. Given tem checked immediately; otherwise, serious the foregoing, the manufacture of your vehicle engine misfiring within a brief period can seri‐ strongly recommends that access to the socket ously damage emission control components, for Onboard Diagnosis be limited to a dealer's in particular the catalytic converter. service center or another qualified service cen‐ ter or repair shop or other persons that have the specialized training and equipment for pur‐ poses of properly utilizing the socket for On‐ board Diagnosis.
338 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 339
Replacing components MOBILITY
Replacing components
Vehicle features and NOTICE options Folded-away wipers can be jammed when the hood is opened. There is a risk of damage to This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ property. Make sure that the wipers with the cific and optional features offered with the series. wiper blades mounted are folded down onto It also describes features that are not necessarily the windshield before opening the hood. available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When us‐ Replacing the front wiper blades ing these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed. 1. To change the wiper blades, fold up the wiper arms, refer to page 130. 2. Lift the wiper all the way off of the windshield. Onboard vehicle tool kit
3. Press button, arrow 1, and pull out the wiper blade, arrow 2. The onboard vehicle tool kit is located in the left storage compartment of the cargo area.
Wiper blades
Safety information
NOTICE 4. Insert the new wiper blade and press it on un‐ The window may sustain damage if the wiper til it you hear it snap into the holder. falls onto it without the wiper blade installed. There is a risk of damage to property. Hold the 5. Fold down the wipers. wiper firmly when changing the wiper blade. Do not fold or switch on the wiper without a wiper blade installed.
339 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 340
MOBILITY Replacing components
Lights and bulbs WARNING General information Work on switched-on lighting systems can cause short circuits. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. When working on Lights and bulbs the lighting system, switch off the lights in Lights and bulbs make an essential contribution question. If necessary, heed the bulb manufac‐ to vehicle safety. turer's instructions. Some items of equipment use light-emitting di‐ odes installed behind a cover as a light source. These light-emitting diodes are related to con‐ WARNING ventional lasers and are officially designated as Intensive brightness can irritate or damage the Class 1 light-emitting diodes. retina of the eye. There is a risk of injury. Do not The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends look directly into the headlights or other light that you let a dealer’s service center or another sources. Do not remove the LED covers. qualified service center or repair shop perform the work in case of a malfunction. A spare light box is available from a dealer’s serv‐ NOTICE ice center or another qualified service center or Dirty bulbs have a reduced service life. There is repair shop. a risk of damage to property. Do not hold new Follow the safety information, refer to page 340. bulbs with your bare hands. Use a clean cloth or something similar, or hold the bulb by its Headlight glass base. Condensation can form on the inside of the headlight glass in cool or humid weather. When driving with the lights switched on, the conden‐ Front lights sation evaporates after a short time. The head‐ light glass does not need to be changed. Adaptive LED headlights If despite driving with the headlights switched on, Follow the safety information, refer to page 340. increasing humidity forms, for instance water All lights feature LED technology. droplets in the light, have the headlights In the case of a malfunction, contact a dealer’s checked. service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. Safety information LED headlights WARNING General information Bulbs can get hot during operation. Contact with the bulbs can cause burns. There is a risk Follow the safety information, refer to page 340. of injury. Only change bulbs after they have All front lights are designed with LED technol‐ cooled off. ogy, with the exception of the two turn signals. In the case of a malfunction, contact a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.
340 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 341
Replacing components MOBILITY
Turn signal, bulb replacement Tail lights Follow the safety information, refer to page 340. 21-watt bulb, PY21W General information Follow the safety information, refer to page 340. 1. In the wheel house, press the two retainer tabs and fold down the cover. All tail lights are designed with LED technology, with the exception of the two reversing lights in the tailgate. In the case of a malfunction, contact a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.
Reversing light, bulb replacement
General information Follow the safety information, refer to page 340. 2. Unscrew the bulb holder. 21-watt bulb, H21W.
Without a warning triangle: removing the panel 1. Opening tailgate. 2. Press the latch, arrow 1, and remove the panel, arrow 2.
3. Press the bulb gently into the bulb holder, turn counterclockwise and remove it. 4. Insert the new bulb. 5. Mount the bulb holder. 6. Mount the lid.
LED front fog lights Follow the safety information, refer to page 340. With a warning triangle: removing the LED front fog lights are made using LED tech‐ holder nology. 1. Opening tailgate. In the case of a malfunction, contact a dealer’s 2. Remove, refer to page 346, the warning tri‐ service center or another qualified service center angle. or repair shop. 3. Press both retainer tabs in the direction of the arrows, arrows 1, using the screwdriver from
341 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 342
MOBILITY Replacing components
the onboard vehicle tool kit and remove the 3. Carefully lift off the hinge cover from the holder of the warning triangle, arrow 2. hinge arm, arrow 1, until the holding pin, ar‐ row 2, behind the trim panel is released.
Removing the hinge covers 4. Pull the hinge cover downward and remove. 1. Open the two clamps on the hinge cover. 5. Remove the second hinge cover in the same way.
Removing the interior trim 1. Carefully pry out all eight expanding rivets us‐ ing the screwdriver. Remove the expanding rivets as described above.
2. On the expanding rivet, carefully pry out the inside pin by a small distance using a screw‐ driver. Then carefully pry out the expanding rivet all the way using the screwdriver.
2. Reach into the handle recess on one side and carefully pull the interior trim downward, ar‐ row 1, to the point where the two holding pins, arrows 2, behind the interior trim are re‐ leased.
342 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 343
Replacing components MOBILITY
3. Proceed accordingly on the other side. Installing the interior trim 4. Carefully release the interior trim from the 1. Connect the cable to the switch unit, if nec‐ tailgate, arrow 1, and, if necessary, pull the essary. Make sure that the plug engages. cable with the plug from the switch unit, ar‐ 2. Position the interior trim on the tailgate and row 2. secure it with two expanding rivets.
5. Remove the interior trim. 3. Press against the interior trim, arrows, so that the four holding pins engage in the tailgate. Replacing the reversing light 1. Turn the bulb holder in the direction indicated on the reflector and remove it.
4. Fasten the interior trim using the remaining expanding rivets and press the pins into the expanding rivets. 2. Press the bulb gently into the bulb holder, 5. Attach one side of the hinge cover on the in‐ turn counterclockwise and remove it. terior trim, arrow 1, and fold the hinge cover 3. Mount the bulb holder. onto the hinge arm, arrow 2.
6. Fasten the hinge cover using the expanding rivet, arrow 1, and press onto the hinge cover
343 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 344
MOBILITY Replacing components
so that the holding pin engages in the tail‐ Safety information gate, arrow 2.
NOTICE Vehicle batteries that are not compatible can damage vehicle systems and impair vehicle functions. There is a risk of personal and prop‐ erty damage. Only vehicle batteries that are compatible with your vehicle type should be in‐ stalled in your vehicle. Information on compati‐ ble vehicle batteries is available at your dealer’s service center. 7. Close the clamps on the hinge cover. 8. Attach the other hinge cover accordingly. 9. Fasten the holder for the warning triangle and Charging the battery attach the warning triangle or mount the panel. General information Make sure that the battery is always sufficiently charged to guarantee that the battery remains Vehicle battery usable for its full service life. A discharged battery is indicated by a red General information indicator light. The battery is maintenance-free. The battery may need to be charged in the fol‐ The added amount of acid is sufficient for the lowing cases: service life of the battery. ▷ When making frequent short-distance drives. More information about the battery can be re‐ ▷ If the vehicle is not used for more than a quested from a dealer’s service center or another month. qualified service center or repair shop. The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends Safety information that you have a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop register the vehicle battery to the vehicle after the battery NOTICE has been replaced. Once the battery has been Battery chargers for the vehicle battery can registered again, all comfort features will be avail‐ work with high voltages and currents, which able without restriction and any Check Control means that the 12 volt on-board network can messages displayed which relate to comfort fea‐ be overloaded or damaged. There is a risk of tures will disappear. damage to property. Only connect battery chargers for the vehicle battery to the starting aid terminals in the engine compartment.
344 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 345
Replacing components MOBILITY
Starting aid terminals Accessing the fuses In the vehicle, only charge the battery via the starting aid terminals, refer to page 349, in the engine compartment with the engine off.
Power failure After a power loss, some equipment needs to be newly initialized or individual settings updated, for example: ▷ Memory function: store the positions again. ▷ Time: update. Remove the cover on the right side trim. ▷ Date: update. Information on the fuse types and locations, as ▷ Glass sunroof: initialize the system. well as the positions of any other fuse boxes, is found on a separate sheet in the fuse box. Disposing of old batteries Replacing fuses Have old batteries disposed of by a deal‐ er’s service center or another qualified The vehicle manufacturer recommends that you service center or repair shop or take have a dealer's service center or another quali‐ them to a collection point. fied service center or repair shop replace the fuses. Maintain the battery in an upright position for transport and storage. Secure the battery so that it does not tip over during transport.
Fuses
Safety information
WARNING Incorrect and repaired fuses can overload elec‐ trical lines and components. There is a risk of fire. Never attempt to repair a blown fuse. Do not replace a nonworking fuse with a substitute of another color or amperage rating.
345 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 346
MOBILITY Breakdown assistance
Breakdown assistance
Vehicle features and Warning triangle options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ cific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When us‐ ing these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed. The warning triangle is located on the inside of the tailgate. Hazard warning flashers Press on the release, arrow 1, and swivel the cover down, arrow 2.
First-aid kit
General information Some of the articles have a limited service life. Check the expiration dates of the contents regu‐ larly and replace any expired items promptly. The button is located in the center console. The red light in the button flashes when the haz‐ Storage ard warning flashers are activated. The first-aid kit is located in the net on the left side of the cargo area.
BMW Roadside Assistance
Concept Contact the BMW Group Roadside Assistance if assistance is needed in the event of a break‐ down.
346 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 347
Breakdown assistance MOBILITY
General information You can launch Teleservice Help by requesting it through the Service Specialist. In the event of a breakdown, data on the vehi‐ cle's condition is sent directly to the manufac‐ 1. Park the vehicle in a safe place. turer of your vehicle. 2. Set the parking brake. Contact can also be made via a Check Control 3. Control Display is switched on. message, refer to page 143. 4. "Teleservice Help" Requirements The driving ability of the vehicle can be restored for specific functions. ▷ Active ConnectedDrive contract, equipment version with Intelligent emergency call or If this is not possible, further measures will be ini‐ BMW ConnectedDrive services. tiated, for instance Roadside Assistance will be informed. ▷ Cellular network reception. ▷ Standby state is switched on. BMW Accident Assistance Starting Roadside Assistance If the vehicle is equipped with Teleservices, sup‐ Concept port is offered through Teleservice Diagnosis. BMW Group Accident Assistance can be con‐ Via iDrive: tacted if assistance is needed in the event of an 1. "ConnectedDrive" accident. 2. "BMW Assist" General information 3. "BMW Roadside Assistance" If the vehicle sensors detect a minor to moder‐ The contact to the Roadside Assistance of ately severe accident, which did not trigger any the manufacture is established. airbags, a Check Control message appears on A telephone number is displayed, if needed. the instrument cluster. In addition, a text mes‐ Select to dial the telephone number on a sage appears on the Control Display. connected mobile phone. When BMW Accident Assistance is activated, data on the vehicle's condition is sent to BMW. Teleservice Diagnosis Teleservice Diagnosis enables the wireless Requirements transmission of detailed vehicle data that is im‐ ▷ Active ConnectedDrive contract, equipment portant for vehicle diagnosis. This data is trans‐ version with Intelligent emergency call or mitted automatically. BMW ConnectedDrive services. Starting Teleservice Help ▷ Cellular network reception. ▷ Standby state is switched on. Depending on the country, the Teleservice Help enables a more in-depth diagnosis of the vehicle via wireless transmission.
347 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 348
MOBILITY Breakdown assistance
Starting BMW Accident For technical reasons, the Emergency Request Assistance cannot be guaranteed under unfavorable condi‐ tions. If an accident is detected Overview automatically A text message relating to BMW Accident Assis‐ tance appears on the Control Display. The connection can be established directly: "BMW Accident Assist." The Check Control message for BMW Accident Assistance can also be called up from the stored Check Control messages, refer to page 143, for a certain length of time. SOS button in the roofliner. Starting manually BMW Accident Assistance can also be con‐ tacted independently of the automatic accident detection function. Via iDrive: Functional requirements 1. "ConnectedDrive" ▷ Standby state is switched on. 2. "BMW Assist" ▷ The Assist system is functional. 3. "BMW Accident Assistance" ▷ If the vehicle is equipped with intelligent Follow the displays on the Control Display. A emergency call: the SIM card integrated in voice connection is established. the vehicle has been activated. 4. "End call" The voice connection can be terminated. Automatic triggering Under certain conditions, for instance if the air‐ bags trigger, an Emergency Request is automati‐ Emergency Request cally initiated immediately after an accident of corresponding severity. Automatic Collision Noti‐ Intelligent emergency call fication is not affected by pressing the SOS but‐ ton. Concept Manual triggering In case of an emergency, an Emergency Re‐ quest can be triggered automatically by the sys‐ 1. Touch the cover. tem or manually. 2. Press and hold the SOS button until the LED in the area of the button illuminates green. General information ▷ The LED is illuminated green when an Emer‐ Only press the SOS button in an emergency. gency Request has been initiated. The Intelligent Assist system establishes a con‐ nection with the BMW Response Center.
348 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 349
Breakdown assistance MOBILITY
If a cancel prompt appears on the Control Display, the Emergency Request can be WARNING aborted. If the jumper cables are connected in the incor‐ If the situation allows, wait in your vehicle until rect order, sparking may occur. There is a risk the voice connection has been established. of injury. Pay attention to the correct order dur‐ ▷ The LED flashes green when a connection to ing connection. the BMW Response Center has been estab‐ lished. The BMW Response Center then makes NOTICE contact with you and takes further steps to In the case of body contact between the two help you. vehicles, a short circuit can occur during jump- Even if you are unable to respond, the BMW starting. There is a risk of damage to property. Response Center can take further steps to Make sure that no body contact occurs. help you under certain circumstances. For this, data is transmitted to the BMW Re‐ sponse Center which serves to determine the Preparation necessary rescue measures. E.g., the current 1. Check whether the battery of the other vehi‐ position of the vehicle, if it can be established. cle has a voltage of 12 volts. The voltage in‐ formation can be found on the battery. Even if you can no longer hear the BMW Re‐ sponse Center through the loudspeakers, the 2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehicle. BMW Response Center may still be able to 3. Switch off any electronic systems/power con‐ hear you. sumers in both vehicles. The BMW Response Center ends the Emer‐ gency Request. Starting aid terminals
Jump-starting
General information If the battery is discharged, the engine can be started using the battery of another vehicle and two jumper cables. Only use jumper cables with fully insulated clamp handles. The starting aid terminal in the engine compart‐ Safety information ment acts as the battery's positive terminal. Open the cover of the starting aid terminal. DANGER Contact with live components can lead to an electric shock. There is a risk of injuries or dan‐ ger to life. Do not touch any components that are under voltage.
349 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 350
MOBILITY Breakdown assistance
If the vehicle to be started has a diesel en‐ gine: let the engine of the assisting vehicle run for approx. 10 minutes. 2. Start the engine of the vehicle that is to be started in the usual way. If the first starting attempt is not successful, wait a few minutes before making another at‐ tempt in order to allow the discharged battery to recharge. A special nut serves as the negative terminal of 3. Let both engines run for several minutes. the battery. 4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the reverse order. Connecting the cables Check the battery and recharge, if needed. Before you begin, switch off all unnecessary electronic systems/power consumers, such as the radio, on the assisting and receiving vehicle. Tow-starting and towing 1. Open the cover of the starting aid terminal. 2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive Safety information jumper cable to the positive terminal of the battery, or to the corresponding starting aid WARNING terminal of the vehicle providing assistance. Due to system limits, individual functions can 3. Attach the terminal clamp on the other end of malfunction during tow-starting/towing with the the cable to the positive terminal of the bat‐ Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a tery, or to the corresponding starting aid ter‐ risk of an accident. Switch all Intelligent Safety minal of the vehicle to be started. systems off prior to tow-starting/towing. 4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative jumper cable to the negative terminal of the battery, or to the corresponding engine or Steptronic transmission: body ground of assisting vehicle. transporting the vehicle 5. Attach the second terminal clamp to the neg‐ ative terminal of the battery, or to the corre‐ General information sponding engine or body ground of the vehi‐ The vehicle is not permitted to be towed. cle to be started. Safety information Starting the engine Never use spray fluids to start the engine. NOTICE 1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle and The vehicle can be damaged when towing the let it run for several minutes at an increased vehicle with a single lifted axle. There is a risk of idle speed. damage to property. The vehicle should only be transported on a loading platform.
350 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 351
Breakdown assistance MOBILITY
Safety information NOTICE The vehicle can become damaged when lifting WARNING and securing it. If the approved gross vehicle weight of the tow‐ There is a risk of damage to property. ing vehicle is lighter than the vehicle to be ▷ Lift the vehicle using suitable means. towed, the tow fitting can tear off or it will not ▷ Do not lift or secure the vehicle by its tow be possible to control the vehicle's response. fitting, body parts, or suspension parts. There is a risk of an accident. Make sure that the gross vehicle weight of the towing vehicle is heavier than the vehicle to be towed. Pushing the vehicle To remove a broken-down vehicle from the dan‐ ger area, it can be pushed for a short distance. NOTICE Roll or push, refer to page 133, the vehicle. If the tow bar or tow rope is attached incor‐ rectly, damage to other vehicle parts can occur. Tow truck There is a risk of damage to property. Correctly attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow fitting.
Tow bar The tow fittings used should be on the same side on both vehicles. Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting the tow bar at an offset angle, please follow the fol‐ lowing: The vehicle should only be transported on a ▷ Maneuvering capability is limited going loading platform. around corners. ▷ The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it is Towing other vehicles secured with an offset.
General information Tow rope When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure that Switch on the hazard warning system, depend‐ the tow rope is taut. ing on local regulations. Use nylon ropes or straps, which will enable the If the electrical system has failed, clearly identify vehicle to be towed without jerking. the vehicle being towed by placing a sign or a warning triangle in the rear window.
351 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 352
MOBILITY Breakdown assistance
Tow fitting Screw thread for tow fitting
General information
Press on the mark on the edge of the cover to push it out. The screw-in tow fitting should always be carried in the vehicle. Tow-starting The tow fitting can be screwed in at the front or Do not tow-start the vehicle. rear of the vehicle. Start the engine by jump-starting, refer to The tow fitting is found in the onboard vehicle page 349, if possible. tool kit, refer to page 339. Have the reasons for the starting difficulties cor‐ ▷ Use only the tow fitting provided with the ve‐ rected by a dealer’s service center or another hicle and screw it all the way in. qualified service center or repair shop. ▷ Use the tow fitting for towing on paved roads only. ▷ Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, for in‐ stance do not lift the vehicle by the tow fit‐ ting.
Safety information
NOTICE If the tow fitting is not used as intended, there may be damage to the vehicle or to the tow fit‐ ting. There is a risk of damage to property. Fol‐ low the notes on using the tow fitting.
352 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 353
Care MOBILITY
Care
Vehicle features and Distances and temperature options ▷ Maximum temperature: 140 ℉/60 ℃. ▷ Minimum distance from sensors, cameras, This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ seals: 12 in/30 cm. cific and optional features offered with the series. ▷ Minimum distance from glass sunroof: It also describes features that are not necessarily 31.5 in/80 cm. available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to Automatic vehicle washes safety-related functions and systems. When us‐ ing these functions and systems, the applicable Safety information laws and regulations must be observed.
NOTICE Washing the vehicle Improper use of automatic vehicle washes can cause damage to the vehicle. There is a risk of General information damage to property. Follow the following in‐ structions: Regularly remove foreign objects such as leaves in the area below the windshield when the hood ▷ Give preference to cloth vehicle washes or is raised. those that use soft brushes in order to avoid paint damage. Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in win‐ ter. Intense soiling and road salt can damage the ▷ Avoid vehicle washes with guide rails vehicle. higher than 4 in/10 cm to avoid damage to the chassis. Steam blaster and high-pressure ▷ Observe the tire width of the guide rail to washer avoid damage to tires and rims. ▷ Fold in exterior mirrors to avoid damage to Safety information the exterior mirrors. ▷ Deactivate the wiper and, if necessary, rain sensor to avoid damage to the wiper sys‐ NOTICE tem. When cleaning with high-pressure washers, components can be damaged due to the pres‐ sure or temperatures being too high. There is a risk of damage to property. Maintain sufficient distance and do not spray too long continu‐ ously. Follow the operating instructions for the high-pressure washer.
353 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 354
MOBILITY Care
Driving into a vehicle wash with a Completely remove all residues on the windows, Steptronic transmission to minimize loss of visibility due to smearing and to reduce wiper noises and wiper blade wear. Safety information Vehicle care NOTICE Selector lever position P is automatically en‐ Vehicle care products gaged when standby state is switched off. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not General information switch standby state off in vehicle washes. BMW recommends using vehicle care and cleaning products from BMW. Suitable care General information products are available from a dealer’s service In a vehicle wash, the vehicle must be able to roll center or another qualified service center or re‐ freely. pair shop. Roll or push the vehicle, refer to page 133. Safety information Some vehicle washes do not permit persons in the vehicle. The vehicle cannot be locked from the outside when in selector lever position N. A WARNING signal sounds when an attempt is made to lock Cleansers can contain substances that are dan‐ the vehicle. gerous and harmful to your health. There is a risk of injury. When cleaning the interior, open Driving out of a vehicle wash the doors or windows. Only use products in‐ Make sure that the remote control is in the vehi‐ tended for cleaning vehicles. Follow the in‐ cle. structions on the container. Switch on drive-ready state, refer to page 120. Vehicle paint Headlights Do not rub wet headlights dry and do not use General information abrasive or acidic cleaning agents. Regular care contributes to driving safety and Soak areas that have been dirtied, for instance value retention. Environmental influences in from insects, with shampoo and wash off with areas with elevated air pollution or natural con‐ water. taminants, such as tree resin or pollen can affect Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an ice the vehicle's paintwork. Tailor the frequency and scraper. extent of your vehicle care to these influences. Aggressive substances such as spilled fuel, oil, After washing the vehicle grease or bird droppings, must be removed im‐ After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes mediately to prevent the finish from being altered briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action can or discolored. be reduced. The heat generated during braking dries brake discs and brake pads and protects them against corrosion.
354 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 355
Care MOBILITY
Safety information Clean the upholstery down to the seams using large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the ma‐ terial vigorously. WARNING Improperly performed work on the vehicle paint Safety information can lead to a failure or malfunction of the radar sensors and thereby result in a safety risk. There is a risk of accidents or risk of damage to NOTICE property. Have paintwork or paintwork repairs Open Velcro® fasteners on articles of clothing on bumpers of vehicles with radar sensors per‐ can damage the seat covers. There is a risk of formed by a dealer’s service center or another damage to property. Ensure that any Velcro® qualified service center or repair shop only. fasteners are closed.
Matte finish Caring for special components Only use cleaning and care products suitable for vehicles with matte finish. Light-alloy wheels When cleaning the vehicle, use only neutral Leather care wheel cleaners having a pH value from 5 to 9. Do Remove dust from the leather regularly, using a not use abrasive cleaning agents or steam jets cloth or vacuum cleaner. above 140 ℉/60 ℃. Follow the manufacturer's instructions. Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime chafe in pores and folds, and lead to increased wear Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning agents can and premature degradation of the leather sur‐ destroy the protective layer of adjacent compo‐ face. nents, such as the brake disc. To guard against discoloration, such as from After cleaning, apply the brakes briefly to dry clothing, clean leather and provide leather care them. The heat generated during braking dries roughly every two months. brake discs and brake pads and protects them against corrosion. Clean light-colored leather more frequently be‐ cause soiling on such surfaces is substantially Chrome surfaces more visible. Carefully clean components such as the radiator Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and grille or door handles with an ample supply of grease will gradually break down the protective water, possibly with shampoo added, particularly layer of the leather surface. when they have been exposed to road salt.
Upholstery material care Rubber components General information Environmental influences can cause surface soil‐ ing of rubber parts and a loss of gloss. Use only Vacuum the upholstery regularly with a vacuum water and suitable cleaning agents for cleaning. cleaner. Treat especially worn rubber parts with rubber If upholstery is very dirty, for instance with bever‐ care agents at regular intervals. When cleaning age stains, use a soft sponge or microfiber cloth rubber seals, do not use any silicon-containing with a suitable interior cleaner. vehicle care products in order to avoid damage or noises.
355 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 356
MOBILITY Care
Fine wood parts Use only a mild soapy solution for cleaning the Clean fine wood facing and fine wood compo‐ installed belt straps. nents only with a moist rag. Then dry with a soft Safety belts should only be allowed to retract if cloth. they are dry.
Kenaf Carpets and floor mats Only treat parts made of Kenaf fibers using suita‐ ble care products. WARNING Objects in the driver's floor area can limit the Plastic components pedal distance or block a depressed pedal. There is a risk of an accident. Stow objects in NOTICE the vehicle such that they are secured and can‐ not enter into the driver's floor area. Use floor Cleansers that contain alcohol or solvents, such mats that are suitable for the vehicle and can as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty grease remov‐ be safely attached to the floor. Do not use ers, fuel, or such, can damage plastic parts. loose floor mats and do not layer several floor There is a risk of damage to property. Clean mats. Make sure that there is sufficient clear‐ with a microfiber cloth. Dampen cloth lightly ance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats with water. are securely fastened again after they were re‐ moved, for instance for cleaning. Plastic components are e.g.:
▷ Imitation leather surfaces. The floor mats can be removed from the car's in‐ ▷ Roofliner. terior for cleaning. ▷ Light lenses. If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with a mi‐ ▷ Matt black spray-coated components. crofiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner. To prevent matting of the carpet, rub back and forth ▷ Painted parts in the car's interior. in the direction of travel only. Clean with a microfiber cloth. Dampen cloth lightly with water. Sensor/camera lenses Do not soak the roofliner. To clean sensors and camera lenses, use a cloth moistened with a small amount of glass deter‐ Safety belts gent.
Displays, screens, and protective WARNING glass of the Head-up Display Chemical cleansers can destroy the safety belt webbing. Missing protective effect of the safety belts. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. NOTICE Use only a mild soapy solution for cleaning the Chemical cleansers, moisture or fluids of any safety belts. kind can damage the surface of displays and screens. There is a risk of damage to property. Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth. thus have a negative impact on safety.
356 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 357
Care MOBILITY
NOTICE The surface of displays can be damaged with improper cleaning. There is a risk of damage to property. Avoid pressure that is too high and do not use any scratching materials.
Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth. Clean the protective glass of the Head-up Dis‐ play, refer to page 153, using a microfiber cloth and commercially available dish-washing soap.
Long-term vehicle storage When the vehicle is shut down for longer than three months, special measures must be taken. Further information is available from a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.
357 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18
358 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 REFERENCE
Technical data ...... 360 Appendix ...... 363 Everything from A to Z ...... 364
359 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 360
REFERENCE Technical data
Technical data
Vehicle features and It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected options options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When us‐ This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ ing these functions and systems, the applicable cific and optional features offered with the series. laws and regulations must be observed.
General information
The technical data and specifications in this urement method. Detailed values can be found in Owner's Manual are used as guidance values. the approval documents, on labels on the vehicle The vehicle-specific data can deviate from this, or can be obtained from a dealer’s service center for instance due to the selected special equip‐ or another qualified service center or repair shop. ment, country version or country-specific meas‐
Dimensions
The dimensions can vary depending on the racks or spoiler. The heights can deviate, for in‐ model version, equipment or country-specific stance due to the selected special equipment, measurement method. tires, load and chassis version. The specified heights do not take into account attached parts, for instance a roof antenna, roof
BMW 5 Series Sedan
Width with mirrors inches/mm 83.7/2,126
Width without mirrors inches/mm 73.5/1,868
Height inches/mm 57.8-58.2/1,467-1,479
Length inches/mm 194.6-195.4/4,943-4,962
Wheelbase inches/mm 117.1/2,975
Smallest turning radius diam. ft/m 39.6-40.2/12.1-12.2
360 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 361
Technical data REFERENCE
Weights
530i
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 4,850/2,200
Load lbs/kg 838/380
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,315/1,050
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,745/1,245
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 220/100
540i
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 5,060/2,295
Load lbs/kg 838/380
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,480/1,125
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,736/1,241
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 220/100
530i xDrive
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 4,976/2,257
Load lbs/kg 827/375
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,425/1,100
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,756/1,250
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 220/100
540i xDrive
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 5,181/2,350
Load lbs/kg 838/380
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,590/1,175
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,756/1,250
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 220/100
361 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 362
REFERENCE Technical data
M550i xDrive powered by BMW M
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 5,430/2,463
Load lbs/kg 893/405
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,756/1,250
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,811/1,275
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 220/100
540d xDrive
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 5,313/2,410
Load lbs/kg 827/375
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,623/1,190
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,824/1,281
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 220/100
Capacities
BMW 5 Series Sedan US gal/liters Notes
Fuel tank, approx. Fuel quality, refer to page 290. Gasoline 17.9/68.0 Diesel 17.4/66.0
362 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 363
Appendix REFERENCE
Appendix
Any updates to the Owner's Manual of the vehi‐ cle are listed here.
Updates made after the editorial deadline
These chapters of the printed Owner's Manual contain updates made after the editorial dead‐ line. ▷ Information: Data storage, refer to page 11. ▷ Remote Control: General, refer to page 74 ▷ Driving assist systems: Steering and lane control assistant, Lane change assistant, refer to page 211. ▷ Saving fuel. ▷ Breakdown assistance: Emergency Request: Intelligent Emergency Call, refer to page 348.
363 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 364
REFERENCE Everything from A to Z
Everything from A to Z
Index
A Air flow, automatic climate control 243 Air outlets, see Ventilation 244 ABS, Antilock Brake System 195 Air pressure, tires 296 Acceleration Assistant, see Launch Control 136 Alarm system 94 Accessories and parts 10 Alarm, unintentional 95 Accident Assistance 347 Alertness assistant 193 Accident prevention, see Active Protection 192 All-season tires, see Winter tires 306 ACC, see Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go All-wheel-drive, see xDrive 197 function 201 Ambient air package 249 Activated-charcoal filter 244 Ambient light 161 Active Blind Spot Detection 184 Animal detection, see Night Vision 177 Active comfort suspension, see Adaptive Antifreeze, see Washer fluid 130 Drive 238 Antilock Brake System, ABS 195 Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go function, Anti-slip control, see DSC 195 ACC 201 Anti-theft protection, locking 75 Active damping control, see Adaptive chas‐ Anti-theft protection, see Lug bolt lock 323 sis 238 Apple CarPlay, connection to the vehicle 66 Active Guard, see Intelligent Safety 167 Approach control warning with City light braking Active PDC, see Emergency brake function 214 function 168 Active Protection 192 Approach control warning with light braking func‐ Active roll stabilization 238 tion 168 Active seat ventilation 113 Approved axle load 361 Active sport chassis/suspension, see M Dynamic Approved total weight 361 Professional 239 Apps, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, En‐ Active Steering, integral 198 tertainment, Communication 8 Adaptive brake assistant 195 Ashtray 256 Adaptive chassis 238 Ashtray, front 256 Adaptive Drive 238 Assistance when driving off, see Drive-off assis‐ Adaptive Light Control 158 tant 195 Adaptive M chassis 239 Assistance with breakdown 346 ADAPTIVE, see Driving Dynamics Control 136 AUC Automatic Recirculating Air Control 242 Additives, engine oil types 333 Audio, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, En‐ After run of fan, see Exhaust gas particulate fil‐ tertainment and Communication 8 ter 275 AUTO H button, see Parking brake 124 Airbags 163 Automatic activation, see Individual activa‐ Airbags, indicator and warning light 165 tion 113 Air circulation, see Recirculated-air mode 243 Automatic climate control 240 Air conditioning 241 Automatic cruise control with Stop&Go func‐ Air, dehumidifying, see Air conditioning 241 tion 201 Air distribution, manual 243 Automatic Curb Monitor, exterior mirror 109
364 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 365
Everything from A to Z REFERENCE
Automatic deactivation, front-seat passenger air‐ Bottle holder, see Cup holders 262 bags 165 Brake assistant 195 Automatic headlight control 157 Brake assistant, adaptive 195 Automatic Hold, see Parking brake 124 Brake discs, breaking in, see Brake system 274 Automatic locking 93 Brake lights, see Lights and bulbs 340 Automatic Recirculating Air Control AUC 242 Brake pads, breaking in, see Brake system 274 Automatic Soft Closing 90 Brake system 274 Automatic transmission, see Steptronic trans‐ Braking, information 276 mission 131 Breakdown assistance 346 Automatic unlocking 93 Breakdown, see FTM Flat Tire Monitor 319 Automatic vehicle wash 353 Break-in 274 AUTO program, automatic climate control 242 Brightness, Control Display 59 AUTO program, intensity 242 Bulb replacement, see Lights and bulbs 340 Auto Start/Stop function 121 Bulbs, replacing, see Lights and bulbs 340 Average speed and average fuel consump‐ Buttons on the steering wheel 34 tion 151 Button, SOS, see Intelligent emergency call 348 Axle loads, weights 361 Button, Start/Stop 120 Bypassing, see Jump-starting 349 B C Backrest curvature, see Lumbar support 103 Backrest, seats 101 Cable for tow-starting/towing 351 Backrest tilt 102 Calendar, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Backrest, width 103 Entertainment, Communication 8 Bandages, see First-aid kit 346 California Proposition 65 Warning 10 Bar for tow-starting/towing 351 Calling up mirror adjustment 93 Battery, changing, remote control of the vehi‐ Calling up seat adjustment 93 cle 77 Calling up steering wheel adjustment 93 Battery, disposing of 345 Camera-based assistance systems, see Intelli‐ Battery, vehicle 344 gent Safety 167 Being towed, see Tow-starting and towing 350 Camera-based cruise control, see Active Cruise Belts, see Safety belts 104 Control with Stop&Go function 201 Beverage holder, see Cup holders 262 Camera lenses, care 356 Biodiesel 291 Camera, rearview camera, without Surround Blocking, power window, see Safety switch 97 View 217 Bluetooth connection 62 Camera, see Surround View 219 Blu-ray, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Can holder, see Cup holders 262 Entertainment, Communication 8 Care, Head-up Display 356 BMW Advanced Diesel 292 Care of displays, screens 356 BMW Assist, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Care, see Washing the vehicle 353 Entertainment and Communication 8 Care, vehicle 354 BMW display key 78 Cargo area 265 BMW display key, malfunction 81 Cargo area, enlarging 267 BMW Gesture Control 51 Cargo area, enlarging with an emergency BMW maintenance system 337 wheel 269 Bonus range, ECO PRO 282
365 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 366
REFERENCE Everything from A to Z
Cargo area, loading, see Stowing and securing Cigarette lighter, front 257 cargo 266 Cigarette lighter, rear 257 Cargo area, storage compartments 266 Cleaning displays, screens 356 Cargo, stowing and securing 266 Cleaning, Head-up Display 356 Cargo straps, see Lashing eyes in the cargo Climate control 240 area 266 Clothes hooks 264 Carpet, care 356 Coasting 283 CarPlay, connection to the vehicle 66 Coasting with engine decoupled, see Coast‐ Car seats, see Transporting children safely 115 ing 283 Cartridge replacement, see Ambient air pack‐ Coasting with idling engine 283 age 249 Cold starting, see Starting the engine 120 Car wash 353 Combination switch, see Turn signals 127 Car washing 353 Combination switch, see Washer/wiper sys‐ Catalytic converter, see Hot exhaust gas sys‐ tem 128 tem 275 Comfort Access 84 CBS Condition Based Service 337 COMFORT, see Driving Dynamics Control 136 Cell phone, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Communication, see Owner's Manual for Naviga‐ Entertainment and Communication 8 tion, Entertainment and Communication 8 Center armrest 262 Compact wheel, see Emergency wheel 326 Center console 36 Comparison of entries, see Entry comparison 42 Central Information Display (CID), see Control Compartments in the doors 261 Display 44 Compatible devices, see Suitable devices 62 Central locking system 83 Compressor 308 Central screen, see Control Display 44 Computer, see Onboard Computer in the instru‐ Changes, technical, see For Your Own Safety 9 ment cluster 149 Changing parts 339 Concierge Service, see Owner's Handbook for Changing wheels 322 Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 8 Changing wheels/tires 305 Condensation, removing from the windows 244 Chassis number, see Vehicle identification num‐ Condensation water under the parked vehi‐ ber 14 cle 277 Check Control 140 Condition Based Service CBS 337 Checking the engine oil level electronically 331 Confirmation signal from the vehicle 93 Checking the oil level electronically 331 ConnectedDrive, see Owner's Manual for Navi‐ Children, seating position 115 gation, Entertainment and Communication 8 Children, transporting safely 115 Connecting device 61 Child restraint system LATCH 117 Connecting electrical devices, see Sockets 257 Child restraint systems, mounting 116 Connecting, mobile devices 61 Child restraint systems, see Transporting chil‐ Connecting mobile phone 61 dren safely 115 Connecting smartphone 61 Child safety locks 119 Connecting telephone 61 Child seat, mounting 116 Connections, Screen Mirroring 66 Child seats, see Transporting children Consumption, see Current consumption 151 safely 115 Contacts, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Chrome-plated surfaces, care 355 Entertainment, Communication 8 Chrome surfaces, care 355 Container for washer fluid 130 Cigarette lighter 256 Continued driving with a flat tire 318, 321
366 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 367
Everything from A to Z REFERENCE
Control Display 44 Departure time, parked-car ventilation 248 Control Display, settings 57 Destination distance, Onboard Computer 150 Controller 44, 45 Device list, displaying 67 Control systems, driving stability 195 Devices, managing 67 Convenient closing with the remote control 76 Diagnosis connection 338 Convenient opening with the remote control 75 Diesel exhaust fluid at low temperatures 292 Coolant 335 Diesel exhaust fluid, having refilled 292 Coolant level 335 Diesel exhaust fluid on minimum 292 Coolant temperature 145 Diesel exhaust fluid, see BMW Advanced Die‐ Cooling, maximum 242 sel 292 Cooling system 335 Diesel fuel 291 Cornering light 158 Diesel particulate filter, see Exhaust gas particu‐ Corrosion on brake discs 277 late filter 275 Cosmetic mirror 256 Digital clock 145 Crossing traffic warning 235 Dimensions 360 Cruise control 199 Dimmable exterior mirrors 109 Cruise control, active with Stop&Go func‐ Dimmable interior mirror 109 tion 201 Direct dial buttons, see Programmable memory Cruise control with distance control, see Active buttons 50 Cruise Control with Stop&Go function 201 Direction indicator, see Turn signals 127 Cruise control without distance control, see Display in the windshield, see Head-up Dis‐ Cruise control 199 play 153 Cruising range 145 Display key, malfunction 81 Cup holder 262 Display key, see BMW display key 78 Cup holder, front 263 Display lighting, see Instrument lighting 160 Cup holder, rear 263 Displays 139 Current consumption, Onboard Computer, con‐ Displays and symbols 8 sumption indicator, Onboard Computer 151 Displays, ECO PRO 282 Displays, screens 356 D Disposal, coolant 336 Disposal, vehicle battery 345 Damage, tires 304 Distance control, see PDC 212 Damping control, active, see Adaptive chas‐ Distance to destination, Onboard Computer 150 sis 238 Divided screen view, see Split screen 43 Data memory 11 Drive-off assistant 195 Data protection, settings 60 Drive-off assistant, see DSC 195 Data, see Deleting personal data in the vehi‐ Driver assistance, see Intelligent Safety 167 cle 60 Drive-ready state, idle state, and standby Data, technical 360 state 39 Date 58 Drive-ready state, see Starting the engine 120 Daytime running lights 158 Driver profiles 90 DCC, see Cruise control 199 Driver profiles, welcome screen 90 Defogging the windows 244 Driving Assistant, see Intelligent Safety 167 Defrosting the windows 244 Driving comfort 238 Dehumidifying, air 241 Driving Dynamics Control 136 Deleting personal data 60 Driving instructions, break-in 274
367 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 368
REFERENCE Everything from A to Z
Driving mode, ECO PRO 280 Engine idling when driving, see Coasting 283 Driving mode, see Driving Dynamics Con‐ Engine oil 331 trol 136 Engine oil, adding 332 Driving notes, general 275 Engine oil change 334 Driving on racetracks 278 Engine oil filler neck 332 Driving stability control systems 195 Engine oil temperature 145 Driving style analysis, ECO PRO 284 Engine oil types to add 333 Driving tips 275 Engine start, jump-starting 349 DSC Dynamic Stability Control 195 Engine start, see Drive-ready state 120 DTC Dynamic Traction Control 197 Engine stopping, see Drive-ready state 120 DVD, Video, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga‐ Engine temperature 145 tion, Entertainment, Communication 8 Entering a destination, see Owner's Handbook Dynamic damping, see Adaptive chassis 238 for Navigation, Entertainment, Communica‐ Dynamic Stability Control DSC 195 tion 8 Dynamic Traction Control DTC 197 Entering an address, navigation, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Com‐ E munication 8 Entertainment, see Owner's Manual for Naviga‐ ECO PRO 280 tion, Entertainment and Communication 8 ECO PRO bonus range 282 Entry comparison, navigation 42 ECO PRO displays 282 Equipment, interior 253 ECO PRO driving style analysis 284 Error displays, see Check Control 140 ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL, see Driving Dynamics ESP Electronic Stability Program, see DSC 195 Control 136 Evasion assistance 172 ECO PRO, see Driving Dynamics Control 136 Exchanging wheels/tires 305 Electric sunroof, glass 97 Exhaust gas particulate filter 275 Electronic oil measurement 331 Exhaust gas system 275 Electronic Stability Program ESP, see DSC 195 Exhaustion warner 193 E-mail, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Exhaust, see Exhaust gas system 275 Entertainment, Communication 8 Exterior lighting during unlocking 75 Emergency brake function when parking, Active Exterior lighting with the vehicle locked 76 PDC 214 Exterior mirror, Automatic Curb Monitor 109 Emergency service, see Accident Assis‐ Exterior mirror, automatic dimming feature 109 tance 347 Exterior mirrors 108 Emergency service, see Breakdown assis‐ Exterior mirrors, malfunction 109 tance 346 External start 349 Emergency unlocking, fuel filler flap 289 External temperature 145 Emergency unlocking, tailgate 89 Eyelet for towing 352 Emergency unlocking, transmission lock 135 Eyes, see Lashing eyes in the cargo area 266 Emergency wheel 326 Energy recovery, Onboard Computer 151 F Energy savings, see Gear shift indicator 147 Engine, automatic Start/Stop function 121 Failure message, see Check Control 140 Engine compartment 328 False alarm, see Avoiding unintentional Engine compartment, working in 329 alarms 95 Engine coolant 335
368 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 369
Everything from A to Z REFERENCE
Fan after run, see Exhaust gas particulate fil‐ Fuel filler flap, unlocking manually 289 ter 275 Fuel gauge 144 Fan, see Air flow 243 Fuel quality 290 Fastening safety belts, see Safety belts 104 Fuel recommendation 290 Filler neck for engine oil 332 Fuel, tank capacity 362 Finding charging stations, see Charging stations Fuses 345 and points of interest, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment, Communica‐ G tion 8 Fine wood parts, care 356 Garage door opener, see Integrated Universal First-aid kit 346 Remote Control 253 Flat tire, changing wheels 322 Gasoline 290 Flat tire, continued driving 318, 321 Gasoline particulate filter, see Exhaust gas partic‐ Flat tire message, FTM 320 ulate filter 275 Flat tire message, TPM 316 Gear change, Steptronic transmission 131 Flat Tire Monitor FTM 319 Gear shift indicator 147 Flat tire, repairing 307 General driving notes 275 Flat tire, see Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 313 General settings 57 Flat tire warning light, FTM 320 Gesture Control 51 Flat tire warning light, TPM 316 Gestures, see BMW Gesture Control 51 Flooding 276 Glare shield, see Sun visor 255 Floor carpet, care 356 Glass sunroof, electric 97 Floor mats, care 356 Glass sunroof, initialize the system 99 Fog, removing from the windows 244 Glove compartment 260 Fold-away position of the wipers 130 GPS geolocation, vehicle position 58 Fold back rear seat backrests 267 GPS, navigation, see Owner's Handbook for Foot brake 276 Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 8 For Your Own Safety 9 Fragrance cartridge, see Ambient air pack‐ H age 249 Fragrance, see Ambient air package 249 Handbrake, see Parking brake 124 Fragrancing, see Ambient air package 249 Hand-held transmitter, alternating code 254 Front airbags 163 Hands-free device, see Owner's Handbook for Front center armrest 262 Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 8 Front fog lights 160 Hazard warning flashers 346 Front fog lights, see Lights and bulbs 340 Head airbags 163 Front lights, see Lights and bulbs 340 Headlight control, automatic 157 Front-seat passenger airbags, automatic deacti‐ Headlight courtesy delay feature 157 vation 165 Headlight courtesy delay feature, switching Front-seat passenger airbags, indicator light 166 on 77 Front seats 101 Headlight flasher 127 FTM Flat Tire Monitor 319 Headlight glass 340 Fuel 290 Headlights, care 354 Fuel cap 288 Headlights, see Lights and bulbs 340 Fuel consumption display, ECO PRO 282 Head restraints, front 105 Fuel filler flap 288 Head restraints, rear 107
369 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 370
REFERENCE Everything from A to Z
Head-up Display 153 Inductive charging of a smartphone, see Wireless Head-up Display, care 356 charging tray, see Owner's Manual for Naviga‐ Head-up Display, see Memory function 111 tion, Entertainment, Communication 8 Head-up Display, standard view 154 Inflation pressure monitor, see Tire Pressure Heated steering wheel 110 Monitor TPM 313 Heated steering wheel, individual activation 113 Inflation pressure, tires 296 Heavy cargo, stowing cargo 266 Inflation pressure warning FTM, tires 319 Height, vehicle 360 Information 8 High-beam Assistant 158 Initialization, Flat Tire Monitor FTM 320 High beams 127 Initialize, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 315 High beams/low beams, see High-beam Assis‐ Instrument cluster 139 tant 158 Instrument lighting 160 Hills 276 Integral Active Steering 198 Hill start assistant, see Drive-off assistant 195 Integrated key 82 Holder for beverages, see Cup holders 262 Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle 70 HomeLink, see Integrated Universal Remote Integrated Universal Remote Control 253 Control 253 Intelligent Auto Start/Stop function 123 Homepage 8 Intelligent emergency call 348 Hood 329 Intelligent Safety 167 Horn 34 Intended use 9 Hotel function, tailgate, see Locking sepa‐ Intensity, AUTO program 242 rately 89 Interior equipment 253 Hot exhaust gas system 275 Interior lights 160 Hotline, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Interior lights during unlocking 75 Entertainment, Communication 8 Interior lights with the vehicle locked 76 Humidity in the headlight, see Headlight Interior mirror 108 glass 340 Interior mirror, automatic dimming feature 109 Hydroplaning 275 Interior motion sensor 95 Internet connection 65 I Internet hotspot 65 Internet page 8 iBrake – PostCrash 192 Intersection warning, see Approach control warn‐ Ice warning, see External temperature 145 ing with light braking function 168 Icy roads, see External temperature 145 Interval display, see Service requirements 146 Identification marks, tires 302 IOM, see Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehi‐ Identification number, see Vehicle identification cle 70 number 14 Ionization, see Ambient air package 249 Idle state, standby state, and drive-ready state 39 J iDrive 42 Indicator and warning lights, see Check Con‐ Jacking points for the vehicle jack 324 trol 140 Jam protection system, glass sunroof 99 Individual activation 113 Jam protection system, windows 96 Individual air distribution 243 Joystick, Steptronic transmission 131 Individual settings, see Driver profiles 90 Jump-starting 349 Jump-starting terminals 349
370 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 371
Everything from A to Z REFERENCE
K Loading 265 Location, vehicle position 58 Kenaf, care 356 Locking, automatic 93 Keyless Go, see Comfort Access 84 Locking, settings 92 Key, mechanical 82 Locking using the remote control 75 Key, see BMW display key 78 Lock, lug bolts 323 Key, see Remote control 74 Locks, child safety 119 Kickdown, Steptronic transmission 131 Low beams 157 Knee airbag 164 Low beams, automatic, see High-beam Assis‐ tant 158 L Lower back support 103 Low-Sulfur Diesel 291 Label on recommended tires 306 Lug bolt lock 323 Lane change assistant 211 Luggage rack, see Roof-mounted luggage Lane control assistant, see Steering and lane rack 277 control assistant 208 Lumbar support 103 Lane control assistant with active side collision protection, see Side collision warning 188 M Lane departure warning 181 Lane threshold, warning 181 Maintenance 337 Language, setting on the Control Display 57 Maintenance requirements, see Condition Based Lashing eyes in the cargo area 266 Service CBS 337 LATCH child restraint fixing system 117 Maintenance, see Service requirements 146 Launch Control 136 Maintenance system, BMW 337 Leather care 355 Make-up mirror 256 LEDs, replacing, see Lights and bulbs 340 Malfunction, BMW display key 81 Length, vehicle 360 Malfunction displays, see Check Control 140 Letters and numbers, entering 47 Malfunction, remote control 77 License plate light, see Lights and bulbs 340 Manual air distribution 243 Light-alloy wheels, care 355 Manual air flow 243 Light control, adaptive 158 Manual brake, see Parking brake 124 Light-emitting diodes, replacing, see Lights and Manual mode, Steptronic transmission 131 bulbs 340 Manual operation, fuel filler flap 289 Lighter, cigarettes 256 Map update, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga‐ Lighting 156 tion, Entertainment, Communication 8 Lighting, speakers 161 Marking, run-flat tire 307 Light in the exterior mirror, see Active Blind Spot Massage seat, front 111 Detection 184 Matte finish 355 Light in the exterior mirror, see Crossing traffic Maximum cooling 242 warning 235 Maximum speed display, see Speed Limit Light replacement, see Lights and bulbs 340 Info 147 Lights 156 Maximum speed of winter tires 306 Lights and bulbs 340 M chassis, adaptive 239 Light switch 156 M Dynamic Professional 239 List of all messages 59 Measurement, units of 58 Load 266 Medical supplies, see First-aid kit 346
371 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 372
REFERENCE Everything from A to Z
Memory function 111 No-touch opening and closing of the tailgate 85 Menu, instrument cluster, see Selection Nylon rope for tow-starting/towing 351 lists 149 Menus, operating, see iDrive 42 O Messages 59 Messages, see Check Control 140 OBD Onboard Diagnosis 338 Microfilter 244 Object detection, see Night Vision 177 Minimum tread depth, tires 304 Obstacle marking, rearview camera 219, 222 Mirror 108 Octane rating, see Recommended fuel Mirror, see Memory function 111 grade 291 Mobile communication devices in the vehi‐ Odometer and trip odometer 150 cle 275 Oil 331 Mobile devices, managing 67 Oil, adding 332 Mobile phone, see Owner's Manual for Naviga‐ Oil change 334 tion, Entertainment and Communication 8 Oil change interval, see Service require‐ Mobility System 307 ments 146 Mode, ECO PRO 280 Oil filler neck 332 Modifications, technical, see For Your Own Oil types to add, engine 333 Safety 9 Onboard Computer in the instrument clus‐ Monitor, see Control Display 44 ter 149 Mounting of child restraint systems 116 Onboard Computer on the Control Display 152 MP3 player, see Audio, see Owner's Handbook Onboard Diagnosis OBD 338 for Navigation, Entertainment, Communica‐ Onboard literature, printed 70 tion 8 Onboard vehicle tool kit 339 Multi-function hook 266 On-call service, see Accident Assistance 347 Multifunction steering wheel, buttons 34 On-call service, see Breakdown assistance 346 Multimedia, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Online Entertainment, see Owner's Handbook Entertainment and Communication 8 for Navigation, Entertainment, Communica‐ Music hard disk, see Owner's Handbook for Nav‐ tion 8 igation, Entertainment, Communication 8 Opening and closing 74 Operating concept, iDrive 42 N Operating with the Controller 46 Operation via touchscreen 47 Navigation data, Onboard Computer 150 Outside air, see AUC 242 Navigation, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Overheating of engine, see Coolant tempera‐ Entertainment and Communication 8 ture 145 Neck restraints, front, see Head restraints 105 Overwintering, see Long-term vehicle stor‐ Neck restraints, rear, see Head restraints 107 age 357 Net, cargo area 267 Owner's Manual media 70 Neutral cleaner, see Light-alloy wheels 355 Owner's Manual, printed 70 New wheels and tires 305 Night Vision device, see Night Vision 177 P Night Vision with pedestrian and animal detec‐ tion 177 Paint, vehicle 354 Notes, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Pairing, mobile devices, see Connections 61 Entertainment, Communication 8 Panic alarm, see Panic mode 94
372 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 373
Everything from A to Z REFERENCE
Panic mode 94 R Panorama View, see Surround View 219 Park Distance Control PDC 212 Racetrack operation 278 Parked-car ventilation 247 Radiator fan, see Exhaust gas particulate fil‐ Parking aid, see PDC 212 ter 275 Parking assistant 226 Radiator fluid 335 Parking assistant Plus, see Surround View 219 Radio-operated remote control, see Remote Parking brake 124 control 74 Parking lights 156 Radio, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, En‐ Parking with Automatic Hold, see Parking tertainment and Communication 8 brake 124 Rain sensor 128 Particulate filter, see Exhaust gas particulate fil‐ Rapeseed-oil methyl ester RME 291 ter 275 Rear automatic climate control 246 Parts and accessories 10 Rear axle steering, see Integral Active Steer‐ Passenger's side mirror, tilting, see Automatic ing 198 Curb Monitor, exterior mirror 109 Rear collision prevention 191 Pathway lines, rearview camera 218, 222 Rear collision warning, see Rear collision preven‐ PDC Park Distance Control 212 tion 191 Pedestrian detection, see Night Vision 177 Rear lights, see Lights and bulbs 340 Performance display, see Sport displays 152 Rearview camera, see Surround View 219 Personal data, deleting 60 Rearview camera, without Surround View 217 Personal profile, see Driver profiles 90 Rear window defroster 244 Person warning with City light braking func‐ Recirculated-air filter, see Microfilter/activated- tion 174 charcoal filter 244 Plastic parts, care 356 Recirculated-air mode 243 PostCrash – iBrake 192 Recommended fuel grade 291 Power failure 345 Recommended tire brands 306 Power sunroof, glass 97 Refueling 288 Power windows 96 Remote 3D View 225 Pressure monitor, see Tire Pressure Monitor Remote control, additional 77 TPM 313 Remote control for audio, see Owner's Hand‐ Pressure, tires 296 book for Navigation, Entertainment, Communi‐ Pressure warning FTM, tires 319 cation 8 Printed onboard literature 70 Remote control, integrated key 82 Profiles, see Driver profiles 90 Remote control, loss 77 Programmable memory buttons, iDrive 50 Remote control, malfunction 77 Protective function, glass sunroof, see Jam pro‐ Remote control of the vehicle, changing the bat‐ tection system 99 tery 77 Protective function, windows, see Jam protec‐ Remote control, opening/closing 74 tion system 96 Remote Control Parking 231 Push-and-turn reel, see Controller 44, 45 Remote control, universal 253 Remote control with display, malfunction 81 Q Remote control with display, see BMW display key 78 Queuing Assistant, see Steering and lane control assistant 208
373 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 374
REFERENCE Everything from A to Z
Remote services, app, see Owner's Handbook Safety package, see Active Protection 192 for Navigation, Entertainment, Communica‐ Safety switch, windows 97 tion 8 Safety systems, see Airbags 163 Replacing parts 339 Safety systems, see Intelligent Safety 167 Replacing wheels/tires 305 Saving fuel 279 Reporting safety malfunctions 15 Screen Mirroring, connection 66 RES CNCL button, see Active Cruise Control Screen, see Control Display 44 with Stop&Go function 201 Screwdriver, see Onboard vehicle tool kit 339 RES CNCL button, see Cruise control 199 Sealant, see Mobility System 307 Reserve warning, see Range 145 Seat heating 112 Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 315 Seat heating, individual activation 113 Retreaded tires 306 Seating position for children 115 Reversing lights, bulb replacement, see Lights Seat, see Memory function 111 and bulbs 340 Seats, front 101 RME rapeseed-oil methyl ester 291 Seat ventilation, active 113 Roadside Assistance, see Accident Assis‐ Seat ventilation, individual activation 113 tance 347 Securing cargo 266 Roadside Assistance, see Breakdown assis‐ Selection list in instrument cluster 149 tance 346 Selector lever, Steptronic transmission 131 Roadside parking lights 157 Self-supporting tires, see Run-flat tires 307 Roller sunblind, rear window 97 Sensors, care 356 Roller sunblinds, rear side windows 97 Service and warranty 11 Rolling code hand-held transmitter 254 Service Center, see Accident Assistance 347 RON recommended fuel grade 291 Service requirements 146 Roofliner 38 Service requirements, see Condition Based Roof load capacity 361 Service CBS 337 Roof-mounted luggage rack 277 Services, ConnectedDrive, see Owner's Manual Rope for tow-starting/towing 351 for Navigation, Entertainment and Communica‐ Route, navigation, see Owner's Handbook for tion 8 Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 8 SET button, see Active Cruise Control with RSC Run-flat System Component, see Run-flat Stop&Go function 201 tires 307 SET button, see Cruise control 199 RTTI, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, En‐ Set speed, see Active Cruise Control with tertainment, Communication 8 Stop&Go function 201 Rubber components, care 355 Settings, locking/unlocking 92 Run-flat tire 307 Settings on Control Display 57 Shift paddles on the steering wheel 131 S Shift point indicator, tachometer 144 Side airbag 163 Safe braking 276 Side collision warning 188 Safety belt reminder for driver's seat and front Side protection without Surround View 215 passenger seat 105 Side protection with Surround View 223 Safety belt reminder for the rear seats 105 Signaling, horn 34 Safety belts 104 Signals when unlocking, see Confirmation sig‐ Safety belts, care 356 nals from the vehicle 93 Safety locks, doors and windows 119 Sitting safely 101
374 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 375
Everything from A to Z REFERENCE
Sizes, see Dimensions 360 Standby state, idle state and drive-ready Ski and snowboard bag 270 state 39 Slide/tilt glass roof, see Glass sunroof 97 Start/stop, automatic function 121 Smallest turning radius 360 Start/Stop button 120 Smartphone, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Starting aid terminals 349 Entertainment and Communication 8 Starting, see Drive-ready state 120 Smoker's package 256 Starting the engine, see Drive-ready state 120 SMS, see Short messages, see Owner's Hand‐ Stations, AM/FM, see Owner's Handbook for book for Navigation, Entertainment, Communi‐ Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 8 cation 8 Status control display, tires 314 SMS text message, supplementary 143 Status field symbols 43 Snow chains 312 Status information, iDrive 43 Socket for OBD Onboard Diagnosis 338 Status of Owner's Manual 9 Sockets 257 Status, vehicle 153 Software update 68 Steering and lane control assistant incl. Traffic Soot particulate filter, see Exhaust gas particulate Jam Assist 208 filter 275 Steering, see Integral Active Steering 198 SOS button, see Intelligent emergency call 348 Steering wheel, adjusting 110 Sound output, see Owner's Handbook for Navi‐ Steering wheel, buttons 34 gation, Entertainment, Communication 8 Steering wheel, see Memory function 111 Spare tire, see Emergency wheel 326 Steptronic Sport transmission, see Steptronic Speaker lighting 161 transmission 131 Special equipment, see Vehicle features and op‐ Steptronic transmission 131 tions 9 Stopping the engine, see Drive-ready state 120 Speed limit display, see Speed Limit Info 147 Storage compartment in the center console 262 Speed Limit Info 147 Storage compartments in the cargo area 266 Speed, see Average speed and average fuel Storage compartments, locations 260 consumption 151 Storage, tires 306 Speed warning 152 Storing the vehicle 357 Split screen 43 Stowing and securing cargo 266 Sport chassis/suspension, active, see M Dy‐ Straps for cargo, see Lashing eyes in the cargo namic Professional 239 area 266 Sport chassis/suspension, see Adaptive M chas‐ Suitable devices 62 sis 239 Suitable mobile phones 62 Sport displays 152 Summer tires, tread 304 SPORT INDIVIDUAL, see Driving Dynamics Sun visor 255 Control 136 Supplementary Owner's Manuals 70 SPORT PLUS, see Driving Dynamics Con‐ Supplementary SMS text message 143 trol 136 Surround View 219 Sport program, Steptronic transmission 131 Suspension settings, see Driving Dynamics Con‐ SPORT, see Driving Dynamics Control 136 trol 136 Stability control systems 195 Switches, see Cockpit 34 Standard equipment, see Vehicle features and Switch for driving dynamics, see Driving Dynam‐ options 9 ics Control 136 Standard view, Head-up Display 154 Symbols and displays 8 SYNC program, automatic climate control 244
375 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 376
REFERENCE Everything from A to Z
T Tires, run-flat 307 Tire tread 304 Tachometer 144 Tone, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Enter‐ Tailgate 87 tainment and Communication 8 Tailgate, emergency unlocking 89 Tool 339 Tailgate, hotel function, see Locking sepa‐ Torque display, see Sport displays 152 rately 89 Touchpad 49 Tailgate, opening and closing with no-touch acti‐ Touchscreen 47 vation 85 Tow bar 351 Tailgate via remote control 76 Tow fitting 352 Tail lights, see Lights and bulbs 340 Towing 350 Technical changes, see For Your Own Safety 9 Tow rope 351 Technical data 360 Tow-starting 350 Telephone, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, TPM Tire Pressure Monitor 313 Entertainment and Communication 8 Traction control 197 Teleservices, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga‐ TRACTION, driving dynamics 197 tion, Entertainment, Communication 8 Traffic bulletins, see Owner's Handbook for Navi‐ Television, TV, see Owner's Handbook for Navi‐ gation, Entertainment, Communication 8 gation, Entertainment, Communication 8 Traffic Jam Assist, see Steering and lane control Temperature, automatic climate control 241 assistant 208 Temperature display, see External tempera‐ Transmission lock, electronic unlocking 135 ture 145 Transmission, see Steptronic transmission 131 Temperature, engine oil 145 Transporting children safely 115 Theft alarm system, see Alarm system 94 Travel information, see Onboard Computer on Thermal camera, see Night Vision 177 the Control Display 152 Thigh support 102 Tread, tires 304 Through-loading system 267 Trip computer 152 Tilt alarm sensor 95 Triple turn signal activation 127 Tilt, backrest 102 Trip odometer 150 Tilting the passenger's side mirror, see Auto‐ Trip recorder, see Trip odometer 150 matic Curb Monitor, exterior mirror 109 Trunk, emergency unlocking 89 Time 57 Trunk lid, see Tailgate 87 Time of arrival, Onboard Computer 150 Turning circle 360 Tire brands, recommended 306 Turning radius lines, rearview camera 218, 222 Tire damage 304 Turn signal, indicator light 142 Tire identification marks 302 Turn signals, bulb replacement, see Lights and Tire inflation pressure 296 bulbs 340 Tire inflation pressure monitor, see FTM Flat Turn signals, high beams, headlight flasher 127 Tire Monitor 319 TV, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, En‐ Tire pressure 296 tertainment, Communication 8 Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 313 Tire repair kit, see Mobility System 307 U Tires and wheels 296 Tires, changing 305 Unintentional alarm, avoiding 95 Tire sealant, see Mobility System 307 Units of measurement 58 Tire settings 313 Universal remote control 253
376 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 377
Everything from A to Z REFERENCE
Unlock button, Steptronic transmission 131 W Unlocking, automatic 93 Unlocking, settings 92 Warning against cross traffic 235 Unlocking with the remote control 75 Warning and indicator lights, see Check Con‐ Updates made after the editorial deadline 9 trol 140 Update, software 68 Warning light in the exterior mirror, see Active Upholstery material care 355 Blind Spot Detection 184 Upper backrest, front 103 Warning light in the exterior mirror, see Crossing USB connection 64 traffic warning 235 USB interface, position in vehicle 258 Warning messages, see Check Control 140 Used battery, disposing of 345 Warning triangle 346 Use, intended 9 Warranty 10 Using a smartphone via voice activation 54 Washer fluid 130 Washer nozzles, windshield 129 V Washer system 128 Washing the vehicle 353 Vanity mirror 256 Water on roads 276 Variable steering, see Integral Active Steer‐ Water, see Condensation water under the parked ing 198 vehicle 277 Vehicle battery 344 Website 8 Vehicle breakdown, see Breakdown assis‐ Weights 361 tance 346 Welcome light during unlocking 75 Vehicle, break-in 274 Welcome lights 157 Vehicle care 354 Welcome screen, driver profiles 90 Vehicle care products 354 Wheelbase, vehicle 360 Vehicle features and options 9 Wheel cleaner, light-alloy wheels 355 Vehicle identification number 14 Wheels and tires 296 Vehicle key, see Remote control 74 Wheels, changing 305 Vehicle paint 354 Wheels, see FTM Flat Tire Monitor 319 Vehicle position, vehicle location 58 Width, vehicle 360 Vehicle status 153 WiFi connection 65 Vehicle storage 357 Window defroster, rear 244 Vehicle wash 353 Window, defrosting and defogging 244 Vehicle, washing 353 Windows, powered 96 Ventilation 244 Windshield washer fluid, see Washer fluid 130 Ventilation, see Parked-car ventilation 247 Windshield washer nozzles 129 Venting, see Ventilation 244 Windshield washer system, see Washer/wiper Vent, see Ventilation 244 system 128 Video, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, En‐ Windshield wiper, see Wiper system 128 tertainment and Communication 8 Winter storage, see Long-term vehicle stor‐ VIN, see Vehicle identification number 14 age 357 Voice activation system 54 Winter tires 306 Voice command response, see Owner's Hand‐ Winter tires, tread 304 book for Navigation, Entertainment, Communi‐ Wiper blades, replacing 339 cation 8 Wiper fluid, see Washer fluid 130 Wiper, fold-away position 130
377 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 Seite 378
REFERENCE Everything from A to Z
Wiper, see Washer/wiper system 128 Wiper system 128 Wireless charging of a smartphone, see Wireless charging tray, see Owner's Manual for Naviga‐ tion, Entertainment, Communication 8 Wireless charging tray, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 8 Wood parts, care 356 Wordmatch principle, see Entry comparison 42 Wrench, see Onboard vehicle tool kit 339
X
xDrive 197
378 Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 *BL272263000O*
01402722630 ue Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18 California Proposition 65 Warning The Ultimate Driving Machine®
BMW DRIVER'S GUIDE APP.
Your customized information about the vehicle in an app. Optimized for smartphones & tablets. Can be used offline.
*BL272263000O*
01402722630 ue Online Edition for Part no. 01402722630 - VI/18